JP7439014B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, this type of gaming machine has a winning lottery that determines whether or not a special game can be executed when a game ball enters a starting prize opening provided in the gaming area, and a special symbol that shows the result of the winning lottery. At the same time as the decision is made, a variable display of the special symbol is executed, and a stop display of the jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the above-mentioned win/fail lottery is to execute the special game (winning the jackpot) is performed, so that many It is known that a special game in which prize balls can be won is executed. In such gaming machines, it is common to set the advantage of the gaming profit given to the player to be different depending on the type of the determined jackpot symbol. For example, the game states include a non-time-saving game state in which it is relatively difficult for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting winning hole, and a time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively easy for a game ball to enter a predetermined starting winning hole. There is known a gaming machine in which the gaming state after the special game is set to the time-saving gaming state when a specific jackpot symbol is determined (see Patent Documents 1 and 2).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-107139 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-253554

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming state that is set after the execution of the special game is associated with the type of jackpot symbol, and the decision to execute the special game (winning the jackpot) and the execution of the special game are Without execution, a non-time-saving gaming state cannot be changed to a time-saving gaming state. As a result, there are large restrictions on changing to different game states, making it difficult to design game specifications with a high degree of freedom, and creating problems in that it is not possible to provide innovative gameplay that can increase player interest. was.

Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide novel gaming features that can increase the interest of players.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the present invention is configured as follows.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, a variable display means capable of executing a variable display based on the result of the determination, and a relative Set either a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to play a game in which the fluctuating display is executed at a relatively low frequency, or a time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to play a game in which the fluctuating display is executed at a relatively high frequency. and a suggestion means for making a predetermined suggestion, the power supply can be restored with or without erasing information stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the setting means The time-saving game state can be set by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times after the information is erased, and the suggesting means determines that the special game will be executed after the power is restored. Until then, it is possible to execute at least one of a first suggestion and a second suggestion indicating the number of times the variable display is performed until the time-saving gaming state is set, and the first suggestion is A first aspect that is executable when the power is restored with or without erasing information and that suggests the possibility that the information is not erased when the power is restored; or It is executable when the power is restored without erasing, and is executable by any aspect of the second aspect that suggests that the information is not erased when the power is restored, and The execution rate of the first suggestion varies depending on the number of times the fluctuation display is performed after the power is restored and the number of times the fluctuation display remains until the time-saving gaming state is set, and the execution rate of the first suggestion is determined without erasing the information. After power recovery is executed, the rate at which the first suggestion is executed according to the second aspect is set lower than the rate at which the first suggestion is executed according to the first aspect, and the information When the number of fluctuating displays after the power is restored with erasure of is equal to or more than a specific number, and the remaining number of fluctuating displays until the time-saving gaming state is set is within a specific range, The number of times the fluctuating display occurs after power is restored with deletion of the information is less than the specific number, and the remaining number of fluctuating displays until the time-saving gaming state is set is within the specific range. The execution rate of the first suggestion is set to be higher than when the first suggestion is executed.

In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the time-saving gaming state is set based on the fact that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times after the information stored in the predetermined storage section is erased. As a result, it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state without having to decide to execute a special game (winning a jackpot) or execute a special game like in conventional gaming machines, allowing for a high degree of freedom in game specifications. It becomes possible to design new games, and it becomes possible to provide novel gameplay that can increase the interest of players.
In addition , the first suggestion and the second suggestion indicating the number of fluctuating displays until the time-saving gaming state is set are provided between when the power is restored and when it is decided to execute the special game. The first suggestion is that it can be executed when the power is restored with or without erasing the information, and the information is erased when the power is restored. The first aspect suggests that the information may not have been deleted, or the first aspect is executable when the power is restored without erasing the information, and the first aspect suggests that the information is not deleted when the power is restored. Since it can be executed in either of the two modes , it is possible to make the player guess how long the remaining period is until the time-saving gaming state is set, thereby increasing the player's interest. I can do it.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can provide novel gaming features that can increase the interest of players.

It is an external perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine with the front door opened. It is a front schematic view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of the inside of an attacker device of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number judgment table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a special symbol random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of a special electric accessory operation table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a game state setting table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a winning determination random number determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a normal symbol variation pattern determination table of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view of the second starting prize opening control table of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of processing at the time of sensor detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of gate detection processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the first starting winning hole detection process in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the process at the time of second starting winning hole detection in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of preliminary determination processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of processing when a specific area is detected in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special figure related control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol variation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the validity determination process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of fluctuation pattern determination processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of small winning game control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of special game end processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the general pattern related control process in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation start processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of the normal symbol stop processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flow chart showing an outline of movable piece control processing in the main control board of the pachinko machine. It is a state transition diagram showing transition to each gaming state of the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the variable performance of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram of a variable performance determination table of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of the advance notice performance of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of the pre-read effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the special notification effect of a pachinko machine. It is a time chart showing the progress of variable performance and special notification performance of the pachinko machine. It is a time chart showing the progress of variable performance and special notification performance of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of main processing in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of timer interrupt processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart showing an outline of variable pattern command reception processing in the sub control board of the pachinko machine. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a win/fail random number determination table for a pachinko machine according to modification example (2). It is an explanatory view of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine concerning modification (36). It is an explanatory view of the fluctuation pattern table of the pachinko machine concerning modification (36). FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of the pachinko machine according to another application example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3; 11 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 3. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4; 12 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 4. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 5. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. FIG. It is an enlarged view of the second starting prize opening and the movable piece of the pachinko machine according to another application example 6. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of post-stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a time saving activation count execution process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of a special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of RAM clearing processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process at the time of sending a spec specification command for a pachinko machine according to another application example 6. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 6; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 6; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 6; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 6; 12 is an explanatory diagram of a random number determination table for a pachinko machine according to another application example 7. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a random number determination table for a pachinko machine according to another application example 7. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. It is an enlarged view of the specific second starting prize opening and movable piece of the pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 12 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variation performance executed when a jackpot is won during a normal game state in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a variation performance executed when a jackpot is won during a normal game state in a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of special symbol fluctuation start processing of the pachinko machine concerning other example 8 of application. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of special symbol fluctuation stop processing of the pachinko machine concerning other example 8 of application. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of post-stop processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a time saving activation count execution process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a time saving activation count start process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of special game end processing of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 8. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of RAM clearing processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 8. 12 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of various setting contents of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. 12 is a state transition diagram showing transitions to each gaming state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 9. FIG. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 10. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 10. 12 is an explanatory diagram of the values of the first low probability time saving counter A and the first low probability time saving counter B after being decremented by one in the pachinko machine according to another application example 10. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol fluctuation start process of the pachinko machine based on other application example 10. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of a determination process for a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of time point determination processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of special game end processing of the pachinko machine concerning other example 10 of application. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of RAM clearing processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the jackpot non-route first low probability time saving command reception process of the pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a first low probability time saving start command reception process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 10. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of the first low probability time saving termination command reception process of the pachinko machine according to another application example 10. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the variable pattern command reception process in the 1st low probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 10. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 11. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting a time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting a time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting a time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting a time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting a time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 11. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time-saving award winning process of the pachinko machine based on other application example 11. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of the end of the time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 11. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 12. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 12. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the time-saving award winning process of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process at the time of small winning symbol determination of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a process when the number of successful terminations is reached in a pachinko machine according to another application example 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance in the high probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance in the 1st low probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance in the 2nd low probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance in the 2nd low probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. It is a figure which shows an example of the performance in the 2nd low probability time-saving game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 12. 13 is a front schematic view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 13. It is an explanatory view of various setting contents of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 13. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the special symbol fluctuation start process of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a process for updating the number of times at the start of variation in a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of a game state setting process at the start of fluctuation of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the post-stop processing of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a process for updating the number of times the pachinko machine stop display time has elapsed according to another application example 13. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the game state setting process when the stop display time of the pachinko machine has elapsed according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a special game ending process of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 12 is a flowchart showing an outline of RAM clearing processing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of processing at the time of power recovery without execution of RAM clearing of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance during a high probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance during a high probability time-saving game state of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|presentation in the normal game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13, and when the 1st low probability time-saving game state is set. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect|presentation in the normal game state of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13, and when the 1st low probability time-saving game state is set. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance of the pachinko machine based on the other application example 13. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance mode determination table for a pachinko machine according to another application example 13; 12 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of a post-special game setting command reception process in a sub-control board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an outline of time saving number command reception processing in a sub control board of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the 1st low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process in the sub-control board of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13. It is a perspective view of the operation handle of the modification of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 13. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing a state in which a frame cover of an operation handle of a modified example of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13 is removed. It is an explanatory view of the result of the sensory test about the operation handle of the modification of the pachinko machine concerning other application example 13. FIG. 12 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing an operation handle in an initial position of a modified example of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 12 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing an operation handle at a maximum rotation position of a modified example of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 13 is an enlarged right sectional view of the decorative portion and the vicinity of the upper guide passage of a modified example of the pachinko machine according to another application example 13. It is a perspective view of the rail base, outer rail, and game board of the modification of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13. It is a schematic diagram of the outer rail of the modification of the pachinko machine based on other application example 13. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a rail base and a game board of a modified example of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13. FIG. 12 is a front view of a game board of a modified example of a pachinko machine according to another application example 13.

Embodiments and application examples of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
Here, the names of members, devices, etc., names of means, codes, step numbers, etc. (hereinafter referred to as codes, etc.) used in the following embodiments and each application example are used in the embodiments, unless otherwise specified. It shall be used as something unique to each application example. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, although the numerals and the like may be the same in the embodiment and each application example, these indicate the numerals and the like in the embodiment and each application example.
(External configuration of pachinko machine P)
The game machine according to this embodiment is a pachinko machine P that uses game balls as game media. Although not particularly shown, in a gaming hall where pachinko machines P are installed, a plurality of pachinko machines P are arranged side by side in the gaming machine installation area called an island, and a game machine for renting game balls is installed. A ball lending device is installed adjacent to each pachinko machine P. Further, each pachinko machine P is connected to a corresponding game ball lending device R.
The game ball lending device R is capable of inserting a storage medium (card) in which value information necessary for inserting banknotes and renting out game balls is stored. Then, by inserting banknotes (or inserting a card) into the game ball lending device R and performing a predetermined operation on the pachinko machine P, you can receive the lending of game balls from the game ball lending device R. It is now possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 1 or 2, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment includes a machine frame 1, which is a rectangular frame fixed to an island and has a hollow part (not particularly shown). A main body frame 2, which is a rectangular frame that is attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has a hollow part (not particularly shown); A front door 3 is attached to 2 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and has an opening (not particularly shown) formed in the front.

As shown in FIG. 1, a speaker serving as an audio output device 10 is provided at the lower left portion of the machine frame 1. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, a game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is accommodated in the hollow portion of the main body frame 2. The front door 3 also includes a transparent plate 4 that covers the opening, an upper plate 6 and a saucer 7 that are located below the transparent plate 4 and can receive game balls, and a plate that is attached to the right side of the saucer 7 and that can hold game balls. An operating handle 5 for performing a firing operation and speakers serving as an audio output device 10 are provided, one each attached to the upper left and right sides of the transparent plate 4.

In this pachinko machine P, when the main body frame 2 is closed to the machine frame 1 and the front door 3 is closed, the transparent plate 4 is positioned in front of the game board 11 with a gap in between. Thereby, the game board 11 located at the rear can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 4.

Furthermore, game balls lent out by the game ball lending device R and prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine P are guided to the upper tray 6. The upper tray 6 is capable of receiving a predetermined amount of game balls, but when the upper tray 6 is full of game balls, game balls that are subsequently lent or paid out are guided to a receiving tray 7. It looks like this. Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the drawings, the bottom surface of the saucer 7 is provided with a discharge hole for discharging the stored game balls and an opening/closing plate that can open and close the discharge hole. In normal conditions, the discharge hole is closed by the opening/closing plate, but by moving the opening/closing lever 8 (see Fig. 1), which is attached integrally with the opening/closing plate, laterally, the opening/closing plate also moves in the same direction, and the discharge hole is closed. The hole is opened. Thereby, the game ball can be dropped from the discharge hole and discharged to the outside of the tray 7.

Further, the operating handle 5 is formed so that the player can rotate it in a predetermined direction. Then, when the player rotates the operating handle 5, the game ball received in the upper tray 6 is sent to a firing device (not particularly shown), and the game ball is sent with an intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 5. A game ball is fired toward the game area 12 by the firing device. The game ball launched in this way is guided by a pair of rails 13a, 13b fixed to the game board 11, rises, and reaches the game area 12.

Here, the game area 12 is defined as a space fixed to the game board 11 in a space formed between the game board 11 and the transparent plate 4 when the main body frame 2 and the front door 3 are closed with respect to the machine frame 1. This is an area partitioned into a substantially circular shape by a pair of rails 13a and 13b, and is an area where game balls can flow down.
As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming area 12 includes a first gaming area 12a, which is an area on the left when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P, and a right area when viewed from the player facing the pachinko machine P. and a second gaming area 12b. These two game areas 12 have different possibilities of entry of game balls depending on the firing strength of the firing device. Specifically, if the firing strength of the firing device is less than a predetermined strength (the strength is such that the game ball fired by the firing device does not reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the first game area. Enter 12a. On the other hand, when the firing strength of the firing device is equal to or higher than the predetermined strength (strength that allows the game ball fired by the firing device to reach the highest point of the game area 12), the game ball is sent to the second game area 12b. enter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, within this gaming area 12, there is a windmill and a large number of nails for making the flowing direction of gaming balls irregular, a general prize opening 14 into which gaming balls can enter, and a starting hole. A first starting prize opening 15 and a second starting winning opening 16 as areas, a gate 20 through which a game ball can pass, an attacker device 17 that operates when a predetermined condition is met, and a game ball guided outside the gaming area 12. An out port 19 and an effect display device 21 as an effect device that performs effects as the game progresses are provided. In addition, in FIG. 3, only some nails are shown, and other nails are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 3, the general winning hole 14 is provided at a position slightly to the left from the center of the lower part of the gaming area 12, and when a game ball enters the general winning hole 14, a predetermined number (5 in this embodiment) of the game ball enters the general winning hole 14. ) prize balls are paid out.
In addition, the number and installation position of the general prize winning holes 14 are not particularly limited.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first starting prize opening 15 is provided at a position slightly lower from the center of the gaming area 12, and the second starting winning opening 16 is provided in the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. It is located slightly above the center on the right side of the screen. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, only the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the first starting prize opening 15. It is now impossible to enter the ball. In addition, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting prize opening 16 is provided with a movable piece 16b (normal electric accessory) that can be opened and closed. When the movable piece 16b is closed, the second starting prize opening 16 is in a closed state, and it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b opens, the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, and this movable piece 16b functions as a guide member that guides the game ball toward the second starting winning opening 16. This allows the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Further, the configuration of the movable piece 16b is not particularly limited, and may include, for example, a pair of blade members that rotate in the left and right directions around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11 to open and close the second starting prize opening 16. , it may be constituted by a lid member that opens and closes the second starting prize opening 16 by rotating back and forth around an axis parallel to the game board 11, or by sliding in the vertical direction to open and close the second starting winning opening 16. 16 may be configured by a shutter member that opens and closes.
Note that the installation positions of the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited. For example, the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16 can be installed in any of the gaming areas 12 ( The game balls flowing down the first game area 12a, second game area 12b) may also be placed at positions where the balls can easily enter.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot). , a lottery is held to determine whether or not a small win (hereinafter referred to as a small win) has been won, which will be described later. One special symbol is determined from among a plurality of predetermined special symbols according to the result of the lottery. There are multiple types of special symbols that can be determined, and depending on the type of special symbol determined, execution of special games that are advantageous to the player, execution of small winning games, and provision of time-saving gaming states (described later) The first time-saving gaming state setting) and other gaming profits are awarded.
In addition, the prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 are not particularly limited as long as they are one or more, and any number of balls may be paid out. good. In addition, the number of prize balls is the same in the starting winning hole (second starting winning hole 16) where the movable piece 16b is provided and the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole 15) where the movable piece 16b is not provided. It may be different, or it may be different. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 is four, and the number of prize balls paid out based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is four. The number of prize balls paid out is one.

The gate 20 is provided above the second starting prize opening 16, as shown in FIG. When a game ball passes through this gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols, which will be described later, is carried out. If the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a win, the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the attacker device 17 is provided at the lower right portion of the gaming area 12 (below the second starting prize opening 16). This attacker device 17 includes a grand prize opening 18 into which game balls can enter, and an opening/closing door 18b that opens and closes this grand prize opening 18. Under normal conditions, the opening/closing door 18b is closed and the big prize opening 18 is closed, so it is impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning opening 18, but the above-mentioned special game or small winning game When this is executed, the opening/closing door 18b opens and the grand prize opening 18 is opened, allowing the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 18. Specifically, during the above-mentioned special game, a round game in which the big winning hole 18 is opened is executed multiple times, and during the above-mentioned small winning game, the big winning hole 18 is opened only once. It is scheduled to be held twice. When one game ball enters the grand prize opening 18, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of prize balls are paid out.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter. It looks like this. In addition, although not particularly shown, almost all of the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b, except for the ball that entered the second start winning hole 16, are nailed so that they can reach the big winning hole 18. There are windmills, etc. Therefore, if the game ball continues to be launched as long as the big winning hole 18 is in the open state, the game ball will enter the big winning hole 18.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), inside the attacker device 17, there is provided a rolling road 51 on which the game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 can roll toward the left. There is. This turning road 51 branches into an upper passage 52 and a lower passage 53 at a predetermined position in the rolling direction, and at the end of the upper passage 52, a general game ball that enters the big prize opening 18 can enter. A region 58 is provided, and a specific region 57 is provided at the end of the lower passage 53 into which a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 18 can enter (see FIGS. 4(a) and (b)).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), at the position where the upper passage 52 and the lower passage 53 diverge, there is a distribution member that distributes the game balls to either the upper passage 52 or the lower passage 53. 59 are provided. This distribution member 59 is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the game board 11, and has two positions: a first position where the path to the upper passage 52 is opened and a path to the lower passage 53 is blocked; It is possible to move between a second position where the passage to the lower passage 53 is closed and a passage to the lower passage 53 is opened. When the game ball enters the big prize opening 18, when the distribution member 59 is located at the first position, it advances to the upper passage 52 and enters the general area 58, and when the distribution member 59 is located at the second position, the game ball enters the general area 58. When there is, it advances to the lower passage 53 and enters the specific area 57.

Although not particularly shown, the attacker device 17 includes a specific area discharge port for discharging game balls that have entered the specific area 57 outside the grand prize opening 18 (to the back side of the game board 11), and a general area. A general area discharge port is provided for discharging the game balls that have entered the game ball 58 to the outside of the grand prize opening 18 (to the back side of the game board 11).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the opening/closing mode (opening/closing pattern) of the opening/closing door 18b in the round game executed during the above-mentioned special game and the distribution are determined for each type of special symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The mode of operation (operation pattern) of the member 59 is set.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a predetermined number (one in this embodiment) of game balls enters the specific area 57 during a specific round game, the gaming state after the end of the special game is changed to A gaming state is set that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state, which are advantageous for the players. On the other hand, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during a specific round game (that is, if all the game balls that entered the grand prize opening 18 enter the general area 58), The gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.
The opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing door 18b, the operation pattern of the sorting member 59, and the setting of the gaming state will be described in detail later.
In addition, as mentioned above, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the round game during the special game, the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability game state or the time-saving game state. Instead, the game state after the end of the special game may be set to a high-probability game state or a time-saving game state, depending on the type of special symbol determined when a jackpot is won. For example, when you win a jackpot and a specific special symbol is determined, the gaming state after the special game is set to a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a time saving gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state). However, if a special symbol other than a specific special symbol is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state. It is also possible to do so. In this way, when the game state after the end of the special game is determined according to the type of special symbol, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned specific area 57.

As shown in FIG. 3, the out hole 19 is provided at the bottom of the gaming area 12, and can be placed in any of the general winning hole 14, the first starting winning hole 15, the second starting winning hole 16, and the big winning hole 18. It also accepts game balls that have not entered the ball. The game balls received at the out port 19 are guided to the back side of the game board 11 and collected.

The effect display device 21 is provided approximately at the center of the gaming area 12, as shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 21. The effect display device 21 is also provided with a display section 21a for displaying images such as moving images and still images.In addition to displaying a background image, the display section 21a also displays effect patterns 50 ( The dummy symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and by the stop display mode of each performance symbol 50, a variable effect is performed to inform the player of the result of the lottery.
Note that the effect display device 21 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device; for example, a drum-type display device or the like that performs various displays using a plurality of drums with patterns attached to the outer periphery may be used.

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment includes, as a performance device, a performance display device 21, a speaker as the above-mentioned audio output device 10, and a performance lighting device 23 that performs performance by emitting light in various colors and lighting patterns. lamp (see Figure 1).
Note that the performance device is not limited to these, and may include, for example, a performance accessory device that moves at various timings and modes.

Further, in a position in front of the upper tray 6, there is provided a production operation device 9 which can be operated by a player to advance or switch productions executed during a game or during standby. The production operation device 9 in this embodiment is composed of an operation dial 9a that is a circular ring-shaped frame and can be rotated, and an operation button 9b that is fitted into the operation dial 9a and can be pressed. . When a predetermined performance is being executed by the performance display device 21, if the operation dial 9a is rotated or the operation button 9b is pressed, various performances such as a variable performance will progress or a different display will be displayed. It is becoming more and more common.
Note that the production operation device 9 is not limited to the operation dial 9a, the operation buttons 9b, etc., and may be provided with a cross key or the like that allows input in the up, down, left, and right directions. Moreover, while providing the production operation device 9 such as the operation dial 9a and the operation button 9b, the above-mentioned cross key may be provided separately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, at the lower right side of the game board 11 and outside the game area 12, there is a first special symbol display device 30 as a device for displaying various situations regarding the game. , a second special symbol display device 31, a first special symbol retention display device 38, a second special symbol retention display device 39, a normal symbol display device 32, and a normal symbol retention display device 33 are provided.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending device R is electrically connected to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, but operations on the game ball lending device R, such as lending out game balls and ejecting cards, It is designed to be accepted by pachinko machine P. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine P includes a value information display device 35 that displays value information (balance information) stored in the card, a ball lending button 36 that can be pressed, and a ball rental button 36 that can be pressed. A card return button 37 that allows the user to return the card is provided.

(Configuration of control means of pachinko machine P)
Next, a control means for controlling the games and performances of the pachinko machine P will be explained.
The above-mentioned control means is composed of various control boards, and specifically, as shown in FIG. It is equipped with a firing payout control board 200 that controls payout, a sub-control board 300 that controls various effects, and a game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a firing payout control board 200 and a sub-control board 300 are connected to the main control board 100, and a game ball lending control board 400 is connected to the firing payout control board 200. There is. Furthermore, an external information terminal board 500 is connected to the main control board 100 and the firing and payout control board 200 for outputting various information regarding game progress to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, a hall computer in a game hall, etc.). has been done.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the firing and payout control board 200 controls both the firing of game balls and the paying out of prize balls. A board) and a board for controlling the payout of prize balls (a payout control board) may be provided separately.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, a power supply board is connected to each board included in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment. This power supply board is provided with a backup power supply, and when the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the pachinko machine P falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that the power has been cut off, and a power cutoff signal is output to the main control board 100. .

The main control board 100 controls the game played in the pachinko machine P, and specifically, starts when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16. special pattern games (win/fail lottery, determination of special symbols, special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter also referred to as special symbol fluctuations)), regular symbol games that are started when the game ball passes through the gate 20 ( It controls lottery of normal symbols, variable display of normal symbols (hereinafter also referred to as variation of normal symbols), special games advantageous to the player, small winning games, etc.
As shown in FIG. 5, this main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing, a main ROM 102 that stores control programs for proceeding with the game, data and tables necessary for the game, and a main ROM 102 that stores data and tables necessary for the game. The main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area, etc.
Then, the main CPU 101 reads out a control program stored in the main ROM 102 and performs calculation processing based on signals from each detection sensor and timer described later, and also controls and performs calculations on various devices connected to the main CPU 101. Sends commands to other boards based on the processing results.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 100 includes a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 14, and a general winning hole detection sensor 14a that detects that a game ball has entered the first starting winning hole 15. The first starting winning hole detection sensor 15a detects that the ball has hit the ball, the second starting winning hole detecting sensor 16a detects that the game ball has entered the second starting winning hole 16, and the game ball enters the big winning hole 18. A big prize opening detection sensor 18a that detects that a ball has entered the gate, a gate detection sensor 20a that detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 20, and a fraud detection sensor that detects magnetism, radio waves, etc. directed toward the game board 11. 35 and a specific area detection sensor 57a that detects that a game ball has entered the specific area 57 are connected. Detection signals output from each of these detection sensors are input to the main control board 100.
Note that the sensors connected to the main control board 100 are not limited to these, and for example, a general area detection sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the general area 58 may be provided.

Furthermore, the main control board 100 includes, as devices to be controlled, a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16 to open and close, and a starting winning opening solenoid 16c that drives the opening and closing door 18b of the big winning opening 18 to open and close. The big prize opening solenoid 18c, the distribution member solenoid 59c that displaces the distribution member 59, the first special symbol display device 30, the second special symbol display device 31, the normal symbol display device 32, and the first special symbol pending display The device 38, the second special symbol reservation display device 39, and the normal symbol reservation display device 33 are connected.
By driving each solenoid, the main control board 100 controls the opening and closing of the second starting prize opening 16 and the big prize opening 18, and controls the displacement of the distribution member 59, and also controls the display of each display device. It is about to be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, multiple stages from setting value 1 to setting value 6 are determined as settings regarding the ball output, and depending on the difference in these setting values, winning of the jackpot in the winning/failure lottery described below is determined. The probabilities of are now different. For example, setting value 6 is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than setting value 1, and if the probability of winning the jackpot is high, the possibility of winning the prize ball is also high. By changing the set value, the expected payout amount of prize balls in the pachinko machine P changes. In addition, a win/fail random number determination table 110 used in a win/fail lottery to be described later is provided corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6, and when a set value is changed, a win/fail random number determination table 110 is provided for each set value. The entire table 110 will be changed.
Although not particularly shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a RAM clear switch and a setting switch used to change the above-mentioned setting values. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the front door 3 is open and the power is turned on with both the RAM clear switch and the setting switch turned on, the machine shifts to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. . During this setting change state, the set value can be changed by operating the RAM clear switch.

Although not particularly shown, the firing and dispensing control board 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, and RAM similarly to the main control board 100, and is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. .

As shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 includes a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5 as a device for controlling the firing of game balls, and a touch sensor 5a that detects when a player touches the operating handle 5. An operation volume 5b that detects the angle (rotation angle), a launch stop switch 5c that stops the launch of game balls, and a ball feeder that sends the game balls received in the upper tray 6 to a launcher (not shown). A solenoid 60 and a firing motor 61 that fires game balls are connected. Further, control signals output from the touch sensor 5a, the operation volume 5b, and the firing stop switch 5c are input to the firing and dispensing control board 200.

When control signals from the touch sensor 5a and the operation volume 5b are input to the firing and payout control board 200, control is performed to energize the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 to fire the game ball. Furthermore, while the ball feed solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 are energized, game balls are continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals (that is, at a firing pace of 100 balls per minute). . On the other hand, when a control signal from the firing stop switch 5c is input to the firing payout control board 200, control is performed to stop the ball feeding solenoid 60 and the firing motor 61 from being energized to stop firing the game balls.
Note that a rotary solenoid may be used instead of the shooting motor 61 as the device for shooting the game ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 is used as a device for controlling the payout of game balls, and the game balls stored in the game ball storage section (not particularly shown) are stored in the firing and payout control board 200 as a device for controlling the payout of game balls. A payout motor 62 that pays out balls and a payout counting switch 63 that detects and counts the paid out game balls are connected. When the launch payout control board 200 receives the payout number command transmitted from the main control board 100, the launch payout control board 200 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) based on this payout number command. The dispensing motor 62 is controlled as follows. At this time, the number of game balls that have been paid out is counted by the payout counting switch 63, making it possible to determine whether a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) have been paid out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, the firing and dispensing control board 200 includes a front door open detection sensor 3a that detects the open state of the front door 3, and a saucer full detection sensor 7a that detects the full state of the saucer 7. , is connected.

When the front door open detection sensor 3a detects that the front door 3 is open, it outputs an open detection signal to the firing and dispensing control board 200, and while the front door 3 is open, the open detection signal is output. Continuous output. Then, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a door opening command to the main control board 100 when the opening detection signal is input. On the other hand, when the front door open detection sensor 3a no longer detects that the front door 3 is open, it turns off and stops outputting the door open detection signal. Then, when the input of the door open detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the front door 3 is closed, and stops transmitting the door open command to the main control board 100.

The saucer full detection sensor 7a is provided at a predetermined position on the saucer 7. When a predetermined amount or more of game balls to be paid out as prize balls are stored in the saucer 7 and the tray is full, the stored game balls will reach the above-mentioned predetermined position.
The saucer full detection sensor 7a is turned on when it detects that the game balls have reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, and outputs a saucer detection signal to the firing and payout control board 200, so that the stored game balls can reach the above-mentioned predetermined position. While the predetermined position is reached, the saucer detection signal is continuously output. Then, when the saucer detection signal is input, the firing and dispensing control board 200 transmits a saucer full command to the main control board 100. On the other hand, when the saucer full detection sensor 7a does not detect that the game ball has reached the above-mentioned predetermined position, it turns off and stops outputting the saucer detection signal. Then, when the input of the saucer detection signal stops, the firing and dispensing control board 200 determines that the saucer 7 is no longer full, and stops sending the saucer full command to the main control board 100.

Further, as described above, the game ball lending control board 400 that relays operations to the game ball lending device R is connected to the firing and payout control board 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the firing and payout control board 200 includes, via the game ball lending control board 400, a value information display device 35, a ball lending switch 36a that detects the pressing operation of the ball lending button 36, and a card return control board 200. A card return switch 37a that detects a pressing operation of the button 37 is connected.

When the ball lending button 36 is pressed, a detection signal output from the ball lending switch 36a is input to the firing payout control board 200, and the firing payout control board 200 sends game balls to the game ball lending device R. A lending request signal requesting the lending of the information is transmitted. When the game ball lending device R receives the lending request signal, the game ball lending device R performs a process of subtracting predetermined value information from the stored value information, and responds to the subtracted value information. Control is performed to pay out the same number of game balls.
Further, when the card return button 37 is pressed, a detection signal output from the card return switch 37a is input to the firing payout control board 200, and the firing payout control board 200 controls the game ball lending device R. Send a return request signal requesting return of the card. Then, when the game ball lending device R receives the return request signal, the game ball lending device R controls ejecting the card.

The sub-control board 300 controls effects executed during gaming, standby, and the like.
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 300 includes a sub-CPU 301 that performs various calculation processes, a control program for executing the effects, a sub-ROM 302 that stores data and tables necessary for executing the effects, and a sub-ROM 302 that stores data and tables necessary for executing the effects. The sub-RAM 303 is used as a temporary storage area during processing, and is connected to enable one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300.
Based on commands sent from the main control board 100 and signals from the timer, the sub CPU 301 reads the control program stored in the sub ROM 302 and performs arithmetic processing, as well as performs image control for controlling image display. A board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not particularly shown) for controlling audio output, and an illumination control board (not particularly shown) for controlling lighting. , sends a command to execute the performance.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the audio control board and the illumination control board are provided separately, but the functions of these boards are integrated into one board (the audio illumination control board). ), and both the audio output and the lighting of the lighting may be controlled by the board.

Furthermore, the effect display device 21 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via an image control board, and the audio output device 10 is connected to the sub-control board 300 via an audio control board. Furthermore, the sub-control board 300 includes, via an illumination control board, the production lighting device 23, a rotational operation detection sensor 9c that detects a rotational operation of the operation dial 9a, and a press operation that detects a press operation of the operation button 9b. A detection sensor 9d is connected.

Although not particularly shown, the image control board includes an image CPU, an image ROM, an image RAM, and the like. The image ROM of this image control board stores image data such as the effect design 50, background, etc. displayed on the effect display device 21. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the image CPU controls image display by the effect display device 21 by storing the image data read from the image ROM in the image RAM.

Although not particularly shown, the audio control board includes a sound chip (CPU), a sound ROM, a sound RAM, and the like. The sound ROM stores sound data such as audio and BGM output from the audio output device 10. Then, based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 300, the sound data read from the sound ROM is stored in the sound RAM, thereby controlling the audio output from the audio output device 10.

The illumination control board controls the lighting of the lighting device 23 based on commands from the sub-control board 300. The illumination control board also receives a rotational operation detection signal outputted from the rotational operation detection sensor 9c based on the rotational operation of the operation dial 9a, or a pressdown outputted from the pressdown operation detection sensor 9d based on the pressed operation of the operation button 9b. When the operation detection signal is input, a predetermined command is sent to the sub control board 300.

(Summary of games on pachinko machine P)
Next, the game in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment will be explained based on various tables stored in the main ROM 102.
As described above, in the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the special figure game and the regular figure game proceed in parallel. In addition, the gaming states when playing these two games are either a low probability gaming state (so-called non-probability variable state) or a high probability gaming state (so-called probability variable state), and a non-time-saving gaming state or time-saving gaming state. Any gaming state that is a combination of any one of the following gaming states is set. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, there are two time-saving gaming states, a first time-saving gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state, and either of the time-saving gaming states is set. There is.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a normal gaming state), a combination of a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a first low probability time saving gaming state), a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a second low probability time saving gaming state), or a high probability gaming state and One of the gaming states that is a combination of the second time-saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a high-probability time-saving gaming state) is set.

Here, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are gaming states in which the probabilities of winning a jackpot are set to be different depending on the winning/failure drawing described later. The probability of doing so is set to a higher value than the low probability gaming state. In other words, it is easier to win a jackpot through the winning lottery in the high probability gaming state than in the low probability gaming state.

In addition, the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are gaming states in which the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is set to be different, and in the time-saving gaming state, the non-time-saving gaming state It is set so that the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in the open state (that is, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be in the open state) than the state. That is, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16 during the time-saving game state than during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, there are two time-saving game states, the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. It is set so that the movable piece 16b is more easily maintained in the open state than in the one-hour saving game state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball is most likely to enter the second starting winning hole 16 during the second time saving game state, and the second starting winning hole 16 is most likely to enter the second starting winning hole 16 during the first time saving gaming state. It is easy for the game ball to enter into the second starting prize opening 16, and it is most difficult for the game ball to enter into the second starting prize opening 16 during the non-time saving game state.
Note that the normal gaming state is set immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, a lottery is drawn. is carried out, and a special symbol associated with a gaming profit based on the result of the lottery is determined. In the winning/failure lottery in this form, first, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot, and if the judgment result is that the jackpot has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as "non-jackpot winning"), then the small jackpot is determined. If the judgment is made and the judgment result is that the small win has not been won (hereinafter also referred to as non-winning of the small win), then the next step is to decide whether to give the time-saving game (whether to give the time-saving gaming state or not). In other words, whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state) is made, and if the judgment result is that the time-saving gaming state will not be granted (hereinafter also referred to as non-winning of the time-saving granting), It will be a loss.
Then, when a judgment result of winning the jackpot is derived from this lottery (that is, when winning the jackpot), the jackpot 18 is opened and it is possible to enter the game ball into the jackpot 18. A special game is executed, and furthermore, the game state after the end of the special game is set to one of a normal game state, a second low probability time saving game state, or a high probability time saving game state. In other words, after the special game is finished, the game is configured to shift to either the normal game state, the second low probability time saving game state, or the high probability time saving game state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery determines that a small win has been won (that is, if a small win has been won), the big prize opening 18 is opened and the game ball can be entered into the big winning opening 18. A small winning game is executed. In this small winning game, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 18, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the gaming state after the end of the small winning game remains the gaming state before the start of the small winning game. That is, when a small winning game is executed, the game state does not change.

In addition, when a determination result indicating that the time-saving gaming state will be granted through the above-mentioned lottery is derived (hereinafter also referred to as winning of the time-saving granting), the first time-saving gaming state is set without changing the low probability gaming state. It has become. That is, when a time-saving award is won in the above-mentioned lottery, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, if the time-saving grant is not won in the above-mentioned lottery, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the determination of the propriety of granting time savings is made only in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the determination of the propriety of granting the time savings is not performed in the lottery in other gaming states. . Therefore, during other gaming states, the determination result of winning the time-saving grant will not be derived, so the gaming state will not change without going through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of special games. It is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the big prize opening 18.
Then, during the normal game state and the first low probability time saving game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a so that the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 ( During the second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state, and special game, the game ball enters the big prize opening 18, or the game ball passes through the gate 20. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the ball enters the second starting winning hole 16.
Specifically, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state, and during the special game, a display instructing to launch a game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed on the performance display device 21. During the normal game state and during the first low probability time-saving game state, a display is performed on the effect display device 21 instructing to launch a game ball toward the first game area 12a.

The lottery is based on various random numbers obtained when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, and the random numbers stored in the main ROM 102 for determining the random numbers. This is done based on various tables.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment uses a random number, which is used to determine the result of the lottery (big hit, small win, provision of a time-saving gaming state, or loss), as a random number related to the lottery and the determination of special symbols; It has a special symbol random number used to determine the type of special symbol, and a variable pattern random number used to determine a variable pattern command to be described later.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the above-mentioned win/fail random number. This random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed each time the random number sequence goes around, and the start value is changed each time the system is reset.
Further, the variation pattern command is for determining a pattern (variation time, manner) of a variation performance that can notify the result of the winning lottery. The random numbers used to determine the fluctuation pattern command are not limited to those mentioned above, and for example, other random numbers may be used in addition to this random number.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a random value is obtained for each of the above-mentioned random numbers, and each random value is stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103. It looks like this.
This reserved storage area stores each random number value (hereinafter referred to as the first special pattern random number) of the random number related to the win/fail lottery and the determination of special symbols, which are obtained by entering the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. and each random number (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol) obtained by entering a game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 for determining the winning/losing lottery and special symbols. The second storage area includes a second reserved storage area for storing random numbers (referred to as random numbers). Each of these reserved storage areas is composed of a total of four storage sections, from the first storage section to the fourth storage section, and stores a total of 4 sets of first special pattern random numbers and a total of 4 sets of second special pattern random numbers. Sets can be stored.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, the first special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the first reservation storage area. It has become. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is not stored in any of the storage units of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part of the first reservation storage area, the game ball is acquired using this as an opportunity. The first special figure random number is stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part and the second storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number acquired at this opportunity is stored in the third storage section of the first reservation storage area. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first storage part to the third storage part of the first reservation storage area, this The first special figure random number obtained at this moment is stored in the fourth storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a state where the first special figure random number is stored in the first to fourth storage parts of the first reservation storage area, this input The first special figure random number related to the ball is not stored.

Similarly, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number is stored in order from the first storage part of the second reservation storage area. The specific storage process is the same as the storage of the first special figure random number described above, so the explanation will be omitted.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of sets of first special figure random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the first pending number) stored in the first pending storage area is determined by the first pending number counter (not particularly shown in the figure). The number of sets of second special drawing random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the second reserved number) stored in the second reserved storage area is stored in the second reserved number counter (not particularly shown). It is meant to be remembered.
In addition, in this specification, as mentioned above, the storage of the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number in the reservation storage area is also referred to as "retention" or "reservation storage", and also, the first reservation The number and the second pending number are also simply referred to as the "reserved number."

The pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a random number determination table 110 for determining the result of a lottery, a special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol, and a random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol. The special electric accessory operation table 112 is used to control the special game and the small win game that are executed when a small win is won. A game state setting table 113 for setting the game state after the time-saving symbol (in which it is determined that the time-saving game state is set) or after the end of the special game, and a fluctuation pattern command for determining the fluctuation pattern command. It has a pattern table 114.
Note that the tables related to the lottery, etc. are not limited to these, and if it is necessary to make judgments or decisions based on random numbers, other tables may be provided as appropriate.

The win/fail random number determination table 110 is for determining the result of the win/fail lottery (big win win, small win win, time saving grant win, or loss), and can be roughly divided into win/fail random numbers that are referred to in a low probability gaming state. It includes a random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table A) and a win/fail random number determination table 110 (hereinafter referred to as table B) that is referred to in the high probability gaming state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 11, Table A and Table B each have six types corresponding to the setting values being set.

Specifically, table A includes table A1 that is referenced when the set value is "1", table A2 that is referenced when the set value is "2", and table A2 that is referenced when the set value is "3". Table A3 is referenced when the setting value is "4", Table A5 is referenced when the setting value is "5", and Table A5 is referenced when the setting value is "6". A table A6 is provided which is referred to in the case of the above.
Table B includes table B1 that is referenced when the setting value is "1", table B2 that is referenced when the setting value is "2", and table B2 that is referenced when the setting value is "3". B3, table B4 that is referenced when the set value is "4", table B5 that is referenced when the set value is "5", and table that is referenced when the set value is "6". B6 is provided.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one win/fail random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, one of the above-mentioned winning/losing random number determination tables 110 is selected depending on the setting value set in the pachinko machine P and the gaming state at the time of performing the winning/losing lottery, and the obtained winning/losing random number is selected. The result of the lottery is determined based on the random number determination table 110.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), according to table A1, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1373, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1374 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A1, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/175, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), according to table A2, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1384, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1385 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A2, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/170, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), according to table A3, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1396, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1397 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A3, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/165, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), according to table A4, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1408, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If the winning random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time-saving award, and if the winning random number is any other random number (0-999, 1409-1999, 3965-65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A4, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/160, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), according to table A5, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1421, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1422 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A5, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/155, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time-saving award is about 1/100.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), according to table A6, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1434, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If the random number is between 3310 and 3964, it will be determined that you have won the time saving award, and if the random number is any other number (0 to 999, 1435 to 1999, 3965 to 65535), it will be determined that you lost. . Therefore, in this table A6, the probability of winning a jackpot is about 1/150, the probability of winning a small win is about 1/50, and the probability of winning a time saving award is about 1/100.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), according to table B1, when the winning/losing random number is between 1000 and 1484, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the winning/losing random number is between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small winning has been won. It is determined that the winner is a winner, and if it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1485 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B1, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/135, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), according to table B2, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1503, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1504 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B2, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/130, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 8(b), according to table B3, when the random numbers are between 1000 and 1523, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1524 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B3, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/125, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 9(b), according to table B4, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1545, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1546 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B4, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/120, and the probability of winning the small prize is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), according to table B5, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1568, it is determined that a jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that a small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1569 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning a jackpot in this table B5 is approximately 1/115, and the probability of winning a small win is approximately 1/50.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), according to table B6, if the random numbers are between 1000 and 1594, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the random numbers are between 2000 and 3309, it is determined that the small win has been won. If it is a random number other than these (0 to 999, 1595 to 1999, 3310 to 65535), it is determined to be a loss. Therefore, in this table B6, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/110, and the probability of winning a small prize is approximately 1/50.

As described above, the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the high probability gaming state and the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the low probability gaming state (for example, table A1 and table B1) have the same associated setting values. etc.), the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the high probability gaming state is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the low probability gaming state. ing.
In addition, the numerical range of the winning/losing random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the winning/losing random number determination table 110 that is referred to in the low probability game state is a high probability game that is associated with the same setting value as the winning/losing random number determining table 110. Included in the numerical range of the random numbers that are determined to be a jackpot win in the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the state (specifically, the lower limit values in the numerical range that are determined to be a jackpot win are the same, and (the upper limit values are different). In other words, the random number that is determined to be a jackpot in the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the low probability gaming state is the same as the win/fail random number determination table 110 referenced in the high probability gaming state that is associated with the same setting value. However, it was determined that he had won the jackpot.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, the lower limit value in the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a jackpot win is the same, and the upper limit value is set to be different. However, the upper limit values may be the same and the lower limit values may be different.

In addition, in both tables, the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a small win is outside the numerical range of the random number that is determined to be a jackpot, and the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are the same. Therefore, the probability of winning a small win is set to be the same. In other words, regardless of the set value and the gaming state (high probability gaming state, low probability gaming state), it is determined that a small win is won with the same probability.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, it is possible to win a small win in the lottery based on either the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number, but it is not limited to this. It may be set so that it is possible to win a small hit only in the lottery based on the first special random number, or it may be set so that it is possible to win the small win only in the lottery based on the second special random number. Good too.

In addition, the random number determination tables 110 (table A1, table A2, table A3, table A4, table A5, and table A6) referred to in the low probability gaming state all contain the numerical values of the random numbers that are determined to be the winning of the time-saving grant. The range is set so that the upper and lower limits of the numerical range are the same, outside the numerical range of the random numbers that are determined to be winning the jackpot, and as a result, the probability of winning the time-saving award is the same. It is set so that Therefore, during the normal gaming state, regardless of the set value that has been set, it will be determined that the time saving award has been won with the same probability.
As mentioned above, since the determination of the validity of the time saving grant is not made in the lottery in game states other than the normal game state, the validity random number determination table 110 (table B1, table B2, table B2, Table B3, Table B4, Table B5, and Table B6) are not provided with a numerical value area in which winning of the time saving grant is determined. Therefore, during the high-probability gaming state, it is never determined that the time-saving award has been won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the numerical range in which it is determined that a jackpot win, the numerical range that is determined as a small win, and the numerical range that is determined as a time saving award are all continuous. Although it is configured by a range of numerical values, it is not limited to this, and may be configured by a discontinuous range of numerical values that includes a numerical value that is a loss in between.

The special symbol random number determination table 111 is for determining the type of special symbol, and as shown in FIGS. It includes a first starting winning hole determination table 111a that is referred to, and a second starting winning hole determining table 111b that is referred to when a win/fail lottery is performed using the second special drawing random number.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one special symbol random number within the numerical value range of 0 to 199 is acquired. Then, when the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery is performed, the special symbol random number determination table of either the first starting winning hole determination table 111a or the second starting winning hole determining table 111b is selected depending on the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered. 111 is selected, and the type of special symbol is determined based on the acquired special symbol random number and the selected special symbol random number determination table 111.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot symbols) that are determined when a jackpot is won. In addition, two types of small winning symbols (Y1, Y2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as small winning symbols) that are determined in the event of a small winning. Seven types of time-saving symbols (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as time-saving symbols) that are determined in the event of a loss. Two types of losing symbols (Z1, Z2) are provided as special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as losing symbols) determined by.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), according to the first starting winning hole determination table 111a, in the case of winning a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 1, A jackpot symbol X2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 2 and 139, and a jackpot symbol X3 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199. That is, in this first starting prize opening determination table 111a, when a jackpot is won, the probability that jackpot symbol X1 will be determined is 1%, the probability that jackpot symbol X2 will be determined is 69%, and the probability that jackpot symbol X3 will be determined. The probability of being determined is 30%.
In addition, in the case of winning a small hit, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 99, and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 100 and 199. be done. That is, in this first starting winning hole determination table 111a, when a small winning is won, the probability that the small winning symbol Y1 will be determined and the probability that the small winning symbol Y2 will be determined are both 50%. ing.
In addition, in the case of winning the time saving award, when the special symbol random number is 0 to 99, the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and when the special symbol random number is 100 to 149, the time saving symbol J2 is determined, Time-saving symbol J3 is determined when the special symbol random number is 150-183, time-saving symbol J4 is determined when the special symbol random number is 184-193, and when the special symbol random number is 194-197. The time saving symbol J5 is determined, and when the special symbol random number is 198 to 199, the time saving symbol J6 is determined. That is, in this first starting prize opening determination table 111a, in the case of winning the time-saving award, the probability that the time-saving symbol J1 will be determined is 50%, the probability that the time-saving symbol J2 will be determined is 25%, and the probability that the time-saving symbol J2 will be determined is 25%. The probability that J3 will be determined is 17%, the probability that time-saving symbol J4 will be determined is 5%, the probability that time-saving symbol J5 will be determined is 2%, and the probability that time-saving symbol J6 will be determined is 1%.
In addition, in the case of a loss, a loss pattern Z1 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 19, and a loss pattern Z2 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 20 and 199. That is, in this first starting winning hole determination table 111a, in the case of a loss, the probability that the losing symbol Z1 is determined is 10%, and the probability that the losing symbol Z2 is determined is 90%.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), according to the second starting winning hole determination table 111b, in the case of winning a jackpot, if the special symbol random number is between 0 and 139, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, When the special symbol random number is between 140 and 199, jackpot symbol X4 is determined. That is, in this second starting prize opening determination table 111b, when a jackpot is won, the probability that jackpot symbol X1 will be determined is 70%, and the probability that jackpot symbol X4 will be determined is 30%. .
In addition, in the case where the time saving award is won, the time saving symbol J7 is determined when the special symbol random number is between 0 and 199 (that is, no matter what value the special symbol random number is). That is, in this second starting prize opening determination table 111b, when the time saving award is won, the probability that the time saving symbol J7 is determined is 100%.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 12(b), the type of small winning symbol determined in the case of a small winning and the determination probability of that type, and the type and determination probability of the losing symbol determined in the case of a loss. The determination probability of the type is set to the same content as the first starting winning hole determination table 111a.

The special electric accessory operation table 112 is for controlling a special game that is executed when a jackpot is won and a small win game that is executed when a small win is won. It is referred to in order to operate the large prize opening solenoid 18c and the distribution member solenoid 59c during execution of the small winning game. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13(a) to 13(d), the special electric accessory actuation table 112 is a first table that is referred to when a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. An operation table 112a, a second operation table 112b that is referred to when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and a third operation table that is referred to when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined. 112c, and a fourth operation table 112d that is referred to when a small winning symbol is won and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the first operation table 112a shown in FIG. 13(a). According to this first operation table 112a, the game ends when either of the following conditions is met: the grand prize opening 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or 10 game balls enter the grand prize opening 18. A round game is executed 10 times in total from the 1st round to the 10th round. In addition, during the execution of each round game, the opening/closing door 18b is displaced from the closed position to the open position, remains in the open position for 29.0 seconds, and then operates in a manner (opening/closing pattern) in which it is displaced from the open position to the closed position. As a result, the big winning hole 18 is opened only once, and the time during which the big winning hole 18 is closed between each round game (namely, the interval time) is set to 2.0 seconds.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the sorting member 59 remains at the first position during each round game of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round. It is designed to operate in a manner (operation pattern) in which it moves (positions). On the other hand, during the three rounds of the round game, the distribution member 59 operates in such a manner that it remains at the second position.

Further, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the second operation table 112b shown in FIG. 13(b). According to this second operation table 112b, a total of 10 round games are executed from the 1st round to the 10th round, which ends under the same conditions as the above-mentioned first operation table 112a. The opening/closing pattern and interval time of the opening/closing door 18b are also set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(b), when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, during each round game of the 1st round, 2nd round, 4th round to 10th round, it is different from the case where the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Similarly, the distributing member 59 operates in such a manner that it remains at the first position, and furthermore, it operates in such a manner that the distributing member 59 remains at the first position during the three rounds of the round game. It has become.

Further, when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, a special game is executed with reference to the third operation table 112c shown in FIG. 13(c). According to the third operation table 112c, a round game that ends under the same conditions as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b described above is executed a total of four times from the 1st round to the 4th round. The opening/closing pattern and interval time of the opening/closing door 18b are set to the same contents as the first operation table 112a and the second operation table 112b.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 13(c), when jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined, jackpot symbol X1 and jackpot symbol X2 are determined during each round game of the 1st, 2nd, and 4th round. As in the case where the distribution member 59 is stopped at the first position, the distribution member 59 operates in a manner that it stays at the first position. It operates in such a manner that the member 59 remains in the first position.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the jackpot 18 remains open for 29.0 seconds in three rounds of the round game (specific round game). Since it is released and the distribution member 59 remains at the second position, as long as the game balls are launched toward the second game area 12b, the game balls will enter the grand prize opening 18 and the predetermined number of balls will be reliably delivered. The game ball can be allowed to enter a specific area 57.
On the other hand, when jackpot symbol X2, X3 or Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening 18, all of the game balls enter the general area 58, and it is impossible for the game ball to enter the specific area 57.

Further, when a small winning is won and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the small winning game is executed with reference to the fourth operation table 112d shown in FIG. 13(d). According to this fourth operation table 112d, the grand prize opening 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and when 10 game balls enter while the grand prize opening 18 is open, the grand prize opening 18 is closed. do.
Further, as shown in FIG. 13(d), during the small winning game, the distribution member 59 operates in such a manner that it remains at the first position.
In this way, in the small winning game, the big winning hole 18 is only open for 0.05 seconds, so it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 18. In addition, since the distribution member 50 stays at the first position during the small winning game, even if a game ball enters the big prize opening 18, the game ball will enter the general area 58 and the game ball will be transferred to the specific area. It is now impossible to enter 57.

The game state setting table 113 shows the game state after the end of the special game when the special game is executed, and the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, which become the winning time-saving grant in the winning/fail lottery during the normal game state. This is for setting the gaming state after J5, J6 or J7 is determined.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a special game is executed, the type of the jackpot symbol determined at the time of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game, and the type of the jackpot symbol that is set in the specific area 57 during the special game. The game state after the end of the special game is set depending on whether or not a number (in this embodiment, one game ball) has entered the game ball. In addition, if a time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 is selected as a winning time-saving symbol in the lottery during the normal gaming state, the game state specified for each time-saving symbol will be set. It is now possible to do so. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, whether or not the game ball can enter the specific area 57 is set in accordance with the type of the determined jackpot symbol. Depending on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability time saving game state after the special game based on the determination is completed.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the low probability time-saving gaming state and shifting to the high probability gaming state, the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment continues to play in the high probability gaming state without shifting to the low probability gaming state. The jackpot symbol associated with the setting is determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol is determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the number of consecutive high accuracy settings) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment). Sometimes, after the end of a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol, a low probability game state is forcibly set. In other words, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the low-probability game state while executing the special game, after the special game based on the determination ends, the high-probability game state will be entered. A low probability gaming state is forcibly set even when the conditions for setting are met.
Similarly, after winning a jackpot in the non-time-saving gaming state and transitioning to the time-saving gaming state (in this embodiment, the second time-saving gaming state), the time-saving gaming state is continuously set without shifting to the non-time-saving gaming state. When the jackpot symbol associated with is determined, and the number of times the jackpot symbol has been determined consecutively (hereinafter referred to as the consecutive time saving setting number) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10,000 times in this embodiment), After the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol ends, a non-time-saving game state is forcibly set. That is, if the above-mentioned jackpot symbols are determined consecutively up to the upper limit number of times without transitioning to the non-time-saving game state through the execution of the special game, after the special game based on the determination ends, the time-saving game state will be changed. Even when the set conditions are met, a non-time-saving gaming state is forcibly set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, considering the set probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of determining each jackpot symbol, it is unlikely that the number of consecutive high accuracy settings and the number of consecutive time shortening settings will reach 10,000. First, essentially, the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state will continue until the conditions for setting the low probability gaming state and the conditions for setting the non time saving gaming state are met.

In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14(a) to (j), the jackpot symbol X1 is determined as the game state setting table 113, and a predetermined number of game balls are thrown into the specific area 57 during the special game. The first game state setting table 113a is referred to when entering the game, and the second game is referred to when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game. The state setting table 113b, the third game state setting table 113c that is referred to when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, and the win/fail status during the normal game state. The fourth game state setting table 113d is referred to when the time saving symbol J1 is determined due to the winning of the time saving grant in the lottery, and the fourth game state setting table 113d is referred to when the time saving grant is won and the time saving symbol J2 is determined in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state. The fifth gaming state setting table 113e that is referred to, the sixth gaming state setting table 113f that is referred to when the time saving symbol J3 is determined due to the winning of the time saving award in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the sixth gaming state setting table 113f that is referred to when the time saving symbol J3 is determined in the lottery during the normal gaming state. The seventh game state setting table 113g is referred to when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined as a time-saving symbol J4 is determined in the winning lottery in the normal gaming state, and the time-saving symbol J5 is determined as the time-saving symbol J5 is determined in the winning lottery in the normal gaming state. 8th game state setting table 113h that is referred to when the normal game state is in the normal game state, the 9th game state setting table 113i that is referenced when the time saving symbol J6 is determined due to the winning of the time saving award in the lottery during the normal game state, A tenth game state setting table 113j is provided which is referred to when the time saving symbol J7 is determined as a time saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the number of consecutive high accuracy settings is predetermined. When the upper limit number of times has not been reached, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability game state, and the number of continuations of the high probability game state (hereinafter referred to as the high probability number of times) is set to 10,000 times. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. Ru.
In other words, in the above case, if the number of consecutive high accuracy settings and the number of consecutive time reduction settings have not reached the upper limit number of times, after the end of the special game, the results of the winning lottery will be derived 10,000 times without winning the jackpot. The high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state (that is, the high-probability time-saving game state) continue until. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/110 to 1/135, so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. Until then, the high probability time saving gaming state will continue.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive high probability settings has reached the predetermined upper limit, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low probability gaming state, and the continuous time is shortened. When the set number of times has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the game state after the end of the special game is set to a non-time-saving game state.

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the sorting member 59 stays at the second position during three rounds in the special game, so as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b. A predetermined number of game balls always enter the specific area 57. That is, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as long as the game ball is launched into the second game area 12b, the high probability time-saving game state will be reliably set.
Although not particularly shown, if a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game even though the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined, the game state after the end of the special game will change. , are set to a low probability time-saving gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (that is, a normal gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 14(b), if the jackpot symbol X2 or The probability time saving game state is set. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was the time saving gaming state (i.e., the first time saving gaming state), The game state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times.
In other words, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving gaming state, the result of the lottery will be changed without winning the jackpot. The low probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state (that is, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state) continue until the game is derived 10,000 times. As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/150 to 1/175, so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. The second low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until then.

On the other hand, in the above case, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot was a non-time-saving gaming state, the special game The gaming state after the end is set to a non-time saving gaming state. Similarly, even when the number of consecutive time saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, in any case, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (namely, a normal gaming state).

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the sorting member 59 stays at the first position during three rounds in the special game, so a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57. Never. That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, either the second low probability time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 14(c), if the jackpot symbol X4 is determined and a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 during the special game, the game state after the special game ends is low probability time saving. Set to gaming state. Along with this, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the second time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. Ru.
That is, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the low probability gaming state and the second time saving gaming state are maintained until the results of the winning lottery are derived 100 times without winning a jackpot. (That is, the second low probability time saving game state) continues.

On the other hand, in the above case, when the number of consecutive time saving settings has reached the predetermined upper limit number of times, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, at this time, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state (namely, a normal gaming state).

As mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the sorting member 59 stays at the first position during three rounds in the special game, so it is impossible for a predetermined number of game balls to enter the specific area 57. do not have. That is, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, either the second low probability time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 14(d), when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 10 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (namely, the first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(e), when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 20. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(f), when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 30 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 30 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(g), when the time-saving symbol J4 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 50. That is, in this case, the low probability gaming state and the first time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 50 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(h), if the time-saving symbol J5 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(i), when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination is changed to the low-probability gaming state without changing. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 1000 times. That is, in this case, the low probability gaming state and the first time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1000 times without winning a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 14(j), when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined as a time-saving award is won in the winning/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the determination remains the low-probability gaming state. The first time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to one. That is, in this case, the low probability game state and the first time-saving game state (first low-probability time-saving game state) continue until the result of the winning lottery is derived once without winning the jackpot.

In addition, when time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 are determined as described above, after the variation of the special symbol (time-saving symbol) stops (the variation of the next special symbol starts) ), the above-mentioned first low probability time saving gaming state is set.

The variation pattern table 114 is used to determine variation pattern commands, as described above.
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the special symbols are determined as described above, a variable pattern command is determined based on the result of the determination. As mentioned above, the variation pattern command is for determining the variation pattern of the variation performance, and the variation pattern command determines the mode of the variation performance and the variation time (the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the variable performance is divided into the first half and the second half, and the mode and variation time of the first half of the variable production and the mode and variation time of the second half of the variable production are different from each other. is also determined by the variation pattern command.
Specifically, the determined variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-control board 300 determines the specific aspect of the variation performance (for example, based on the received variation pattern command). , images, etc. to be displayed on the display section 21a).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variable pattern commands are provided, and each variable pattern command is associated with the variable pattern table 114. For each variation pattern table 114, types and determination ratios of variation pattern commands to be determined are set.

The pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment has a variable pattern table 114 in which the game ball is placed in the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state or during the first low probability time-saving gaming state (that is, during left-handed hitting). Table A is referred to when the ball enters the second starting winning slot 16 when the game ball is in the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state (that is, while hitting right hand). It includes a table B and a table C that are referred to when a ball enters the ball (see FIG. 15).

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, after winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state and shifting to at least one of the second time saving gaming state or the high probability gaming state, A jackpot that is won consecutively without transitioning to the normal gaming state or the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (from the so-called first win, while at least one of the second time-saving gaming state or the high-probability gaming state continues) If the consecutive jackpot number condition that the number of consecutive jackpot wins (hereinafter referred to as consecutive jackpots) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.) is not met, Table B is referred to and the consecutive jackpot number condition is determined. Table C is referenced when the following holds true.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, one fluctuating pattern random number within the numerical range of 0 to 249 is acquired, and this acquired fluctuating pattern random number and, The special symbol determined as described above, the current number of reservations (first number of reservations or second number of reservations), the current gaming state, and the number of consecutive jackpots conditions described above (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number) ) A variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern table 114 depending on the success or failure of the establishment of the variation pattern command.

Although not particularly shown, the fluctuation pattern table 114 includes cases where a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, It also includes a table that is referred to when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 during a low probability time saving game state or a high probability time saving game state. However, as long as the instruction to launch the game ball is followed on the performance display device 21, the game ball will only enter the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal game state or the first low probability time saving game state. During the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters only into the second starting prize opening 16. Therefore, the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, or the first starting during the second low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state. The entry of the game ball into the prize opening 15 is irregular, and in the following, such irregular entry will not be considered. The explanation will be given assuming that a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, and a gaming ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 during the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving gaming state.

Then, when determining the variable pattern command with reference to table A (when determining the variable pattern command based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15), the first pending number at the time is referenced. On the other hand, when determining the variable pattern command with reference to table B or table C (when determining the variable pattern command based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16), the relevant The second pending number at the time is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 15(a), according to table A, if the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a loss), and the current first pending number is 0 or 1. , when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, a fluctuation pattern called "13 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 0 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 13 seconds) is associated. When the fluctuation pattern command "00H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" (the first half fluctuation time is 13 seconds, the second half fluctuation time is 7 seconds) is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, If the fluctuation pattern command "02H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time in the second half is set to 25 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, it is called "60 seconds fluctuation". A variation pattern command "03H" associated with a variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the variation time in the first half is set to 20 seconds and the variation time in the second half is set to 40 seconds) is determined.

In addition, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current first pending number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern "3 seconds fluctuation" (first half fluctuation When the fluctuation pattern command "04H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the time is 0 seconds and the fluctuation time in the second half is set to 3 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 229, the command "20 seconds" is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "01H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 230 and 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined. " is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "03H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "18 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 18 seconds) is determined, and the variation pattern command "BAH" associated with the variation pattern command "BAH" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is 10 to 249, the variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B3H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "30 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 30 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BBH" is associated with a variation pattern random number of 10 to 249, a variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B4H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J3 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "36 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 36 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BCH" is associated with a variation pattern random number of 10 to 249, a variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B5H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.

In addition, when the time saving symbol J4 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "46 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 46 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BDH" is associated, and the variation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, the variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B6H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J5 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "66 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , a variation pattern in which the variation time in the second half is set to 66 seconds) is determined, and when the variation pattern command "BEH" is associated with a variation pattern random number of 10 to 249, the variation of "60 seconds variation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B7H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J6 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 9, a fluctuation pattern of "68 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is 0 seconds) , the fluctuation pattern with the latter half of the fluctuation time set to 68 seconds) is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" is associated with the fluctuation pattern random number is between 10 and 249, the fluctuation of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variable pattern command "B8H" with which the pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J7 is determined, regardless of the current first pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 249 (regardless of which value the fluctuation pattern random number is), the "60 seconds fluctuation" A variation pattern command "B9H" with which the variation pattern is associated is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a small winning), the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, regardless of the current first reservation number. When the fluctuation pattern command "22H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "22H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" was associated. A variation pattern command "23H" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a jackpot win), the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 124, regardless of the current first pending number. When the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "A2H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" was associated with it. A variation pattern command "A3H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), according to table B, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. When the fluctuation pattern command "00H" was associated with the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation", the fluctuation pattern command "00H" was determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number was between 210 and 239, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" was associated with it. The variation pattern command "02H" is determined, and when the variation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

In addition, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is associated when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 0 and 209. When the fluctuation pattern command "04H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 210 to 239, the fluctuation pattern command "02H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 240. ˜249, a variation pattern command “03H” associated with a variation pattern of “60 seconds variation” is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "45 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern. When the pattern command "22H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "23H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

Also, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the command "A2H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), according to table C, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 0 or 1, the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209. At this time, a variation pattern command "05H" associated with a variation pattern "26 seconds variation" (a variation pattern in which the variation time in the first half is set to 0 seconds and the variation time in the second half is set to 26 seconds) is determined, When the fluctuation pattern random number was between 210 and 239, a fluctuation pattern called "90 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first half was set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half was set to 60 seconds) was associated. When the fluctuation pattern command "06H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, a fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation time of the first half is set to 30 seconds and the fluctuation time of the second half is set to 90 seconds) The variation pattern command "07H" associated with the variation pattern) is determined.

In addition, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the current second pending number is 2 or more, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 209, the fluctuation pattern "6 seconds fluctuation" (first half fluctuation When the fluctuation pattern command "08H" is associated with a fluctuation pattern in which the time is 0 seconds and the fluctuation time in the latter half is set to 6 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 210 and 239, the command "90 seconds" is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "06H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 240 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "07H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation of 120 seconds" is determined. ” is determined.

In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern. When the pattern command "26H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "27H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 124, the fluctuation pattern of "90 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern When the command "A6H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 249, the fluctuation pattern command "A7H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is determined.

In this way, the variation time associated with the variation pattern determined in table C is set to be longer than the variation time associated with the variation pattern determined in table B. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state and the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number-of-hits condition is satisfied more than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number-of-hits condition is met (before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number). After that (after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number), the determination ratio of long fluctuation time is higher.
As a result, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, after the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is satisfied, the period from winning a jackpot to winning the next jackpot is longer than before the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to reduce the number of special games played per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time). Therefore, it is necessary to properly prevent the occurrence of situations where the gambling nature becomes extremely high, such as when a large number of special games are executed in a short period of time, and the number of prize balls won by the player increases rapidly. be able to.

The variation pattern command determined as above is sent to the sub-control board 300, and based on the variation pattern command, the specific aspect of the first half of the variation effect and the specific aspect of the second half of the variation effect are determined. Ru. Then, the variation effect is executed according to the specific manner determined in this way, but the total of the first half variation time and the second half variation time set in the variation pattern command is the variation production (special symbol). This is the time from the start to the end of the variable display).
For example, if the determined variation pattern command is "02H" (the first half's variation time is 20 seconds and the second half's variation time is 25 seconds), the first half's variation time and the second half's variation time are The total value of 45 seconds (=20 seconds + 25 seconds) is the variable time of the entire variable performance (the entire variable display of special symbols).
In addition, for the fluctuation pattern commands "00H", "04H", "05H", "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", and "BFH", the fluctuation time of the first half is "0 seconds" is specified. When these variation pattern commands are determined, the entire variation effect is executed in a manner determined according to the variation pattern command during the corresponding latter half of the variation time.

Also, based on the above-mentioned variation time, the production display device 21 performs a variable production, and the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 30 or second special symbol display device 31) displays a special symbol in a variable manner. It will be done.
Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball enters is the first starting winning hole 15, the first special symbol display device 30 blinks during the above-mentioned variable time, and the game ball enters the starting winning hole. When the starting winning hole is the second starting winning hole 16, the second special symbol display device 31 is displayed blinking during the above-mentioned variable time. Then, after the elapse of the variable time, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that, as will be described later, the stop display of this special symbol is performed until a predetermined stop display time has elapsed.

Regarding the aspect of the fluctuating performance, neither the first half of the fluctuating performance nor the second half of the fluctuating performance is determined based on the fluctuating pattern command, but other commands are used in addition to the fluctuating pattern command. At the same time, the mode of the first half of the fluctuating performance may be determined based on one of the commands, and the mode of the second half of the fluctuating performance may be determined based on another command.
Further, instead of dividing the variable performance into the first half and the second half, the variable performance may be divided into more parts and the mode of each part may be determined based on the corresponding command.

Next, processing related to the general figure game will be explained.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when a game ball launched by a firing device (not shown) and flowing down the gaming area 12 passes through the gate 20, the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is actuated. A lottery of normal symbols is performed to determine whether or not to open the movable piece 16b. When a winning result is obtained by drawing this normal symbol, the movable piece 16b opens for a predetermined period of time, and the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening 16. It becomes easier.
This normal symbol lottery is based on a winning random number obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 20 and a winning random number determination table 116 stored in the main ROM 102 and used to determine the random number. It will be held.

Then, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the above-mentioned winning determination random number is obtained, and the random number is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 103, with an upper limit of four. Specifically, this common map reservation storage area is made up of a total of four storage parts, from the first storage part to the fourth storage part, and the data are stored in the order in which the gates 20 are passed, starting from the first storage part. It has become. In addition, if the random number determined to hit has already been stored in some storage units, the random number determined to hit is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number among the empty storage units. Then, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 when four winning random numbers have already been stored in the general pattern reservation storage area, the winning determination random numbers related to this passage will not be stored in the general pattern reservation storage area. .
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a hardware random number built into the main control board 100 is used as the winning determination random number. This winning determination random number is updated according to a certain rule, and the random number sequence is automatically changed every time the random number sequence goes around, and the starting value is changed every time the system is reset.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the number of winning determination random numbers (hereinafter referred to as the number of reserved figures) stored in the reserved memory area of ordinary figures is determined by the number of reserved figures of ordinary figures counter (not particularly shown). is stored in the memory.

The winning determination random number determination table 116 is for determining whether or not there is a hit by drawing a normal symbol, and as shown in FIGS. The first determination table 116a is referred to during the normal game state), special game, and small winning game, and the second determination table 116a is referred to during the first time-saving game state (that is, during the first low-probability time-saving game state). It includes a table 116b and a third determination table 116c that is referred to during the second time-saving game state (that is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state or during the high-probability time-saving game state).
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the gate 20, one winning determining random number within the numerical range of 0 to 65535 is obtained. Then, if the gaming state at the time when the normal symbols are drawn is a non-time saving gaming state, or when the normal symbol is drawn during the special game or the small winning game, the first determination table 116a selects Then, a normal symbol lottery is performed based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected first determination table 116a. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the first time-saving gaming state, the second determination table 116b is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected second determination table 116b. A drawing of regular symbols will be held. Further, if the gaming state at the time of drawing the normal symbol is the second time-saving gaming state, the third determination table 116c is selected, and based on the acquired winning determination random number and the selected third determination table 116c. A drawing of regular symbols will be held.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), according to the first determination table 116a, a win is determined when the winning random number is 1, and when the winning random number is other than this (0, 2 to 65535). It is judged as a failure. Therefore, the probability of winning in this first determination table 116a is 1/65536.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(b), according to the second determination table 116b, it is determined that it is a win when the winning determination random number is 1 to 5, and other winning determination random numbers (0, 6 to 65535) If it is, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in this second determination table 116b is 5/65536.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(c), according to the third determination table 116c, a win is determined when the winning random number is between 1 and 65500, and other winning random numbers (0, 65501 through 65535) If it is, it is determined that it is a loss. Therefore, the probability of winning in this third determination table 116c is approximately 99/100.
In addition, if the drawing of normal symbols results in a win, the winning symbol is determined, and if the lottery results in a loss, the losing symbol is determined.

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment has a normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 and a second starting prize opening opening as tables for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbols and controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 16b. A control table 118 is provided.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117 is for determining the variation pattern of normal symbols. As described above, when a normal symbol is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate 20, the normal symbol variation pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation pattern determination table 117.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, when the game state is a non-time saving game state, or during a special game or a small winning game, normal symbols with a variable time of 3 seconds are set. When the fluctuation pattern of is determined and the gaming state is the first time saving gaming state, a fluctuation pattern of normal symbols with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is determined, and when the gaming state is the second time saving gaming state , a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds is determined. Then, when the normal symbol variation pattern is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 (see FIG. 3) is displayed blinking during the variation time set to this normal symbol variation pattern. If the drawing of normal symbols results in a win and a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, and if the lottery results in a loss and a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display device 32 lights up. Lights out.
In addition, in this specification, the blinking display of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol variation", and the lighting or extinguishing of the normal symbol display device 32 is referred to as "normal symbol stop display" and "stop of normal symbol fluctuation". , "normal symbol fluctuation stop", etc.

In addition, the second starting winning opening control table 118 is referred to in order to control the operation of the movable piece 16b provided in the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol display device 32 lights up, the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning hole 16 opens and closes in a manner determined in the second starting winning hole opening control table 118. ing. Specifically, when the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state, or during a special game or a small winning game, as shown in FIG. sec x 1 time), the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 is opened for 0.05 seconds. In addition, when the gaming state is the first time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The movable piece 16b of the prize opening 16 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In addition, when the gaming state is the second time saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. The movable piece 16b of the prize opening 16 is opened for a total of 1.8 seconds.

As mentioned above, the conditions for opening and closing the second start prize opening 16 are determined in the non-time saving gaming state and the time saving gaming state, respectively, and depending on the contents of these conditions, in the time saving gaming state, the Since the second starting prize opening 16 is easily maintained in the open state, it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting winning opening 16 than in the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, in the first time-saving game state of the time-saving game states, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving game state, but compared to the second time-saving game state of the time-saving game states. The second starting prize opening 16 is difficult to maintain in the open state. That is, during the first time-saving game state, it is easier to enter the second starting winning hole 16 than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and during the second time-saving gaming state, it is easier to enter the second starting winning hole 16 than during the first time-saving gaming state. It is now easier to hit the ball to 16. Therefore, during the second time-saving gaming state, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state, and during the first time-saving gaming state, more than in the non-time-saving gaming state. At the same time, you will have the opportunity to win a lottery.

In addition, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, as described above, as a process for easily maintaining the second starting prize opening 16 in the open state, the second determination table 116b and the third determination table 116c are used. (The winning determination random number determination table 116 is set to have a higher probability of winning than the non-time-saving gaming state), the lottery of normal symbols, the variable time for the first time-saving gaming state and the variable time for the second time-saving gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). Deciding on the variable time (shorter than the time-saving gaming state), and releasing using the opening pattern for the first time-saving gaming state or the opening pattern for the second time-saving gaming state (an opening pattern with a longer total opening time than the non-time-saving gaming state) Although all of the controls are performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the above-mentioned processes may be performed.

(Summary of processing in pachinko machine P)
Next, an outline of the processing executed by the main control board 100 as the above-mentioned special figure game, regular figure game, and special game progress will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the main processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
When power is supplied by the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101, and the main CPU 101 executes the main processing shown in the flowchart of FIG.

In step 100, as an initialization process, the main CPU 101 reads a startup program from the main ROM 102 in response to power-on, initializes flags stored in the main RAM 103, and performs various functions sent to the sub-control board 300. The command is stored in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 101.
In step 101, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number that is referred to when updating the special symbol random number. This initial value update random number for special symbol random number is for determining the initial value of the special symbol random number. That is, the special symbol random number is updated using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at the time of starting the update as an initial value. When this random number range is rotated once, the update of the special symbol random number is continued using the initial value update random number for the special symbol random number at that time as the initial value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 102.

In step 102, the main CPU 101 updates a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern. When the process of step 102 is completed, the processes of step 101 and step 102 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be explained.
The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control board 100 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed.

In step 200, the main CPU 101 executes timer update processing to update various timer counters. Then, the process advances to the next step 201.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 is executed, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped. It has become.
In step 201, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding "1", and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0", and when the random number counter completes one round, updates the random number from the value of the initial value update random number for special symbol random number at that time. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 202.

In step 202, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is an input to the gate detection sensor 20a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the specific area detection sensor 57a, and based on this, Executes sensor detection processing that performs predetermined processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 203.
In step 203, the main CPU 101 executes a special figure-related control process for controlling the special figure game, the special game, and the small winning game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 204.

In step 204, the main CPU 101 executes a control process related to the standard game to control the standard game. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 205.
In step 205, the main CPU 101 executes error-related processing to control the occurrence and cancellation of various errors. Specifically, when the main control board 100 receives a door open command based on the opening of the front door 3, a saucer full command based on the full status of the saucer 7, etc., the main CPU 101 executes the corresponding error designation. A command (for example, a door open command, a saucer full command, etc.) is generated and stored (set) in the performance transmission data storage area. In addition, when the main control board 100 no longer receives the above-mentioned command, the main CPU 101 generates a corresponding error release designation command (for example, a door close command, a full tank release command, etc.) and stores the production transmission data. Store in area. Then, the process advances to the next step 206.

In step 206, when the detection signals from the general winning opening detection sensor 14a, the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a, the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a, and the big winning opening detection sensor 18a are input to the main CPU 101, the corresponding The main CPU 101 updates the prize ball counter provided corresponding to each detection signal, and transmits a payout number designation command corresponding to each detection signal to the firing payout control board 200. In addition, when the prize ball is paid out by the firing and payout control board 200, a payout command is transmitted to the main control board 100 for each payout, and when the main CPU 101 receives the payout command, it subtracts the prize ball counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 207.
In step 207, the main CPU 101 outputs external information data for outputting the gaming state of the pachinko machine P to the outside of the pachinko machine P, and starting winning opening solenoid data for opening and closing the movable piece 16b of the second starting winning opening 16. , big winning hole solenoid data for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning hole 18, various display devices (first special symbol display device 30, second special symbol display device 31, normal symbol display device 32, first special symbol pending display) Display data etc. for the device 38, the second special symbol reservation display device 39, and the normal symbol reservation display device 33) are created. Then, the process proceeds to the next step 208.

In step 208, the main CPU 101 performs an output control process that performs port output to output the signal of each data created in step 207 described above, and command transmission to transmit the command stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Execute. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 ends.

Next, the sensor detection processing in step 202 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 21.
In step 300, the main CPU 101 executes gate detection processing for performing a lottery of normal symbols based on the game ball passing through the gate 20. Then, the process advances to the next step 301.
In step 301, the main CPU 101 executes a first starting winning hole detection process for performing a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15. Then, the process advances to the next step 302.

In step 302, the main CPU 101 executes a second starting winning hole detection process for performing a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16. Then, the process advances to the next step 303.
In step 303, the main CPU 101 executes a specific area detection process for performing a predetermined process based on the game ball entering the specific area 57. Then, the process at the time of sensor detection ends.

Next, the process at the time of gate detection in step 300 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.
In step 400, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input. If it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a is not input, the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 20a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 401.
In step 401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the reserved number of regular-sized figures counter (that is, the number of reserved regular-sized figures at the present time) is less than "4". If it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the gate detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than 4, the process proceeds to the next step 402.

In step 402, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 403.
In step 403, the main CPU 101 acquires the winning determination random number, stores it in the normal pattern reservation storage area, and ends the gate detection process.

Next, the process at the time of first starting winning opening detection in step 301 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.
In step 500, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting winning opening detection sensor 15a is not input, the first starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the first starting prize opening detection sensor 15a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 501.
In step 501, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first pending number counter (that is, the first pending number at the current time) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of first starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process proceeds to the next step 502.

In step 502, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the first pending number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 503.
In step 503, the main CPU 101 acquires the random numbers and stores them in the storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 504.

In step 504, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in step 201 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area where the random number of success or failure was stored in step 503 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 505.
In step 505, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the first reservation storage area in which the random number of validity was stored in step 503 described above. As described above, the acquired random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage section of the first reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 506.

In step 506, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the first special symbol random number and the first time-saving symbol random number have been stored, and stores it in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 507.
In step 507, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state or a first time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that it is neither the non-time-saving game state nor the first time-saving game state (that is, it is the second time-saving game state), the first starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is the non-time-saving gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state, the process advances to the next step 508.

In step 508, the main CPU 101 determines the stored first special figure random number before the start of fluctuation based on the first special figure random number (at the time when the first special figure random number is acquired (stored as pending)) A preliminary determination process is executed to perform various determinations regarding the winning/failure lottery. Then, the process at the time of first starting winning hole detection is ended.

Next, the process at the time of detecting the second starting winning hole in step 302 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.
In step 600, the main CPU 101 determines whether a detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input. Then, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a is not input, the second starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting winning opening detection sensor 16a has been input, the process proceeds to the next step 601.
In step 601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second pending number counter (that is, the current second pending number) is less than "4". Then, when it is determined that the value is not less than "4" (that is, "4"), the process at the time of second starting winning opening detection is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is less than "4", the process advances to the next step 602.

In step 602, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the second pending number counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 603.
In step 603, the main CPU 101 acquires the random number and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 604.

In step 604, the main CPU 101 acquires the special symbol random number updated in step 201 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area where the random number of success or failure was stored in step 603 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 605.
In step 605, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number updated in step 102 described above, and stores it in the storage section of the second reservation storage area in which the random number of validity was stored in step 603 described above. As described above, the acquired random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers are all stored in the same storage section of the second reservation storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 606.

In step 606, the main CPU 101 generates a start winning command indicating that the second special figure random number has been stored, and stores it in the presentation transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 607.
In step 607, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state is the second time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that it is not in the second time-saving gaming state (that is, in the non-time-saving gaming state or the first time-saving gaming state), the second starting winning opening detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is the second time-saving game state, the process advances to the next step 608.

In step 608, the main CPU 101 determines the stored second special figure random number before the start of fluctuation based on the second special figure random number (at the time the second special figure random number is acquired (stored as pending)) A preliminary determination process is executed to perform various determinations regarding the winning/failure lottery. Then, the process at the time of second starting winning hole detection is ended.

Next, the preliminary determination processing of steps 508 and 608 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. In addition, in the advance judgment process of step 508 described above, the following process is executed based on the win/fail random number, special symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern random number stored in the storage unit of the first reservation storage area, and the first reservation number. In the preliminary determination process of step 608 described above, the following process is executed based on the win/fail random number, special symbol random number, and fluctuation pattern random number stored in the storage section of the second reservation storage area, and the second reservation number. be done.
In step 650, the main CPU 101 determines the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16), the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations), and , the game state (normal game state, first low probability time saving game state, second low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state) is confirmed. Then, the process advances to the next step 651.

In step 651, the main CPU 101 selects one of the win/fail random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the gaming state confirmed in step 650 described above (tables A1 to A6, tables B1 to B6). (either one) is acquired, and based on the acquired table and the stored random numbers, a win/fail determination process is executed to determine the result of the win/fail lottery. Thereafter, data related to the result of the determination (big win, small win, time saving award, or loss) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this preliminary determination process as well, the determination as to whether the time saving grant is appropriate or not is made only when the gaming state confirmed in step 650 (that is, the gaming state set at the time) is the normal gaming state, This is not performed if the game is in a game state other than the normal game state. Therefore, when the game is in a game state other than the normal game state, the result is either a jackpot win, a small win, or a loss. Then, the process advances to the next step 652.
In step 652, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning hole 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the first starting winning hole determination table 111a are obtained. , the types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3), the types of small winning symbols (small winning symbols Y1, Y2), and the types of time-saving symbols (time-saving symbols J1, J2) based on the stored special symbol random numbers. , J3, J4, J5, J6) or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2). In addition, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the stored information are obtained. Based on the special symbol random number, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X4), the type of small prize symbol (small prize symbol Y1, Y2), the type of time saving symbol (time saving symbol J7), or the type of losing symbol The type (losing symbols Z1, Z2) is determined. Then, data related to the result of the determination (type of special symbol) is stored in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 653.

In step 653, the main CPU 101 determines the gaming state confirmed in step 650 above, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and the above-mentioned consecutive jackpot number condition (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number). A fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to whether or not is established is obtained. Then, the process advances to the next step 654.
In step 654, the main CPU 101 generates a variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol determined in step 652, the number of reservations, the variation pattern table 114 obtained in step 653, and the stored variation pattern random number. A variation pattern command determination process is executed to determine the change pattern command. Then, the process advances to the next step 655.

In step 655, the main CPU 101 generates a preliminary determination command including the result of the lottery determined in step 612 described above, the type of special symbol determined in step 652 described above, and the variation pattern command determined in step 654 described above. is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the preliminary determination process ends.
Through the above processing, for the first special pattern random number or the second special pattern random number stored as pending, as a result of the winning/failure lottery determined at the start of the special pattern fluctuation, the special symbol type and fluctuation pattern command are changed to the pre-judgment command. This is transmitted to the sub-control board 300 in advance (that is, before the fluctuation starts) at the time of obtaining the random number.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, in the above-mentioned preliminary determination process, the game ball is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and is stored in the reserved storage area (first reserved storage area). Determine the first special figure random number or the second special figure random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 and stored in the reservation storage area (second reservation storage area). However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the preliminary determination process, instead of directly determining the random numbers stored in the reserved storage area, random numbers stored in another storage area (for example, a register, etc.) may be determined.

Next, the specific area detection process in step 303 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.
In step 670, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a special game is being played. If it is determined that the special game is not in progress, the specific area detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special game is in progress, the process advances to the next step 671.
In step 671, the main CPU 101 determines whether the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). If it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has not been input a predetermined number of times, the specific area detection process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal from the specific area detection sensor 57a has been input a predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to the next step 672.
In step 672, the main CPU 101 turns on an entry flag indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the specific area 57. Then, the specific area detection process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special figure related control process of step 203 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.
At step 700, main CPU 101 loads the value of execution phase data. This execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the special figure-related control process is to be executed. Specifically, this execution phase data includes data "00" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation start processing described later, data "01" indicating execution of special symbol fluctuation stop processing described later, and post-stop processing described later. data "02" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "03" indicating the execution of the special game control process described later, data "04" indicating the execution of the small winning game control process described later, and the special game end process described later. It has data "05" indicating execution.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol fluctuation start processing (step 701), special symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 702), post-stop processing (step 703), and special Either the game control process (step 704), the small winning game control process (step 705), or the special game end process (step 706) is executed. Then, the special figure related control process is ended.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol variation start process of step 701 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.
In step 800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "00" indicating execution of the special symbol variation start process. If it is determined that the execution phase data is "00", the process advances to the next step 801. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "00", the special symbol variation start process is ended.
In step 801, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the second reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the second reservation number counter is greater than or equal to "1". . If it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to step 804. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to the next step 802.

In step 802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the first reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the first reservation number counter is greater than or equal to "1". . If it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process proceeds to the next step 803.
In step 803, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first pending number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first pending storage area. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the first reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the first reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. As a result, each random number stored in the first reservation storage area is used in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) process for determining validity, which will be described later. Then, the process advances to step 805.

In addition, in step 804, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 801 that the second special figure random number is stored, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second reservation number counter by "1", and also decrements the value of the second reservation number counter. Execute area shift processing. Specifically, each random number stored in the first storage section of the second reservation storage area is stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the random numbers are stored in the second storage section of the second reservation storage area. - Shift each random number stored in the fourth storage unit to the storage unit with the next lower number. As a result, each random number stored in the second reservation storage area is used in a so-called first-in first-out (FIFO) process for determining validity, which will be described later. Then, the process advances to step 805.
In step 805, the main CPU 101 increments by "1" the count value of a variation counter for counting the number of executions of the winning lottery (the number of variations of the special symbol). Further, the main CPU 101 stores a variation number command including the count value of the variation number counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation number command is sent to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 is able to grasp the current count value of the variation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 806.

In step 806, the main CPU 101 executes a success/failure determination process to derive the result of the win/fail lottery. Then, the process advances to the next step 807.
In step 807, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination processing to determine the type of special symbol. Specifically, when the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the first starting winning hole 15 (first special figure random number), the first starting winning hole determination table 111a is acquired, and the table and the first starting winning hole determination table 111a are obtained. , the result of the lottery determined in step 806 described above (big hit winning, small winning winning, time saving grant winning, loss) and the special symbol stored in a predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Based on the random numbers, the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3), the type of small prize symbol (small prize symbol Y1, Y2), and the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol J1, J2, J3, J4, J5) , J6) or the type of losing symbol (losing symbol Z1, Z2). In addition, if the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered is the second starting winning hole 16 (second special figure random number), the second starting winning hole determination table 111b is acquired, and the table and the above-mentioned The result of the lottery determined in step 806 (big win, small win, time saving award, loss) and the special symbol random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Based on the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol X1, Z2) is determined. Then, data corresponding to the determined special symbol is stored in a predetermined temporary storage area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in this special symbol determination process, the current gaming state, that is, the gaming state at the time when the special symbol was determined, is stored in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 808.
In addition, in the fluctuation start process of the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, if both the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, the second special figure random number is given priority to the first special figure random number. Although random numbers are processed, the process is not limited to this, and may be processed in the order in which they are stored in the reserved storage area.

In step 808, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined in step 807 described above in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, information regarding the determined type of special symbol will be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of variation. Then, the process advances to the next step 809.
In step 809, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 810.

In step 810, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol display device 30 starts blinking display, and the special symbol is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. When a variable display is performed, the second special symbol display device 31 starts a blinking display. Here, the blinking display means that "-" blinks at predetermined intervals on each display device.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the first special figure random number is stored in the first reservation storage area, the first special figure reservation display device 38 displays the first reservation number in a manner that allows the first reservation number to be recognized. When the second special figure random number is stored in the second reservation storage area, the second special figure reservation display device 39 is displayed in such a manner that the second reservation number can be recognized. Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the first special symbol random number, the first special symbol is When the display device 38 is display-controlled and the above-mentioned special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the second special symbol random number, at the same time as the variable display starts, a display is displayed to indicate that the second pending number is reduced by one. , the display of the second special figure reservation display device 39 is controlled.
Then, the process advances to the next step 811.

In step 811, the main CPU 101 sets the execution phase data to "01" so that the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed in the special symbol related control processing, and ends the special symbol fluctuation start processing.
Furthermore, in step 812, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above step 802 that the first special figure random number is not stored in the first reservation storage area, the main CPU 101 displays the effect based on the fact that the variable display is not performed. The device 21 executes a customer waiting determination process for displaying a customer waiting display. Specifically, the main CPU 101 measures the time during which a special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without a variable display of a special symbol. Assuming that the system is in a customer waiting state, a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the validity determination process of step 806 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.
In step 850, the main CPU 101 selects and selects one of the win/fail random number determination tables 110 that corresponds to the set value and the current gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state). Based on the table and the random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 described above, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be won (that is, the jackpot is determined). Execute judgment processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range that will result in a jackpot from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned win/fail random number falls within the acquired numerical range. Then, if the above-mentioned random number is within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the above-mentioned random number is not within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won. Then, the process advances to the next step 851.
In step 851, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process executed in step 850 described above is a jackpot (that is, whether or not the jackpot has been won). If it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (the jackpot has not been won), the process proceeds to step 853. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 852.

In step 852, the main 101 stores the fact that the jackpot has been won in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103. Then, the validity determination process ends.
Further, in step 853, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 851 that the jackpot has not been won, the main CPU 101 stores the table selected in the above-mentioned step 850 and the table stored in the predetermined processing area in the above-mentioned step 803 or step 804. Based on the winning random number (that is, the same winning random number as the winning random number that was the subject of determination in step 850 described above), it is determined whether or not there will be a small win (i.e., determining whether the small winning is correct or not). ) Execute the small hit determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range that will result in a small win from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether the above-mentioned win/fail random number falls within the acquired numerical range. If the above-mentioned random number falls within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that a small hit has been won, and when the above-mentioned random number does not fall within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that a small hit has not been won. Then, the process advances to the next step 854.

In step 854, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the small win determination process executed in step 853 described above is a small win (that is, whether or not a small win has been won). If it is determined that the small winning is not won (the small winning is not won), the process proceeds to step 856. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 855.
In step 855, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 that the small win has been won. Then, the validity determination process ends.

Further, in step 856, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 854 that the small win has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently set gaming state is the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the game state is not the normal game state (that is, the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, the process advances to the next step 857.
In step 857, the main CPU 101 uses the table selected in step 850 described above and the random number stored in the predetermined processing area in step 803 or step 804 (that is, the target of determination in step 850 and step 853 described above). A time-saving grant determination process is executed to determine whether or not the time-saving grant is a win (that is, to determine whether the time-saving grant is appropriate) based on the winning random number and the same winning/fail random number. Specifically, the main CPU 101 acquires information on the numerical range in which the time-saving award is won from the above-mentioned table, and determines whether or not the above-mentioned random number falls within the acquired numerical range. Then, if the above-mentioned right/fail random number falls within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving grant is won, and if the above-mentioned right-fail random number does not fall within the above-mentioned numerical range, it is determined that the time-saving grant is not won. The process then proceeds to the next step 858.

In step 858, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the time-saving grant determination process executed in step 857 described above is a winning of the time-saving grant (that is, whether or not the time-saving grant has been won). If it is determined that the time saving award is not won (the small winning is not won), the process proceeds to step 860. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving award has been won, the process proceeds to the next step 859.
In step 859, the main 101 stores in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103 the fact that the time saving award has been won. Then, the validity determination process ends.

Further, in step 860, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the normal gaming state is not in the above-mentioned step 856, or when it is determined that the time saving award has not been won in the above-mentioned step 858, the main CPU 101 stores a predetermined memory in the main RAM 103. Memorize the fact that you lost in the area. Then, the validity determination process ends.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the jackpot propriety determination process, the small win propriety determination process, and the time saving grant propriety determination process are all performed using the win/fail random number determination table 110 corresponding to the set setting value and gaming state. is executed by a common processing program (same module) to select the numerical value, obtain information on the numerical range to be determined, and determine whether a valid random number belongs to the numerical range. It looks like this.

Next, the variation pattern determination process in step 809 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30.
In step 900, the main CPU 101 determines the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16), the number of reservations (first number of reservations, second number of reservations), the number of games Check the state (normal game state, first low probability time saving game state, second low probability time saving game state, high probability time saving game state). Then, the process advances to the next step 901.
In step 901, the main CPU 101 determines the gaming state confirmed in step 900 above, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, and the condition for the number of consecutive jackpots (the number of consecutive jackpots must reach a predetermined number). A fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to whether or not is established is obtained. Then, the process advances to the next step 902.

In step 902, the main CPU 101 uses the fluctuation pattern table 114 obtained in step 901 described above, the type of special symbol determined in step 807 described above, the number of reservations confirmed in step 900 described above, and the number of reservations confirmed in step 803 described above. Alternatively, in step 804, a variation pattern command is determined based on the variation pattern random number stored in the processing area, and the determined variation pattern command is stored in a predetermined processing area. Then, the process advances to the next step 903.
In step 903, the main CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command determined in step 902 described above in the presentation transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 904.

In step 904, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time associated with the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern table 114. Then, the determined variable time is set in the variable time timer counter. Then, the variation pattern determination process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 702 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.
In step 1000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "01" indicating execution of the special symbol variation stop processing. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "01", the special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "01", the process advances to the next step 1001.

In step 1001, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable time set in the variable time timer counter in step 904 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1002.
In step 1002, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the special symbol determined in step 807 above on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, and Execute the stop display. Then, the process advances to the next step 1003.

In step 1003, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol confirmation command indicating that the special symbol has been confirmed in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1004.
In step 1004, the main CPU 101 sets a stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol in a stop display time timer counter. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a stop display time of 3 seconds is set when the determined special symbol is a time-saving symbol (J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, J7), and 0. A stop display time of 5 seconds is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 1005.

In step 1005, the main CPU 101 sets "02" to the execution phase data so that the post-stop process is executed in the special figure-related control process. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing ends.

Next, the post-stop processing in step 703 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.
In step 1100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "02" indicating execution of post-stop processing. If it is determined that the execution phase data is not "02", the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "02", the process advances to the next step 1101.
In step 1101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter in step 1004 described above has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1102.

In step 1102, the main CPU 101 stores a stop display end command indicating that the stop display time has elapsed in the performance transmission data storage area. Thereby, the fact that the stop display time has elapsed is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Further, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in a gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 1103.
In step 1103, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a first time saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is a first time saving gaming state, or a second time saving game flag indicating that the current gaming state is a second time saving gaming state. It is determined whether any of the game flags is on. Then, when it is determined that the first time saving game flag or the second time saving game flag is on, the time saving number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This time saving number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving game state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, processing is also executed to turn off the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag that was on. Moreover, when it is determined that both the first time saving game flag and the second time saving game flag are not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1104.

In step 1104, the main CPU 101 performs high-accuracy frequency update processing. Here, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a high probability gaming flag indicating that the current gaming state is a high probability gaming state is on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability game flag is on, the high probability number storage area provided in the main RAM 103 is updated. This high probability number storage area stores the remaining number of fluctuations until the high probability game state ends. Then, the stored remaining number of fluctuations is decremented by "1". Further, when the remaining number of fluctuations becomes "0" by updating the remaining number of fluctuations, a process of turning off the high certainty game flag is also executed. Further, if it is determined that the high-precision game flag is not turned on, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 1105.

In step 1105, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol (that is, a small winning symbol, a time-saving symbol, or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1106.
In step 1106, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning and the type of the stopped displayed jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4) to the sub control board 300. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 1107.

In step 1107, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 1108.
In step 1108, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Then, the process advances to the next step 1109.

In step 1109, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "10" as the number of rounds if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X1 or X2, and sets "10" as the round number if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X3 or X4. Set "4" as the number. Then, the process advances to the next step 1110.
In step 1110, the main CPU 101 sets "03" to the execution phase data so that the special game control process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

In addition, in step 1111, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1105 that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. do. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol (that is, it is a time saving symbol or a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1114. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1112.
In step 1112, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the small winning game, in the opening time timer counter, and stores the opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the performance transmission data. Store in area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1113.

In step 1113, the main CPU 101 sets "04" to the execution phase data so that the small winning game control process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 1114, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1111 that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a time-saving symbol. do. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a time-saving symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 1116. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a time-saving symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 1115.
In step 1115, the main CPU 101 executes a first low probability time saving gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state to the first low probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, in addition to turning on the first time-saving game flag, if the stopped-displayed time-saving symbol is J1, the number of time-savings is set to "10", and if the stopped-displayed time-saving symbol is J2. If the time saving symbol is stopped, set the time saving number to “20”, if the time saving symbol that is stopped and displayed is J3, set the time saving number to “30”, and if the time saving symbol that is stopped and displayed is J4. Set the number of time savers to "50", if the time saver symbol stopped and displayed is J5, set the number of time savers to "100", and if the time saver symbol stopped displayed is J6 The number of times of time saving is set to "1000", and when the stopped and displayed time saving symbol is J7, the number of times of time saving is set to "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1116.

In step 1116, the main CPU 101 confirms the set gaming state and stores a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1117.
In step 1117, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the special game control process of step 704 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.
In step 1200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "03" indicating execution of the special game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "03", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "03", the process advances to the next step 1201.
In step 1201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1108 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1202.

In step 1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an ending process is in progress, which is a standby process performed after all rounds of games are completed in this special game control process. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process advances to step 1210. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 1203.
In step 1203, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot opening/closing control process for opening/closing the jackpot 18 and operating the distribution member 59 based on the special electric accessory actuation table 112 corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Execute. Then, the process advances to the next step 1204.

In step 1204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the time when the round game has started based on the big prize opening opening/closing control in step 1203 described above. If it is determined that it is not the time when the round game has started, the process advances to step 1206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has started, the process advances to the next step 1205.
In step 1205, the main CPU 101 stores a round game start command indicating the start of a round game in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1206.
Note that the round game start command is provided for each number of round games, so that it is possible to transmit to the sub control board 300 how many times the round game has been started.

In step 1206, the main CPU 101 determines whether the round game has ended based on the big winning opening opening/closing control in step 1203 described above. Then, when it is determined that the round game has not ended, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round game has ended, the process advances to the next step 1207.
In step 1207, the main CPU 101 decrements the number of rounds stored in the main RAM 103 by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1208.

In step 1208, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of rounds decremented in step 1207 described above is "0". Then, if it is determined that the number of rounds is not "0", the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of rounds is "0", the process advances to the next step 1209.
In step 1209, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the special game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends an ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. Remember. Then, the special game control process ends.

Further, in step 1210, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 1202 described above that the ending process is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1209 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the special game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1211.
In step 1211, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end command indicating that the special game has ended in the effect transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1212.

In step 1212, the main CPU 101 sets "05" to the execution phase data so that the special game end process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the special game control process ends.

Next, the small winning game control process of step 705 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.
In step 1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "04" indicating execution of the small winning game control process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "04", the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "04", the process advances to the next step 1251.
In step 1251, the main CPU 101 determines whether the opening time set in the opening time timer counter in step 1112 described above has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1252.

In step 1252, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an ending process is in progress, which is a standby process that is performed after the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 is completed in this small winning game control process. If it is determined that the ending process is in progress, the process advances to step 1256. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending process is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 1253.
In step 1253, the main CPU 101 performs a small winning game execution process of opening and closing the big winning opening 18 based on the fourth operating table 112d in the special electric accessory operating table 112. Then, the process advances to the next step 1254.

In step 1254, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has been completed. Then, when it is determined that the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has not been completed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening and closing of the big prize opening 18 has been completed, the process proceeds to the next step 1255.
In step 1255, the main CPU 101 sets the ending time, which is the waiting time set at the end of the small winning game, in the ending time timer counter, and sends the ending command indicating that the ending process is started to the performance transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Then, the small winning game control process ends.

Further, in step 1256, which is proceeded when it is determined that the ending process is in progress in step 1252 described above, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ending time set in the ending time timer counter in step 1255 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed, the small winning game control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1257.
In step 1257, the main CPU 101 stores a small winning game end command indicating that the small winning game has ended in the performance transmission data storage area. The process then proceeds to the next step 1258.

In step 1258, the main CPU 101 confirms the set gaming state and stores a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Moreover, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the special symbol variation process is executed in the special symbol related control process. Then, the small winning game control process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned special game ending process of step 705 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.
In step 1300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the execution phase data is data "05" indicating execution of the special game end process. Then, when it is determined that the execution phase data is not "05", the special game ending process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution phase data is "05", the process advances to the next step 1301.
In step 1301, the main CPU 101 determines whether the entry flag is on. If it is determined that the entry flag is not on (that is, off), the process advances to step 1309. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entry flag is on, the process advances to the next step 1302.

In step 1302, the main CPU 101 decrements by 1 the value of the continuous probability change setting counter for counting the number of continuous probability change settings described above, and the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter for counting the number of continuous time reduction settings described above. Decrement by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 1303.
In step 1303, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether the number of continuous probability variation settings has reached a predetermined upper limit number of times. If it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting counter has not reached 0, the process advances to step 1305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous probability variation setting number counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 1304.

In step 1304, the main CPU 101 executes a low probability gaming state setting process to set the gaming state to a low probability gaming state. Specifically, the high certainty game flag is turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in a continuous probability change setting number counter. Then, the process advances to step 1306.
Further, in step 1305, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1303 that the value of the continuous probability change setting counter has not reached 0, a high probability gaming state setting process is executed to set the gaming state to a high probability gaming state. . Specifically, the high probability game flag is turned on and the high probability number of games is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to the next step 1306.

In step 1306, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the continuous time saving setting number counter has reached 0, that is, whether the number of continuous time saving settings has reached a predetermined upper limit. If it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter has not reached 0, the process advances to step 1308. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the continuous time reduction setting counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 1307.
In step 1307, the main CPU 101 executes a non-time-saving gaming state setting process that sets the gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" in the continuous time saving setting number counter. Then, the process advances to step 1311.

Further, in step 1308, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1306 that the value of the continuous time saving setting counter has not reached 0, the main CPU 101 executes a second time saving game that sets the gaming state to the second time saving gaming state. Execute status setting processing. Specifically, the second time saving game flag is turned on and the number of time saving times is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to step 1311.
In addition, in step 1309, which is proceeded when it is determined that the entry flag is not on in the above step 1301, the main CPU 101 executes the low probability time saving game state setting process similar to the above step 1304, and also sets the continuous probability change setting number counter. A predetermined upper limit number of times "10000" is set to "10000". Then, the process advances to the next step 1310.

In step 1310, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving/non-time-saving gaming state setting process that sets the gaming state to a non-time-saving gaming state or a second time-saving gaming state. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot is X2 or To set it, turn on the second time saving game flag and set the number of time saving times to "10000". On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off in order to set the non-time-saving game state. Further, when the jackpot symbol determined at the time of jackpot winning is X4, a second time-saving game flag is turned on and the number of time-savings is set to ``100'' in order to set a second time-saving game state. Then, the process advances to step 1311.
In step 1311, the main CPU 101 determines whether the set gaming state is a high probability time saving gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state) or a second low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state). ). If it is determined that neither is the case, the process advances to step 1313. On the other hand, if it is determined that either is the case, the process advances to the next step 1312.

In step 1312, the main CPU 101 increments by 1 the value of a continuous jackpot counter for counting the number of consecutive jackpots. Note that when the value of the continuous jackpot number counter reaches a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment), the above-mentioned continuous jackpot number condition is satisfied. Then, the process advances to step 1314.
Further, in step 1313, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the gaming state set in step 1311 described above is neither the high probability time saving gaming state nor the second low probability time saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 calculates the value of the continuous jackpot number counter. Reset (zero clear). Then, the process advances to the next step 1314.

In step 1314, the main CPU 101 turns off the entry flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 1315.
In step 1315, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming state designation command in the performance transmission data storage area according to the gaming state set as described above. This gaming state designation command includes information on whether the high-precision game flag is on or off, information on whether the first time-saving game flag is on or off, and information on whether the second time-saving game flag is on or off, which are set as described above. Contains information on , high accuracy count, and time saving count. Then, the process advances to the next step 1316.

In step 1316, the main CPU 101 sets "00" to the execution phase data so that the fluctuation start process is executed in the special figure related control process. Then, the special game ending process is ended.

Next, the ordinary map related control process in step 204 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36.
In step 1400, the main CPU 101 loads the value of the general pattern execution phase data. This ordinary figure execution phase data indicates which of the plurality of functional modules (subroutines) configuring the ordinary figure related control processing is to be executed. Specifically, this normal symbol execution phase data includes data "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation start process described later, data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later, and the data "11" indicating the execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process described later. It has data "12" indicating the execution of the post-symbol stop process and data "13" indicating the execution of the movable piece control process described later.
Then, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation start processing (step 1401), normal symbol fluctuation stop processing (step 1402), and normal symbol stop post processing (step 1403) or the movable piece control process (step 1404). Then, the general map related control process is ended.

Next, the normal symbol variation start process of step 1401 mentioned above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37.
In step 1500, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is "10" indicating the execution of the normal symbol variation start process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "10", the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "10", the process proceeds to the next step 1501.
In step 1501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determined random number is stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the ordinary figure reservation number counter is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol reservation number counter is not greater than "1" (that is, "0"), the ordinary symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure reservation number counter is "1" or more, the process advances to the next step 1502.

In step 1502, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the ordinary figure reservation counter by "1". Then, the process advances to the next step 1503.
In step 1503, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process of the general drawing reservation storage area. Specifically, the winning determination random numbers stored in the first storage section are stored in a predetermined processing area provided in the main RAM 103, and the winning determination random numbers stored in the second to fourth storage sections are stored. Shift the determined random number to the storage section with the next lower number. As a result, the winning determination random numbers stored in the general pattern reservation storage area are used in the winning determination process described later in a so-called first-in, first-out (FIFO) manner. Then, the process advances to step 1504.

In step 1504, the main CPU 101 selects the winning determination random number determination table 116 (first Judgment table 116a, second judgment table 116b, or third judgment table 116c) is selected, and based on the selected table and the winning determination random number stored in the processing area in step 1503 described above, a normal symbol is selected. A winning determination process is executed to derive the lottery result. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the first determination table 116a when in a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game, and when in a first time-saving game state, The second determination table 116b is referred to, and if the second time-saving game state is in progress, the third determination table 116c is referred to determine the winning determination random number stored in the processing area. Then, the process advances to the next step 1505.
In step 1505, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the winning determination process in step 1504 described above is a win. If it is determined that the game is a hit, the process advances to the next step 1506. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a win (that is, a loss), the process advances to step 1507.

In step 1506, the main CPU 101 stores the winning symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to step 1508.
Further, in step 1507, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the result of the winning determination process is not a win (that is, a loss) in the above-mentioned step 1505, the main CPU 101 stores the loss symbol data in a predetermined processing area of the main RAM 103. Then, the process advances to the next step 1508.

In step 1508, the main CPU 101 confirms whether the current state of the pachinko machine P is a non-time-saving game state, a first time-saving game state, a second time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game. , with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 117, the normal symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the current state of the pachinko machine P is set in the regular symbol fluctuation time timer counter. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is in a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game, the main CPU 101 sets the regular figure fluctuation time counter to "3 seconds", and when in the first time-saving game state. In one case, the normal figure variation time counter is set to ``2 seconds'', and when the second time saving game state is in progress, the normal figure variation time counter is set to ``0.6 seconds''. Then, the process advances to the next step 1509.
In step 1509, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of normal symbols. As a result, when a variable display of normal symbols is performed, the normal symbol display device 32 starts blinking display. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the winning determination random number is stored in the normal pattern holding storage area, the normal pattern holding display device 33 is displayed in a manner that allows the number of normal drawings held to be recognized. It has become. When a variable display of normal symbols is performed, at the same time as the start of the variable display, the display of the normal symbol reservation display device 33 is controlled so as to indicate that the number of reserved symbols decreases by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 1510.

In step 1510, the main CPU 101 stores the current state of the pachinko machine P in the gaming machine state buffer as the state of the pachinko machine P at the start of the change. Then, the process advances to the next step 1511.
In step 1511, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "11" so that the normal symbol fluctuation stop process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing in step 1402 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.
In step 1600, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "11" indicating execution of the normal symbol fluctuation stop process. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "11", the ordinary symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "11", the process advances to the next step 1601.
In step 1601, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation time set in the normal symbol fluctuation time timer counter in step 1508 has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1602.

In step 1602, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stop displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 32, and executes the stop display of the normal symbols. Then, the process advances to the next step 1603.
In step 1603, the main CPU 101 sets the variable stop display time for stopping and displaying the normal symbols in the normal symbol stop display time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 1604.

In step 1604, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "12" so that the normal symbol stop post-processing is executed in the normal symbol related control process. Then, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing ends.

Next, the above-described normal symbol stop processing in step 1403 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39.
In step 1700, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal symbol execution phase data is data "12" indicating execution of the normal symbol stop post-processing. Then, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol execution phase data is not "12", the ordinary symbol stop processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary figure execution phase data is "12", the process advances to the next step 1701.
In step 1701, the main CPU 101 determines whether the variable stop display time set in the regular figure stop display time timer counter in step 1603 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the variable stop display time has not elapsed, the normal symbol stop post-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1702.

In step 1702, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is not a winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 1704. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a winning symbol, the process advances to the next step 1703.
In step 1703, the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary figure execution phase data to "13" so that the movable piece control process is executed in the ordinary figure related control process. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

In addition, in step 1704, which is proceeded to when it is determined that the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in step 1702 is not a winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the main CPU 101 starts the normal symbol fluctuation in the common symbol related control process. Set the general figure execution phase data to "10" so that the process is executed. Then, the normal symbol stop post-processing is completed.

Next, the movable piece control process in step 1404 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 40.
In step 1800, the main CPU 101 determines whether the general pattern execution phase data is data "13" indicating execution of the movable piece control process. Then, if it is determined that the ordinary pattern execution phase data is not "13", the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ordinary pattern execution phase data is "13", the process advances to the next step 1801.
In step 1801, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the movable piece 16b is under operation control, that is, whether or not the starting prize opening solenoid 16c is energized. If it is determined that the movable piece 16b is under operational control, the process advances to step 1804. On the other hand, if it is determined that the movable piece 16b is not under operational control, the process advances to the next step 1802.

In step 1802, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state of the pachinko machine P at the time when the normal symbols start changing is in a non-time-saving game state, in a first time-saving game state, in a second time-saving game state, in a special game, or in a small winning game. Check to see which one. Then, the process advances to the next step 1803.
In step 1803, the main CPU 101 refers to the second starting winning hole opening control table 118, and generates energization control data (opening data) for the starting winning hole solenoid 16c according to the state of the pachinko machine P confirmed in step 1802 described above. , set the number of times of energization (number of times of opening) and the number of times of energization (opening time). Then, the movable piece control process ends.

Further, in step 1804, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 1801 that the movable piece 16b is under operation control, the main CPU 101 determines whether the energization time (opening time) set in the above-mentioned step 1803 has elapsed. Determine. Then, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has not elapsed, the movable piece control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the energization time (opening time) has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 1805.
In step 1805, the main CPU 101 stops the operation of the movable piece 16b, that is, stops the energization of the starting prize opening solenoid 16c. Then, the process advances to the next step 1806.

In step 1806, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol execution phase data to "10" so that the normal symbol fluctuation start process is executed in the common symbol related control process. Then, the movable piece control process ends.

(Playability of Pachinko machine P according to this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability playing time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state), (a gaming state that combines a gaming state), a second low probability time saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state), or a high probability time saving gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state) The game progresses by setting one of the game states (a combination of game states).

When a player starts playing a game, the normal gaming state is often set. During this normal game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will , there is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12(a)). . Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined. In this case, the predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game ends is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 14(a) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the player plays left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the normal gaming state or the high probability time-saving gaming state (Fig. 41). However, since the jackpot symbol It is extremely difficult to transition to the gaming state.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state, a judgment is made as to whether or not the time-saving award is given in a lottery, and the winning of the time-saving award is determined with a probability of approximately 1/100. (See FIG. 6(a), FIG. 7(a), FIG. 8(a), FIG. 9(a), FIG. 10(a), and FIG. 11(a)). Then, when the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7 are determined, the game state is set to the first low-probability time-saving game state without going through the jackpot or special game. At the same time, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the first low probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues. However, if the result of the lottery is drawn 30 times without winning the jackpot, and the time-saving symbol J4 is determined, the first low probability time-saving gaming state is the result of the lottery without winning the jackpot. If the time-saving symbol J5 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the lottery is derived 100 times without winning a jackpot. However, when the time-saving symbol J6 is determined, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1000 times without winning a jackpot, and when the time-saving symbol J7 is determined. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived once without winning a jackpot.

In addition, during this first low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (left-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Similar to the normal gaming state, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. Then, if a jackpot is won during this first low probability time-saving gaming state, jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined in the same way as during the normal gaming state, and the determination probability of each jackpot symbol (determination of jackpot symbol Since the probability is 1% and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined (see FIG. 12(a)). If jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined during the first low probability time-saving game state, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, so the game state after the end of the special game is the second A low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 (see FIG. 14(b) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the first low-probability time-saving game state (if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 10 times). If the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the time-saving symbol J4 is determined until the result of the winning lottery is derived 20 times, and if the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the time-saving symbol J4 is determined until the result of the winning lottery is derived 30 times. In this case, until the result of the winning lottery is drawn 50 times, if the time saving symbol J5 is determined, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times, if the time saving symbol J6 is determined. If you win the jackpot until the result of the winning lottery is drawn 1000 times, or until the result of the winning lottery is drawn once if the time saving symbol J7 is decided), it will be almost the second lowest. This will lead to a transition to the probability time saving game state (see FIG. 41).

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched (right-handed) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game will not be played. There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but it will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 12(b)). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, as described above, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game due to the predetermined number of game balls not entering the specific area 57 is again set to the second low probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state is set again. The number of times is set to 100 (see FIG. 14(c) and FIG. 41). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, if the player plays right as instructed during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset by winning the jackpot. Or, it will shift to a high probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 41). Here, when transitioning from the first low probability time saving game state to the second low probability time saving game state, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times, and during the second low probability time saving game state, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state. Since the second starting prize opening 16 is kept in the open state much more easily than during the time-saving game state, the next jackpot can almost certainly be won while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses. Since the jackpot symbol X1 is determined 70% of the time when a jackpot is won (see Figure 12(b)), during the second low probability time-saving game state, when a jackpot is won, It is easy to shift to a high probability time saving gaming state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you are instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed hit), and follow this instruction to launch the game ball. As long as the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery will be held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X4 will be determined (see FIG. 12(b)). ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 and the gaming state after the end of the special game is again set to the high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is 10000. set to times. In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, the game state after the end of the special game without a predetermined number of game balls entering the specific area 57 is set to the second low probability time-saving game state, and the number of time-savings is 100. (see FIG. 12(c) and FIG. 41).
During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the player can almost certainly win the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state with 100 time saving times is set (FIG. 12(c)) , see FIG. 41), if the player wins a jackpot before the winning lottery is performed 100 times, he can expect to transition to the high probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the first prize is determined by the time-saving award winning (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6, or J7) based on the lottery. Aiming to transition to the probability time-saving gaming state, during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (until the results of the winning lottery are derived 10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times, or 1 time) ) by winning the jackpot, the player aims to move to the second low-probability time-saving game state, and then aims to acquire many game balls by continuing the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state. Provides novel gameplay. That is, the first low-probability time-saving game state, which can be transitioned from the normal game state without going through jackpot winning and special games, shifts to the second low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state that is advantageous for the player. This provides a gaming experience that creates a chance zone for players to play, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, a determination is made as to whether or not the time-saving award is given in the lottery during the normal gaming state, and the time-saving award is won by the winning/falsifying lottery, and the time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3 , J4, J5, J6, or J7, it is possible to shift to the time-saving gaming state without winning the jackpot and executing the special game, so there is no need to play the game regarding the transition to the time-saving gaming state. Not only can this give a novel impression to the player, but also there can be a wide variety of transitions to the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide an unprecedented gaming experience.
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, in the lottery, if the jackpot is determined based on the random numbers and it is determined that the jackpot has not been won, during the normal gaming state, the same jackpot Since the determination of whether or not to grant time savings is made based on random numbers, it is possible to limit the types of random numbers used to make various determinations, reducing the load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 and main RAM 103. can do.
Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is the same regardless of the setting value, so the setting value is determined by setting the time-saving gaming state that does not involve winning the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a situation where the gambling nature becomes too high when the advantage of each game changes and a predetermined set value is set.

(Summary of performance in pachinko machine P)
As mentioned above, by executing various processes in the main control board 100, the special figure game, the regular figure game, the special game, and the small winning game will proceed. While these games are in progress, the main control board 100 sends various commands to the sub-control board 300, and when the sub-control board 300 receives these commands, the sub-control board 300 controls the progress of the game. Execute control of the production associated with the event.
In the following, a variable performance that is executed while a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and can notify the result of a win/fail lottery, and a variable performance when the result of a win/fail lottery is a winning of a time-saving grant, which can be executed and A special notification effect that can notify the winning of and the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state based on the winning will be explained.

(Summary of variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as described above, during the variable display of the special symbols, a variable performance that can notify the result of the winning lottery is executed by the display mode of the performance pattern 50. In this fluctuating performance, a fluctuating display of performance symbols 50 (dummy symbols) is performed superimposed on the background image displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21. The result of the lottery can be notified to the player by the combination of performance symbols 50 that are displayed in a variable manner and then displayed in a static manner (static display mode).

Specifically, after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of all the effect symbols 50 is started from the state in which all the effect symbols 50 are stopped and displayed (FIGS. 42(a) and (b), (See FIGS. 43(a) and (b)). Note that the downward arrow in the figure indicates that the performance symbol 50 is displayed to scroll from the top to the bottom.
After that, the effect pattern 50 located on the left side (hereinafter referred to as the first stop pattern), the effect pattern 50 located on the right side (hereinafter referred to as the second stop pattern), and the effect pattern 50 located in the center (hereinafter referred to as the third stop pattern) ) (see FIGS. 42(c) to (e) and FIGS. 43(c) to (e)).

If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, all the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (see FIG. 43(e)). That is, by stopping and displaying all the performance symbols 50 as the same symbol, it is announced that the result of the lottery is a jackpot.

Furthermore, if the result of the lottery is a loss, all the performance symbols 50 will not be stopped and displayed as the same symbol (see FIG. 42(e)). That is, by stopping and displaying at least one effect pattern 50 as a pattern different from the other effect patterns 50, it is shown that the result of the winning lottery is a loss. The above-mentioned stop display mode does not actively notify the player that the result of the lottery is a loss, but simply makes the player aware that the result is a loss (not a jackpot or small win). It is.
Although not particularly shown, if the result of the lottery is a small win, a specific form indicating that (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same symbol, The effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in combinations such as a combination in which the third stopped pattern is a special pattern indicating winning of a small hit. That is, by stopping and displaying the performance symbols 50 in a specific manner, it is announced that the result of the winning lottery is a small winning.
In addition, the manner in which the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed in the case of winning a small hit is not limited to the above content, but is similar to the manner in which the result of the lottery is a loss (that is, at least one of the performance symbols 50 may be stopped and displayed in a pattern different from other effect patterns 50). Thereby, the player may not be able to grasp whether the result of the win/fail lottery is a loss or a small win based on the stop display mode of the performance symbols 50.

In addition, if the result of the winning/failure lottery is a winning of the time-saving award, a special mode indicating that (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd number symbol other than "7", The effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a combination where the 3-stop pattern is "7", etc.), and a setting image indicating that the first low probability time-saving game state is set (for example, "CHANCE ZONE ENTER!!") (character images, etc.) are displayed (see FIGS. 44(g) to (h)), and the number of times saved is notified (see FIG. 44(i)). That is, by stopping and displaying the production pattern 50 in a special manner and displaying the above-mentioned setting image, it is announced that the result of the lottery is a win for time saving, and the number of time savings is announced. , the type of time-saving symbol determined is notified.

Further, the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed almost simultaneously with the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31 prior to the stop display of the performance symbol 50, and the result of the lottery is grasped based on the type of the special symbol. This is prevented.

(Aspects of the first half of the variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, the first half of the variable performance (from when the variable performance starts until the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed) includes the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. There is a no-reach pattern in which symbols are stopped and displayed with different symbols, and a reach variation pattern in which the first and second stop symbols are stopped and displayed as the same symbol (a so-called reach display is performed). There is.

There are multiple types of reach-free patterns and reach variation patterns, and various ways of variation are set.
Specifically, as a no-reach pattern, there is a no-reach pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different symbols without any particular change in the way of variation or the display content of the production symbol 50. , all the performance symbols 50 temporarily stop in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are symbols with numbers different by 1 and temporarily stop, and the third stop symbol suggests a temporary stop). After a pseudo-continuous performance is executed in which the display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once) in which the variable display is restarted (temporarily stopping at the stop symbol), the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are different symbols. There is a no-reach pattern B that is displayed in a stopped state.
In addition, as a reach variation pattern, there is a reach variation pattern A in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as the same symbol without any particular change in the way of variation or the display content of the performance symbol 50, as described above. A reach variation pattern B is provided in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different symbols after the pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

Note that various times and various times may be set for the number of temporary stops and the timing for temporary stopping in the pseudo-continuous performance. In addition, it is set so that the above-mentioned temporary stop is performed a specific number of times (for example, 4 times) to execute a pseudo continuous effect only when winning a jackpot or winning a time saving award, and the pseudo continuous effect is When executed, it may be possible to understand that the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed. In addition, we have set up a pseudo continuous effect in which after the reach display is performed, the third stop symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the fluctuating display is resumed. The execution rate of consecutive performances may be set to be high.
Further, the no-reach pattern and the variable reach pattern are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, as a reach fluctuation pattern, a reach display in which the first stop symbol and a second stop symbol are the same and are stopped and displayed is not performed, and instead of performing the reach display, a predetermined image is displayed to indicate that a reach has occurred. A mode of notifying by displaying the information may also be provided.

(Aspects of the second half of the fluctuating performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the first half of the variable performance is a no-reach pattern, the second half of the variable performance (the second stop symbol is stopped and displayed, then the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed) As an aspect of (up to)), a normal loss pattern is provided in which the third stop symbol is stopped and displayed as it is to notify that the result of the lottery is a loss (see FIG. 42).
As the second half of the variable performance when the first half of the variable performance is a reach variation pattern, after the reach is displayed, a predetermined developed performance image is displayed on the performance display device 21 along with the variable display of the third stop symbol. The reach development effect is executed, and the development pattern (see Figure 44) informs that the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, a small win, a time saving win, or a loss, and the above-mentioned reach after the reach is displayed. A no-development pattern (see FIG. 43) is provided in which the result of the winning lottery is announced as a jackpot win, a small win, a time-saving grant win, or a loss without executing the development effect.

A plurality of types of patterns with development are provided, and various types of development effect images are set. In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, a developed pattern A and a developed pattern B are provided as patterns with development.
In development pattern A, a moving image (hereinafter referred to as development effect image A) is displayed in which the effect patterns 50 are sequentially destroyed and the finally displayed effect pattern 50 is determined as the third stop pattern. Yes (see FIGS. 44(e) to (g)), and as described later, it can be executed in any case of winning a jackpot, winning a small winning, winning a time saving grant, or losing. .
When development pattern A is executed and the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a display is displayed to the effect that the effect pattern 50 that constitutes a stop display mode that ultimately results in a jackpot is reached. When the result of the win/fail lottery is a small win, a display indicating that the performance pattern 50 that constitutes the stop display mode that ultimately results in a small win is reached is displayed, and the result of the win/fail lottery is shortened. When it is a winning of the grant, a display indicating that the production pattern 50 that constitutes the stop display mode that ultimately becomes the winning of the time saving grant is displayed (see FIGS. 44(e) to (g)), and a lottery is held. When the result is a loss, it is set so that a display indicating that the performance symbol 50 constituting the stop display mode that ultimately results in a loss is reached is performed. Thereby, it is announced whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot win, a small win, a time saving win, or a loss.

Although not particularly illustrated, the development pattern B is one in which a moving image is displayed in which a predetermined character challenges a mission and the result of the challenge is shown.
This development pattern B has four types of patterns: development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4. For each pattern, the content of the mission to be challenged is displayed as a moving image. A developed effect image B1, a developed effect image B2, a developed effect image B3, or a developed effect image B4, which are different from each other, are associated with each other. Specifically, in the developed pattern B1, the developed effect image B1 is displayed, in the developed pattern B2, the developed effect image B2 is displayed, in the developed pattern B3, the developed effect image B3 is displayed, and in the developed pattern B4, the developed effect image B4 is displayed. is set to be displayed.

Further, as will be described later, this development pattern B can only be executed in the case of winning a jackpot or winning a time saving award.
When the development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, or development pattern B4 is executed, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, it will be announced that the above-mentioned mission was finally successful. After this is displayed, a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot is displayed (see Figures 46(b) to (d)), and if the result of the lottery is a winning of the time saving award, the above-mentioned final result will be displayed. After the mission failure is displayed, the setting image indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is set and the number of time saving times are displayed (see FIGS. 45(e) to (h)). has been done. Thereby, it is announced whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving prize win.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when the variable performance according to the development pattern B is executed, it is determined that the result of the winning lottery is either a jackpot winning or a time saving award winning. , it is possible to increase the player's interest in executing the variable performance based on the development pattern B.

Note that the pattern with development is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, as a pattern with development, after a predetermined development effect image is displayed, another development effect image whose expectation level of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is set higher than that of the development effect image concerned is displayed. A mode may be provided in which the display changes, or a mode in which the winning of a jackpot or the winning of a time-saving award is notified after being notified of a loss.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, as a mode of variable production, apart from the above-mentioned various modes, from a state in which all the production symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner, these production symbols 50 are changed after a lapse of a variation time. A special fluctuation pattern is provided in which all the characters are stopped and displayed all at once.

Furthermore, in each of the above effects, in addition to displaying images, predetermined sounds may be output, and the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

(Determination of the mode of variable production)
Next, the determination of the execution mode of the above-mentioned variable effect will be explained.
The main ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 stores a variable effect determination table 119 that defines the mode of variable effects for each variable pattern command that can be determined by the main control board 100. When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 100 at the start of variation, it refers to the variation effect determination table 119 and determines the mode of the variation effect based on the received variation pattern command. do.

In the variable effect determination table 119, modes of variable effects are defined in association with variable pattern commands and variable effect random numbers obtained within a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249 in this embodiment). When the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 100, it obtains a variation effect random number of 1 from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249). Then, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable effect based on the variable effect determination table 119, the received variation pattern command, and the obtained variable effect random number. As a result, a variable performance based on the determined mode is executed on the performance display device 21.

As shown in FIG. 47, according to the variation effect determination table 119, if the received variation pattern command is "00H", "04H", "05H", or "08H" (that is, the result of the lottery is a loss). ), the first half is a no-reach pattern A and the second half is a normal losing pattern (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 1), or the first half is a no-reach pattern B and the second half is a normal losing pattern. (hereinafter referred to as aspect 2) is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "01H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a loss), the first half is a reach variation pattern A and the second half is a no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as , Aspect 3) or an aspect in which the first half is the reach variation pattern B and the second half is the no-development pattern (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 9) is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "02H", "03H", "06H", or "07H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a loss), the first half is the reach variation pattern. Either an aspect in which A and the latter half are development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 4), or an aspect in which the first half is reach variation pattern B and the latter part is development pattern A (hereinafter referred to as aspect 10) is determined. .

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "22H", "23H", "26H" or "27H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a small win), mode 4 or Either aspect 10 is determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "A2H", "A3H", "A6H" or "A7H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot), mode 4, the first half The first half is reach variation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 5), the first half is reach variation pattern A and the second half is development pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 6), and the first half is Reach variation pattern A and the latter half are developed pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 7), first half is reach fluctuation pattern A and the latter half is developed pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as aspect 8), aspect 10, first half is the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the form of the developed pattern B1 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 11), the first half is the reach variation pattern B and the latter half is the form of the developed pattern B2 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 12), and the first half is the reach Either the variation pattern B and the latter half are developed pattern B3 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 13), or the first half is reach variation pattern B and the latter half is developed pattern B4 (hereinafter referred to as Aspect 14). be done.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B3H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving and the time saving symbol J1 (10 times of time saving) is determined, mode 4 , aspect 5, aspect 10, or aspect 11 is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B4H" (that is, if the result of the winning lottery is a time saving award and the time saving symbol J2 (20 time saving times) is determined) or "B5H" (In other words, when the result of the winning lottery is the winning of the time saving grant and the time saving symbol J3 (30 times of time saving) is determined), aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 10, aspect 11 Alternatively, either aspect 12 is determined.

In addition, if the received variation pattern command is "B6H" (that is, if the result of the lottery is a time saving award and the time saving symbol J4 (50 time saving times) is determined) or "B7H" (In other words, when the result of the lottery is the winning of the time saving award and the time saving symbol J5 (100 times of time saving) is determined), aspect 4, aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 7, aspect 10 , aspect 11, aspect 12, or aspect 13 is determined.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B8H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving and the time saving symbol J6 (1000 times of time saving) is determined, mode 4 , aspect 5, aspect 6, aspect 7, aspect 8, aspect 10, aspect 11, aspect 12, aspect 13, or aspect 14 is determined.

In addition, when the received variation pattern command is "B9H" (that is, when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J7 (one time-saving number) is determined, mode 4 Alternatively, either aspect 10 is determined.

In addition, if the received fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "BDH", "BEH", or "BFH" (in other words, the result of the lottery is the winning of the time-saving grant) case), a special fluctuation pattern (hereinafter referred to as aspect 15) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 47, the numbers shown in each area in which a variation pattern command and a variation effect mode are associated are the range of the variation effect random number assigned to the area, that is, the selection ratio (determined) of the area. percentage).
In the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, regarding the aspect of the variable performance, if the result of the lottery is a loss, in the case of a jackpot win, in the case of a small win win, or in the case of a time-saving award win, a predetermined time-saving symbol is determined. The selection ratio for each case is set separately.

For example, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win, the determination rate for reach variation pattern A is lower than in the case of a loss or a small win, but the reach variation pattern The decision rate for B is high. Therefore, when the reach variation pattern B is executed, the level of expectation for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is higher than when the reach variation pattern A is executed.

In addition, regarding development pattern A, the result of the lottery can be determined regardless of whether it is a loss, a small win, a jackpot, or a time saving award, but development pattern B ( Regarding B1, B2, B3, and B4), the result of the lottery can be determined only in the case of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. Therefore, when the development pattern B is executed, the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving grant is confirmed, and it is possible to grasp that either of these wins has been won.

In addition, regarding development pattern B1, the result of the lottery is the winning of time saving, and the time saving symbols J1 (number of time reductions: 10 times), J2 (number of time reductions: 20 times), J3 (number of time reductions: 30 times), J4 (number of time reductions: 50 times). ), J5 (number of time reductions: 100 times), or J6 (number of time reductions: 1000 times) is determined. Regarding the development pattern B2, the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and can be determined when the time-saving symbols J2, J3, J4, J5, or J6 are determined. Regarding the development pattern B3, the result of the lottery is the winning of the time-saving award, which can be determined when the time-saving symbols J4, J5, or J6 are determined. The development pattern B4 can be determined when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J6 is determined.
That is, in the case where the result of the lottery is a time-saving award, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, only the developed pattern B1 of the developed patterns B can be determined, and the time-saving symbol J2 or J3 When the development pattern B1 and development pattern B2 are determined, the development pattern B1 and development pattern B2 of the development pattern B can be determined, and when the time-saving pattern J4 or J5 is determined, the development pattern B1 and the development pattern of the development pattern B can be determined. B2 and development pattern B3 can be determined, and when time-saving symbol J6 is determined, all of development pattern B1, development pattern B2, development pattern B3, and development pattern B4 of development pattern B can be determined. It looks like this.

In other words, when the time-saving pattern J1 with a set time-saving number of 10 times is determined and the developed pattern B is executed, the execution rate of the developed pattern B1 is 100%, and the execution rate of the developed patterns B2, B3, and B4 is 100%. The percentages are all 0%, and the development pattern B is executed when the time saving symbol J2 in which the number of time savings is determined is 20 times or the time saving symbol J3 in which the number of time savings is determined is 30 times is determined. Sometimes, the execution rate of the developed patterns B1 and B2 is both 50%, and the execution rate of the developed patterns B3 and B4 is both 0%, and the time saving pattern J4 with a set number of time saving times of 50 is determined or the time saving pattern is When developed pattern B is executed when the time-saving pattern J5 with a predetermined number of times of 100 times is determined, the execution ratio of developed patterns B1, B2, and B3 is all about 33%, and the execution ratio of developed pattern B4 is 0. %, and when the development pattern B is executed when the time-saving pattern J6 with a set time-saving number of 1000 times is determined, the execution ratio of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 is all 25%. That is, the execution ratios of the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 vary depending on the set number of time reductions.

When development pattern B1 is executed, a jackpot is won, or a time saving grant is made in which the number of time saving times is set to 10 times or more (10 times, 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, 100 times or 1000 times). The election is confirmed. In addition, if development pattern B2 is executed, a jackpot win or a time-saving award where the number of time-savings is set to 20 or more (20, 30, 50, 100, or 1000 times) is won. Determine. Furthermore, when the development pattern B3 is executed, the winning of a jackpot or the winning of a time saving grant where the number of time saving times is set to 50 times or more (50 times, 100 times, or 1000 times) is confirmed. Further, when the development pattern B4 is executed, the winning of the jackpot or the winning of the time saving award where the number of time saving times is set to 1000 is confirmed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the developed patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 differs depending on the number of time reductions when the time reduction grant is won, and the executed development patterns Since it is possible to give the player a different sense of expectation regarding the number of time reductions that can be set for each type of B, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable effects based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, and when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award, the development patterns B1, B2, B3 , B4 can be executed, but if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, the variable effects based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are not executed. In other words, the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are better when the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a time-saving award than when the result is a small win or a loss. The execution rate of variable effects is high. Therefore, by executing the fluctuating performance based on the development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4, it is possible to improve expectations for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. It is possible to increase the player's interest in the variable performance.

Note that the fluctuating effects based on development patterns B1, B2, B3, and B4 are not executed when the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, but rather when the result of the lottery is a big win or a loss. It may be configured to be executed at a lower rate than in the case of winning the time saving award.

In addition, during the fluctuating performance, in addition to the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50, various preview images are displayed that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. ing.

In the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned preview performance is individually set to have a high or low probability of being executed when winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award. This makes it possible to change the player's expectations for winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award in accordance with the preview performance that is executed. Specifically, certain preview performances are set to have a high probability of being executed when winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant, so players may This will increase expectations.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, it is set that the possibility that a specific preview effect will be executed is higher when the player wins a time-saving award than when the player wins a jackpot.

For example, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, it is possible to execute a line preview in which a predetermined character's line is displayed as a preview performance that is executed before the reach display during a variable performance. There is. There are three patterns of dialogue announcements: dialogue announcement A, dialogue announcement B, and dialogue announcement C.
Further, as a preview performance executed after the reach display during the variable performance, a cut-in preview in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed can be executed. Cut-in notices include a blue cut-in notice that displays a blue cut-in image, a red cut-in notice that displays a red cut-in image, and a purple cut-in notice that displays a purple cut-in image. Three patterns are provided.

Then, if the winner of the time saving grant is selected by the lottery, it is possible to execute dialogue announcement A and dialogue announcement B as dialogue announcements, and in the above case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is 15%. The rate at which dialogue announcement B is executed is 10%. In addition, as cut-in notices, blue cut-in notices, red cut-in notices, and purple cut-in notices can be executed, and in the above cases, the rate of execution of blue cut-in notices is 10%, and the rate of execution of red cut-in notices is 10%. The execution rate is 40%, and the execution rate of purple cut-in notices is 55%.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the lottery, dialogue announcements A, B, and C can be executed as dialogue announcements, and in this case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is is 15%, the rate at which line preview B is executed is 20%, and the rate at which line preview C is executed is 25%. In addition, blue cut-in notices and red cut-in notices can be executed as cut-in notices, and in the above case, the rate at which blue cut-in notices are executed is 10%, and the rate at which red cut-in notices are executed is It is 25%.

In addition, in the event of a loss or a small win in the lottery, it is possible to execute dialogue announcement A and dialogue announcement B as dialogue announcements, and in this case, the rate at which dialogue announcement A is executed is 3%, and the rate at which dialogue preview B is executed is 5%. In addition, blue cut-in notices and red cut-in notices can be executed as cut-in notices, and in the above case, the rate at which blue cut-in notices are executed is 5%, and the rate at which red cut-in notices are executed is It is 10%.

In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a time saving award is won, the rate at which the line preview A is executed is the same, and the rate at which the line preview B is executed is the same, compared to when the jackpot is won. Since the proportion of dialogue announcements that occur and the ratio of dialogue announcements C that are executed are both small, when dialogue announcements B and dialogue announcements C are executed, it is possible to create a feeling of anticipation in the player for winning the jackpot. ing. Note that the line preview C can only be executed if the jackpot is won, so if the line preview C is executed, the jackpot win is confirmed and the player's interest can be increased. ing.

On the other hand, when winning a time-saving award, compared to winning a jackpot, the percentage of blue cut-in notices executed is the same, the percentage of red cut-in notices executed, and the percentage of purple cut-in notices executed are the same. Since the percentage of cut-in notices executed is high, when a red cut-in notice or a purple cut-in notice is executed, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation among players for winning the time-saving award. ing. Note that the purple cut-in notice can only be executed if the time-saving grant is won, so if the purple cut-in notice is executed, the time-saving grant is confirmed and increases the player's interest. It is now possible to do so.
As a result, it is possible to raise players' expectations for winning a time-saving grant that has a high possibility of transitioning to a high-probability time-saving gaming state, rather than winning a jackpot where it is extremely difficult to transition to a high-probability time-saving gaming state. It has become.

Note that the performances that can be executed by the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment are not limited to the above-mentioned variable performances, but, for example, the performances that can be executed from before the execution of the variable performances related to the hold stored in the hold storage area. A look-ahead effect may be provided that gives suggestions regarding suspension.
Specifically, as a look-ahead effect, when a new reservation is memorized, multiple modes including a normal mode and a special mode in which the expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving grant are higher than the normal mode, etc. A pending look-ahead effect that displays a pending display in one of the following modes, a pending display that is displayed in a predetermined mode at any timing from the time when the pending is stored until the fluctuating effect based on the pending ends. When a new hold is memorized, a change effect that changes the hold change to a state in which there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award is performed, and during a fluctuating effect based on the hold, or from the hold. A high expectation level suggestion that suggests that there is a high expectation of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving award, spanning multiple variable performances from the previously stored variable performance based on the hold to the variable performance based on the hold. A look-ahead zone effect or the like that displays an image (for example, a background image, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the case of winning the time-saving award, it is more likely that the above-mentioned pending look-ahead effect where the hold display is displayed in the special mode, the hold change look-ahead effect, the look-ahead zone effect, etc. will be performed if you win the time saving award than if you win the jackpot. It may also be set to increase the performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49, as a pending change look-ahead effect, there is a blue pending change in which a white pending display changes to a blue pending display, a red pending change in which a white pending display changes to a red pending display, and a white pending display. There are three patterns of purple pending change, in which the pending display changes to a purple pending display, and as a look-ahead zone effect, a zone A where a first high expectation level suggestion image is displayed, and a second high expectation level suggestion image. It is assumed that three patterns are provided: zone B where is displayed, and zone C where a third high expectation suggestion image is displayed.

If any of the stored reservations is determined to be a winner of the time saving grant by lottery, the reservation change pre-reading effect for the above-mentioned reservations will be a blue reservation change, a red reservation change, and a purple reservation change. In the above case, the rate at which blue pending changes are executed may be 10%, the rate at which red pending changes are executed may be 40%, and the rate at which purple pending changes are executed may be 55%. . In addition, Zone A and Zone B can be executed as a look-ahead zone effect targeting the above-mentioned hold, and in the above case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 15%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 10%. It may also be expressed as a percentage.

In addition, if any of the stored reservations is determined to have won a jackpot by lottery, it is possible to execute the blue reservation change and red reservation change as a reservation change look-ahead performance targeting the reservations mentioned above. In the above case, the rate at which the blue hold change is executed may be 10%, and the rate at which the red hold change is executed may be 25%. In addition, Zone A, Zone B, and Zone C can be executed as pre-read zone effects for the above-mentioned hold, and in this case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 15%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 15%. The rate at which zone C is executed may be 20%, and the rate at which zone C is executed may be 25%.

In addition, if any of the stored reservations is determined to be a loss or a small win by lottery, a blue reservation change and a red reservation change will be displayed as a reservation change look-ahead effect for the reservation mentioned above. In the case described above, the rate at which the blue pending change is executed may be 5%, and the rate at which the red pending change is executed may be 10%. In addition, Zone A and Zone B can be executed as a look-ahead zone effect for the above-mentioned hold, and in this case, the rate at which Zone A is executed is 3%, and the rate at which Zone B is executed is 3%. It may be set to 5%.

In other words, when the settings are made as described above, when it is determined that the time-saving award is won, the rate at which the blue pending change is executed is the same as when it is determined that the jackpot is won, and the rate at which the red pending change is executed is the same. Since both the percentage of execution and the percentage of execution of the purple pending change are high, when the red pending change and the purple pending change are executed, it is possible to make the player have expectations for winning the time saving award. In addition, the purple pending change can only be executed when it is determined that the time saving award has been won, so if the purple pending change is executed, the decision to award the time saving is confirmed and the player's interest is increased. is now possible.
Even when set in this way, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for winning the time-saving award rather than winning the jackpot.

In addition, when the settings are made as described above, when it is determined that the time-saving award has been won, the rate at which Zone A is executed is the same, and when Zone B is executed, compared to when it is determined that the jackpot has been won. Since both the percentage and the percentage at which Zone C is executed are small, when Zone B or Zone C is executed, it is possible to make the player feel hopeful of winning the jackpot. Note that Zone C can only be executed when it is determined that a jackpot has been won, so if Zone C is executed, the jackpot is confirmed and the player's interest can be increased. It has become.

(Summary of special announcement performance)
The special notification performance is when the result of the lottery is a time-saving award and a fluctuation performance based on a special fluctuation pattern is performed (i.e., the determined fluctuation pattern command is "BAH", "BBH", "BCH", "``BDH'',``BEH'' or ``BFH'') is a performance that can be executed in conjunction with the relevant variable performance, and the winning of time saving grant and the number of time saving times of the first low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning. It is something that can be reported.

This special notification performance starts after the fluctuation performance is started, after the fluctuation time predetermined for each fluctuation pattern command has passed, and after the fluctuation performance ends, the stop display time predetermined for each special symbol (time-saving symbol are configured to continue to be executed until 3 seconds have passed.
Specifically, in the special notification performance, after a predetermined period of time (2 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, all images (performance patterns 50 . 50(a)-(c)). Then, when a predetermined blackout performance execution time (4 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed, a variable display of a performance pattern 50 smaller in size than the performance pattern 50 before the start of the blackout performance starts in the upper right corner of the display section 21a. As a result, the variable effect is restarted, and a window is displayed in the center of the display section 21a, and the count-up display of numbers is started within this window (see FIG. 50(d)). The count-up display is executed until the variation time specified in the variation pattern command has elapsed (see FIGS. 50(e) to 50(h)). Then, when the variable time has elapsed, the numbers in the window mentioned above will reach the number of time savers corresponding to the time saver symbol determined based on the time saver winning, and will count up as the variable effect ends. The display ends (see FIG. 50(h)). After that, until the stop display time elapses, a setting image indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is set and the number of time saving times are displayed (see FIGS. 50(i) to (j)), The special notification effect ends as the stop display time elapses.

In the count-up display described above, until the number in the window reaches a predetermined value (20 in this embodiment), the number in the window increases by a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 20) every predetermined count time (1 second in this embodiment). In this case, the display increases by 1) (see FIGS. 50(d) to (e)).
Also, when the number in the window reaches ``10'' or ``20'' (i.e., the value of the number of time reductions that can be set), the display moves back and forth between the currently displayed number and the next number. An inciting effect that arouses the anticipation of counting up to the next number is executed (see FIGS. 50(f) to (g), FIGS. 51(a) to (d), and FIG. 52(a)). Here, if a time saving symbol corresponding to a greater number of time saving times than the number being displayed has been determined, the count up will be counted up to the next number through the above-mentioned inciting effect, and then the count up display will continue. (See FIGS. 51(a)-(b)). On the other hand, if a time-saving symbol corresponding to the same number of time-savings as the number being displayed has been determined, the count-up display ends with the number being displayed without counting up to the next number at the end of the inciting effect. (In other words, at this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (Fig. 50 (h) to (j), Fig. 51 (e) to (see (g)).

Also, if a time saving symbol corresponding to a time saving number exceeding 20 times (30 times, 50 times, 100 times, 1000 times) has been determined, the number in the window will exceed "20" and the count-up display will be displayed. However, after the number in the window exceeds "20" after the above-mentioned inciting effect, the number in the window will be covered by a predetermined shielding image (for example, an image saying "???"). A shielding effect in which the image is hidden is executed (see FIG. 52(b)). Then, when the time corresponding to the determined number of time reductions has elapsed, the shielding image is erased, and a number indicating the determined number of time reductions is suddenly displayed in the window, and the count-up display ends (i.e., At this point, the variable time has elapsed and the variable effect ends), and then the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time reductions are displayed (see FIGS. 52(c) to 52(e)). By obscuring the numbers in the window with the occlusion image in this way, the player is given a sense of anticipation for the numbers that will eventually be displayed in the window (i.e., the number of time-savings corresponding to the determined time-saving symbol). can be improved.

The progress of the special notification effect will be explained in more detail below.
(1) When the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number of 10 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BAH" (variation time 18 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(a), the special variation A blackout effect is started two seconds after the start of the variable effect based on the pattern, and the blackout effect is ended and a count-up display is started six seconds after the start of the variable effect. Then, 16 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "10" and the excitement effect is executed, and 18 seconds after the start of the change effect, the excitement effect ends and the number in the window reaches "10". It will stop as it is. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 10 times, the execution time of the special notification effect is 21 seconds from the start of the variable effect until the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time.

(2) When the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number 20 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BBH" (variation time 30 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the special variation Until 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable effect based on the pattern, the special notification effect will proceed in the same way as in (1), but after 18 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variable effect and the excitement effect has ended, the numbers in the window will exceeds "10" and the count-up display continues. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect, the number in the window reaches "20" and the excitement effect is executed, and 30 seconds after the start of the change effect, the excitement effect ends and the number in the window reaches "20". It will stop as it is. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time saving times are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 20, the execution time of the special notification effect is 33 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10. It is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when it is set.

(3) When the time saving symbol J3 (time saving number of 30 times) is determined and the variation pattern command "BCH" (variation time 36 seconds) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the special variation Until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance based on the pattern, the special notification performance will proceed in the same way as in (2), but after 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuating performance and the inciting performance has ended, the shielding performance will be executed. be done. Then, 36 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the shielding effect ends, the shielding image is erased, and the number "30" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 30, the execution time of the special notification effect is 39 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times is set.

(4) When the time saving symbol J4 (50 times of time saving) is determined and the variation pattern command “BDH” (variation time 46 seconds) is determined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the variation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 46 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "50" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of time saving times are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 50, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from when the variable effect starts until the time when the variable effect ends and the stop display time elapses, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 or 30 times are set.

(5) When the time saving symbol J5 (100 times of time saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BEH" (66 seconds of fluctuation time) is determined. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the fluctuation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) and (4) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 66 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "100" is displayed in the window. At the same time, the variable performance ends at this point. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
In other words, when the number of time reductions is set to 100, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from when the variable effect starts until the time when the variable effect ends and the stop display time elapses, and the number of time reductions is 10, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20, 30, or 50 times are set.

(6) When the time saving symbol J6 (1000 times of time saving) is determined and the fluctuation pattern command "BFH" (68 seconds of fluctuation time) is determined In this case, as shown in FIG. 54(c), the fluctuation effect The special notification effect proceeds in the same manner as in (3) to (5) until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start and the shielding effect is executed. Thereafter, 68 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the occlusion effect ends, the occlusion image is erased, and the number "1000" is displayed in the window. Additionally, at this point, the variable performance ends. Thereafter, the above-mentioned setting image and the number of times of time saving are displayed until the stop display time of 3 seconds has elapsed, and the special notification effect ends.
That is, when the number of time reductions is set to 1000 times, the execution time of the special notification effect is 49 seconds from the start of the variable effect to the end of the variable effect and the elapse of the stop display time, and the number of time reductions is 10 times, This is longer than the execution time of the special notification effect when 20 times, 30 times, 50 times, and 100 times are set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the time saving symbol J7 (one time saving number) is determined, the variation performance based on the special variation pattern is not performed, and the special notification performance is also not performed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to the present embodiment, when a time saving award is won, the greater the number of time reductions set corresponding to the determined time saving symbol, the more the special notification The execution time of the performance becomes longer. In other words, after the special notification performance is executed, the game shifts to the first low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, but if the execution period of the special notification performance becomes longer, The period during which the first low-probability time-saving game state that transitions to after the execution of the performance is executed becomes longer.
Therefore, as the execution period of the special notification performance becomes longer, the gaming profit (grant of time-saving gaming state) given to the player increases, so that the player's interest in the special notification performance can be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment, when the time saving award is won and the special notification effect is executed, the game ball is sent to the second starting prize opening 16 without going through the jackpot winning and the special game. Since the first low-probability time-saving game state in which it is easy to enter the ball is set, the opening of the big prize opening 18 is carried out during the period after the special notification effect is executed until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. You won't be hit. Therefore, the operation control of the structure (big prize opening 18) during the above-mentioned period is reduced, and the burden on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

Next, control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing various processing as described above will be explained.
First, the main processing of the sub-control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 55.
In step 2000, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 302, and initialization and setting processing of flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 303 is executed. Then, the process advances to the next step 2001.
In step 2001, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of updating each performance random number (variable performance random number), and thereafter repeatedly executes the process of step 2001 until an interrupt process is performed. Here, each performance random number is updated asynchronously.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 will be explained with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 56.
The sub-control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not particularly shown) that generates clock pulses at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds). Upon generation of the clock pulse by this reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 301 reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 56.

In step 2100, the sub CPU 301 executes updating processing of various timer counters used in the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 2101.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to this embodiment employs a subtraction timer, and the timer counter is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 300 is executed, and when it reaches 0, the subtraction is stopped. It has become.
In step 2101, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 303, and executes various processes according to the received command. Specifically, in the sub control board 300, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 100, a command reception interrupt process is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 100 is stored in a reception buffer. Then, the sub CPU 301 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer by command reception interrupt processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 2102.

In step 2102, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the operation of the effect operation device 9 can be accepted according to the progress status of the variable effect being executed, etc., and receives operation signals from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c and the press operation detection sensor 9d. Determine whether or not has been input. If the production operation device 9 is accepting an operation when an operation signal is input from the rotation operation detection sensor 9c or the press operation detection sensor 9d, an image indicating that the production operation device 9 has been operated is displayed. Commands are sent to the transmission buffer to be sent to various control boards such as a control board (not particularly shown), an audio control board (not shown), and an illumination control board (not shown). Store. Then, the process advances to the next step 2103.
In step 2103, the sub CPU 301 transmits the command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 303 to various control boards such as an image control board, an audio control board, and an illumination control board. Then, the timer interrupt processing of the sub control board 300 ends.

Next, of the command analysis process in step 2101 described above, the variable pattern command reception process executed when a variable pattern command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57. As described above, the variation pattern command is stored in step 903 of the variation pattern determination process in the main control board 100, and then transmitted to the sub control board 300 in the output control process of step 208.
In step 2200, the sub CPU 301 obtains the variable effect random number updated in step 2001 described above. Then, the process advances to the next step 2201.
In step 2201, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variable effect based on the variable effect determination table 119, the variable effect random number obtained in step 2200 described above, and the received variation pattern command. Then, the process advances to the next step 2202.

In step 2202, the sub CPU 301 sets a variable effect execution command in the transmission buffer according to the determined variable effect mode. The variable effect execution command set here is transmitted to the various control boards in step 2103 described above, and these control boards control the execution of the variable effect based on the received variable effect execution command. . Then, the variable pattern command reception process ends.

In addition, the special notification performance in the above-described embodiment is started at the same time as the variable performance related to winning the time-saving award is started, and ends when the variable performance ends and the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed. It was set so that the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (set number of time-saving symbols) would change by varying the variation time set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the time-saving symbol. It is not limited to this.
For example, for any of the time-saving symbols, the variation time specified in the corresponding variation pattern command is the same, but by making the stop display time different for each time-saving symbol, the time-saving symbol (the set number of time-saving symbols) The execution time of each special notification effect may be set to vary. Moreover, by varying both the above-mentioned variable time and stop display time, it may be set so that the execution time of the special notification effect for each time-saving symbol (set number of time-savings) changes.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

In addition, the special notification performance is not executed during the period from the start of the variable performance related to the winning of the time saving award until the stop display time of the special symbol after the end of the variable performance has elapsed, but rather at the start of the above-mentioned variable performance. It may also be executed during the period from to the end. Specifically, starting from a predetermined start point in the above-mentioned fluctuating performance (for example, the start time of the fluctuating performance, a point after a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuating performance started, etc.), and a predetermined end point in the fluctuating performance. (For example, it may be made to end at a point in time after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance, at the end of the fluctuating performance, etc.).
In addition, the special notification effect is to be executed during the period from when the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that resulted in the winning of the time saving award is obtained until the end of the variable effect related to the winning of the time saving award. Good too. Specifically, for example, it is executed during a period of one variable performance (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead variable performance) that is executed before a variable performance related to winning a time-saving grant (hereinafter referred to as the variable performance). Alternatively, it may be executed in a period that spans a plurality of look-ahead variation performances, or it may be executed in a period that spans from a look-ahead variation performance to the relevant variation performance.
When set in this way, the execution timing of the special notification effect can be varied, and the player's interest can be increased.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to derive the winning of the time-saving grant as a result of the determination in the lottery, and when the winning of the time-saving grant is achieved, the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. However, the winning of the time-saving award is not determined as a result of the judgment in the winning/failure drawing, and may be determined based on the judgment result other than the jackpot winning (i.e., small winning winning or losing) in the winning drawing. Even if a special symbol (that is, a small winning symbol or a losing symbol) is substituted as a time-saving symbol, the propriety of setting a time-saving gaming state (appropriateness of granting time-saving) is determined according to the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol. good.

For example, a losing symbol ZA1, a losing symbol ZA2, a losing symbol ZA3, etc. are provided as losing symbols that are determined when a winner is determined by a lottery based on a winning or failing random number, and when the losing symbol ZA1 is determined, the number of time reductions is 10 times. A first time-saving gaming state is set in which the number of time-savings is determined, and when the losing symbol ZA2 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state is set in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times, and when the losing symbol ZA3 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state is set. A first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is determined may be set. Also in this case, a variation effect based on variation pattern B similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed. Good too.

Similarly, small winning symbols YA1, small winning symbol YA2, small winning symbol YA3, etc. are provided as small winning symbols to be determined when a small winning is won by a lottery based on a winning or failing random number. When YA1 is determined, a first time saving gaming state is set in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 10 times, and when the small winning symbol YA2 is determined, a first time saving gaming state is set in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 20 times. When the small winning symbol YA3 is determined, the first time saving game state in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 30 may be set. Also in this case, a variation effect based on variation pattern B similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed, or a special notification effect similar to that of the above-described embodiment may be executed. Good too.
In addition, as mentioned above, in the case where the time-saving gaming state is set based on the small winning symbol, the special notification performance starts after the variable performance based on the winning of the small winning starts. It may be set to be executed during the period until the winning game ends. When set in this way, the variable time of the above-mentioned variable performance, the stop display time of the special symbol, the opening time of the small winning game, the opening time of the big prize opening 18 during the small winning game, and the opening time of the small winning game. By varying one or more of the ending times, the execution time of the special notification effect for each small winning symbol may be set to vary.
In addition, the above-mentioned special notification performance is similar to the above, from the time when the special figure random number (first special figure random number) that won the small hit is acquired until the variable effect related to the winning of the small hit ends. It may also be executed during a period.
When set in this way, there will be a wide variety of time-saving award winnings, and the player's interest can be increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution time of the special notification effect is set to become longer as the number of time reductions set corresponding to the determined time reduction symbol increases. The object to be controlled is not limited to the special notification effect that can be executed when winning the time saving award. For example, if one of the jackpot symbols is determined based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of round games to be played during the special game is determined for each jackpot symbol, It may be set so that the greater the number of round games executed in response to the jackpot symbols, the longer the variable time of the variable performance executed based on the winning of the jackpot. In other words, it may be set so that the longer the variable time of the variable performance executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the greater the number of round games during the special game executed thereafter.
In addition, the greater the number of round games that are executed in response to jackpot symbols, the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable effect that is executed based on the winning of the jackpot. You can also set it as follows. In other words, it may be set so that the longer the execution period of the predetermined look-ahead effect, the greater the number of round games during the special game to be executed thereafter.
When set in this way, it is possible to increase the player's interest in a variable performance based on winning a jackpot or a pre-reading performance that can be executed before the variable performance.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the big prize opening 18 is not opened during the period from when the special notification effect is executed until the first low probability time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set. However, other winning openings (for example, the second starting winning opening 16) are opened during the period from the execution of the variable performance based on the winning of the jackpot until the start of the special game advantageous to the player. You may choose not to have one.

In addition, the fluctuating performance and special notification performance according to the development pattern B in the above-described embodiment are not only executed when a time-saving grant is won through a lottery, but also when a jackpot is won and a time-saving gaming state is set. It may also be executed when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined.

(Modified example)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which the second starting prize opening 16 is relatively difficult to maintain in an open state are combined. Only in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state, the judgment of the propriety of time saving is made. In the lottery during the time-saving game state that is likely to be maintained in the open state (i.e., during the first low-probability time-saving game state, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), it is determined whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not. By not making a determination, it was possible to win the time-saving grant only during the normal gaming state, and not to win the time-saving grant during other gaming states. The control for this is not limited to this.

For example, as the win/fail random number determination table 110 that is referred to during the high probability game state or the time-saving game state, a table (FIG. 6 (b), FIG. 7 ( b), FIG. 8(b), FIG. 9(b), FIG. 10(b), and FIG. 11(b)), and in the winning/losing lottery during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the lottery is based on the above-mentioned table. It may also be possible to determine whether or not the time saving grant is appropriate. In this case, during the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state, the time-saving award is determined based on the win/fail random number determination table 110, which does not determine that the time-saving award has been won. Similar to the embodiment, it is impossible to win the time saving grant during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state.
In addition, for example, the numerical range of the winning/losing random numbers that result in winning the time-saving award is set in the winning/losing random number determination table 110 that is referred to during the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. In the lottery, it is determined whether or not the time-saving grant is granted based on the table, but if the winning time-saving grant is won, the determination result of the winning of the time-saving grant is forcibly rewritten to the non-winning of the time-saving grant. Alternatively, the determination result of winning the time-saving grant may be discarded. Even in this case, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it becomes impossible to win the time saving grant during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments can be achieved, and the determination in the lottery can be carried out in the same way as in the normal gaming state even in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state. Judgments in the lottery can be made common, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.
Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving grant is set to be the same no matter which setting value is set, but the invention is not limited to this. , the probability of winning the time-saving grant may be set to differ depending on the set value. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability of winning a time-saving award when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and the probability of winning a time-saving award when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 are determined. The probability of winning the award was set to be the same in both cases, but it is not limited to this, and there is a case where the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and a case where the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16. The probability of winning the time-saving award may be set to be different depending on the case where the game ball enters the game ball. Further, the number of time saving times may be set to differ depending on the set gaming state and the type of time saving symbol determined when the time saving award is won. In addition, the number of times to save time determined according to the set gaming state and the type of time-saving symbol determined when winning a time-saving award may be 0 times, or it must be set to 1 or more times. Good too.
In addition, when setting a different number of time savers for each time saver symbol to be determined, the number of time savers and the probability of determining the time saver symbol are determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning/failure lottery, and the gambling nature becomes too high. (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state (for pachinko machines that have multiple levels of setting values associated with settings related to ball output, the lowest jackpot winning probability in a low-probability gaming state) If the probability of winning (probability of winning) is 1/P, the number of time-saving symbols≦P×specific coefficient A, and the probability of determining time-saving symbols≦P×specific coefficient B) may be satisfied.
Moreover, multiple types of conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state that are set based on the determination of the time-saving symbols may be set. For example, the number of fluctuations based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entering of a gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16 reach a predetermined number of times (time saving number C1). The time-saving gaming state ends when either of the following conditions is met: or, the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches a predetermined number of times (time-saving number C2). You can also set it as follows. In addition, when set in this way, the larger number of time reductions among the number of time reductions C1 and number of time reductions C2 is determined by the relationship with the probability of winning the jackpot in the winning/failure lottery as described above, and the gambling quality is high. It may be set to a value within a range that is not excessive.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, when a time-saving grant is won as a result of determining whether the time-saving grant is appropriate in a lottery using a winning random number, it is different from a winning lottery using a special symbol random number that is different from the winning random number. The time saving symbol is determined by the process of determining the special symbol, and the number of time saving symbols is determined according to the type (J1, J2, J3) of the determined time reducing symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, it may be set so that both the winning of the time saving award and the determination of the number of time saving times can be determined by a winning/failure lottery using a winning/losing random number. That is, the winning of the time saving grant and the determination of the number of time saving times may be performed using the same random number and the same process instead of using separate random numbers and separate processes.
Specifically, in the win/fail random number determination table 110, a numerical range is set in which it is determined that the time-saving grant is won and a predetermined time-saving symbol is associated, and when the acquired win/fail random number belongs to the numerical range, It can be set so that the winning of time saving award and the number of time saving times defined in the time saving symbol corresponding to the numerical range are determined. For example, if the set value is 1, and the winning/losing random number determination table 110 is referred to in the winning/losing lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 during the low probability gaming state, the winning/losing random number is 3310 to 3637, it is determined that the time saving symbol J1 (time saving number 10 times) is associated with the winning of the time saving award, and when the winning/wrong random number is 3638 to 3964, the time saving symbol J2 (time saving number 20 times) is determined to have been won. ) can be provided as a table A1a in which it is determined that the winning of the time saving grant is associated (see FIG. 58). According to this table A1a, if the winning/losing random number is between 3310 and 3637, it is determined that the time saving award has been won, and the number of time saving times is determined to be 10 by determining the time saving symbol J1. Become. Further, when the winning/failing random number is between 3638 and 3964, it is determined that the time saving award has been won, and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, so that the number of time saving times is determined to be 20.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and the winning of the time saving grant and the number of working hours are determined only by the process of determining the propriety of the time saving grant in the lottery. , the processing load in the lottery will be reduced.

(3) In the above-mentioned embodiment, after determining whether or not the time-saving grant is appropriate in the win/fail lottery during the normal gaming state, if the result of the determination is a winning of the time-saving grant, the number of time-saving grants is associated. Although the time-saving symbols are determined, the order of processing is not limited to this.
For example, after determining the time-saving symbol, a lottery may be performed to determine whether the time-saving award is appropriate or not. Then, when the winning of the time saving award is determined, the time saving game state (first time saving gaming state) is set, and the number of time saving times associated with the previously determined time saving symbol is set. good.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether the jackpot is appropriate, the determination of the small win, and the determination of whether the time saving grant is appropriate are all executed with reference to the same random number determination table 110. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the determination of the propriety of time-saving granting is performed using a table different from the random number determination table 110 used for determining the propriety of jackpots and the propriety of small wins, and a specific table used only for determining the propriety of time-saving granting. It may also be executed by referring to the table.
Even in this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, multiple types of time-saving symbols are provided that are associated with the number of time-saving symbols, and the number of time-saving symbols is determined according to the determined time-saving symbol. It is not limited to. For example, one type of time-saving symbol J is provided that is associated only with the winning of the time-saving grant, but not with the number of time-saving grants, and when the winning of the time-saving grant is determined by lottery, the relevant time-saving symbol J is determined. In addition, the number of time reductions may be determined by a specific lottery that is separate from the winning lottery.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be achieved, and the storage capacity of the special symbols in the main ROM 102 can be reduced, and the space for storing other information can be increased.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, a low-probability gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is relatively difficult to maintain the second starting prize opening 16 in an open state are combined. Only in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state, it is determined whether the time saving award is appropriate or not, and it is possible to win the time saving award (determining the time saving symbols J1, J2, J3), and the probability of winning the jackpot is relative. during a high-probability gaming state, or during a time-saving gaming state in which the second starting prize opening 16 is relatively likely to be kept open (i.e., during a first low-probability time-saving gaming state, during a second low-probability time-saving gaming state, During the high probability time saving game state), in the lottery, there was no determination as to whether the time saving award was given, making it impossible to win the time saving award, but this is not limited to this. Even if there is, it may be determined whether the time saving grant is appropriate or not in the lottery.

Specifically, for example, even in a winning lottery during a first low probability time saving gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state (that is, during a gaming state in which the time saving gaming state is set), time saving is awarded. A determination may be made as to whether or not the above is correct, and settings may be made so that the time-saving symbols can be won (time-saving symbols J1, J2, J3). Then, in the lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, it is determined whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not, resulting in a time-saving grant win, and if the time-saving symbol is determined, the first time-saving game state is reset. At the same time, the number of time-savings associated with the determined time-saving symbol (10 times for time-saving symbol J1, 20 times for time-saving symbol J2, 1 time for time-saving symbol J3). You may also set it again (overwrite the current number of time reductions). For example, when the remaining number of time savings in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (number of time-savings 20 times) is determined, the first time-saving game state is In addition to being reset, "20 times" may be set again as the number of time saving times. In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the lottery is derived 20 times without winning the jackpot again.
In addition, in the above case, instead of resetting the number of time savings associated with the time saving symbol, the number of time savings associated with the time saving symbol may be added to the remaining number of time savings at the time. For example, when the remaining number of time savings in the first low-probability time-saving game state is 5, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J2 (number of time-savings 20 times) is determined, the first time-saving game state is At the same time as being reset, the remaining number of time reductions may be updated to "25 times (= remaining number of time reductions 5 times + number of time reductions defined in time saving symbol J2 20 times)". In this case, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue until the result of the lottery is derived 25 times without winning the jackpot again.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are achieved, and the chances of setting a time-saving gaming state without winning a jackpot or playing a special game increase, so it is more innovative. It is possible to add gameplay and increase the interest of the players.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving symbols that can be determined when a time-saving award is won include the time-saving symbol J1 in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 10 times, and the time-saving symbol in which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times. Although three types of time-saving symbols J2 and J3 in which the number of times of time-saving is determined to be one are provided, the present invention is not limited to these, and other time-saving symbols in which different number of times of time-saving are determined may be provided.
Specifically, in addition to these time-saving symbols, there are a time-saving symbol J4 in which the number of time-savers is set to 30, a time-saving symbol J5 in which the number of time-savers is set to 50, and a time-saving symbol J6 in which the number of time-savers is set to 10,000. etc. may be provided. Furthermore, only one type of time-saving symbol in which a predetermined number of times of time-saving is determined may be provided as the time-saving symbol that can be determined when a time-saving award is won.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of time-saving game states that can be set without involving winning a jackpot or executing a special game. , it becomes possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.
Further, the number of time saving times to be set may be predetermined for each type of time saving symbol as described above, or may be predetermined for each type of time saving symbol and each set gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state), if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, or if the time-saving symbol J3 is determined, the number of time-saving symbols will be 100. However, in the time-saving game state, if the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, the number of time-savings is set to 100, and if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the number of time-savings is set to 50, and the time-saving number is set to 50. When the symbol J3 is determined, the number of time saving times may be set to 0 (that is, the time saving gaming state may be set to end at the same time as the time saving gaming state is set).
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and since it is possible to increase the variation of the number of time reductions that can be set, it is possible to provide a more innovative gaming experience, and it is possible for the player to can increase interest.
In addition, the pachinko machine will be able to win a time-saving award in both the winning lottery when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 and the second starting winning opening 16. If it has been set, the probability of winning the time saving award in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the probability of winning the time saving award based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16. The probability of winning the time saving award in the winning lottery is different from the probability of winning the time saving award (for example, in the winning lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the probability of winning the time saving award is 1/100, and the probability of winning the time saving award is different from the probability of winning the time saving award in the winning lottery). In the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the number 16, it may be set so that the time saving award is won at 1/10.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment are achieved, and since the degree of advantage regarding the setting of the time-saving gaming state changes for each starting winning hole into which the game ball enters, the player's interest is increased. can be increased.
Also, in accordance with the type of the determined time-saving symbol, in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol, the normal symbol is won by lottery and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the movable piece 16b opens ( The regular opening time, which is the time until the second starting prize opening 16 becomes open, may be set to be different. For example, in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, the opening time for the regular symbol is 0.5 seconds, and in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, the regular symbol opening time is 0.5 seconds. In the time-saving game state, which is set based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J3, the opening time of the common symbol may be set to be 1.5 seconds.
In this case, the same effects as in the above-described embodiment are achieved, and the advantage of the set time-saving gaming state changes for each determined time-saving symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest. be able to.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, it is possible to derive a time-saving grant win as a result of the determination in the lottery, and when a time-saving grant is won, a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. However, the winning of the time-saving award was not derived as a result of the judgment in the winning/failure drawing, but was determined based on the judgment result other than the jackpot winning (i.e., small winning winning or losing) in the winning/failure drawing. The special symbol obtained (that is, the small winning symbol or the losing symbol) is substituted as a time-saving symbol, and depending on the determined type of the above-mentioned special symbol, it is determined whether a time-saving gaming state can be set (appropriateness of time-saving granting). Good too.

For example, in the case of a loss in a win/fail lottery based on a win/fail random number, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving gaming state in which the number of time saving times is determined to be 20 is set, and the special symbol random number When the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the first time-saving gaming state may not be set. In addition, losing symbols that can be determined by special symbol random numbers are not limited to these, and include losing symbols in which a first time-saving gaming state with a different number of time-savings than the losing symbol Z1 is set (for example, a number of time-savings with a number of 50 times). A losing pattern Z3 in which a first time saving game state is set, a losing pattern Z4 in which a first time saving gaming state with a time saving number of 10000 times is set, etc.) may be provided.
It should be noted that, instead of determining the losing symbols through the process of determining the winning/losing lottery and special symbols, in the winning/losing lottery based on the winning/losing random numbers as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first time-saving gaming state and A loss corresponding to a loss pattern Z1 for which the number of time-savings is determined to be 20 times and a loss corresponding to a loss pattern Z2 for which it is determined that the first time-saving gaming state is not set are set to be derivable, and the loss symbols are determined by a lottery of success or failure. If there is a loss corresponding to Z1, the first time saving gaming state with 20 time saving times is set, and if the winning lottery results in a loss corresponding to losing symbol Z2, the first time saving gaming state is not set. You can also do this.

Also, for example, in the case where a small win is won by a win/fail lottery based on a win/fail random number, when the small win symbol Y1 is determined by the special symbol random number, the first time saving game state in which the number of time savers is set to 50 is activated. When the small winning symbol Y2 is set and the special symbol random number is determined, the first time saving game state may not be set. In addition, the small winning symbols that can be determined by the special symbol random numbers are not limited to these, but are small winning symbols in which a first time saving game state with a different number of time saving times than the small winning symbol Y1 is set (for example, the number of time saving times). A small winning symbol Y3 in which the first time saving game state is set 80 times, a small winning symbol Z4 in which the first time saving gaming state is set 10000 times, etc.) may be provided.
In addition, instead of determining the small winning symbol through the process of determining the winning lottery and the special symbol, in the winning lottery based on the winning random number as in the above-mentioned modification (2), for example, the setting of the first time-saving gaming state is performed. It is possible to derive a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y1 in which the number of time saving times is set to 50, and a small winning winning corresponding to the small winning symbol Y2 in which it is determined that the first time saving gaming state is not set. , and if a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y1 is won by the lottery, the first time saving game state with 50 time saving times is set, and a small winning corresponding to the small winning symbol Y2 is determined by the lottery. The first time-saving gaming state may not be set if the player wins.
Further, it may be determined that the time-saving gaming state is set for all of the small winning symbols that can be determined, or it may be determined that the time-saving gaming state is set for some of the small winning symbols that can be determined. Further, it may be determined that the time-saving gaming state is set for all of the losing symbols that can be determined, or it may be determined that the time-saving gaming state is set for some of the losing symbols that can be determined. In addition, the small winning or losing symbols that are set to set the time-saving gaming state are fixed, so that the small winning or losing symbols that are set to set the time-saving gaming state do not change every time the game is played. You may also do so.
In this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and special symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols that have been conventionally adopted can be used without newly providing time-saving symbols as special symbols. Using this, it is possible to set a time-saving gaming state that does not involve winning a jackpot or executing a special game, and it becomes possible to simplify the development process of a pachinko machine.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the time-saving game is granted in a winning/failure lottery based on a winning/failing random number. The control of the decision is not limited to this.
For example, a time-saving pattern random number, which is a dedicated random number for determining whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state, is provided separately from the winning/losing random number and special symbol random number, and the time-saving pattern random number, which is a special random number for determining whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state, is provided, and the time-saving pattern random number is set separately from the winning/losing lottery and the determination of the special symbol. It is set to perform a time-saving symbol lottery to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) based on the symbol random number, and based on the result of the time-saving symbol lottery, a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. It may also be possible to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving times when setting the time-saving gaming state.
That is, a win/fail lottery is performed based on a win/fail random number, a special symbol is determined based on the result of the win/fail lottery, and a time-saving symbol lottery is performed based on a time-saving symbol random number to determine whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set (described later). It can be set to determine the time saving symbol).

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, along with the above-mentioned first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number, the above-mentioned random number dedicated to the time-saving pattern lottery is drawn. A certain time-saving symbol random number is obtained within a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535), and based on the obtained time-saving symbol random number, the type of the time-saving symbol is determined as to whether or not a time-saving gaming state can be set. Set to perform time-saving symbol lottery.
More specifically, a time-saving symbol random number determination table is provided for determining the type of time-saving symbol in the time-saving symbol lottery. This time saving symbol random number determination table may be provided for each type of starting winning hole into which the game ball enters (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16). When the set gaming state is the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed with reference to a predetermined time-saving symbol random number determination table to determine the type of time-saving symbol.

The time-saving symbols include time-saving winning symbols that are determined to win a time-saving award (that is, to set a time-saving gaming state), and time-saving symbols that are determined to not win a time-saving award (that is, not to set a time-saving gaming state). A winning symbol can be provided. In addition, as time-saving winning symbols, there are multiple types of time-saving winning symbols with different number of time-savings determined (for example, time-saving winning symbol JA1 with 10 time-savings, JA2 with 20 time-savings, etc.) can be provided.
Then, when any of the time-saving winning symbols is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery, for example, a first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set, and according to the determined time-saving winning symbol. The number of time saving times is set. As a result, the first low-probability time-saving game state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived the set number of times without winning a jackpot. On the other hand, if a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined, the normal gaming state remains.
In addition, if the set gaming state is other than the normal gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state), the above mentioned time saving symbol lottery will be performed. Alternatively, it may be set to forcibly determine the time-saving non-winning symbols. As a result, the time-saving gaming state will not be newly set in any gaming state other than the normal gaming state.

In addition, as described above, when the type of time-saving symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, the time-saving symbol lottery and the time-saving symbol are determined by the winning lottery, special symbol, etc. in the above-mentioned embodiment. It may be set to perform the same control as the control related to.
For example, the obtained time-saving pattern random number is the same as the first special pattern random number and second special pattern random number that are obtained when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning hole 16. It may be stored in a reservation storage area and set so that it can be reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) similarly to the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number.
In addition, when a time-saving symbol is determined as described above, a predetermined display device (a time-saving symbol display device) different from the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 is used similarly to the special symbol. It may be set so that a variable display of time-saving symbols (hereinafter also referred to as variation of time-saving symbols) is performed in . The variable display of the time-saving symbols may be set to start at the same timing as the variable display of the special symbols, or may be set to have the same variable time as the variable display of the special symbols. Further, when the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the time-saving symbol are started at the same timing, the time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed at the start of the variable display.

In addition, when a time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, if you lose in the winning lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning lottery has stopped. A time-saving game state (first low probability time-saving game state) may be set (at the start of the next special symbol variation). In addition, when a small hit is won in the win/fail lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol drawing, after the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning ends (the first special after the small winning game ends) (at the start of symbol fluctuation), a time-saving gaming state may be set.

On the other hand, if a time-saving winning symbol is determined in the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and if a jackpot is won in the win/fail lottery executed in conjunction with the time-saving symbol lottery, the time-saving winning symbol will not be determined. The time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the jackpot is not set, and after the special game based on the jackpot winning ends (at the time when the first special symbol fluctuation starts after the special game ends), the jackpot determined based on the jackpot winning. The gaming state may be set according to the type of symbol. In other words, if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol and the determination of the jackpot symbol overlap (jackpot winning), even if the determination of the time-saving winning symbol is invalidated and the gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol. good. If the setting of the gaming state based on the determination of time-saving winning symbols is given priority over the special game, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot may change, and the special game will be terminated after confirming whether or not there is any such change. It is necessary to set the subsequent gaming state, and the process of setting the gaming state may become complicated, but by doing as described above, it is possible to appropriately prevent such a situation from occurring.

Further, the variable pattern command, the mode of the variable presentation, the mode of the pre-reading presentation, etc. may be determined based on the results of the determination of the special symbol and the determination of the time-saving symbol.
Specifically, if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving winning symbol is determined, the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined. is determined, and when the result of the lottery is a jackpot (when a time-saving non-winning symbol is determined), the variable pattern command and the mode of variable performance are determined respectively. Good too. For example, if the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss, and a time-saving winning symbol is determined, or if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss. It may be set so that the determination rate of a fluctuation pattern command associated with a long fluctuation time is higher than that in the case of winning or losing a time-saving non-winning symbol. It may be set so that the determination ratio of the variable presentation mode or the look-ahead presentation mode that is set to have a high expectation of winning or winning the time-saving award may be set to be high.

Also, even if it is set to determine the type of time-saving symbol by a time-saving symbol lottery based on a time-saving symbol random number, whether or not the time-saving symbol lottery is performed in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state to set the time-saving gaming state. It may also be possible to decide whether The various controls in this case are the same as in (6) above, so explanations will be omitted.
In addition, in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, it is not decided whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving games, but in the time-saving symbol lottery based on the time-saving symbol random number, it is determined only whether the time-saving gaming state can be set. However, when it is decided to set the time-saving gaming state, a lottery may be held to determine the number of time-savings based on another random number (random number for determining the number of time-savings) different from the above-mentioned time-saving symbol random number. .

Moreover, the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery may be set to be performed using other random numbers instead of using the time-saving symbol random numbers.
For example, instead of using a random number of 1 to determine both the jackpot and the small win as in the above-described embodiment, A random number for determining a jackpot, a random number for determining a small win, a random number for determining a small win, and a random number for determining a loss, used only for determining whether or not a small win will be won. By making a judgment for each time, the judgment result of jackpot winning, small winning winning, or losing is derived, and the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is performed based on one of these random numbers to save time. It may also be possible to determine whether or not the gaming state can be set and the number of time reductions.

Also, as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol random number of 1 is not used to determine the jackpot symbol, the small prize symbol, or the losing symbol, but the jackpot symbol is used only to determine the type of the jackpot symbol in the case of winning a jackpot. The symbol determination random number, the small winning symbol determining random number that is used only to determine the type of small winning symbol in the case of winning a small hit, and the losing symbol determining random number that is used only to determine the type of losing symbol in the case of a loss. The type of jackpot symbol, the type of small prize symbol, and the type of loss symbol are determined based on any random number according to the determination result of jackpot winning, small winning winning, or losing. It is also possible to perform a time-saving symbol lottery based on any one of them to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state and the number of time-saving games.

In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, in a pachinko machine P in which multiple levels of setting values are associated with settings related to ball payout, the lottery probability is set to be different depending on the setting values. Random numbers used in (e.g., win/fail random numbers, jackpot judgment random numbers, small hit judgment random numbers, loss judgment random numbers, etc.), or used in a lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value. A time saving symbol lottery may be performed based on any of the random numbers (for example, special symbol random numbers, etc.) to determine whether or not the time saving gaming state can be set and the number of time saving times. In addition, the time-saving symbol lottery is not performed based on the random numbers used in the lottery, where the lottery probability is set to differ depending on the setting value, and the lottery probability is set to be the same regardless of the setting value. The time-saving symbol lottery may be performed based only on the random numbers used in the lottery to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set and the number of time-saving times.

When set as described above, the same effects as those of the embodiment described above are achieved, and there are many control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state, so that the time-saving gaming state can be set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes possible.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, when a high probability gaming state is set, a special symbol (jackpot symbol , the high-probability gaming state ends and the low-probability gaming state is set, but the control of transition to the low-probability gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, after a high-probability gaming state is set, if a predetermined number of high-probability drawings (for example, 80, etc.) are held without winning a jackpot, the high-probability gaming state ends. (configured as a so-called ST type pachinko machine). In the pachinko machine set in this way, if a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state can be set, the above-described embodiment mode is set during the gaming state. When the winning of the time-saving grant is determined by the lottery and the time-saving symbol is determined, as in the above-mentioned variation (8), the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is determined to set the time-saving gaming state. or when a time-saving winning symbol is determined by the time-saving symbol lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (9), the time-saving gaming state may be set based on the determination.
Furthermore, for example, a random number for a fall lottery to be used for a fall lottery to determine whether to end a high probability gaming state and set a low probability gaming state is provided, and the high probability gaming state is terminated by a fall lottery based on the fall lottery random number. However, when it is determined to set the low probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state may end. Then, when a falling lottery random number is provided, a time-saving symbol lottery like the above-mentioned modification example (9) may be performed based on the falling lottery random number to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state. .
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the embodiment described above are achieved, and there are many control methods for setting the time-saving gaming state, so that the time-saving gaming state can be set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes possible.

(11) In the embodiment described above, the process of determining the result of the lottery is performed in the order of determining whether the jackpot is appropriate → determining whether the small win is appropriate → determining whether the time saving grant is appropriate. The order is not limited to this.
For example, the determination may be made in the order of determining whether the jackpot is appropriate → determining whether the time saving grant is appropriate → determining whether the small win is appropriate.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the win/fail lottery, instead of deriving the determination result of winning the time-saving grant, the small winning symbol corresponds to the small winning symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state. (hereinafter also referred to as a small win with time saving), winning of a small win corresponding to a small winning symbol that does not set a time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a small win without time saving), In a pachinko machine where the time-saving gaming state is set when a small win with a bonus is won, and the time-saving gaming state is not set when a small win with no time saving is won, for example, determining whether the jackpot is correct → Judgment is made in the following order: Judgment of the validity of the small win with time saving → Judgment of the propriety of the small win without time saving, Judgment of the propriety of the jackpot → Judgment of the propriety of the small win without time saving → Judgment of the propriety of the small win with time saving. Good too.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (8), in the lottery, instead of deriving the determination result of winning the time-saving grant, the losing symbol corresponding to the losing symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set (hereinafter referred to as , a loss with a time saver), and a loss corresponding to a losing symbol for which it is specified that a time saver gaming state is not set (hereinafter also referred to as a loss without a time saver), and when a loss with a time saver occurs, the time saver gaming state is set. In a pachinko machine where is set and the time-saving gaming state is not set in the case of a loss with no time-saving, for example, the order of determining whether a jackpot is correct → determining whether a small win is correct → determining whether a loss with a time-saving is determined, and the jackpot is determined. The determination may be made in the following order: determination of success or failure of winning with time saving → determination of success or failure of small win.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether to end a high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, the fall lottery → win/fail lottery (judgment of jackpot, small win, time saving, etc.) The lottery process may be performed in the order of (judgment).

In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification (9), in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery, and in which setting values for multiple stages are not determined, the time-saving symbol lottery The lottery process may be performed in the order of → success/failure lottery, or the lottery process may be performed in the order of success/failure lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, in pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set by a time-saving symbol lottery, and in which multiple levels of setting values are determined, the time-saving symbol lottery (for any setting value, the lottery probability The lottery process may be performed in the order of (a lottery set so that the numbers are the same) → a win/fail lottery (a lottery whose lottery probabilities are set to be different depending on the set value).
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is set to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state by a time-saving symbol lottery, and to determine whether or not to end a high-probability gaming state by a fall lottery, and in which setting values for multiple stages are not determined. The lottery process may be performed in the order of falling lottery → time-saving symbol lottery → success/failure lottery, or the lottery process may be performed in the order of falling lottery → success/failure lottery → time-saving symbol lottery. In addition, pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to set a time-saving gaming state by a time-saving symbol lottery, and determine whether or not to end a high-probability gaming state by a falling lottery, and which have multiple levels of setting values. In this case, the falling lottery (the lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) → the time-saving symbol lottery (the lottery set so that the lottery probability is the same regardless of the setting value) The lottery process may be performed in the following order: success/failure lottery (a lottery in which the lottery probability is set to vary depending on a set value).

When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and a lottery can be held to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set at a timing that corresponds to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, but the trigger for executing the special game is not limited to this. do not have.
For example, a small prize that is executed not only when the result of a winning lottery results in a jackpot, but also when the winning lottery results in a predetermined small winning symbol (when a predetermined small winning symbol is determined). In the winning game, a specified large prize opening with a special area into which the game ball can enter is opened, and the game ball that enters the specified large prize opening during the small winning game enters the special area. It may also be configured so that a special game is executed even when the game is played (configured as a pachinko machine that mixes one type and two types). In addition, after the special game executed based on the winning of the above-mentioned small hit ends, the game state (non-time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state) corresponding to the small winning symbol determined at the time of winning the above-mentioned small winning occurs. You may also set it to migrate.

Also in the pachinko machine set as described above (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine), as in the above embodiments and modified examples, it is possible to determine whether or not to provide time saving (as in the above embodiments and modifications). Win/fail lottery of the above-mentioned modification (2)), determination of small winning symbols and losing symbols for which it is determined whether a time-saving gaming state can be set (process of determining the win/fail lottery and special symbols of the above-mentioned modification (8)) , the determination of the time-saving winning symbol or the time-saving non-winning symbol (the time-saving symbol lottery of the above-mentioned modification example (9)), etc. (hereinafter, these determinations and decisions are collectively referred to as the time-saving granting determination process). However, the time-saving game state may be set without involving the winning of a jackpot and the execution of a special game.
In addition, for example, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery on a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, the time-saving symbol lottery determines that a time-saving gaming state is set (a time-saving symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state) (time-saving winning symbol)) is determined and it becomes a loss (the losing symbol is determined) by the winning lottery, after the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the winning lottery stops, the result of the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery is determined. When it is decided to set the time-saving gaming state according to the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and when the small winning is won by the win/fail lottery (the small winning symbol is determined), the above-mentioned The time-saving gaming state is not set according to the result of the time-saving symbol lottery, and after the small-winning game and special game based on the winning of the small winning, the type of the small winning symbol determined based on the winning of the small winning. A corresponding gaming state may be set.
Specifically, the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) associated with setting the first time-saving gaming state (the number of time-savings is 20 times) is determined by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and a small win is awarded in the winning/failure lottery. If you win a small winning game and a small winning symbol is determined to be associated with setting the second time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100 times) after the small winning game and special game end, the small winning game and special game After the game ends, the first time-saving game state may not be set, but the second time-saving game state may be set.
In this case, in addition to achieving the same effects as the above-described embodiment, it is possible to install a lottery function that determines whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state in pachinko machines with various specifications, and it also allows small winnings to be achieved. When the winning of the game and the determination of the setting of the time-saving gaming state overlap, it is possible to appropriately prevent the occurrence of a situation where the setting process of the time-saving gaming state becomes complicated.

(13) When multiple types of decision results are provided as the decision results that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving award decision processing, it is made easy to maintain the second starting prize opening 16 in an open state for each decision result. You may set a time-saving gaming state with different processing contents.
For example, as in the above-mentioned embodiment, a setting is made to determine a time-saving symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state through the winning/failure lottery and special symbol determination processing, or in the above-mentioned modification example (9). ), when it is set to determine the time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) which is determined to set the time-saving gaming state by time-saving symbol lottery, the type of time-saving symbol (time-saving winning symbol) that can be determined. As such, although the probability of winning in the lottery of symbols and normal symbols that are set to set the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state is higher than in the non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuating time of the normal symbol and the second starting prize opening The opening time of 16 is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state. Although the variation time of the normal symbol is longer than that of the non-time-saving gaming state, which is a symbol that is set to set the 3rd time-saving gaming state, it is possible to win in the drawing of the normal symbol. The probability that the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 is the same as the non-time saving gaming state. Even if a symbol etc. is provided that stipulates that the fifth time-saving gaming state is set, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are the same as the non-time-saving gaming state, although it is longer than the state. good. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, a symbol may be provided in which it is determined that the other one is a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, similar settings can be made in the case where it is possible to derive the result of winning the time-saving grant corresponding to the predetermined time-saving symbol in the winning lottery as in the above-mentioned modification (2). For example, in a winning/failure lottery, a time-saving award corresponding to a time-saving symbol that is set to set the above-mentioned third time-saving gaming state, a winning of a time-saving award that corresponds to a time-saving symbol that is set to set the above-mentioned 4th time-saving gaming state, etc. The setting may be such that it is possible to derive a result such as winning a time-saving award.

In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification example (8), when setting is made to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the small winning symbol or the losing symbol determined in the process of win/fail lottery and special symbol determination process. , a small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) that is defined to set the above-mentioned first time-saving gaming state, and a small winning symbol Y3 (or losing symbol) that is defined to set the above-mentioned third time-saving gaming state. Z3), the small winning symbol Y4 (or losing symbol Z4) that is set to set the above-mentioned fourth time-saving gaming state, and the small winning symbol Y5 (or A loss pattern Z5) or the like may be provided. In addition to these, any two of the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 will be higher (or longer) than in the non-time saving gaming state. However, the other one may be provided with a small winning symbol (or a losing symbol) that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state that is the same as the non-time-saving gaming state.
In addition, as in the above-mentioned modification example (8), in the winning/fail lottery, it is determined that a small win corresponding to a small winning symbol for which a time-saving gaming state is set or a time-saving gaming state is set. Similar settings can be made when it is possible to derive the result of a loss corresponding to a loss symbol. For example, in a win/fail lottery, a small win corresponding to the small winning symbol Y3 (or a loss corresponding to the losing symbol Z3) for which it is determined that the third time saving gaming state described above is set, the fourth time saving gaming state described above The setting may be made such that it is possible to derive a result such as a small win win corresponding to the small win symbol Y4 (or a loss corresponding to the lose symbol Z4).

In the case of setting as described above, the same operation and effect as in the above-described embodiment is achieved, and in the time-saving game state that is set without involving jackpot winnings and execution of special games, the second starting prize opening 16 Since it is possible to increase the variation of the processing for making it easier to maintain the open state, it is possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.

(14) The types and number of symbols (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols, losing symbols, etc.) that are determined to set a time-saving gaming state that can be determined by the above-mentioned time-saving granting determination process are determined for each gaming state. may be set differently.
For example, if there are predetermined types (for example, 5 types) of symbols that are set to set the time-saving gaming state (time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols, losing symbols, etc.), in the normal gaming state, Although all types can be determined, it may be set so that any one or more types can be determined in a low probability time saving game state, or all types can be determined in a low probability time saving gaming state. , it may be set so that any one or more types can be determined in the normal gaming state.
Also, for example, although all types can be determined in a specific time-saving game state (for example, the first time-saving game state), in a time-saving game state other than the specific one (for example, the third time-saving game state), any one or more types can be determined. It may be set so that the type of the data can be determined.
When set as described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be achieved, and the rate at which time-saving gaming states are set and the types of time-saving gaming states that can be set can be changed for each gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide more innovative gameplay features and increase the interest of the players.

(15) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the fluctuation pattern is determined according to the determined type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol. You can do it like this.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment are achieved, and when the time-saving gaming state is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, a variable production with a rich variety can be achieved. can be executed.

(16) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol, within a predetermined period (for example, from the predetermined starting point until the 100th winning/losing lottery is conducted) The time-saving gaming state is set according to the number of times a small winning symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state and the number of losing symbols are determined to be setting a time-saving gaming state. You may also do so.
For example, if the small winning symbol Y1 (the small winning symbol that is determined to set the first time saving game state with the number of time saving times of 20 times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, twice, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period, , a time-saving game state determined for the small winning symbol Y1 may be set. Also, for example, if the losing symbol Z1 (the small winning symbol that is determined to set the first time-saving gaming state of 50 time-saving times) is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, three times, etc.) within the above-mentioned predetermined period. In addition, a time-saving gaming state determined for the losing symbol Z1 may be set.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are achieved, and the conditions under which the time-saving gaming state is set can be varied widely, making it possible to provide more innovative gaming features.

(17) In a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, if the time-saving gaming state is set based on the type of small winning symbol, the small winning symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set is set. When a game ball enters a special area provided in a specified large winning opening during a small winning game based on the decision, and when a gaming ball does not enter a special area provided in a specified large winning opening during the small winning game. The number of time saving times in the time saving game state set after the small winning game may be the same or may be different.
For example, if a small winning symbol Y1 is determined to set the first time saving game state of 20 time saving times, during the small winning game based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1, the game ball is placed in the special area. When the game ball enters the special area, after the small winning game and the special game are finished, the first time saving game state with 20 time saving times is set, and even when the game ball does not enter the special area, after the small winning game ends, the first time saving game state is set. The first time-saving game state may be set 20 times.
For example, when the above-mentioned small winning symbol Y1 is determined, when the game ball enters the special area during the small winning game based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1, after the small winning game and the special game are finished, Even if the first time saving gaming state with 20 time saving times is set and the game ball does not enter the special area, the first time saving gaming state with 5 time saving times is set after the end of the small winning game. good.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and different time-saving game states can be set depending on whether or not the game ball can be placed in the special area, providing a rich variety of playability. It can be done.

(18) When setting a time-saving gaming state when a small win is won in a win/fail lottery (when the small win symbol is determined), the time saving gaming state is set from the winning of the small win (determination of the small win symbol). Any timing until the end of the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning (for example, when winning the small winning, when the fluctuation of the small winning symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the small winning symbol ends, the small winning game based on the small winning symbol) The time-saving game state may be set at the start of a winning game, during the small winning game, at the end of the small winning game (when the first special symbol fluctuation starts after the small winning game ends, etc.).
Similarly, when setting a time-saving gaming state when there is a loss in a winning/failure lottery (when a losing symbol is determined), the time-saving gaming state is set based on the losing symbol from the time when the losing symbol is determined (when the losing symbol is determined). The time can be shortened at any timing until the end of the fluctuation (for example, when the losing lottery result is derived, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends (when the fluctuation of the next special symbol starts), etc.) A gaming state may also be set.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the transition to the time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the variation of the gameplay. .

(19) If it is set to determine whether or not the time-saving gaming state can be set based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the number of time saving times in the time-saving gaming state corresponds to the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol. A predetermined number of time savings may be set, or a lottery may be held to determine the number of time savings when transitioning to the time saving gaming state, and the number of time savings determined by the lottery may be set.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the method of determining the number of time reductions, and it is possible to determine the number of time reductions according to the specifications of the pachinko machine. becomes.

(20) If it is set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving game state based on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the time-saving game is set according to the type of the determined small winning symbol or losing symbol. The state performance (difficulty level of maintaining the second starting winning port 16 in the open state) may be different.
For example, when a small winning symbol Y1 (or a losing symbol Z1) is determined, the second starting prize opening 16 is more likely to be kept open than in the normal gaming state (the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is high). time-saving gaming state A is set, and the small winning symbol Y3 (or the losing time) is set. When the symbol Z3) is determined, a time-saving game state B may be set in which the second starting prize opening 16 is more easily maintained in the open state than the time-saving game state A.
Further, the performance of the time-saving gaming state that is set may be different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol and the gaming state that is set.
For example, if the small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) is determined in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state A is set, but the small winning symbol Y1 (or losing symbol Z1) is ) is determined, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state B may be set.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of performance of the time-saving gaming state that is set, and it is possible to provide more innovative gaming characteristics. Become.

(21) When a time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol for which it is determined that a time-saving gaming state is to be set, an upper limit for the number of times of time-saving is set. (In other words, the number of time-saving games is infinite) and the time-saving gaming state may be ended on the condition of winning the jackpot, or a lottery may be used to determine the time-saving ending symbol that is set to end the time-saving gaming state. (Lottery of time-saving ending symbol) may be performed, and the time-saving gaming state may be ended on the condition that the time-saving ending symbol is determined by the lottery. In addition, the time-saving gaming state is terminated on the condition that the time-saving gaming state is set and a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined for which the number of time-saving times is determined, and a new time-saving gaming is started based on the determination. You may set (overwrite) the status and the number of time reductions. In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving game state, a special game is executed based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of a win/fail lottery is derived) reaches the time-saving number, winning a jackpot, or winning a small win. In addition, a time-saving gaming state (such as (29) described later) due to the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined time-saving activation number LN (second time-saving gaming state described later) The process may be terminated by satisfying any of the conditions for setting time saving)).
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the variation of the end conditions of the time-saving game state can be increased, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay.

(22) When the number of consecutive time-saving settings reaches a predetermined upper limit, it is determined that the next gaming state cannot be set as a time-saving gaming state (a non-time-saving gaming state is forcibly set). In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter), a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is specified to set a time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. In this case, the above-mentioned continuous time saving setting number may or may not be updated based on the stop display.
In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, even if a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state is stopped and displayed, the above-mentioned continuous The time saving setting number of times may or may not be updated.
In addition, time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, which are determined to set the time-saving gaming state when determined during the normal gaming state, but not to set the time-saving gaming state when determined during the time-saving gaming state, Even when a small winning symbol or a losing symbol is stopped and displayed during the time-saving game state, the above-mentioned continuous time-saving set number may or may not be updated based on the stopped display.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and the difficulty level of reaching the upper limit number of consecutive time reduction settings can be changed, making it possible to provide more innovative gameplay. Become.

(23) In a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, the performance of the time-saving gaming state ( One or more of the winning probability of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16, and the number of time reductions), the remaining number of consecutive time reduction settings until the set number of consecutive time reductions reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times. It may be made to differ depending on the number of times remaining, or it may be made to be the same regardless of the remaining number of times.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the time-saving gaming states set in the pachinko machine equipped with the time-saving limiter, resulting in more innovative gameplay. can be granted.

(24) A pachinko machine configured such that a falling lottery is carried out and a time-saving gaming state is set by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state. In the machine, when it is decided to end the high-probability gaming state by falling lottery, and a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state, the said As the number of time-saving games in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the symbol determination, the number of time-saving games determined according to the gaming state before the above-mentioned determination by the falling lottery and the type of determined symbol is set. Alternatively, a predetermined number of time reductions may be set depending on the gaming state before the above-described determination by the falling lottery and the type of determined symbol.
In this case as well, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiment can be achieved, and it is possible to increase the variation of the number of time-savings set in the time-saving gaming state, making it possible to provide more innovative gaming features. Become.

(25) If a time-saving symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state while a look-ahead effect that notifies the result of the lottery is being executed, if a time-saving symbol, small winning symbol, or losing symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state, the execution The prefetch effect may be continued, or the prefetch effect may be stopped without continuing.
In addition, when a time-saving symbol, a small winning symbol, or a pending symbol that determines a losing symbol is stored, a specific effect (pre-read effect, other (e.g., a predetermined performance that is executed during a variable performance based on the suspension of The specific performance may be continued or may be stopped without continuing.
Note that the same applies to pachinko machines that are set to determine whether or not to set the time-saving gaming state by the above-mentioned time-saving symbol lottery, and are set to execute a look-ahead effect that notifies the result of the time-saving symbol lottery. The control may be performed.
Even in this case, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments are achieved, and the time-saving game state is determined to be set appropriately according to the situation of determining the time-saving symbol, the small winning symbol, or the losing symbol. This makes it possible to perform a variety of performances.

(26) In a pachinko machine that can set the gaming state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot to a high-probability gaming state, the gaming state after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot during a low-probability gaming state is set to a high-probability gaming state. The probability A1 that the game state will be set to the probability game state, and the probability A2 that the game state will be set to the high probability game state after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot during the high probability game state are as follows: They may be set to the same value or may be set to different values.
In addition, the probabilities A1 and A2 mentioned above may be set to the same value regardless of the type of special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used for the lottery. Alternatively, it may be set to a different value depending on the type of special figure random number. In addition, the probabilities A1 and A2 described above may be set to have the same value regardless of the type of special symbol determined when winning a jackpot, or may be set to have the same value depending on the type of special symbol. It may be set to a different value. Further, the value may be set to be different depending on the type of special symbol random number used in the winning lottery and the type of special symbol determined when winning a jackpot.
When set in this way, there is a probability that a high probability game state will be set from a low probability game state through the execution of a special game, and a high probability game state will be set again from a high probability game state through the execution of a special game. There are many variations in the probabilities that are set, and the gameplay that can be provided to players can also be varied.

(27) In a pachinko machine that can end a high-probability gaming state and set a low-probability gaming state by falling lottery, the decision probability B for ending the high-probability gaming state and setting a low-probability gaming state is one value. Only one value may be provided, or a plurality of values may be provided.
If only one value is set, the falling lottery will always be performed using that value, and if multiple values are set, depending on the situation (for example, a special lottery after a high probability gaming state is set). The falling lottery may be performed using any value (depending on the number of variations in the symbol, the type of starting winning hole into which the game ball entered, etc.).
In addition, the decision probability B has the same value regardless of the set gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state that is a combination of high probability gaming state and non time saving gaming state). You can also set it as follows. Further, the decision probability B may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special figure random number (first special figure random number, second special figure random number) used for the winning/failure lottery. You may set it to a different value depending on the type of special figure random number. Further, the decision probability B may be set to be the same value regardless of the type of special symbol (losing symbol) determined in the case of a loss, or may be set to be the same value depending on the type of special symbol. It may be set to a value. Further, it may be set to a different value depending on the set gaming state, the type of special symbol random number used for winning/losing lottery, and the type of special symbol determined in the case of a loss.
When set in this way, there are many variations in the probability that a high-probability gaming state ends and a low-probability gaming state is set, and the gameplay that can be provided to players can also be rich in variation. can.

(28) A pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine equipped with a probability change limiter) that is set so that a low probability game state is forcibly set after the end of a special game when the number of consecutive high probability settings reaches a predetermined upper limit. In a pachinko machine (referred to as a pachinko machine), only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the upper limit number of times. If only one value is set, the above setting is performed when the number of consecutive high accuracy settings reaches the relevant value, and if multiple values are set, the number of consecutive high accuracy settings is changed depending on the situation. The above-mentioned setting may be performed upon reaching any value corresponding to (for example, the number of times the game state has shifted from a low-probability gaming state to a high-probability gaming state).
Similarly, in a pachinko machine equipped with a time-saving limiter, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the upper limit number of times. If only one value is set, the above setting is performed when the number of continuous time reduction settings reaches the value, and if multiple values are set, the number of continuous time reduction settings is changed depending on the situation. The above-mentioned setting may be performed when any value is reached (for example, depending on the number of times the game mode is shifted from a non-time-saving gaming state to a time-saving gaming state).
When set in this way, there is a wide variety of variations in the upper limit of the number of continuous high accuracy settings and the number of continuous time reduction settings, and the gaming experience that can be provided to the player can also be rich in variation.

(29) In the above-described embodiment, the time-saving gaming state is set if the time-saving grant is won as a result of determining whether the time-saving grant is appropriate or not in the winning/failure lottery during the normal gaming state. The trigger for setting the gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, when the number of changes in special symbols (the number of times the lottery results are derived in a win/fail lottery) is counted, and the count value reaches a predetermined number of time saving activations LN without winning a jackpot, the gaming state is the time saving gaming state. If it is other than (normal gaming state or high probability non-time saving gaming state), a time saving gaming state is set in which the number of time saving times becomes the specific number of time saving times TN without going through jackpot winning and execution of special games. You can also do this. Further, the specific time saving number TN may be set to be larger than the time saving activation number LN.
When set in this way, even if the jackpot is not won, the time-saving gaming state will be set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, so there are variations in which the time-saving gaming state can be set. This makes it possible to increase the interest of players.

(30) In a pachinko machine set as in the above modification example (29), the above count value is (a) at the time of power-on (at the time of RAM clearing), (b) the number of times the special symbol changes during the normal gaming state. When the number of time-saving activations LN is reached, or the number of variations of the special symbol during the normal gaming state reaches the number of time-saving activations LN, after that, a lottery for the specific time-saving number TN is held without winning the jackpot. (c) At the time of winning the jackpot or at the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot, (d) Setting the time-saving gaming state. In a pachinko machine that sets a time-saving gaming state by determining a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol, when the time-saving gaming state is set, (e) a setting value is set. In a pachinko machine, the RAM may be cleared at one or more of the RAM clearing times that are performed by changing the setting value. That is, counting of the above-mentioned count value may be started from the time points (a) to (e). Note that the clearing at the time point (c) may be set to always be executed.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may be cleared at other times different from (a) to (e).
In addition, the above-mentioned count value may be always counted regardless of which gaming state is set, or may be set to always count during a state advantageous to the player (for example, during a high probability gaming state, to save time). The count may not be counted during the gaming state, etc.).
In addition, as for the timing of counting the above-mentioned count value, when there is a loss in the lottery (when a losing symbol is determined), from the time when it becomes a loss (the losing symbol is determined) Any timing until the end of the fluctuation based on the result (for example, when the losing lottery result is derived, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol starts, when the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends, the stop display after the fluctuation of the losing symbol ends) When time has elapsed (when the next special symbol starts changing), etc.), or when a jackpot is won in the lottery (when the jackpot symbol is determined), any of the above points may be selected. Alternatively, it may be the end point of a special game based on winning a jackpot.
Further, the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set may be set to be the same as the timing at which the above-mentioned count value is counted.
Further, the above-mentioned count value may be, for example, in the normal gaming state, counting the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number mainly obtained during the normal gaming state. However, not only the variation of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number but also the variation of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number may be counted.
When set in this way, there are many variations in the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.
In addition, when starting counting the above-mentioned count value from the end of the special game, the change at the time when the count value reaches the time saving activation number LN can be executed using a specific fluctuation pattern (variation time). Good too. In addition, when starting counting the above-mentioned count value from the time when the RAM is cleared, it is also possible to prevent the variation at the time when the count value reaches the time saving activation number LN by using a specific variation pattern (variation time). good.

(31) In a pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the number of time-saving activations LN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery, and is within a range that does not increase the gambling quality too much. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a lottery is 1/P, P x activation lower limit coefficient (for example, 2.5, etc.) ≦ Number of time saving activations LN ≦ P x activation upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.0 etc.)). Alternatively, the value may be set to an appropriate value depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine, regardless of the probability of winning a jackpot. Further, as the time saving activation number LN, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided.
If you set multiple levels of setting values that are associated with settings related to ball dispensing, you may set a different number of time saving activations LN for each setting value, or you can set the same time saving activation number LN for each setting value. The number of times LN (time saving activation number LN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any set value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)) may be set.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the time-saving gaming state is set.

(32) In a pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the specific time reduction number TN is determined in relation to the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning/failure lottery, and is within a range that does not increase the gambling quality too much. Value (for example, if the probability of winning a jackpot in a lottery is 1/P, P x specific lower limit coefficient (for example, 0.4, etc.) ≦Specific time saving number TN≦P x specific upper limit coefficient (for example, 3.8 etc.)). Alternatively, the value may be set to an appropriate value depending on the game specifications of the pachinko machine, without depending on the probability of winning a jackpot. Moreover, only one value or a plurality of values may be provided as the specific time reduction number LN.
In addition, the number of time-saving gaming states that are set based on winning a jackpot, and the number of time-saving gaming states that are set based on the determination of a symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, regardless of winning a jackpot. The number of time reductions may also be set to a value within the above range.
In addition, if multiple levels of setting values are provided that are associated with settings related to ball dispensing, a different specific time reduction number TN may be set for each setting value, or the same number of times TN may be set for each setting value. A specific time saving number TN (specific time saving number TN determined based on the probability of winning a jackpot at any set value (for example, the lowest probability of winning a jackpot)) may be set.
In addition, the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activations LN is based on the winning of the jackpot or the determination of the symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set. The game may be set to end by satisfying the same time-saving ending conditions as the time-saving gaming state set. For example, the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state may be set to end when a jackpot is won or when a win/fail lottery is performed a specific number of times TN without winning a jackpot.
In addition, as a condition for the time-saving gaming state to end, for example, the total of the number of variations of the special symbol based on the first special symbol random number and the number of variations of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number reaches the specific number of time-savings TN1; And, if multiple patterns are provided in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the second special symbol random number reaches the specific time saving number TN2, both the specific time saving number TN1 and TN2 will fall within the above range. Alternatively, only either the specific number of time reductions TN1 or TN2 (for example, only the larger value of the specific number of time reductions TN1 or TN2) may fall within the above range.
When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature based on the setting of the time-saving gaming state from becoming too high, and it is possible to increase the variation of the timing at which the set time-saving gaming state ends.

(33) In the pachinko machine set as in the above modification (29), the second time-saving game state is set based on the count value of the number of variations of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activations LN. A plurality of time-saving gaming states having different processing contents for making it easy to maintain the starting prize opening 16 in an open state may be provided, and any one of the time-saving gaming states may be set depending on the situation.
Specifically, the first time-saving game state in the above-described embodiment, the third time-saving game state in the above-described modification (13), the fourth time-saving game state, the fifth time-saving game state, etc. are provided, and, for example, the time-saving activation The type of jackpot symbol when the final jackpot was won before the number of times LN was reached, the type of the small winning symbol when the last small hit was won before the number LN was reached, the time saving was activated. When the time-saving gaming state is set before the number of times LN is reached, one of the time-saving gaming states is set depending on the type of jackpot symbol, small winning symbol, losing symbol, time-saving symbol, or time-saving winning symbol. It's okay.
When set in this way, the variation of the time-saving game state that is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the time-saving activation number LN becomes abundant, and it is possible to increase the player's interest. .

(34) In a pachinko machine in which the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of special symbols reaching the number of time-saving activations LN as in the above-mentioned modification (29), the normal gaming state The time-saving gaming state is also set based on the determination of a symbol (time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol, or losing symbol) that is set to set the time-saving gaming state in medium (low probability gaming state). You may also do so.
In the pachinko machine set in this way, a symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state is not determined during the time-saving gaming state, but the symbol is determined to set the time-saving gaming state only during the non-time-saving gaming state. It may be possible to determine a symbol in which a time-saving gaming state is set, or it may be possible to determine a symbol in which a time-saving gaming state is set even during a time-saving gaming state.
Also, if the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of time saving activations LN during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state), and at the same time, the above-mentioned symbol is determined during the normal gaming state (during the low-probability gaming state) (i.e. , if the setting conditions for a plurality of time-saving gaming states are met at the same time), one of the time-saving gaming states may be set.
In addition, the above-mentioned count value is set to be counted not only during the normal gaming state but also during the low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state. When the count value reaches the number of time saving activation times LN during the game, the time saving gaming state may be set again. In this case, when the time-saving gaming state is reset, the number of time-savings corresponding to the reset time-saving gaming state (i.e., the specific number of time-savings TN) is set again as the number of time-savings. Alternatively, the number of time reductions corresponding to the reset time saving gaming state may be added to the remaining number of time reductions at the time. Further, when the above-mentioned count value reaches the number of time-saving activations LN, after the time-saving gaming state set at that time ends, the time-saving gaming state based on the arrival may be set.
In this case, it is possible to increase the variety of time-saving gaming states that can be set, and to increase the player's interest.

(35) Even in so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machines, the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activation times LN, as in the above-mentioned modification example (29). It is also possible to do so.
Moreover, the above-mentioned count value may not be cleared based on a small winning win.
In addition, in the so-called 1 type 2 mixed pachinko machine set as described above, a special game is executed when the result of the lottery is a jackpot, and the result of the lottery is a predetermined small win. In a small winning game that is executed when a winner is won, if a special game is set to be executed when a game ball enters a special area of a specific large prize opening, the above-mentioned modification example (31) or ( 32), the probability P used to determine the number of time-saving activations LN and the specific number of time-savings TN includes the probability of winning the above-mentioned jackpot, the probability of winning the predetermined small win mentioned above (during the non-time-saving gaming state). (probability of winning a small hit in a winning/failure drawing based on the special drawing random numbers that are mainly obtained), or the total probability of winning the jackpot mentioned above and the probability of winning a predetermined small winning mentioned above. Good too.
In addition, in the so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine set as described above, there is no jackpot winning as a result of the winning lottery, but when the winning lottery results in a predetermined small winning. If the special game is set to be executed only when the game ball enters the special area of the specific large prize opening in the small winning game to be executed, as in the above-mentioned variations (31) and (32). The probability P used to determine the number of time-saving activations LN and the specific number of time-savings TN is the probability of winning the predetermined small hit mentioned above (in the winning/failure lottery based on special drawing random numbers mainly obtained during the non-time-saving gaming state). The probability of winning a small hit) or the probability of winning a predetermined small win and the game ball entering the special area (probability of a special game being executed via winning a predetermined small win) May be used.
In addition, in the case of a small winning, the time saving activation number LN may be updated depending on the type of small winning symbol determined based on the winning, or may not be updated. .
In addition, in so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machines, a time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of special symbols reaching the number of time-saving activations LN, and a time-saving gaming state is set during the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state). If the time-saving gaming state is also set based on the determination of a time-saving symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol for which the time-saving gaming state is set in (medium), the above-mentioned count value When the above-mentioned symbol is determined at the same time as the time saving activation number LN is reached (that is, when the setting conditions of multiple time saving gaming states are met at the same time), one of the time saving gaming states is set. Good too.
In addition, in a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activation times LN, the number of changes of the special symbol When the game ball enters the special area during the small winning game based on the small winning when the small winning is won and the predetermined small winning symbol is determined by the lottery at the time when the number of time saving activations LN is reached, the small winning game is executed. After the end of the game, without setting a time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activations LN, the game state determined for the predetermined small winning symbol (for example, when the number of time-saving activations LN has been reached) A time-saving gaming state that is different from the time-saving gaming state based on this (a time-saving gaming state with a different difficulty level in which the second starting prize opening 16 is maintained in an open state, a time-saving gaming state with a different number of set time saving times, etc.)) You can also do this.
In addition, in a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, when the time-saving gaming state is set based on the count value of the number of changes of the special symbol reaching the number of time-saving activation times LN, the number of changes of the special symbol When the game ball does not enter the special area during the small winning game based on the small winning, although the small winning is won and the predetermined small winning symbol is determined by the lottery at the time when the number of time saving activations LN is reached. After the end of the small winning game, a time-saving game state may be set based on the fact that the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN. If the above-mentioned time saving game state is set during a small winning game, when the game ball enters the special area and the special game is executed during the small winning game, the set time saving gaming state is terminated. However, when set as described above, it is possible to prevent complicated processing such as ending the set time-saving gaming state from being performed.
In the case described above, it is possible to increase the variation of the time-saving game states set in the pachinko machine that mixes one type and two types, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(36) Pachinko machines also have a time-saving gaming state that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a jackpot symbol that is set as a time-saving gaming state (i.e., a jackpot winning state). and the time-saving game state set through the execution of the special game (hereinafter also referred to as the first time-saving), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations LN. (i.e., a time-saving gaming state that is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game, hereinafter also referred to as a second time-saving gaming state), and the fact that the time-saving gaming state is set. Set based on the determination of prescribed symbols (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are defined to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are defined to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) All of the time-saving game states (that is, the time-saving game states that are set without winning the jackpot and executing the special game, hereinafter also referred to as the third time-saving game) may be provided.
By doing so, there is a wide variety of time-saving gaming states that can be set, so it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(37) In addition, in the above-mentioned first time saving, there are settings such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), a setting where the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and , you may make it set so that the opening time of the 2nd starting prize opening 16 becomes long. In addition, in the second time saving mentioned above, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols is the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), and You may also make settings such that the fluctuation time of the symbols becomes shorter and the opening time of the second start prize opening 16 becomes longer. In addition, even in the third time saving mentioned above, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols is the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state), and You may also make settings such that the fluctuation time of the symbols becomes shorter and the opening time of the second start prize opening 16 becomes longer.
In addition, only in the first time saving among the first time saving, second time saving, and third time saving, settings are made such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the normal gaming state (non-time saving gaming state). It's okay.
By doing so, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of various time-saving gaming states, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

(38) In addition, when a pachinko machine is equipped with a first time saver, a second time saver, and a third time saver, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set the time saver gaming state during the first time saver, ( 1a) Control may be adopted in which the first time saving is ended and a new first time saving is set after the special game ends. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the first time saving, (2a) the first time saving is ended and a new second time saving is started. (2b) Continue the first time reduction; (2c) End the first time reduction if the number of time reductions when setting the second time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction. , or setting a new second time reduction, any one of (2a) to (2c) may be adopted. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the first time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (3a) End the first time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (3b) Continue the first time reduction, (3c) Third time reduction. Among (3a) to (3c), the first time reduction is terminated and a third time reduction is newly set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the first time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving game state during the second time saving, (4a) the second time saving is ended and a first time saving is newly set after the special game ends; This control may be adopted. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the second time saving, (5a) the second time saving is ended and a new second time saving is started. Any one of the controls (5a) to (5b) may be adopted, such as setting the time reduction or (5b) continuing the second time reduction. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the second time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (6a) End the second time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (6b) Continue the second time reduction, (6c) Third time reduction. Among (6a) to (6c), the second time reduction is ended and a third time reduction is newly set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the second time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

Furthermore, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving game state during the third time saving, (7a) the third time saving is ended and a new first time saving is set after the special game ends; This control may be adopted. In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activations LN during the third time saving, (8a) the third time saving is ended and a new second (8b) Continue the third time reduction; (8c) End the third time reduction if the number of time reductions when setting the second time reduction is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the third time reduction. , or setting a new second time reduction, any one of (8a) to (8c) may be adopted. In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the third time-saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, and setting a time-saving gaming state) (9a) End the third time reduction and set a new third time reduction, (9b) Continue the third time reduction, (9c) Third time reduction. Among (9a) to (9c), the third time reduction is ended and a new third time reduction is set if the number of time reductions when the number of time reductions is set is greater than the remaining number of time reductions in the third time reduction. Either control may be adopted.

In addition, as control when various decisions are made in the above-mentioned 1st time reduction, 2nd time reduction, and 3rd time reduction, you may apply it in combination suitably based on the above-mentioned content.
For example, the following control may be performed.
During the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state, non-time saving gaming state), when a jackpot symbol is determined to set the time saving gaming state, the first time saving is set after the end of the special game, and the special symbol When the number of fluctuations (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, the second time saving is set and the symbol that is set to set the time saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time saving When a symbol, a time-saving winning symbol, a small winning symbol prescribed to set a time-saving game state, a losing symbol prescribed to set a time-saving game state, etc.) is determined, a third time-saving symbol is set.
During the first time saving, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time saving gaming state, the first time saving is ended, a new first time saving is set after the special game ends, and the number of changes of the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, it is determined that the first time saving is continued without setting the second time saving, and a time saving gaming state is set. When a symbol (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is defined to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, the third time-saving symbol is determined. Continue the first time reduction without setting.
During the second time reduction, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time reduction gaming state, the second time reduction is ended, a new first time reduction is set after the end of the special game, and the number of changes in the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) reaches the predetermined number of time saving activation times LN, the currently set second time saving is continued without setting a new second time saving, and the time saving game state is entered. (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) When it is determined, the second time reduction is continued without setting the third time reduction.
During the third time reduction, when a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time reduction game state, the third time reduction is ended, and after the special game is over, a new first time reduction is set, and the number of changes in the special symbol is determined. When (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) reaches a predetermined number of time saving activations LN, the third time saving is terminated, a second time saving is newly set, and a time saving gaming state is set. When a symbol (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, a new number of winning symbols is determined. The currently set 3rd time reduction is continued without setting the 3rd time reduction.
When a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time-saving game state during a high-probability time-saving game state or a high-probability non-time-saving game state (that is, during a high-probability game state), after the special game ends, When the first time saver is set and the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/fail lottery is derived) reaches a predetermined time saver activation number LN, the second time saver is not set and a time saver gaming state is set. A symbol that has been determined has been determined (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is designated to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) Sometimes, the third time reduction is not set.
By doing as described above, there are many variations in the settings of the time-saving gaming state, so it is possible to increase the player's interest.

As mentioned in (31) above, if a pachinko machine is provided with a second time reduction and a setting value that is associated with settings related to ball dispensing, the same time reduction will occur no matter which setting value is used. You may set the number of activations LN.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the degree of advantage between each setting value changes excessively due to the setting of the second time saving.
In addition, the main control board 100 is configured to count the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery are derived) in order to determine whether the number of time saving activations LN has been reached. Counting is always performed during low probability gaming states (low probability non-time saving gaming states, low probability time saving gaming states) and is not performed during high probability gaming states (high probability non time saving gaming states, high probability time saving gaming states). You can do it like this. That is, during the low probability gaming state, the above-mentioned counting may always be performed regardless of whether or not the time saving gaming state is set.
By doing so, the second time saving can be reliably set only during the low probability gaming state.
In addition, the above-mentioned count is calculated at the time when the RAM is cleared by a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the RAM clear button to clear the RAM) when the power is turned on, and for pachinko machines that have a set value. The time when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting value, the time when the count value from the above count reaches the number of time saving activations LN and the second time saving is set, the time when the jackpot is won (a special event based on the winning of the small winning) The game may be cleared at the start of the game) or at the end of the special game. In addition, clearing at the time when the second time reduction is set, clearing at the time of winning the jackpot (starting time of special game based on winning of small win), or clearing at the end of special game may be always executed. .
In addition, the timing at which it is determined that the count value by the above-mentioned count has reached the number of time saving activations LN is the time when the special symbol fluctuation starts, the time when the special symbol fluctuation ends, and the time when the special symbol fluctuation ends and the stop display time is reached. It may be any time point that has elapsed. Then, the second time saving may be set at a timing when it is determined that the count value obtained by the above-mentioned counting has reached the number of time saving activation times LN.

In addition, as the end conditions for the second time reduction, (10a) winning the jackpot is set, and (10b) the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the second starting winning. (10c) The total number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the opening 16 reaches the time saving number, (10c) The number of fluctuations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches a specific number. , (10d) The number of small winnings must reach a predetermined number of times. Any one or more of (10a) to (10c) may be set.
For example, the following contents can be set as the end conditions for the first time reduction, the second time reduction, and the third time reduction.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine, the jackpot symbol XA1 (in the variable performance, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all "7") and jackpot symbol XA2 (in the variable production, the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol, and the third stop symbol are all other than "7"), and the time-saving game The time-saving symbol JD1 that is determined to set the state (in a variable production, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are the same odd number symbols other than "7", and the third stop symbol is "7") When the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches a predetermined number of times LN (for example, 1000 times), the time saver is activated. It is assumed that the gaming state is set and that it is possible to win a small prize in the lottery.
In this pachinko machine, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol The game ends when the total number of variations based on the ball entering and the number of variations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches 100 times (time saving number), and the game enters the second starting winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering reaches 10 times (a specific number of times), and to end when the number of small winnings reaches 2 times (a predetermined number of times).
In addition, the first time reduction set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol The process ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 reaches 50 times (time saving number), and the number of fluctuations based on the number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations based on the ball reaches 4 times (a specific number of times), and to end when the number of small winnings reaches 1 time (a predetermined number of times).
In addition, the second time reduction, which is set when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined number of time reduction activations LN, It is set to end based on the winning, and the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the number of fluctuations based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16 is It ends when 600 times (time saving number) is reached, and it ends when the number of variations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 reaches 50 times (specific number), and winning a small hit. It can be set to end when the number of times reaches 10 (predetermined number of times).
In addition, the third time saving, which is set when the time saving symbol JD1 is determined, is set to end based on the winning of the jackpot, and the number of changes based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15. And it ends when the total number of fluctuations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 reaches 60 times (time saving number), and it is based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. It can be set to end when the number of fluctuations reaches 8 times (a specific number of times) and ends when the number of small winnings reaches 3 times (a predetermined number of times).
By doing as described above, it is possible to increase the variety of endings of the time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to provide various gaming features.

In addition, regarding the second time reduction, if the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be the same as in the normal gaming state (non-time reduction gaming state), the second starting prize opening 16 will be opened during the second time reduction. In order to easily maintain this state, it is necessary to set the above-mentioned probability of winning during the normal gaming state to a certain degree. In this case, the movable piece 16b is designed to be able to protrude and retract from the game board 11, and when the movable piece 16b protrudes from the game board 11, the movable piece 16b guides the game ball to the second starting prize opening 16. On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the game ball is not guided to the second starting prize opening 16 and the ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. By configuring the ball so that it does not enter the starting prize opening 16, and by setting the projecting time (opening time) of the movable piece 16b to be shorter during the normal gaming state than during the second time reduction, In the case of winning in the drawing of normal symbols, the rate of entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 can be lowered than in the case of winning in the drawing of normal symbols during the second time reduction. can.

Moreover, the number of times that the second time saving can be set may be only one time between winning a jackpot and winning the next jackpot. Specifically, after the jackpot is won (the end of the special game), the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations LN. After the second time saving is set due to the arrival, the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning/failure lottery is derived, that is, the count value from the above count) is set again without winning the jackpot is the number of time saving activation times LN The second time reduction may not be set even if the time limit is reached.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the time-saving gaming state from being set too much and the gambling nature from becoming too high.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 100 controls, during the low probability gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), to determine whether the number of time saving activations LN has been reached. The number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) is counted, but after winning the jackpot (the end of the special game), the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived) is reduced in time. After the second time reduction is set due to reaching the activation number LN, the above-mentioned counting may be stopped.
By doing so, the processing load on the main control board 100 can be reduced.

In addition, symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state during the first time saving or second time saving (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, time-saving symbols) Even if the first time reduction or the second time reduction is set to continue without setting the third time reduction when a losing symbol, etc. for which a gaming state is set is determined, the first time reduction or the second time reduction is set. , the final lottery of the first time saving or the second time saving (the winning lottery just before the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above count) reaches the number of time saving) According to When a losing symbol, etc.) is determined, a third time saving may be set.
By doing so, it is possible to increase the continuity of the time-saving gaming state and increase the player's interest.
In addition, in the case of setting as described above, the final lottery of the first time reduction or the second time reduction (the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the winning lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) A symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are determined to set a time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming) When a losing symbol, etc. for which a state is determined) is determined, the first time saving or second time saving is ended and a non-time saving gaming state is set, using the end of the special symbol variation in the final round as an opportunity. , After the non-time-saving gaming state is set, a stop display of the symbol for which the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state is set is performed, and after the stop display is performed, a third time-saving game may be set. In addition, in conjunction with the above-mentioned setting of the non-time-saving gaming state, the transmission of the external signal (time-saving signal) that is sent to the outside of the pachinko machine in the time-saving gaming state and indicating that it is in the time-saving gaming state is terminated, and the third The external signal may be transmitted again in accordance with the time reduction setting.
By doing so, it is possible to reliably execute the end of the time-saving gaming state and control the new settings, and it is also possible to reliably notify the outside of the pachinko machine of the switching of the time-saving gaming state.

In addition, if the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN, if a small win is won by the win/fail lottery. The setting may be such that both the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning and the setting of the second time saving when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches the number of time saving activation times LN are executed.
In addition, when set in this way, the second time saving is (a) from the winning of the small winning until the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed and the small winning game starts, and (b) from the start of the small winning game to the end. It may be set at any timing up to (c) after the end of the small winning game.
By doing this, in the case where a small win and the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the second time reduction overlap, there are many variations in the timing at which the second time reduction is set, so it is rich in variation. It becomes possible to add more gameplay.

In addition, if the second time reduction and third time reduction are installed, the advantage may be set to be the same for both the second time reduction and the third time reduction (in other words, it is possible to set the advantage to be the same in the lottery of normal symbols. You may set the probability that the normal symbol will be the same, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting winning hole 16 to be the same), or you may set the advantage to be different (the normal symbol lottery Any one or more of the probability of winning, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 may be set differently). For example, a setting may be made in which the second time reduction is more advantageous than the third time reduction (a setting that increases the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols, a setting that shortens the fluctuation time of normal symbols, and a setting that increases the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols, and You may perform any one or more of the settings that increase the opening time of the starting prize opening 16).
By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the advantages of the second time saving and the third time saving, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.
In addition, when the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, that is, the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activation times LN, it is determined that the time-saving gaming state is set. When a symbol (such as the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol, small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbol that is defined to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) is determined, the third The second time saving may be set in preference to the time saving.
By doing so, even if the conditions for setting the second time reduction and the third time reduction overlap, the second time reduction can be reliably set.

(39) Also, regarding the first time reduction, second time reduction, and third time reduction, the change of special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and the change of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16. Simultaneously change the special symbols based on the ball entering (that is, both the reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the holding based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16) It is also installed in a pachinko machine (hereinafter also referred to as a simultaneous play machine) that is set to perform so-called simultaneous play control, which processes both holds at the same time when the above is stored. 38) may be configured.
When the simultaneous spinning machine is equipped with a first time saver, a second time saver, and a third time saver, based on the entry of the game ball into either the first start winning opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16. Symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state (the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, time-saving winning symbols, small winning symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state, losing symbols that are designed to set a time-saving gaming state) etc.) is determined, and during the variation of the special symbol based on the determination, the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the above-mentioned count When the count value) reaches the predetermined time saving activation number LN, when the special symbol is changing based on the entry of the game ball into either one of the above, the entry of the game ball into any other of the above. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol based on the ball (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches the number of times LN of time reduction activation, a second time reduction is set, and the second time reduction is set. Although a stop display of a symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state determined based on the entry of a game ball into one of the above-mentioned balls is later performed, even if the third time-saving game state is controlled not to be set. good.
In addition, a symbol that is determined to set a time-saving gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into either the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 (the above-mentioned time-saving symbol, time-saving winning symbol , a small winning symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, a losing symbol that is set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and while the special symbol is changing based on the decision, either one of the winning symbols is decided. When the jackpot symbol is determined based on the game ball entering the game ball (the jackpot has been won), during the fluctuation of the special symbol based on the game ball entering the game ball into either one of the above, A time-saving game in which a first time-save is set based on the jackpot symbol being determined based on the entry of the game ball into one of the above-mentioned balls after setting the first time-save. Although the symbols for which the state is set are displayed in a stopped state, the third time saving may be controlled not to be set.
By doing this, even if the conditions for setting the first time reduction or the second time reduction are met in the simultaneous turning machine, and the conditions for setting the third time reduction are met simultaneously, It is possible to reliably set the first time reduction or the second time reduction.

(40) Also, if the time-saving gaming state is set after the special game ends based on the determination of a jackpot symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state (i.e., when the first time-saving gaming state is set), , during a predetermined period of time (for example, the most A period shorter than a long variable time, a period shorter than the time from the start to the end of a special game when the number of round games is the smallest (for example, 10 seconds, etc.), on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. A display instructing to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hitting) is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the entire area of the display section 21a, etc.), and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the above-mentioned predetermined Even if a mark indicating the launch of a game ball toward the second game area 12b is continued to be displayed in an area smaller than the area (for example, the upper right corner area or the lower right corner area of the display section 21a). good.
By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware that the time-saving game state will be set after the end of the variable performance and special game, and at the same time, after the end of the variable performance and special game, the player can move toward the second game area 12b. It is possible to give an impression that the player will launch the game ball in a different manner.

In addition, when the time-saving gaming state is set because the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value based on the above-mentioned count) reaches the time-saving activation number LN (i.e., the second time-saving is set), during the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time when the number of time-saving activations LN is reached (during the execution of fluctuation effects), for a period shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, than the shortest fluctuation time). for a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds, etc.), in a specific area on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (for example, an area about half the size of the display section 21a) toward the second gaming area 12b. After a period shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined period has elapsed, an area smaller than the above-mentioned specific area (for example, the area in the upper right corner of the display section 21a A mark indicating the launch of the game ball toward the second game area 12b may continue to be displayed in the lower right corner area, etc.).
By doing this, it is possible to make the player recognize that the time-saving gaming state will be set after that during the variable performance at the time when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the time-saving activation number LN, and the above-mentioned Even if a short variation time is determined as the variation time at the time, the game ball is launched toward the second gaming area 12b after the completion of the variation performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Can make an impression.
Note that the above-mentioned predetermined area and the above-mentioned specific area may be the same area or may be different areas. Moreover, the above-mentioned specific area may be a part of the above-mentioned predetermined area. In addition, an area where a mark suggesting launching of a game ball toward the second game area 12b is displayed when the first time saver is set, and a second game area 12b when the second time saver is set. The areas in which the marks indicating the launch of the game ball toward are displayed may be the same area, different areas, or areas of different sizes. Further, one region may be a part of the other region.

In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, i.e., the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches the time saving activation number LN, a jackpot is won by the win/fail lottery, and the time saving gaming state is set. If a jackpot symbol is determined that will not be played, the second time reduction may be set after the special game based on the winning of the jackpot ends.
By doing so, there are many opportunities to set the time-saving gaming state, so that the player's interest can be increased.
In addition, when the number of changes in the special symbol (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is derived, that is, the count value from the above-mentioned count) reaches the time saving activation number LN, a jackpot is won by the win/fail lottery, and the player is in a high probability gaming state. If a jackpot symbol is determined to set a time-saving gaming state (high-probability time-saving gaming state), after the special game based on the winning of the jackpot ends, the jackpot is won without setting the second time-saving gaming state. A high probability game state and a time-saving game state (high probability time-saving game state) based on the symbols may be set.
By doing so, after the special game ends, a game state that is more advantageous to the player is set, so that the player's interest can be increased.

(41) In pachinko machines that are set so that special games are executed only based on winning a jackpot, the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time) in a variation that has reached the number of time-saving activations LN has elapsed, or the relevant stop The second time reduction may be set at a predetermined time point after the display time has elapsed.
In addition, in so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machines, if the result of the lottery at the time when the number of time-saving activations LN is reached is a loss, the stop display time will elapse after the fluctuation of the special symbol at that point stops. The second time reduction may be set at any point in time (for example, at the time when the variation of the special symbol stops, at the time when the stop display time has elapsed, etc.). In addition, if the result of the lottery at the time when the number of time-saving activations LN is reached is a small win, the end point of the small win game based on the small win win (the end point of the ending process in the small win game) Then, the second time reduction may be set.
Moreover, in a so-called simultaneous turning machine, the second time saving may be set at the start of the fluctuation when the number of time saving activations LN is reached.
By doing as described above, the second time reduction can be set at an appropriate timing according to the specifications of the pachinko machine.

(42) The pachinko machine P also includes a hall computer, a data display device that displays the number of jackpot wins (the number of special game executions), the number of changes after the end of the special game, the number of time-saving game state settings, etc. The setting may be such that a plurality of external signals can be transmitted to an external device installed outside the pachinko machine P.
For example, a plurality of jackpot signals that are transmitted based on winning a jackpot and executing a special game can be provided as external signals.
The first jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals is set to be continuously transmitted to the hall computer and data display device from the start to the end of the special game, and the jackpot signal is transmitted to the hall computer and data display device from the start to the end of the special game. It may be possible to count the number of wins (the number of times the special game is executed) and to display the number of wins. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when the first jackpot signal is received, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset.
In addition, the second jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals will be sent to the hall computer or data display device continuously from the start of the special game until the end of the time-saving game state (third time-saving) that is set after the end of the special game. The third time reduction may be set to be transmitted to the hall computer or the data display device so that the number of times the third time reduction is performed can be counted and the number of times can be displayed. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when the second jackpot signal is received, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset.
In addition, the third jackpot signal among the plurality of jackpot signals is set to be continuously sent to the hall computer and data display device from the time the second time reduction is set until the end, and The device may be able to count the number of times the second time saving is performed and also display the number of times. Further, in the hall computer or the data display device, when receiving the third jackpot signal, the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game may be reset. Moreover, in the data display device, when the third jackpot signal is received, it may be configured to notify that the second time reduction has been set. In addition, regarding the third jackpot signal, instead of being sent continuously from the time the second time reduction is set until it ends, it is sent only when the second time reduction is set. Good too.
Moreover, the above-mentioned jackpot signal may not be sent to both the hall computer and the data display device, but may be sent to only one of them. For example, the first jackpot signal and the second jackpot signal may be sent only to the data display device, and the third jackpot signal may be sent only to the hall computer.
By doing as described above, it becomes possible to know from the outside of the pachinko machine P that the second time reduction has been set.

(43) In the above embodiment, after the above-mentioned continuous jackpot number condition (the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number), the determination ratio of the fluctuation time is set to be longer than before the continuous jackpot number condition is satisfied. By increasing the amount, the number of special games executed per unit time (number of jackpot wins per unit time) was reduced, but in order to reduce the number of special games executed per unit time. The control method by the main CPU 101 is not limited to this. A specific example will be described below.
As mentioned above, continuous jackpots mean winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state and moving to at least one of the time-saving gaming state or the high probability gaming state, and then continuing without shifting to the normal gaming state. This refers to the jackpot that was won.

(Specific example 1)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.), in the variations executed after this, (A) the variation time of the special symbol variation executed before this The determination ratio may be set to be high for long fluctuation times. In addition, in the special games to be executed after this, (B) an opening time that is longer than the opening time of the special games executed before this may be set, and (C) the opening time may be set to be longer than the opening time of the special games executed before this. (D) The ending time may be set to be longer than the ending time of the special game that was previously executed, or (D) the interval time may be set to be longer than the interval time of the special game that was executed before this. (E) A longer opening time may be set than the opening time of the big prize opening 18 in the special game that was executed before this.

(Specific example 2)
For example, when the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) will be applied in the fluctuations and special games executed after this. You can also set it as follows.
(Specific example 3)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times, etc.) and the total number of rounds executed during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20 times, etc.), In the fluctuations and special games to be played, settings may be made as shown in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 4)
For example, when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number or after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game) If the number of rounds to be executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.), the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations to be performed thereafter, In the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game to be executed thereafter, the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set.
(Specific example 5)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the total number of rounds executed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 20 times, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). If the number of rounds executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) (such as set jackpot symbols, etc.), in the fluctuations related to winning the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after that, , the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game to be executed thereafter.

(Specific example 6)
For example, if the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot during a continuous jackpot is less than a specific number (for example, 10 times), or when all special games during a continuous jackpot If the total number of fluctuations after the end reaches a specific number, the fluctuations related to the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after this, as well as the special games based on the winning of the jackpot and the specials executed after this. In the game, settings may be made as shown in (A) to (E) above.
(Specific example 7)
For example, during a continuous jackpot, the number of fluctuations from the end of a predetermined special game to winning the next jackpot is less than a certain number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.), and the decision is made when the next jackpot is won. If the jackpot symbol that has been awarded is a specific symbol (such as a jackpot symbol that is set to have a relatively large number of rounds executed during the special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), The above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a variation or a variation executed thereafter, or in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game executed thereafter.

(Specific example 8)
For example, when the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 balls, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E ) may also be set.
(Specific example 9)
For example, the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is a specific symbol (during a special game). If the number of rounds executed is relatively large (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.), the fluctuations related to winning the jackpot and the fluctuations executed after that, , the above-mentioned (A) to (E) may be set in a special game based on the winning of the jackpot or a special game to be executed thereafter.

(Specific example 10)
For example, if the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during a continuous jackpot and the number of fired balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,500 balls, etc.), the above-mentioned fluctuations and special games that will be executed from then on will be It may be set as shown in (A) to (E).
(Specific example 11)
For example, the difference between the number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots and the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1,500, etc.), and the jackpot symbol determined in the jackpot after reaching the predetermined number is specified. (Jackpot symbols with a relatively large number of rounds executed during the special game (10 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.)), changes related to winning the jackpot and subsequent executions. In the fluctuations to be made, and also in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot and the special game to be executed thereafter, settings as described in (A) to (E) above may be made.

(Specific example 12)
For example, the fluctuation pattern determined at the time of winning a predetermined jackpot during a continuous jackpot is a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (3 seconds, 6 seconds, etc.)) In this case, the settings may be set as in (A) above in the variations to be executed after this, or the above-mentioned changes may be set in the special game based on the winning of the jackpot or the special game to be executed after this. It may be set as shown in (B) to (E).
(Specific example 13)
For example, when the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are stored, before the fluctuation based on the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number start, the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number are Pre-judgment processing is set to be executed to perform various judgments regarding the winning/failure lottery and the determination of special symbols regarding random numbers (determination of whether or not to win a jackpot, determination of the type of special symbol to be determined, etc.), During consecutive jackpots, if the judgment result from the preliminary judgment process is the predetermined content (for example, the pending items stored at the end of the special game include those that win the jackpot, etc.), In the variations and special games to be executed after this, settings as described in (A) to (E) above may be made.

(Specific example 14)
For example, when the total elapsed time during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes, etc.), in the fluctuations and special games that will be executed from then on, as in (A) to (E) above, May be set.
(Specific example 15)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.), and the total elapsed time during the consecutive jackpots is less than or equal to the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), then For fluctuations and special games, settings may be made as shown in (A) to (E) above.

(Specific example 16)
For example, when the total execution time of special games during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), the above-mentioned (A) to (E) are You can also set it like this.
(Specific example 17)
For example, if the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times, etc.) and the total execution time of special games during the consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes, etc.), then The variations and special games to be executed may be set as shown in (A) to (E) above.

Even when the setting is made as described above, the number of special games executed per unit time (the number of jackpot wins per unit time) can be reduced, as in the above-described embodiment. This prevents the occurrence of situations where the gambling nature becomes extremely high, such as when a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, and the number of prize balls won by the player increases rapidly. Can be appropriately prevented.

Furthermore, the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 described above can be set in combination with each other as long as no contradiction occurs. Further, regarding the settings (A) to (E) described above when various conditions are satisfied, only one or a plurality of settings may be set.

The main control board 100 is also provided with a counter (consisting of a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of consecutive jackpots, and the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number based on the count value of the counter. It may be determined whether or not. Then, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 described above are satisfied, any one or more of the settings (A) to (E) described above may be set.
In addition, since the game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 during the high probability time saving game state, the continuous jackpot is a jackpot won mainly based on the second special drawing random number. Therefore, the above-mentioned counter counts the number of successive jackpots based on the second special drawing random number, and resets the count value of the counter when a jackpot is won based on the first special drawing random number. If the number of successive jackpots is set as follows and the number of successive jackpots based on the second special drawing random number reaches a predetermined number, it is determined that the conditions regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied. You may also do so. In other words, if you win a jackpot based on the first special drawing random number, it will be treated as if the continuous jackpot has been interrupted, and if you do not win a jackpot continuously based on the second special drawing random number, the above-mentioned specific examples 1- The conditions regarding the number of consecutive jackpots in 17 may be set so as not to be satisfied.
If you win a jackpot based on the second special random number, it is decided to execute a special game in which the number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively larger than if you win a jackpot based on the first special random number. There is a high possibility that the number of prize balls won by a player will increase rapidly in a short period of time. In the case of setting as described above, only the jackpot based on the second special drawing random number is subject to the condition regarding the number of consecutive jackpots, so settings (A) to (E) described above will be made excessively. The situation can be prevented.

Further, when the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, (A) regarding the variable time and at least one of (B) to (E) regarding the various times during the special game are set in combination. Sometimes, after the various conditions are met, both the variable time and the various times during the special game are longer than before the various conditions are met, but the rate of change in the variable time is greater than the rate of change of the various times during the special game. may be set to be larger.
For example, when the conditions in Example 1 are met and (A) and (B) are set in combination, the variation time of the special symbol variation is 3 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number. or 6 seconds are likely to be determined, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the special symbol will be 13 seconds or 15 seconds (2.5 times to 5 times the fluctuation time before reaching the predetermined number) In addition, the opening time during the special game is 10 seconds before the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, and after the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, The opening time during the game may be set to be 15 seconds (changed to 1.5 times the opening time before reaching the predetermined number of times).

In addition, when the various conditions in Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and (A) regarding the fluctuation time is set, after the various conditions are satisfied, the fluctuation pattern becomes less reachable than before the various conditions are satisfied. Although both the fluctuation time and the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a reach fluctuation pattern become longer, the rate of change of the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the rate of change of the fluctuation time of fluctuations that become a fluctuation pattern without reach. It may be set so that it becomes larger, or it may be set so that the rate of change in the variation time of the variation that becomes the no-reach variation pattern is greater than the rate of change of the variation time of the variation that becomes the reach variation pattern. .
For example, if (A) is set when the conditions in Example 2 are met, before the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the no-reach fluctuation pattern is 3. seconds or 6 seconds are likely to be determined, and after the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern is 13 seconds or 15 seconds (before reaching the predetermined number) In addition, before the total number of rounds executed during a continuous jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation of the fluctuation becomes a reach fluctuation pattern. 20 seconds or 30 seconds is easily determined as the time, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is 180 seconds or 240 seconds (when the predetermined number of rounds is reached). The setting may be made so that the change (6 to 12 times the change time before reaching the change) is easily determined.
In addition, when (A) is set when the conditions in Specific Example 8 are met, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches the predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation becomes a no-reach fluctuation pattern. 3 seconds or 6 seconds are likely to be determined as the maximum number of balls, and after the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, 13 seconds or 15 seconds (predetermined In addition, before the total number of prize balls paid out during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the reach fluctuation 20 seconds or 30 seconds is likely to be determined as the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the pattern, and after the total number of rounds executed during consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined number, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation that becomes the reach fluctuation pattern is set to 40 seconds or 30 seconds. It may be set so that 45 seconds (varies approximately 1.3 to 2.25 times the variation time before reaching the predetermined number) is easily determined.
In addition, if the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, at least one of (B) to (E) regarding various times during special games is set without setting (A) regarding variable time. By doing so, after the various conditions are met, although the variable time does not change, the execution time of the special game (opening time, ending time, interval time, opening time of the big prize opening 18) may be made longer. . In addition, in this case, for example, the opening time after satisfying various conditions is longer than other times (ending time, interval time, opening time of the big prize opening 18) after satisfying the conditions. It may be set to be longer, or it may be set so that the rate of change in the opening time before and after satisfying various conditions is greater than the rate of change in other times.

Furthermore, if the various conditions in the above specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, other settings may be made instead of the settings as in (A) to (E) above. For example, if various conditions are met, in the regular symbol game to be executed after this, (F) the determination ratio of the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of the regular symbol that was executed before this will be higher. (G) The opening time may be set to be shorter than the opening time of the movable piece 16b of the second starting prize opening 16 before this.
Also, for example, if various conditions are met, after the end of the subsequent special game, (H) the number of time reductions set after the end of the previous special game is set to be smaller than the number of time reductions set after the end of the previous special game. It's okay.
By setting in this way, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting prize opening 16 is reduced, and the chances of winning or losing lottery are also reduced, so the number of special games executed per unit time (per unit time The number of jackpot wins) can be reduced.

For example, if various conditions are met, in the special game to be executed after this, (I) a mode in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the previous special game (for example, 0.5 seconds) The grand prize opening 18 may be set to open and close in a manner such as repeating opening and closing for 1.0 seconds a predetermined number of times.
When set in this way, the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game is reduced, and the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even if a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, the number of prize balls that the player obtains can be suppressed, resulting in an extremely high level of gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent such situations from occurring.

Also, for example, if various conditions are met, when the special symbol changes from now on, (J) when both the first special symbol random number and the second special symbol random number are stored, the second special symbol It may be set so that the first special figure random number is processed in priority to the random number.
When set in this way, a special game with a smaller number of rounds will be executed when a jackpot is won based on the first special drawing random number than when a jackpot is won based on the second special drawing random number. Since the percentage of winning balls is high, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the special game decreases, and the expected value of the total number of prize balls per unit time can be reduced. As a result, even if a large number of special games are executed in a concentrated manner over a short period of time, the number of prize balls that the player obtains can be suppressed, resulting in an extremely high level of gambling. It is possible to appropriately prevent such situations from occurring.

Further, as for the settings (F) to (J), just one of them may be set, or a plurality of them may be set, similarly to (A) to (E). Further, it may be set in combination with at least one of (A) to (E).
In addition, in the settings (A) to (G), when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, various times become longer, but while the predetermined time is , and other times may be set to be shorter. For example, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the determination ratio of the variation time that is longer than the variation time of the special symbol variation that was executed before is set to be higher ((A) ), an ending time shorter than the ending time of the special game that was executed before this may be set (setting (C)).
In this case, after the various conditions of Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the time from the start of the fluctuation until the end of the special game will be too long, and the interests of the players will be extremely hindered. It is possible to prevent such situations from occurring.

In addition, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, and the settings of (A) to (E) are made and various times are made to be longer, specific effects are executed within the longer period. The frequency may be set to be high.
For example, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the setting is made so that the determination ratio of the variation time longer than the variation time of the previously executed special symbol variation is set (Setting (A) ), when a long variation time is determined, it may be set so that the frequency of execution of a suggestive effect (specific effect) indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in the corresponding variation may be increased. Further, it may be set so that the frequency of execution of a special effect (specific effect) indicating content unrelated to the result of the winning lottery may be increased.

In addition, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, an opening time that is longer than the opening time of the special game that was executed before this is set (setting of (B)), If the ending time is set to be longer than the ending time of the special game that was executed before this (setting of (C)), the ending time will be stored at that point until the opening time or ending time has passed. It may be set to increase the frequency of execution of a look-ahead effect (specific effect) that suggests that there is something that can be determined to be a jackpot among the pending games.
Note that there are no particular limitations on the degree of change in the frequency of execution of a specific performance. For example, a specific effect may not be executed before the above conditions are met, but the specific effect may be set to be executed after the above conditions are met; Before the various conditions were met, specific effects were executed at a predetermined execution rate, but after the various conditions described above were met, the specific effects were executed at a higher rate than the above-mentioned predetermined execution rate. You may also set it so that it is executed.
In this case, as described above, while appropriately preventing the occurrence of a situation where the gambling nature becomes extremely high, it is possible to prevent the players' interest from decreasing due to the lengthening of various times. can be prevented.

In addition, if one or more of (A) to (J) are set when the various conditions of Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, the corresponding The setting may be canceled (that is, the setting may be returned to the setting before satisfying the various conditions described above).
Note that the predetermined termination conditions include, for example, that a predetermined number of changes (for example, 30 times) have been made due to the settings made after the various conditions described above have been met, and that the changes have been made after the various conditions described above have been met. Depending on the settings, the special game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (the jackpot has been won a predetermined number of times), or it has been determined that the continuous jackpot has been interrupted (for example, when the regular game is played after the special game ends) It is possible to set the following information: the jackpot symbol for which the state is set has been determined, the normal gaming state has been set, a predetermined number of changes have been made since the normal gaming state was set, etc. .
In this case, the setting for preventing a situation where gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, if various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of (A) to (J) are set, at least one of the time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state is Even when the game continues (that is, when you are in a continuous jackpot), if certain conditions are met (for example, a special game with a relatively large number of game balls that can be acquired is When the associated jackpot symbol ).
In this case, the setting for preventing a situation where gambling becomes high continues for a long time, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

In addition, if the various conditions in Specific Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, specific external information may be transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine P (for example, to the pachinko machine such as a hall computer) in order to transmit the settings made based on this. Alternatively, in order to notify that the above settings have been made, a predetermined display (for example, a specific It may also be possible to display a mark image, display a warning message such as "Game progress time is changing", or light a lamp in a predetermined manner.
Further, when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied, history information indicating this may be stored in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100 or the sub RAM 303 of the sub control board 300. In this case, it is possible to understand the frequency and period during which settings are made to prevent situations where the gambling nature becomes high, and this can be used to help develop pachinko machines that are less likely to cause situations where the gambling nature becomes high. can.

In addition, the pachinko machine P is provided with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables 114 in which the length of the fluctuation time that can be determined and the determination ratio of the fluctuation time are set to be different, and a jackpot is achieved in a state where various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied. When a player wins a jackpot, after the special game based on the jackpot ends, a variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to a different variation pattern table 114 based on the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. Assume that it has been set.
Even with these settings, if you win the jackpot while meeting the various conditions mentioned above and setting one or more of (A) to (J), No matter which jackpot symbol is determined at the time of winning the jackpot, the variation pattern (variation time) may be determined by referring to the common variation pattern table 114.
Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and jackpot symbol When a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the first fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio is set high, and a jackpot is won without satisfying the various conditions described above, and jackpot symbol X2 is determined. After the special game based on the jackpot ends, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined by referring to the second fluctuation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of relatively short fluctuation time is set high. It is assumed that it was set to . When the settings are set in this way, even if you win a jackpot with the above conditions met and either jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, after the special game based on the jackpot ends, The variation pattern (variation time) is determined by referring to the third variation pattern table 114 in which the determination ratio of variation times longer than the variation time that can be determined by the first variation pattern table 114 is set higher. It's okay.

Further, the pachinko machine P may be provided with a variation pattern table 114 as described below. The variation pattern table 114 will be specifically explained below. In addition, here, we do not take into account the time-saving award winning (determination of the time-saving symbol), and the winning of the small hit is not decided in the win/fail lottery, but it is decided when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. An example will be explained in which there are two types of jackpot symbols, X1 and X2, and one type of losing symbol, Y2.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 59 to 60, refer to the case where a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied during a high probability time saving gaming state. When the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (J) are performed, the second Tables D1, D2, and D3 may be provided to be referred to when a game ball enters the starting winning hole 16.

As shown in FIG. 59, according to table C, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, "3 seconds fluctuation" When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 50 and 124, "5 seconds fluctuation" is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 224, "10 seconds fluctuation" is determined. When a fluctuation pattern command "C2H" associated with a fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 225 and 249, "15 seconds fluctuation" is determined. A variation pattern command "C3H" associated with a variation pattern (a variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 15 seconds) is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or When the fluctuation pattern command "D0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern set to "60 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is set to 60 seconds) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 50 and 124. When the fluctuation pattern command "D1H" associated with the set fluctuation pattern) is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 125 and 174, the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" (the entire fluctuation time is set to 100 seconds) is determined. When the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" is associated with the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which A variation pattern command "D3H" associated with the variation pattern) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), according to the table D1, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 12, When the fluctuation pattern command "C0H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 13 to 25, the fluctuation pattern command "C1H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "5 seconds fluctuation" is determined. " is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 26 and 50, the fluctuation pattern command "C4H" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "50 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 50 seconds). is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 51 and 150. When the fluctuation pattern command "C5H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is between 225 and 249. A variation pattern command "C6H" is determined, which is associated with a variation pattern of "100 seconds variation".
In addition, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174. , the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 150 seconds) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern random number is 175 to 249. When there is a variation pattern of "200 seconds variation" (a variation pattern in which the entire variation time is set to 200 seconds), a variation pattern command "D5H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), according to table D2, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 24, "50 seconds When the variation pattern command "C4H" associated with the variation pattern of "variation" is determined and the variation pattern random number is 25 to 74, the variation pattern command "C5H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined. " is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 75 to 149, the fluctuation pattern command "C7H" is associated with the fluctuation pattern of "70 seconds fluctuation" (the fluctuation pattern in which the entire fluctuation time is set to 70 seconds). is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 150 and 249, the fluctuation pattern command "C6H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when jackpot symbol X1 or When the command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174. , the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 175 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined. The attached variation pattern command "D5H" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 60(c), according to table D3, when the losing symbol Y2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 249, "60 seconds A variation pattern command "C5H" associated with the variation pattern "Fluctuation" is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, regardless of the current second pending number, when the fluctuation pattern random number is 0 to 49, the fluctuation pattern of "60 seconds fluctuation" is associated with the fluctuation pattern When the command "D1H" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 50 to 124, the fluctuation pattern command "D2H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "100 seconds fluctuation" is determined and the fluctuation pattern random number is 125 to 174. When , the fluctuation pattern command "D4H" associated with the fluctuation pattern of "150 seconds fluctuation" is determined, and when the fluctuation pattern random number is between 175 and 249, the fluctuation pattern of "200 seconds fluctuation" is determined. The attached variation pattern command "D5H" is determined.

If the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 during the high-probability time-saving gaming state when the various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are not satisfied, table C is referred to and the fluctuation pattern ( In other words, when the various conditions of Examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned (A) to (J) are set during the high probability time saving gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 of table D1, table D2, or table D3.
In addition, when various conditions of specific examples 1 to 17 are satisfied and one or more of the above-mentioned settings (A) to (J) are performed during the high probability time saving gaming state, the second starting prize opening 16 When a game ball enters the game ball, the variable pattern table 114 to be referred to may be switched by satisfying a predetermined switching condition. Specifically, the variable pattern table 115 to be referred to may be switched from table D1 to table D2 to table D3 depending on the number of consecutive jackpots. Furthermore, depending on the number of fluctuations, the referenced fluctuation pattern table 114 may be switched from table D3 to table D2 to table D1.

(Other gameplay features that apply time-saving gaming state settings)
Next, an example of another gaming feature in which control is applied to set a time-saving gaming state without winning a jackpot or executing a special game will be described. Note that the following description will focus on configurations and controls that are different from those of the above-described embodiments, and descriptions of similar configurations and controls will be omitted unless necessary. Further, it is assumed that the pachinko machines P according to the following other application examples are not provided with any setting values.
(Other application example 1)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not particularly illustrated, the configuration of the game board 11 (game area 12) of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, and the installed devices and members are almost the same as those in the above-described embodiment. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, a normal gaming state (a gaming state combining a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), a second low probability time saving gaming state, similar to the above embodiment. (a game state that combines a low probability game state and a second time-saving game state) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines a high-probability game state and a second time-saving game state) is set. It is supposed to be done.
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal gaming state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a, so as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction. In this case, the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small winning game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b. As long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the grand prize opening 18 (see Fig. 3). .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, When a jackpot is won based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined. The probability of winning a jackpot during the normal gaming state is set to approximately 1/150, and the probability of winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving gaming state is set to approximately 1/110.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of After the game ball cannot enter the specific area 57 and the special game ends, a normal game state is set. Additionally, approximately 400 game balls can be acquired during the special game.
On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57 in the specific round game. After the special game ends, a high probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 10,000 times) is set. Additionally, approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired during the special game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, as in the above-described embodiment, the determination of whether or not the time-saving grant is appropriate in the lottery and the determination of the time-saving symbol in the case where the time-saving grant is won are not performed. . Instead of this, a second time-saving game state (the number of time-savings to be set is a predetermined There are a losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that the number of times (10,000 times in this application example)) is set, and a losing symbol Z2 in which it is determined that the time-saving gaming state is not set. Then, in the normal gaming state, when a loss occurs and the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state, the subsequent gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the second low probability time saving gaming state. It is supposed to be done. On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
Note that the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/500.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 and the game ball loses, the losing symbol Z1 is not determined. Also, even if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state or high probability time saving gaming state) and a losing symbol Z1 is determined. , the setting of the second time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, the game state at the time is changed. This will not happen, and the time saving number of 10,000 times will not be reset. Note that the remaining number of time reductions at that point in time is updated (that is, 1 is subtracted).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability variation settings is set to five. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the high probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination, so the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row. Then, after the special game based on the determination ends, the normal game state is forcibly set.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 1)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the second low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), Either a game state that combines the second time-saving game state) or a high-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It has become.

When a player starts playing a game, the normal gaming state is often set. During this normal game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will , there is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls do not enter the specific area 57 and the game state after the special game ends is set to the normal game state (see FIG. 61). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, during the normal gaming state, the high probability time-saving gaming state is not set through winning a jackpot or executing a special game.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal gaming state, the result of the lottery will be a loss and a loss symbol Z1 may be determined (the probability of determination is approximately 1/500). There is. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the game state is set to the second low probability time saving game state without going through jackpot winning and special games, and this second low probability time saving gaming state is used to win the jackpot. This continues until the results of the lottery are derived 10,000 times without any problem.

During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball is directed to be launched (right-handed) toward the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball is There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but the ball will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined. When the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the gaming state after the special game ends is set to a high probability time saving game state, and the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times. . That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, if the player plays right as instructed during the second low probability time saving game state, the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the high probability time saving game state. (See Figure 61). Here, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second start prize opening 16 is kept in the open state much more easily than during the normal game state, so while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, , you can almost certainly win the next jackpot and move to a high probability time-saving gaming state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you are instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right-handed hit), and follow this instruction to launch the game ball. As long as there is a jackpot, a lottery will be held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X2 will be determined. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a predetermined number of game balls enter the specific area 57, and the game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time-saving game state again, and the number of time-savings is 10,000. set to times. During the high-probability time-saving game state, as in the second low-probability time-saving game state, you can almost certainly win the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls, and the high-probability time-saving game state is set again. Ru.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, when the high probability time-saving gaming state is set, it is essentially possible to win the jackpot again during the gaming state, and to enter the high-probability time-saving gaming state again. Set. Therefore, once the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, jackpot symbol X2 can be determined consecutively until jackpot symbol X2 is determined 5 times in a row (the number of consecutive probability changes reaches the upper limit ) The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined five times in a row, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 1, when the high probability time-saving game state is set, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 is executed five times in a row without transitioning to the normal game state. be done.

Here, for example, assume that the pachinko machine P is configured so that the high probability time-saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 (400 game balls that can be acquired during the special game). . Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state is set, and similarly to the above, when the high probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot occurs without transitioning to the normal gaming state. Symbols X2 can be determined consecutively.
However, in the pachinko machine P configured in this way, since the high probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is also counted as the number of consecutive probability variations setting. Become. Then, after setting the high probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined four times in a row, the number of consecutive probability change settings reaches the upper limit, and the special game based on the determination The gaming state after the end is set to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired between the time when the jackpot symbol 400 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 1 time + 1000 game balls that can be acquired in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 4 times).

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1, as described above, the first low probability Since the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 during the probability time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot symbol X2 is determined (the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined). The number of game balls that can be obtained until the time is set is 5000 (=1000 game balls that can be obtained in one special game based on the determination of jackpot symbol X2 x 5 times).

In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine, if a jackpot is won based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, either the first jackpot symbol or the second jackpot symbol is determined. When any jackpot symbol is determined, a high probability gaming state is always set provided that the number of consecutive probability changes has not reached the upper limit number of times, but the first jackpot When a symbol is determined, a time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game, and when a second jackpot symbol is determined, a non-time-saving game state is set after the end of a special game. In addition, in this pachinko machine P, if a jackpot is won and a jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, the number of consecutive probability changes has reached the upper limit number. The number of game balls that can be obtained during the special game when the high probability game state is always set and the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 results in a jackpot is It is assumed that the number of game balls is set to be greater than the number of game balls that can be acquired during a special game when a jackpot is achieved by entering the game ball into the starting winning hole 15. Furthermore, in this pachinko machine P, during the non-time-saving game state, a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting prize opening 15, and during the time-saving game state, the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a. It is assumed that the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b in order to cause the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.

In the pachinko machine configured as described above, when the second jackpot symbol is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, after the special game based on the determination ends, the high winning symbol is Since the state shifts to a probability game state and a non-time-saving game state, the number of consecutive probability change settings increases, but a winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15 continues thereafter. Then, after that, when the first jackpot symbol is determined and the transition to the time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of consecutive probability variations has already increased, and by the time the number of consecutive probability variations has reached the upper limit, the number of consecutive probability variations has been increased. The number of times a jackpot can be won based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 is reduced, which is disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, if the pachinko machine according to other application example 1 is set to shift to the time-saving game state based on the determination of a specific losing symbol that is not a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol, the time-saving game The number of continuous probability change settings does not increase before shifting to the state, and the time saving game state is transferred with the number of continuous probability change settings being 0, so that the disadvantageous situation described above does not occur.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 1, based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol by the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state, the second Rather than transitioning to a high probability time-saving game state in which a game ball enters the starting winning hole 16, a specific losing pattern (losing pattern Z1) due to the game ball entering the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state ), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 via a low probability time saving gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state) in which the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16. Based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol by , a transition is made to a high probability time saving gaming state.
Therefore, from the time when the jackpot symbol that determines the transition to the high-probability time-saving gaming state is determined until the end of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the game ball is not allowed to enter the second starting prize opening 16. Based on this, it becomes possible to obtain gaming profits that can be awarded based on this (for example, the number of rounds during a special game that is executed based on winning a jackpot, etc.), and it becomes possible to provide novel gaming features that increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1, the time-saving gaming state is set by determining a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) during the normal gaming state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the time-saving gaming state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal gaming state.
In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the losing symbol Z1 for which the setting of the time-saving gaming state is determined is determined, the specific performance is more effective than when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. It may be set so that the execution rate of (a look-ahead performance, a reach development performance that has high expectations from the player during a variable performance, etc.) is high.

(Other application example 2)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 2 has almost the same configuration and control as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1.
However, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, if the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 and the jackpot symbol 100 high probability time saving game states are set. Since the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to approximately 1/110, which is the same as in other application example 1, it is not always possible to win the next jackpot during the high probability time-saving gaming state, but it is possible to win the jackpot. When the lottery is held 100 times, the normal gaming state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, the upper limit of the number of consecutive probability changes is not particularly set, and the conditions for setting the low probability time-saving gaming state (winning a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving gaming state) The high-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the winning lottery is performed 100 times without any error.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, when the result of a lottery based on the entry of game balls into not only the first starting winning hole 15 but also the second starting winning hole 16 is a loss, Also, there is a losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that the second time-saving gaming state (the number of time-saving games to be set is a predetermined number of times (10,000 times in this application example)) is set, or it is determined that the time-saving gaming state is not set. The losing symbol Z2 can be determined. Then, in the normal gaming state, even when a loss occurs and the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, the above-mentioned second time-saving gaming state is set. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 during the normal gaming state, the subsequent gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the second low probability time saving gaming state. It looks like this. On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined in the normal gaming state, the gaming state remains the normal gaming state.
It should be noted that the probability that a losing symbol Z1 will be determined when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/7.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, in a game state other than the normal game state (second low probability time-saving game state or high probability time-saving game state), the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. Even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the above, the second time saving gaming state is not reset. That is, in the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, even if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, the game state at that time is changed. This will not happen, and the time saving number of 10,000 times will not be reset. Note that the remaining number of time reductions at that point in time is updated (that is, 1 is subtracted).

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 2)
Regarding the flow of the game in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 2, from the normal game state, the second low probability time saving game state, to the high probability time saving game state, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 1 is the same as
In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 2, as described above, the number of time reductions in the high probability time reduction gaming state is set to 100, so if the winning lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot, the high probability The probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Here, during the high probability time saving game state, the game ball is always launched into the second game area 12b, and the game ball can pass through the gate 20. Then, when the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set, the second pending number is 4, which is the upper limit (that is, the second special drawing random number is the upper limit of 4 pending memory). ) is likely. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, as in the above-described embodiment, the second special figure random number is processed preferentially over the first special figure random number, so the above-mentioned Before the first special figure random numbers that are held and stored at the time when the normal gaming state of be exposed.

After the normal gaming state is set, the game ball is launched again toward the first gaming area 12a, and the game enters the high-probability time-saving gaming state with the aim of getting the gaming ball into the first starting prize opening 15. We will once again aim to transition to
However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 2, the losing symbol Z1 is determined in a lottery based on up to four second special symbol random numbers that are stored on hold at the time when the above-mentioned normal game state is set. Then, a second low-probability time-saving game state with a time-saving count of 10,000 times is set, and after this, a high-probability time-saving game state is reset. That is, even if the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that is pending at this point, and the game enters the second low-probability time-saving game state. By shifting, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the entered ball, the state shifts to the high probability time-saving gaming state again.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, during the normal gaming state, a certain When a losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined, it is possible to shift to a second low probability time saving game state without winning the jackpot or executing a special game, and then to a high probability time saving gaming state. There is.
As a result, when the high probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, based on the second special figure random number that is stored and stored, the high probability time saving game can be played without going through the jackpot winning and the execution of the special game. This makes it possible to re-transfer to the current state, and it becomes possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 2, the time-saving game state may be set by determining a specific small winning symbol during the normal game state, similarly to the other application example 1.

(Other application example 3)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 3 is a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, and is a pachinko machine that wins a jackpot or enters a special area described later during a small win game based on a small win win. A special game is executed when a ball enters the ball.

The configuration of the game board 11 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, and the devices and members installed on the game board 11, other than the attacker device 17, are different from those of other application examples 1 and 2. They are the same.
Although not particularly illustrated, the attacker device 17 has the same structure as the specific area 57 instead of the specific area 57 provided in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2. The internal structure is the same as that of the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, except that some special regions have different functions.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, during a special game based on winning a jackpot or during a small winning game based on winning a small winning, the large winning opening 18 is opened, and the game ball can enter the big winning hole 18. However, during the special game, the distribution member 59 stays at the first position, and the game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the special area, but all enter the general area 58. On the other hand, during a small winning game, the sorting member 59 remains at the second position, and the game balls that enter the big prize opening 18 do not enter the general area 58, but all enter the special area. It is supposed to be done.
In other words, the game ball can enter the special area only during the small winning game, and as a result, the game ball enters the special area during the small winning game based on the winning of the small winning, and the special game is executed. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, as in the above-described embodiment, other application example 1, and other application example 2, the predetermined area (specific area 57 ) The game state after the end of the special game is not set depending on whether or not a predetermined number of game balls have entered the ball. The above-mentioned game state is set depending on the winning symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, a normal gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state (the winning probability of normal symbols, the winning probability of normal symbols, A first low-probability time-saving gaming state that combines variable time and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 (same content as in the above embodiment), or a low-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state (normal symbol winning) Any game state of a second low probability time-saving game state is set, which is a combination of the probability, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening 16 (same content as in the above-mentioned embodiment).
As in the above-described embodiment, during the normal game state and during the first low probability time-saving game state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a. As long as the game ball is launched in accordance with the above, the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening 15. On the other hand, during the second low probability time-saving game state, during the special game, and during the small winning game, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b, so the game ball is launched according to this instruction. As long as the game ball is in the position, the game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the grand prize opening 18 (see FIG. 3).

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, it is possible to win a jackpot, The symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state (during left hitting), a special game is executed based on the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of continuous time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. (first low probability time saving game state), a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, if the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. Then, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state). In either case, after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving game state and the number of continuous time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the first low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are reset. becomes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the jackpot When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 is determined, and when a small winning is won, a small winning symbol Y1 is determined. That is, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (while hitting right), it is based on whether the jackpot is won (the jackpot symbol X2 is determined) or the small win is won (the small win symbol Y1 is determined). A special game is executed through the small winning game that is executed.
As shown in FIG. 62, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state, and The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 299/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, either a jackpot win or a small win is determined in the lottery, and no loss is determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the third application example, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a special game is always executed.
Further, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to one. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, in both cases where the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and the small win symbol Y1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls are played. It is now possible to obtain.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the gaming state at the time of determination is the second low probability. When the second low probability time saving gaming state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the end of the special game based on the decision while in the time saving gaming state, and the gaming state at the time of the decision was the normal gaming state. Then, after the special game ends based on the determination, the normal game state is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the second low probability time saving game state and the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low probability time saving gaming state, a first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. Since the second low probability time saving game state is then set, any of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time saving settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time saving settings will reach the upper limit, so after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the losing symbols are determined, the normal gaming state is forcibly set.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 3)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), Either the first time-saving game state (a game state that combines the first time-saving game state) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It looks like this.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the player starts playing, the normal gaming state is set. In the normal gaming state, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will: Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning hole 15, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the game state. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0), the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In addition, during the second low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Since there is a possibility that the game ball enters only into the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 during the game state. In the hit/fail lottery, as described above, a lottery result of either a jackpot winning (determining the jackpot symbol X2) or a small winning winning (determining the small winning symbol Y1) is derived. Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on the determination ends (FIG. 62, (See FIG. 63), the number of consecutive time reduction settings increases by one (the number remaining until reaching the upper limit number decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the special game will be executed continuously until the number of consecutive time saving settings reaches the upper limit number of times.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time shortening settings is 1, so if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined twice thereafter, the normal game state will be forcibly set after the special game based on the determination ends. .
In addition, as mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (upper limit number of second reserved number) is set to one. During the fluctuation based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1, a game ball enters the second start winning hole 16 and one second special symbol random number is stored pending. Therefore, even if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined twice and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the jackpot will be won one more time based on the second special random number stored in the memory at this point. The symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, and a special game based on the determination is executed. In addition, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined in the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). ), after the above-mentioned special game ends, the normal game state remains unchanged from before the execution of the special game.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state where the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 0, the pachinko machine P will be able to The special game will be executed a total of two times (a total of three times if you include the special game executed based on the jackpot or small win based on the second special figure random number that has been stored on hold).

(2) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.In contrast to (1), the first start in the normal gaming state If there is a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 15 and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low probability time saving gaming state (FIG. 62, (See Figure 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings becomes one (two times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. (see FIGS. 62 and 63), based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 2 times (1 time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).

Then, if the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, then the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win When symbol Y1 is determined once, a normal game state is forcibly set after the special game based on the determination is completed.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is one, the normal game state is set again. Until then, a special game will be executed once (two times in total if you include the special game executed based on the jackpot or small win based on the second special figure random number that has been stored on hold).

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.Also, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1 during the normal gaming state When the first low-probability time-saving game state (the number of consecutive million time-saving settings is 1) is set, if a losing symbol Z1 is further determined in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game state after the determination is the 1 is reset to the low probability time saving gaming state (see FIGS. 62 and 63). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of times the continuous time reduction setting is set becomes two times (one time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
Then, in this first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the jackpot symbol Based on the determination of X1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit is 0).
Then, even though the jackpot symbol X1 has been determined, the number of consecutive time-saving settings has reached the upper limit of three times, so after the special game based on the determination ends, a second low-probability time-saving game state is set. The normal gaming state is forcibly set.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, if a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state in which the number of consecutive time-saving settings is two, the game is entered into the second starting prize opening 16. The normal game state is set again without executing the special game based on the ball entering the ball.

In addition, in the above-mentioned first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), when the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the losing symbol Based on the determination of symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time saving settings is 3 (the remaining number of times until reaching the upper limit is 0), so after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (Fig. 62, (See Figure 63). Then, the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are repeated.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 3, in the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state, a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is generated without winning the jackpot or executing a special game. Based on the determination, the first low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of consecutive time saving settings is updated. Then, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the upper limit number of consecutive time-saving settings is set. The remaining number of times until reaching . As a result, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is executed in succession changes, creating a novelty that increases the player's interest. This makes it possible to provide more gameplay.

Note that it is not necessary to set it so that when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, it will always result in a jackpot or small win, but it may be set so that it will result in a loss with a predetermined probability. .

(Other application example 4)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 4 is also a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed pachinko machine, and the configuration of the game board 11, the devices and members installed on the game board 11, the game state to be set, All the game areas 12 where game balls are launched during each game state are the same as in the third application example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, it is possible to win a jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, as in other application example 3. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined. That is, during the normal game state or during the first low probability time saving game state (during left hitting), a special game is executed based on the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X1).
Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300 regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time-saving settings described below has not reached the upper limit, the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. (first low probability time saving game state), a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, if the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 results in a loss, the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined. The decision probability of the losing symbol Z1 is set to approximately 1/50, and the decision probability of the losing symbol Z2 is set to approximately 49/50.
Then, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (first low probability time saving gaming state). In either case, after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 10000) is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal gaming state is set after the determination.
That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving game state and the number of continuous time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the first low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are reset. becomes.

On the other hand, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is not set. That is, if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues even after the determination, and if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the corresponding Even after the determination, the first low probability time saving game state continues.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and the jackpot When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined. In other words, during the second low-probability time-saving game state (while hitting right), it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot will be won (the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 will be determined) or the small win will be won (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 will be determined). ) A special game is executed through a small winning game executed based on.

As shown in FIG. 64, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state. The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 299/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, either a jackpot win or a small win is determined in the lottery, and no loss is determined. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to the third application example, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a special game is always executed.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 64, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both 1/2. Similarly, when a small win is won, the determination probability of the small win symbol Y1 and the determination probability of the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
Further, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to two. In addition, the upper limit number of reservations of the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, four round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 400 It is now possible to obtain a number of game balls.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state. In any of the second low-probability time-saving game states, the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set after the end of the special game based on the determination. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined during the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state and the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving game is executed. The state and the number of time saving times will be set (reset during the second low probability time saving game state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, if the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number, the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first one. 2. When in the low probability time saving gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state (the number of time saving times is 100 times) is set after the special game based on the determination, and the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state. When the special game is completed based on the determination, the normal game state is set. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive time reduction settings has reached the upper limit number of times, the normal game state is set after the special game ends.
That is, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time saving game state and the number of consecutive time saving settings has not reached the upper limit number of times, the second low probability time saving gaming state and the number of time saving times are It will be reset.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit of the number of consecutive time reduction settings is set to three. In the pachinko machine P, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the low probability time saving gaming state, a first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. If so, a second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and when a jackpot symbol X3 or a small winning symbol Y2 is determined during the second low probability time saving gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state is set. Any one of these decisions will be counted as the number of consecutive time reduction settings. If these determinations are made three times in a row, the number of consecutive time saving settings will reach the upper limit, so after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol or small winning symbol described above, the above-mentioned After the losing symbols are determined, the normal gaming state is forcibly set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, the upper limit of the number of regular symbols reserved is set to 0, and the regular symbols are not reserved due to the game ball passing through the gate 20. The second low-probability time-saving gaming state set as described above ends at the start of the fluctuation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, and after that, the normal gaming state is set. ing.
Here, for example, when transitioning from the normal game state or the first low probability time saving game state to the second low probability time saving game state through the execution of a special game, the second special figure random number is not stored and stored. 2. A low probability time saving gaming state may be set. In this case, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened, and the first gaming ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 which is currently open. When the fluctuation is started based on this, the second low probability time saving game state ends. However, since the second starting prize opening 16 is still open at the time of the start of fluctuation, if a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during this time, the second special random number will reach the upper limit of two. It will be stored on hold.

In addition, as mentioned above, based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, the winning of the jackpot or small winning is guaranteed, so after the special game based on the winning ends, the second special random number A second low-probability time-saving game state may be set in a state where the game is suspended and stored. In this case, as soon as the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, a governing lottery (the lottery result is a jackpot or a small jackpot) is performed based on the second special random number that has been stored and fluctuations are started. Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the second low probability time saving game state ends immediately. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 20 after the above-mentioned special game ends, since the second low probability time saving game state has already ended, it is extremely difficult for the second starting prize opening 16 to remain in the open state. , the game ball will not enter the second starting prize opening 16.

In addition, when a winning/fail lottery is performed based on the last second special figure random number that was held and stored, the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set again in a state where the second special figure random number is not held and stored. . In this case, the same processing as described above will be performed.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 4)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 4, a normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), a first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state), Either the game state (a game state that combines the states) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (the game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game begins to progress. There is.

(1) When a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the player starts playing, the normal gaming state is set. In the normal gaming state, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 0 (that is, the remaining number of times until the upper limit is reached is 3).
During the normal gaming state, as described above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will: Since there is a possibility that the ball enters only the first starting winning hole 15, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the game state. When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Here, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0), the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, so the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of continuous time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In addition, during the second low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, Since there is a possibility that the game ball enters only into the second starting prize opening 16, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 during the game state.
In addition, when the second low probability time-saving game state is set as described above, the second special figure random number is not stored on hold. Therefore, after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the second starting winning hole 16 is opened, and a winning lottery is performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 that is currently open. Further, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number is stored pending up to the upper limit of two.

In the above-mentioned lottery, as described above, the jackpot symbol X2 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined based on the jackpot winning, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the small winning winning, or the small winning symbol One of the lottery results for determining the small winning symbol Y2 based on the winning result is derived. During the second low-probability time-saving game state, even if any of the above-mentioned symbols is determined, the second low-probability time-saving game state is reset after the special game based on the determination ends (Fig. 64, 65), the number of continuous time reduction settings increases by one (the number remaining until reaching the upper limit number decreases by one). Therefore, after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the special game will be executed continuously until the number of consecutive time saving settings reaches the upper limit number of times.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of continuous time shortening settings is one time, so if either jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small prize symbol Y1 or small prize symbol Y2 is determined twice, the special game ends based on the determination. After that, the normal gaming state is forcibly set. Furthermore, since the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is reset to 0 times.

Here, as mentioned above, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special random number used for the first winning lottery and fluctuation, two second special random numbers are reserved. be remembered. Therefore, at the time when the above-mentioned symbols are determined twice and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the remaining one second special symbol random number is stored in abeyance.
Then, a lottery is performed based on the last second special symbol random number that has been stored, and one of the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small winning symbol Y1, or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined. . Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set again (FIG. 64, (See FIG. 65), the number of continuous time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times). On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65).

Then, since the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery has been carried out, the second special random number is not stored in storage, so the second low probability time saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1. If so, the second starting prize opening 16 will be opened again, and a lottery and fluctuation will be performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 which is currently open. , Based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number will be held and stored up to the upper limit of two.
As a result, the special game will be executed continuously until either the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small prize symbol Y1 or the small prize symbol Y2 is determined twice.

On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined and the normal gaming state is set, the jackpot is won again from the normal gaming state (determination of the jackpot symbol X2), and the 2. The aim is to transition to a low probability time saving gaming state.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 0) and the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, then when you transition to the normal gaming state, the remaining amount will be Unless the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the last second special symbol random number, the second low probability time-saving game state will be repeatedly set and the special game will continue to be executed continuously. .
For example, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined when the game state is shifted to the normal game state for the first time, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 is changed to the above-mentioned determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2. A total of four special games will be executed up to the special game based on the above. In addition, when the first transition to the normal gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, and when the second transition to the normal gaming state, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y2 is determined, A total of seven special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2.

(2) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.In contrast to (1), the first start in the normal gaming state In the event that there is a loss in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the winning hole 15 and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state after the determination is set to the first low probability time saving gaming state (FIG. 64, (See Figure 65). Then, based on the determination of the losing symbol Z1, the number of consecutive time reduction settings becomes one (two times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In this first low-probability time-saving game state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1), the game ball is continuously launched into the first game area 12a. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the second low probability time-saving game state. (See FIGS. 64 and 65), based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the set number of consecutive time reductions is 2 times (1 time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
In addition, as in the case of (1), after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the first game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, and based on this, the lottery and fluctuations are performed. Furthermore, based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special pattern random numbers are stored pending up to the upper limit of two.

Then, as mentioned above, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 1) and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined. Based on this, the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2 times, so if either jackpot symbol X2, jackpot symbol X3, small prize symbol Y1 or small prize symbol Y2 is determined once, the special game ends based on the determination. After that, the normal gaming state is forcibly set. Furthermore, since the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is reset to 0 times.

(b) In the forcibly set normal gaming state, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that was previously stored and stored. When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, in addition to the second special figure random number used for the first win/fail lottery and fluctuation, two second special figure random numbers are held and stored. Therefore, at the time when the above-mentioned symbols are determined once and the normal gaming state is forcibly set, the remaining two second special symbol random numbers are held and stored.
Then, a lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number which is the first of the two stored symbols, and the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small winning symbol Y1, or the small winning symbol Y2 are drawn. One of them is determined. Here, since the normal gaming state is set at the time of the lottery, if the jackpot symbol The gaming state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 1 (2 times remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).
At this point, the remaining one second special pattern random number is reserved and stored, so one of the above-mentioned symbols is determined based on this last one second special pattern random number, and the second special pattern random number is selected again. 2 Low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the number of continuous time saving settings is 2 (one remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times).

Then, as the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery was carried out, the second special random number was not stored and stored, so the second low-probability time-saving gaming state was set based on the determination of one of the above-mentioned symbols. In this case, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened again, and a lottery and fluctuation are performed based on the entry of the first game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 which is currently open. Based on the entry of the second to third game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, the second special figure random number will be stored on hold up to the upper limit of two.
As mentioned above, at this point, the number of consecutive time reduction settings is 2 times (1 time remaining until reaching the upper limit number of times), so in the lottery based on the entry of the first game ball mentioned above, When either the jackpot symbol X2, the jackpot symbol X3, the small prize symbol Y1 or the small prize symbol Y2 is determined, the normal game state is forcibly set, resulting in the same situation as described above.

(b) In the case where the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special symbol random number that has been previously stored in the normal gaming state that has been forcibly set. The normal gaming state is forcibly set, and the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined based on the second special pattern random number that was stored first of the two that had been stored at this point. If so, the normal gaming state is set again based on the determination (see FIGS. 64 and 65).
At this point, the remaining one second special pattern random number is reserved and stored, so if the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on this last one second special symbol random number In this case, the second low-probability time-saving game state is set again (see FIGS. 64 and 65), resulting in the same situation as in (1) above.
On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the normal gaming state will continue to be set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and in this case, the same situation as in (1) above will occur. becomes.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the normal gaming state (when the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 1) and the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, then when you transition to the normal gaming state, the remaining amount will be For both of the two second special random numbers, the second low probability time-saving game state is repeatedly set and the special game continues to be executed unless the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined. Become.
For example, if the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special symbol random numbers that were stored on hold when the game state was shifted to the normal gaming state for the first time, A total of four special games will be executed, from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2. In addition, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special random number that was stored when the game state shifts to the normal game state for the first time, and the state shifts to the normal game state for the second time. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the first and second second special random numbers that were held and stored at the time of the game, the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 A total of seven special games will be executed up to the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or small win symbol Y2.
In addition, the jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special random number that was stored when the game state shifts to the normal game state for the first time, and the state shifts to the normal game state for the second time. The jackpot symbol X2 or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the first second special symbol random number that was stored on hold when the game was played, and the one that was stored on hold when the game transitioned to the normal gaming state for the third time. If the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined for both the number and the second second special symbol random number, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is selected from the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A total of 10 special games will be executed up to the special game based on the decision.

(3) When a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2) and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.Similar to the pachinko machine P according to other application example 3, If a jackpot is won in the first low-probability time-saving game state where the number of consecutive time-saving settings is 2, the special game based on the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 16 will not be executed. , the normal gaming state will be set again.
Also, in the above-mentioned first low probability time saving game state (when the number of consecutive time saving settings is 2), if the losing symbol Z1 is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, other Similarly to the pachinko machine P according to application example 3, after the determination, the normal gaming state is forcibly set (see FIGS. 64 and 65), and the above (1) to (3) are repeated. Become.

In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 4, in the normal game state or the first low probability time-saving game state, a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is generated without winning the jackpot or executing a special game. Based on the determination, the first low probability time saving game state is set, and the number of consecutive time saving settings is updated. In addition, when transitioning from the second low probability time-saving game state to the normal game state via the special game, a predetermined jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X2 ) or the small winning symbol (small winning symbol Y1) is determined, the second low probability time saving game state is set again. Then, depending on the number of times the first low-probability time-saving game state is set in the normal game state or the first low-probability time-saving game state, at the time the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the upper limit number of consecutive time-saving settings is set. The remaining number of times until reaching the normal game state changes, and it becomes possible to re-transfer to the second low probability time-saving game state depending on the lottery result at the time of transition to the normal game state, so the second low probability time-saving game During the state (until the normal game state is set again), the number of times the special game is executed continuously changes, making it possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.

Note that it is not necessary to set it so that when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, it will always result in a jackpot or small win, but it may be set so that it will result in a loss with a predetermined probability. .
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 and a loss is determined, a specific loss pattern (loss pattern) in which the first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set The symbol Z1) may be determined.
Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol for which a normal gaming state is set may be determined.
In addition, a first time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state) is set based on the determination of a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15. Instead, a specific jackpot symbol or small prize symbol is provided in which the first time-saving gaming state is set when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and the specific jackpot symbol or small prize symbol is provided. The first time-saving gaming state may be set based on the determination.

(Other application example 5)
(Overview of configuration and control)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 5 is also a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko machine. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 66, a regular figure start opening 70 into which a game ball can enter is provided at the lower center of the game area 12. Only game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter into this normal figure starting prize opening 70.

Further, at the lower left side of the regular figure starting opening 70, an entrance device 80 into which a game ball can enter is provided. As shown in FIG. 66, this entrance device 80 includes a ball entrance 81 into which game balls can enter, an opening/closing door 82 (normal electric accessory) that opens and closes the ball entrance 81, and a ball entrance 81 that allows players to enter the ball from the entrance 81. A first downstream passage 83 and a second downstream passage 84 through which the balled game ball can flow down, and which can be displaced to a first position or a second position, and when the ball enters from the ball entrance 81 when it is in the first position. A distribution member 85 that distributes the game balls to the first downstream passage 83 and distributes the game balls that entered from the ball entry port 81 to the second downstream passage 84 when in the second position, and a game that flows down the first downstream passage 83. A first gate 86 through which the ball can pass, a second gate 87 through which the game ball flowing down the second flow path 84 can pass, and the game ball that has passed through the first gate 86 and the second gate 87 are placed on the game board 11. It is equipped with an outlet (not particularly shown) for discharging to the back side.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, in the center of the left part of the gaming area 12, there is a first starting winning opening 15 equipped with an opening/closing door 90 that can be opened and closed, and a second starting winning opening equipped with an opening/closing door 91 that can be opened and closed. 16 are arranged in parallel. Further, at the lower left part of the game area 12, an attacker device 17 having the same configuration as other application examples 3 and 4 is provided.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to this other application example 5, similarly to other application examples 3 and 4, the normal game state, the first low probability time saving game state, or the second low probability time saving game state is set. Either one is set, but in either game state, the game ball is directed to be launched (left-handed) toward the first game area 12a.
Then, when the game ball flowing down the first gaming area 12a enters the normal pattern starting port 70, a drawing of a normal pattern is performed, and if the result of the drawing is a win, the opening/closing door 82 opens and the entry device 80 enters. The game ball can enter the ball opening 81, and the sorting member 85 stays at the first position or the second position, so that the game ball that enters the ball opening 81 is routed to the first downstream passage 83 or the second downstream passage 83. It is guided to the downstream passage 84. Which downstream path the game ball is guided to is determined in advance according to the set game state.

Further, when the game ball guided to the first downstream passage 83 passes through the first gate 86, the opening/closing door 90 opens (the second starting prize opening 16 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. It becomes possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second starting prize opening 16, the opening/closing door 90 is closed. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is It is set to 1.
Further, when the game ball guided to the second downstream passage 84 passes through the second gate 87, the opening/closing door 91 opens (the first starting prize opening 15 is opened), and the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. It becomes possible. Then, when two game balls enter the second starting prize opening 16, the opening/closing door 91 is closed. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is It is set to 1.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols during the non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state) is set to approximately 1/150. The opening time of the opening/closing door 82 in the event of a win is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the non-time-saving gaming state, the sorting member 85 stops at the second position, and as a result, the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is transferred to the second gate 87. By passing through, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/2, and the probability of winning is set to approximately 1/2. In this case, the opening time of the door 82 is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the first time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 stops at the first position, so that the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is routed to the first gate. By passing through 86, the first starting prize opening 15 is opened.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state) is set to approximately 1/1.1, and the probability of winning is approximately 1/1.1. In this case, the opening time of the opening/closing door 82 is 1.8 seconds (=0.9 seconds x 2 times). Then, when a winning result occurs in the normal symbol lottery during the second time-saving game state, the sorting member 85 stops at the second position, so that the game ball that enters from the ball entrance 81 is routed to the second gate. By passing through 87, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, similarly to other application examples 3 and 4, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, It is possible to win a jackpot, and if a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and if it is a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined. Note that the probability of winning the jackpot when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state.
When the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and approximately 1000 game balls can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, regardless of whether the gaming state at the time of determination is the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state), After the special game based on the determination ends, a second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set.
In addition, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, a second low probability time-saving gaming state (the number of time-savings is 100 times) is set after the determination. . On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the setting of the time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot, and it is possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot. When winning, a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and when it is a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Then, when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, either the jackpot is won (the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined), or the small win is won (the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 A special game is executed through a small winning game executed based on the above decision.

As shown in FIG. 67, the probability of winning a jackpot when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is set to approximately 1/300, regardless of the gaming state, and The probability of winning a small hit when a game ball enters the winning hole 16 is set to approximately 149/300, regardless of the gaming state. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, the probability of winning a jackpot or a small jackpot and executing a special game is approximately 1/2.
Moreover, as shown in FIG. 67, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 at the time of winning the jackpot are both 1/2. Similarly, when a small win is won, the determination probability of the small win symbol Y1 and the determination probability of the small win symbol Y2 are both 1/2.
Then, when the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, and when the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, 10 round games are executed during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 It is now possible to obtain a number of game balls.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined, if the gaming state at the time of the determination is the normal gaming state, after the special game based on the determination ends. When the second low-probability time-saving game state (the number of time-savings is 100) is set and the game state at the time of the determination is the second low-probability time-saving game state, the normal game state is entered after the special game based on the determination ends. is set.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination is either the normal gaming state or the second low probability time-saving gaming state. In this case, the second low probability time saving game state (the number of time saving times is 100) is set after the special game based on the determination ends. That is, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined during the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state and the number of time saving times are set (second low probability time saving game (reset) during this state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 67, when the losing symbol 999 times) is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of the determination is the second low probability time-saving gaming state, the setting of the time-saving gaming state is not performed. That is, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the second low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 5)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), the first low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a non time saving gaming state), Either the first time-saving game state (a game state that combines the first time-saving game state) or the second low-probability time-saving game state (a game state that combines the low-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. It looks like this.

Immediately after factory shipment or in the initial state after reset, a normal gaming state is set.
During the normal game state, a game ball can enter the normal pattern starting winning hole 70, and a lottery of normal symbols is performed based on the game ball entering the normal pattern starting winning hole 70. . When this normal symbol lottery is won, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that enters the entry device 70 is allowed to pass through the second gate 87 as described above, and the game ball passes through the gate. The second starting prize opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second starting prize opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and a lottery is held based on the entered game ball. It will be held twice.
In this lottery, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, and after the special game based on the determination ends, a second low probability time-saving game state (time-saving number of 100 times) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68) ). On the other hand, when a loss occurs, the loss symbol Z1 is determined, and after the determination, a first low probability time saving game state (999 times of time saving) is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

(1) When the second low-probability time-saving game state is set During the second low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the regular game starting prize opening 70 as well as during the normal game state. When the game ball enters the normal pattern starting prize opening 70 and wins in the lottery of normal symbols, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball that enters the entry device 70 enters the second gate. 87, and when the game ball passes through the gate, the second starting prize opening 16 is opened. Then, when one game ball enters the opened second starting prize opening 16, the second starting winning opening 16 is closed, and one winning/failure lottery is performed based on the entered game ball.

In this lottery, if you win a jackpot, the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, if you win a small win, the small win symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and if you lose, the losing symbol Z2 is determined (see Figures 67 and 68) ). Then, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y2 is determined, the second low probability time-saving game state is set again after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIGS. 67 and 68). On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1 is determined, the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Further, when the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state continues even after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).

In addition, since the number of time-saving games in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set to 100, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state will end if the above-mentioned winning lottery is performed 100 times without winning a jackpot. Become. However, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second starting prize opening 16 is frequently opened, and in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16, it is possible to win a jackpot or a small winning. Since the probability of winning is set to approximately 1/2, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state will essentially continue until the player wins the jackpot or small jackpot again.
When the second low probability time-saving game state is set, unless the jackpot symbol X2 or the small win symbol Y1 is determined in the above-mentioned winning lottery, the second low probability The probability time saving game state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or the small prize symbol Y1, if the normal game state is set after the special game based on the determination has ended, as described above, the normal symbol will be won in the lottery and the A lottery is held based on the entry of game balls into the 2-start prize opening 16. Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state (100 time saving times) is set again, and when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. is set.

(2) When the first low-probability time-saving game state is set As described above, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined in the normal game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set.
During the first low-probability time-saving game state, the game ball can enter the normal pattern starting prize opening 70 as well as during the normal game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state, but the When a winning result is achieved in the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the normal pattern starting prize opening 70, the opening/closing door 82 is opened and the game ball entering the entry device 70 is allowed to pass through the first gate 86. When the game ball passes through the gate, the first starting prize opening 15 is opened. Then, when two game balls enter the opened first starting prize opening 15, the first starting winning opening 15 is closed, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball that entered first. The first special figure random number obtained based on the game ball that entered the ball after the fluctuation is performed is stored on hold. Moreover, when the variation in progress is completed, successive lottery and variation based on the first special symbol random number stored on hold are performed.

If a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol A low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). The flow of the game after the second low probability time saving game state is set is the same as (1).
On the other hand, if there is a loss in the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is not set and the first low probability time-saving gaming state continues as it is. Furthermore, by performing the winning lottery once, the remaining number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state is decreased by 1.

Here, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, two game balls enter while the first starting prize opening 15 is opened due to the determination of a win in the drawing of normal symbols, so the first special pattern random number is The state in which one item is held and stored is maintained. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, as described above, the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state is set to 999 times, which is an odd number. Then, if the winning lottery is performed 999 times without winning a jackpot during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set (see FIG. 68). , At this point, one first special figure random number is held and stored.
Then, a win/fail lottery is performed based on the first special random number that was stored on hold at the time the normal gaming state was set, and if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special lottery based on the determination is made. After the game ends, a second low probability time saving game state is set (see FIGS. 67 and 68). Furthermore, even if there is a loss in the above-mentioned lottery and a loss symbol Z1 is determined, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set after the determination (see FIGS. 67 and 68).
In other words, after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, if a winning lottery is performed 999 times without winning a jackpot, the subsequent game state will always be the second low-probability time-saving game that is highly advantageous for the player. The state will be set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 5, when a winning lottery is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot in a predetermined gaming state (first low probability time-saving gaming state), the next lottery is performed. In the lottery, whether a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol X1) or a specific losing symbol (losing symbol Z1) is determined, the advantage for the player is A high specific gaming state (second low probability time saving gaming state) is set. As a result, it is possible to set an upper limit (so-called ceiling) on the number of winning/failure drawings before transitioning to a specific gaming state, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay that increases the player's interest.
In addition, in the case of a loss based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, a loss pattern is set in which a first low probability time saving gaming state (999 times of time saving) is set. Although only Z2 was to be determined, it is not limited to this, for example, the losing symbol Z1 in which it is determined that a second low probability time saving game state (time saving number of 100 times) is set. may be determined.

(Other application example 6)
(Overview of configuration and control)
Although not particularly illustrated, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 is not a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine, but similar to the above embodiment, a special game is executed only based on a jackpot win. It is configured to

(Summary of the structure within the gaming area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, as in the above embodiment, there is a general winning opening 14, a first starting winning opening 15, a second starting winning opening 16, a movable piece 16b, An attacker device 17, an exit 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 69).
Note that the structures, installation positions, etc. of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiments.
The structure within the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, as shown in FIG. 69, the gate 20 is provided at the upper right of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is configured such that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through it, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through it. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, almost all the game balls entering the second game area 12b are configured to pass through the gate 20.

As shown in FIG. 69, below the gate 20, a second starting prize opening 16 and a flat movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be projected and retracted into the game board 11 are installed side by side. ing.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to slope downward from the right end to the left end when it protrudes from the game board 11. And, the right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the second starting prize opening 16 is arranged to the left of the left end of the movable piece 16b. Further, the second starting prize opening 16 has a cup shape that opens upward, and the game ball that reaches the opening enters the second starting winning opening 16.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, when the movable piece 16b is protruding from the game board 11, the upper surface of the movable piece 16b is a guide member that guides the game ball to the opening of the second starting prize opening 16. By functioning as such, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 (see FIG. 70(b)). On the other hand, in the state where the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the second starting prize opening 16, and the second starting winning opening 16 It is impossible for a game ball to enter the ball (see FIG. 70(a)). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the second starting prize opening 16 is approximately the width of the flow path in the second game area 12b through which game balls flow down. Since they are the same, in the state where the movable piece 16b is protruding, almost all of the game balls that have entered the second game area 12b and passed through the gate 20 can enter the second starting prize opening 16.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols is carried out, and a variable display of the normal symbols is started. If the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a win, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b protrudes for a predetermined operating time. state (see FIG. 70(b)). On the other hand, if the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a loss, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b is moved to the game board. 11 (see FIG. 70(a)).
In addition, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the second starting prize opening 16, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
Moreover, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a predetermined number of game balls (one in other application example 6) are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 69, an attacker device 17 is provided below the second starting prize opening 16 and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the grand prize opening 18.
In addition, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the big prize opening 18, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after the special game executed based on winning the jackpot ends, a game state is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. It has become so.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a normal gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, and a gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state. 1 low probability time saving gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state which is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state, or a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state. One of the high probability time saving game states is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are defined as the frequency of entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 (input). The difficulty level of the ball (in other words, the frequency of winning/failure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16) is set to be different from each other. The specific contents of the settings will be explained in detail later.
Note that, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b. The game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the grand prize opening 18.
Then, during the normal gaming state, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, and the first During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and during the special game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second starting prize opening 16, and The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the big prize opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, and the jackpot If you win, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be determined. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize opening 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state ), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is , is set to approximately 3/300 (that is, approximately 1/100).
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 are both set to 50/100 (that is, 50%).
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71(a), it is possible to win a jackpot even in a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 is determined. It looks like this. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state ), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is , is set to approximately 3/300 (1/100).
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (ie, 100%).
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(a), when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X1 and X2 are determined, the jackpot 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds during the special game based on the determination. A round game that ends when either of the following conditions is met: or when 10 game balls enter the grand prize opening 18, is executed 5 times, and approximately 500 game balls can be won. ing.
Further, when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times, and about 1000 game balls can be obtained.

(Overview of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 71(c), in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not particularly shown, the same settings are made during the special game.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, which is the same as during the non-time-saving game state, The fluctuation time is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a normal symbol is won by lottery is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state. There is.
In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is the same as during the non-time-saving game state and during the first time-saving game state. Approximately 1/1.1 higher than medium, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when the normal symbol is won by lottery. , is set to 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time saving game state.

That is, during both the non-time-saving game state and the special game, there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and there is no chance that the movable piece 16b will be in the protruding state. many. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 5 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to change from the retracted state to the protruding state (from the protruding state to the protruding state). Although the interval until the next protruding state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a retracted state, and it is almost impossible for the game ball that has entered the second gaming area 12b to enter the second starting prize opening 16.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state), you will win in the normal symbol lottery with the same probability as during the non-time-saving game state, so it is the same as during the non-time-saving game state. There are many chances that the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is retracted. Although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to reach the protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time that the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a protruding state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will enter the second starting prize opening 16.

Also, during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. Therefore, there are extremely many chances that the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state. In addition, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is As in the case of inside, although the time from the retracted state to the protruded state of the movable piece 16b is short (the interval from one protruded state to the next protruded state is short), the state in which the movable piece 16b protrudes It is maintained for a long time. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be in a protruding state than during the first time-saving game state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16. The performance is higher than during the first time-saving game state.

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 6, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is generally high in all of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state. Although it is set, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16 (that is, the possibility of the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16) The frequency of entry of game balls (in other words, the frequency of execution of the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the non-time-saving game state, so the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more easily, and the second time-saving game state Inside, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be maintained in a protruding state than in the first time-saving game state, so it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, and during the first time-saving game state, more than in the non-time-saving game state. At the same time, you will have the opportunity to win a lottery.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, any one of the normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, or the high probability time saving gaming state is set. be done.
Specifically, as long as the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a as instructed during the normal gaming state, the winning lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting prize opening 15 It is possible to win a jackpot, and when a jackpot is won, jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low probability gaming state, and is also set to the second time-saving gaming state. As a result, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the second low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.
That is, after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100 without winning a jackpot (that is, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times), The second low probability time saving game state continues.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability gaming state, and is also set to the second time-saving gaming state. By doing so, a high probability time saving gaming state is set. When the high probability time saving game state is set, both the high probability number of times and the number of time saving times are set to 100.
In other words, after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the high-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100 times (that is, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times) without winning a jackpot. The gaming state continues.

In addition, in both the second low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state, as described above, the movable piece 16b is almost in a protruding state, and the game ball that enters the second game area 12b wins the second starting prize. There is a high possibility that the ball will land in the hole 16. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state, the game ball is launched into the second starting prize opening 16. enters the ball. Then, in the lottery based on the entered ball, it is possible to win a jackpot, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability gaming state, and is also set to the second time-saving gaming state. Accordingly, a high probability time saving game state is set, and both the high probability number of times and the number of time saving times are set to 100.

In addition, after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, if all 100 winning/failure lottery results are other than a jackpot (that is, a loss), the second time saving gaming state is changed to a non-time saving gaming state. A normal gaming state is set.
Similarly, after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set, if all 100 winning or losing lottery results are other than jackpots, the high-probability gaming state is changed to the low-probability gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state. By changing to the gaming state, the normal gaming state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the normal gaming state is set after the RAM is cleared. Furthermore, after the special game based on the jackpot symbol X1 ends, a second low probability time-saving game state is set, and when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100 without winning a jackpot, a normal game state is set. Furthermore, after the special game based on the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is finished, a high probability time-saving game state is set, and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 without winning a jackpot, a normal game state is set.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), after the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state is set, the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations (other 500 times in application example 6) (that is, after the normal gaming state or the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, all of the results of the 500 winning/failure drawings are other than jackpots), the low probability gaming state becomes By changing the non-time-saving game state to the first time-saving game state as it is, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the first low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 600 times.
That is, after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 without winning a jackpot (that is, all of the 600 winning/failure lottery results are other than jackpots). ), the first low probability time saving gaming state continues.

In addition, during the first low probability time saving game state, as in the second low probability time saving game state and the high probability time saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a protruding state, and the game that has entered the second game area 12b There is a high possibility that the ball will enter the second starting prize opening 16. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b as instructed during the first low probability time-saving game state, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. Then, in the lottery based on the entered ball, it is possible to win a jackpot, and when the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is determined.
On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, when the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 600 without winning a jackpot (that is, when all the results of the 600 winning/failure drawings are other than jackpot), By changing the first time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state, a normal game state is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the time-saving activation is performed to count the number of time-saving activations (500 times) for which the first low probability time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) is set. The number counter is constituted by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, when the special game ends, or when the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set. It is reset when one of the reset conditions is met. Then, when the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the time saving activation number counter starts counting, and the count is counted during the normal gaming state and the second low probability time saving gaming state (i.e., the low probability It is designed to be executed only during the gaming state).

Specifically, when the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and counting by the time saving activation number counter is started from this point.
In addition, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 ends, the subsequent game state is set to the second low probability time saving game state (low probability game state), and counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from this point. .
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, but counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the high probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the time saving activation number counter counts each time the special symbol changes. When the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the above-mentioned number of time saving activations, the fluctuation of the special symbol at that point in time ends (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed), and when the predetermined stop display time has elapsed, the 1. A low probability time saving game state is set.
That is, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of times the special symbol changes (count value based on the time saving activation number count) after the normal game state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set is the time saving activation. By reaching the number of times, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set without winning the jackpot or executing the special game, so it is possible to provide novel gameplay and increase the player's interest. .

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot until winning the next jackpot, the first low probability time saving is performed. The gaming state (first time saving gaming state) can be set only once.
That is, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter after the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set reaches the number of time saving activations (500 times) and the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. , the first low probability time saving gaming state cannot be set again until the next jackpot is won.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low probability time-saving game state, until the next jackpot is won, the corresponding The time saving activation number counter is set to stop counting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, it is not specified that the time-saving gaming state is set for any of the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the losing symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time when the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of continuous time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability change settings as in the above-mentioned embodiment are not set, and whenever the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, A low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed, and whenever a jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination is completed. .

(Summary of sending information regarding gaming status)
The main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 transmits information regarding the gaming state at the time (hereinafter also referred to as gaming state designation information) to the sub-control board 300 at various times.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the gaming state designation information includes normal A designation information, second low probability time reduction designation information, second low probability time reduction end predetermined number of times before designation information, and second Low-probability time-saving final designation information, high-probability time-saving hold designation information, high-probability time-saving designation information, high-probability time-saving end designation information a predetermined number of times before, high-probability time-saving final designation information, first low-probability time-saving designation information before arrival, first low There are 13 types of probability time saving designation information, first low probability time saving end designation information a predetermined number of times before, first low probability time saving final designation information, and normal B designation information.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the main CPU 101 changes the above-mentioned game state designation information transmitted to the sub-control board 300 after the special symbols are stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. (for example, when the gaming state is changed from the second low probability time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state), when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed (i.e., when the stopped display special symbol is confirmed) ), a gaming state change designation command including information indicating that the gaming state designation information is to be changed is transmitted.
Furthermore, when the special game ends, the main CPU 101 transmits a post-special game game state designation command that includes information on the game state to be set thereafter.
Furthermore, the main CPU 101 determines when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, at the time when the special symbol has started to vary, or when the special symbol has been stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. the starting point of the opening process when the special game is executed, the starting point of the round game when the special game is executed (the time when the big prize opening 18 is opened), the round game when the special game is executed (when the big prize opening 18 is closed), when the ending process starts when a special game is executed, when the ending process ends when a special game is executed, when the RAM is cleared, when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on) At the time of recovery from interruption), a specification designation command including model information of the pachinko machine P is transmitted. Note that the above-mentioned points in time at which the specification specification command is transmitted are also collectively referred to as the specification specification command transmission point.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, predetermined game state designation information is included in the game state change designation command, the special after-game game state designation command, or the spec designation command, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It looks like this.

(1) Normal A designation information Normal A designation information is after the RAM is cleared and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning the jackpot, or after the high-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning the jackpot. This indicates that the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as normal gaming state A) is in progress.
The normal A designation information is the 100th change that has been reached without winning a jackpot since the second low probability time saving gaming state was set (in other words, the second low probability time saving gaming state has ended without winning a jackpot). When the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, or when the 100th variation is reached without winning the jackpot after the high probability time-saving gaming state is set (i.e., when winning the jackpot) When the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed (a variation that causes the high-probability time-saving game state to end), it is included in the game state change designation command that is sent, and is sent to the sub-control board 300. It has become.
Further, the normal A designation information is included in the spec designation command that is transmitted when the spec designation command transmission time comes during the normal gaming state A, and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, each time the special symbols start changing during the normal game state A, the normal A designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub-control board 300. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during normal gaming state A, at the time of recovery from the power outage, and if RAM is cleared and normal gaming state A is set, at the time of RAM clearing, normal A The specification information is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. For example, if you win a jackpot during the normal game state A and a special game is executed, the normal A designation information is specified at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc. It is included in the designated command and sent to the sub control board 300.

(2) Second low-probability time-saving designation information The second low-probability time-saving designation information indicates that this is the 1st to 95th special symbol variation after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set.
The second low probability time saving designation information is included in the special game post game state designation command that is sent when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 ends, and is sent to the sub control board 300. .
In addition, the second low probability time saving designation information is a spec designation command that is sent when the spec designation command is sent during the 1st to 95th special symbol variations after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, every time the 1st to 95th special symbol variations are started after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the second low probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command, and the sub control board 300 sent to. For example, if a power outage occurs during the 1st to 95th special symbol fluctuations after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the second low probability time saving designation information is included in the spec specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 1st to 95th lottery after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, and the ending. At the start of the process, the second low probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(3) 2nd low probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information 2nd low probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information is the 96th to 99th special symbol change after the 2nd low probability time saving gaming state is set. This indicates that there is a change (that is, the change is 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before the last change in the second low probability time-saving game state).
The second low probability time saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is a game state that is transmitted at the 95th variation after the second low probability time saving game state is set, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed. It is included in the change designation command and sent to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the second low probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information is sent when the spec specification command is sent at the 96th to 99th special symbol variation after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. The specified specification command is included in the specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. For example, every time the 96th to 99th special symbol variations are started after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the specification information for specifying the end of the second low probability time saving a predetermined number of times is included in the spec specification command, It is transmitted to the sub control board 300. In addition, for example, if a power outage occurs during the 96th to 99th special symbol fluctuations after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the second low probability time saving gaming state is set to the predetermined end when the power is restored. The pre-number specification information is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub control board 300. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 96th to 99th lottery after the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, and the ending. At the start of the process, information specifying the second low probability time saving end predetermined number of times before is included in the spec specifying command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(4) Second low-probability time-saving final designation information The second low-probability time-saving final designation information indicates that this is the 100th special symbol change after the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (in other words, the second low-probability time-saving final designation information This indicates that this is the last change in the time-saving gaming state.
The second low probability time saving final designation information is a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 99th change after the second low probability time saving game state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the second low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec specifying command that is sent when the spec specifying command is sent at the 100th special symbol change after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, at the time when the 100th special symbol change starts after the second low probability time saving game state is set, the second low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. be done. In addition, for example, if a power outage occurs during the 100th special symbol change after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the second low probability time saving final designation information will be set to the spec at the time the power is restored. It is included in the designated command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, when a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 100th lottery after the second low probability time-saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, and the start of the ending process. At the time, the second low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(5) High-probability time-saving reservation designation information High-probability time-saving reservation designation information is stored in the second special symbol random number reservation memory (hereinafter also referred to as high-reservation retention) that is stored at the time when the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set. This indicates that the special symbol is a variation based on the above.
The high probability time saving reservation designation information is included in the special game post game state designation command that is sent when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 ends, and is sent to the sub control board 300. There is.
In addition, the high probability time saving reservation designation information is included in the spec designation command that is sent when it comes time to send the spec designation command in the variation of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high secured retention, and is sent to the sub control board 300. It looks like this. For example, each time a special symbol variation based on a high secured hold is started, high probability time saving reservation designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300. Further, for example, if a power outage occurs during the variation of the special symbol based on the above-mentioned high security hold, the high probability time saving reservation designation information is included in the spec designation command at the time of restoration from the power outage, and the sub control board 300 sent to. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the lottery based on the above-mentioned high secured margin, there will be a high probability time saving hold at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc. The specification information is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub control board 300.

(6) High-probability time-saving designation information High-probability time-saving designation information indicates that the number of special symbol fluctuations after the high probability time-saving gaming state is set is the 95th time after the special symbol fluctuations based on the above-mentioned high secured hold are completed. This indicates that the fluctuation is up to.
The high probability time saving designation information is a game state change designation that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the special symbol change based on the latest stored hold among the above-mentioned high secured points. It is included in the command and sent to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the high probability time saving designation information can be obtained using the spec designation command between the next variation after the end of the special symbol variation based on the high probability time saving game state and the 95th variation of the special symbol after the high probability time saving gaming state is set. It is included in the specification designation command that is sent when the transmission time comes, and is sent to the sub control board 300. For example, if 4 high-secure locks are stored at the time the high-probability time-saving game state is set, the 5th to 95th special symbol changes will start after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Each time, the high probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub control board 300. For example, in the above case, if a power outage occurs during the 5th to 95th special symbol fluctuations after the high probability time saving gaming state is set, the high probability time saving designation information is It is included in the spec specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, in the above case, when a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 5th to 95th lottery after the high probability time saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, at the start of the round game, At the start of the ending process, high probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(7) High-probability time-saving end specified number of times before specification information High-probability time-saving end specified number of times before specification information indicates that the special symbol changes from the 96th to 99th time after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set (i.e., the high probability This indicates that the change is 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before the last change in the probability time saving game state.
The high-probability time-saving end specified number of times before designation information is the game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 95th change after the high-probability time-saving game state is set. It is configured to be included and transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the high probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information is a spec specifying command that is sent when the spec specifying command is sent during the 96th to 99th special symbol variations after the high probability time saving gaming state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, every time the 96th to 99th special symbol variations are started after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information is included in the spec specification command, and the sub control board 300 sent to. For example, if a power outage occurs during the 96th to 99th special symbol fluctuations after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving end predetermined number of times before specification information will be specified at the time the power is restored. It is included in the designated command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 96th to 99th lottery after the high probability time-saving game state is set, the timing of the opening process, the round game start, and the ending process. At the start point, etc., high probability time saving termination predetermined number of times earlier designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(8) High-probability time-saving final designation information The high-probability time-saving final designation information indicates that this is the 100th special symbol variation after the high-probability time-saving gaming state was set (in other words, it is the last variation of the high-probability time-saving gaming state). It indicates that there is a certain fact).
The high probability time saving final designation information is included in the game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 99th change after the high probability time saving gaming state is set. The information is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the high probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command that is sent when the spec designation command is sent in the 100th special symbol change after the high probability time savings gaming state is set, and is included in the sub control. It is configured to be transmitted to the board 300. For example, at the time when the 100th special symbol change is started after the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300. Further, for example, when a power outage occurs during the 100th special symbol change after the high probability time saving gaming state is set, the high probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec specification command at the time of the power outage recovery, It is sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, when a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 100th lottery after the high probability time saving game state is set, the start time of the opening process, the start time of the round game, the start time of the ending process, etc. In this step, the high probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub control board 300.

(9) First low-probability time-saving designation information The first low-probability time-saving designation information is specified after the normal game state (normal game state A) or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends. This indicates that the special symbol will change for the 500th time (that is, it will change immediately before the first low probability time saving gaming state is set).
The specified information before reaching the first low probability time saving is that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 499th change after the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game. It is included in the game state change designation command transmitted at the time, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
In addition, if a power outage occurs during the 499th special symbol change after the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game, the first low probability time saving game state will be activated at the time of the power outage recovery. The pre-arrival specification information is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, if the special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 499th lottery after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game ends, at the start of the opening process, the round At the start of the game, the start of the ending process, etc., the first low probability time saving pre-arrival specification information is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(10) First low probability time saving designation information The first low probability time saving designation information indicates that this is the 1st to 595th special symbol variation after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set.
The first low probability time saving designation information is the 500th change after the normal gaming state is set after the RAM is cleared, or the 500th change after the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set after the end of the special game. In the variation, the special symbol is stopped and displayed and is included in the game state change designation command that is sent when the stop display time has elapsed and is sent to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the first low probability time saving designation information is a spec designation command that is sent when the spec designation command is sent in the 1st to 595th special symbol variation after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, every time the 1st to 595th special symbol variations are started after the first low probability time saving game state is set, the first low probability time saving designation information is included in the spec specification command, and the sub control board 300 sent to. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during the 1st to 595th special symbol fluctuations after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, the first low probability time saving designation information will be set to the spec. It is included in the designated command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 1st to 595th winning/failure lottery after the first low probability time saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the ending At the start of the process, the first low probability time saving designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub control board 300.

(11) First low-probability time-saving end specified number of times before specification information The first low-probability time-saving end specified number of times before specification information is the 596th to 599th special symbol change after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. This indicates that there is a change (that is, the change is 4 times before, 3 times before, 2 times before, or 1 time before the last change in the first low probability time-saving game state).
The first low probability time saving end predetermined number of times before designation information is a game state that is transmitted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 595th change after the first low probability time saving game state is set. It is included in the change designation command and sent to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the first low probability time saving end specified number of times before specification information is sent when the spec specification command is sent during the 596th to 599th special symbol fluctuations after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. The specified specification command is included in the specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. For example, every time the 596th to 599th special symbol changes are started after the first low probability time saving game state is set, the specification information for specifying the end of the first low probability time saving a predetermined number of times is included in the spec specification command, It is sent to the sub control board 300. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during the 596th to 599th special symbol fluctuation after the first low probability time saving game state is set, at the time of power outage recovery, the first low probability time saving game state ends a predetermined number of times. The specification information is included in the specification specification command and sent to the sub control board 300. In addition, if a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 596th to 599th winning/failure lottery after the first low probability time saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the ending At the start of the process, information specifying the first low-probability time-saving end predetermined number of times before is included in the spec specification command and transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

(12) First low-probability time-saving final designation information The first low-probability time-saving final designation information indicates that this is the 600th special symbol variation after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set (i.e., the first low-probability time-saving final designation information This indicates that this is the last change in the time-saving gaming state.
The first low-probability time-saving final designation information is a game state change designation command that is sent when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed in the 599th change after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the first low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec specifying command that is sent when the spec specifying command is sent at the 600th special symbol change after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, at the time when the 600th special symbol change starts after the first low probability time saving game state is set, the first low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub control board 300. be done. Also, for example, if a power outage occurs during the 600th special symbol change after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, the first low probability time saving final designation information will be changed to the spec specification command at the time of power outage recovery. and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. In addition, when a special game is executed by winning a jackpot in the 600th lottery after the first low probability time-saving game state is set, at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, and the start of the ending process. At the time, the first low probability time saving final designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300.

(13) Normal B designation information Normal B designation information indicates that you are in a normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as normal gaming state B) that is set after the first low probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning a jackpot. This shows that.
The normal B designation information is the 600th change that has been reached without winning a jackpot since the first low probability time saving gaming state was set (in other words, the first low probability time saving gaming state has ended without winning a jackpot) When the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time has elapsed, it is included in the game state change designation command that is sent, and is sent to the sub-control board 300.
Further, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command that is transmitted when the spec designation command transmission time comes during the normal gaming state B, and is transmitted to the sub control board 300. For example, each time the special symbols start changing during the normal game state B, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command and sent to the sub control board 300. Further, for example, if a power outage occurs during the normal gaming state B, the normal B designation information is included in the spec designation command and transmitted to the sub control board 300 at the time of recovery from the power outage. For example, if you win a jackpot during the normal game state B and a special game is executed, the normal B designation information will be set to the specifications at the start of the opening process, the start of the round game, the start of the ending process, etc. It is included in the designated command and sent to the sub control board 300.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the above-mentioned game state designation information according to the set game state, the number of changes of special symbols, etc. is stored in a predetermined memory in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100. If a power outage occurs, the data stored in the main RAM 103 including the above gaming state designation information is backed up. As a result, the above-mentioned gaming state designation information corresponding to the gaming state set before the power outage occurred, the number of changes in special symbols, etc. can be acquired and transmitted to the sub-control board 300 when the power outage is restored.
Then, upon receiving the gaming state designation information, the sub CPU 301 stores the received gaming state designation information in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303 in the sub control board 300.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, at each of the above-mentioned times, the game state designation information corresponding to the set game state, the number of changes of special symbols, etc. is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Therefore, the sub-control board 300 can also grasp the gaming state set at each of the above-mentioned times and the number of changes in special symbols since the gaming state was set. It becomes possible to perform performances according to the number of changes in special symbols, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, at the time of recovery from a power outage (when the power of the pachinko machine P is turned on from off), the game state designation information before the power outage occurs on the sub control board 300. sent to.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, for example, if an unexpected power outage occurs in the pachinko machine P due to lightning or the like, the data stored in the main RAM 103 in the main control board 100 is backed up, but the sub-control The data stored in the sub-RAM 303 on the board 300 is not backed up. Therefore, when the sub-control board 300 is reset due to the above-described power outage, the data stored in the sub-RAM 303 in the sub-control board 300 is cleared. Then, as described above, the gaming state designation information stored in the sub-RAM 303 will also be cleared. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, communication is possible in one direction from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, so that the main control board 300 is reset when the sub-control board 300 I can't figure out what I did. Therefore, when a power outage occurs, the main CPU 101 transmits the gaming state designation information stored in the main RAM 103 to the sub control board 300 at the time of recovery from the power outage, so that the sub control board 300 , it is possible to grasp the gaming state designation information before the power outage occurs. Thereby, even if a power outage occurs, it is possible to re-execute the performance according to the gaming state that was set before the power outage occurred.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the first first set is set when the number of changes of the special symbol after the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state is set reaches the number of time-saving activations. A second low probability that is set during the low probability time-saving game state (that is, during the time-saving game state that is set without winning the jackpot and executing the special game) and after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. During the time-saving gaming state (that is, during the time-saving gaming state set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game), gaming state designation information corresponding to each time-saving gaming state is determined.
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the time-saving game state set in the sub-control board 300 is set without involving the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game (i.e. , the first low-probability time-saving game state), or whether it was set through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game (that is, the second low-probability time-saving game state). This makes it possible to perform performances according to each time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the main CPU 101 causes the next First low-probability time-saving pre-arrival designation information indicating that the change is a change immediately before the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, it is possible to prepare the data, etc. of the performance to be executed at the time when the first low probability time-saving game state is set, before that time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for example, the content of the performance changes suddenly at that point in time, giving the player a sense of discomfort regarding the progress of the performance.

(Summary of sending various times)
The main CPU 101 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6 generates numerical information regarding various times, such as the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving, at the time of setting each of the above-mentioned game states, the time of starting counting by the time saving activation number counter, etc. (numerical data) to the sub control board 300.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines, at the time of setting the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, at the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1), the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state. 100 times" is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the main CPU 101, at the time of setting the high probability time saving game state (that is, at the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or The numerical information and the numerical information “100 times” which is the number of time saving times are transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the main CPU 101 controls the first time saving operation at the time when the time saving activation number counter starts counting (that is, when the RAM is cleared, or when the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game). Numerical information "500 times", which is the number of time saving activations in the low probability time saving game state, is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, at the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set (that is, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations (500 times)), the main CPU 101 controls the time saving in the first low probability time saving gaming state. Numerical information indicating the number of times "600 times" is transmitted to the sub control board 300.

Although not particularly illustrated, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the numerical information corresponding to the various numbers described above is all number data A, which is 1-byte (8-bit) binary data. and number data B.
Specifically, the number data A and the number data B are both "0000000b" (0 in decimal notation) by the lower 7 bits excluding the upper 1 bit. Note that the number with "b" at the end is 2. Numerical values in the range from ``1111111b'' (127 in decimal notation) to ``1111111b'' (127 in decimal notation) are expressed. The lower 7 bits of count data A are the remainder values obtained by dividing the above-mentioned various count values by ``128'', which is the maximum value ``127'' (decimal number) that can be expressed in a 7-bit binary number plus 1. The lower 7 bits of the number data B are the quotient value obtained by dividing the above-mentioned various number values by the above-mentioned "128".
The main CPU 101 transmits the number data A configured as described above to the sub control board 300 at the various times described above, and then transmits the number data B configured as described above to the sub control board 300. When the sub CPU 301 receives the number data A and the number data B, the sub CPU 301 adds the lower 7 bits of the number data A received earlier to the product of the lower 7 bits of the number data B received later and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the 7-bit values, the corresponding number of times can be calculated. This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp the various counts described above.

For example, if the number of times of time saving in the second low probability time saving game state is "100 times", the quotient of dividing this "100 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "0" and the remainder is "100". Therefore, the lower 7 bits of the frequency data A corresponding to the time saving number "100 times" are "1100100b" (100 in decimal), and the lower 7 bits of the frequency data B are "0000000b" (0 in decimal). becomes.
Then, at the time of setting the second low probability time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A whose lower 7 bits are "1100100b" to the sub control board 300, and then transmits the number data B whose lower 7 bits are "0000000b". is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number data A and the number data B, the sub CPU 301 converts the number data A into "0", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "0000000b" (0 in decimal notation) of the number data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the lower 7 bits "1100100b" (100 in decimal), it is possible to calculate "100 times" which is the number of time savings in the second low probability time saving gaming state. Thereby, in the sub control board 300, it becomes possible to acquire the numerical information of "100 times" which is the number of time saving times at the time of setting the second low probability time saving game state.

Also, for example, if the number of time-saving activations in the first low-probability time-saving game state is "500 times", the quotient of dividing this "500 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "3", and the remainder is "116". . Therefore, the lower 7 bits of the frequency data A corresponding to the number of time saving activations "500" are "1110100b" (116 in decimal), and the lower 7 bits of the frequency data B are "0000011b" (3 in decimal). ).
Then, at the time when the time saving activation number counter starts counting, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A whose lower 7 bits are "1110100b" to the sub control board 300, and then transmits the number data B whose lower 7 bits are "0000011b". It is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number data A and the number data B, the sub CPU 301 converts the number data A into "384", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "0000011b" (3 in decimal notation) of the number data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the lower 7 bits "1110100b" (116 in decimal), it is possible to calculate "500" which is the number of time saving activations of the first low probability time saving gaming state. Thereby, in the sub-control board 300, it becomes possible to acquire the numerical information "500 times" which is the number of times of time saving activation at the time when the time saving activation number counter starts counting.

Further, for example, if the number of time savings in the first low probability time saving game state is "600 times", the quotient obtained by dividing this "600 times" by the above-mentioned "128" is "4" and the remainder is "88". Therefore, the lower 7 bits of the frequency data A corresponding to the time saving number "600 times" are "1011000b" (88 in decimal), and the lower 7 bits of the frequency data B are "0000100b" (4 in decimal). becomes.
Then, at the time of setting the first low probability time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A whose lower 7 bits are "1011000b" to the sub control board 300, and then transmits the number data B whose lower 7 bits are "0000100b". is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
When the sub CPU 301 receives the number data A and the number data B, the sub CPU 301 converts the number data A into "512", which is the product of the lower 7 bits "0000100b" (4 in decimal number) of the number data B and the above-mentioned "128". By adding the lower 7 bit value "1011000b" (88 in decimal), it is possible to calculate "600 times" which is the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state. Thereby, in the sub-control board 300, it becomes possible to acquire the numerical information "600 times" which is the number of time saving times at the time of setting the first low probability time saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 6, the maximum value that can be expressed as a binary number of multiple bits (7 bits in other application example 6) for various times such as the number of time reductions and the number of time reduction activations. The number data A including the remainder value when divided by a value 1 larger than , and the number data B including the quotient value are transmitted to the sub control board 300, and the sub control board 300 receives the received number data A and the number data. The above-mentioned number of times can be calculated based on B.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6, even when the various times such as the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation are large values, the number of data transmitted to the sub control board 300 is reduced. At the same time, the above-mentioned number of times can be transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, after sending the number data A including the above-mentioned remainder value, the number data B including the above-mentioned quotient value is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. ing.
As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine, if the various counts such as the number of time reductions and the number of time reduction activations are set to be less than or equal to the maximum value that can be expressed by the binary number of multiple bits, the number of times data B Since the value of the quotient included in is always 0, the above-mentioned number of times can be calculated based only on the previously transmitted number of times data A. Therefore, in the above case, the process of calculating the above-mentioned number of times in the sub-control board 300 can be simplified.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the first one is set when the number of changes of the special symbol after the normal game state or the second low probability time saving game state is set reaches the number of time saving activations. The number of times to save time in a low probability time-saving gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state that is set without winning a jackpot or executing a special game), and the second set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. Regarding the number of time-saving games in a low-probability time-saving gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state set through jackpot winnings and execution of special games), data configured in a predetermined format (number of times data A, By transmitting the number data B) to the sub control board 300, the sub control board 300 can acquire (understand) the above-mentioned time saving number based on the data.
Therefore, in the sub-control board 300, by executing the same process, the number of time-saving gaming states that are set without involving jackpot winnings and special game executions, and jackpot winnings and special game executions. It is possible to obtain any of the time saving times of the time saving gaming state set via , and it is possible to prevent the obtaining process from becoming complicated.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment.
First, the post-stop processing that is executed after the special symbol stops changing and the stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol is set in the stop display time timer counter will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 72.
In step 3000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop display time set in the stop display time timer counter has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 3001.
In step 3001, the main CPU 101 stores the current gaming state in the gaming state buffer. Then, the process advances to the next step 3002.

In step 3002, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. This time saving number updating process is the same as the time saving number updating process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 3003.
In step 3003, the main CPU 101 executes a high-accuracy frequency update process. This high-accuracy count update process is the same as the high-accuracy count update process in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 3004.

In step 3004, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 3009. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to the next step 3005.
In step 3005, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot winning command for transmitting the game state at the jackpot winning and the type of the stopped displayed jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3) to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 3006.

In step 3006, the main CPU 101 resets the current gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 3007.
In step 3007, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Then, the process advances to the next step 3008.

In step 3008, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds in the main RAM 103 based on the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "5" as the round number if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X1 or X2, and sets "5" as the round number if the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is X3. Set "10". Then, the post-stop processing ends.

In addition, in step 3009, which is proceeded when it is determined that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in step 3004 is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation number count execution process for counting by the time-saving activation number counter. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 3010.
In step 3010, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the high probability time saving gaming state has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second time-saving game flag has been turned from on to off in step 3002 described above, and whether or not the high certainty game flag has been turned from on to off in step 3003 described above. If it is determined that the high probability time saving game state has not ended yet, the process proceeds to step 3012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability time saving gaming state has ended, the process advances to the next step 3011.

In step 3011, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation frequency counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number of time saving activations "500" to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 3012.
In step 3012, the main CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state designation information to be sent to the sub control board 300 is to be changed at that point in time, and if it is determined that the gaming state designation information is to be changed, the main CPU 101 A game state change designation command including game state designation information is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Note that if it is determined that the gaming state designation information is not changed, the main CPU 101 does not execute anything here. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the time-saving activation count execution processing in step 3010 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.
In step 3100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high certainty game flag is off. Then, when it is determined that the high certainty game flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high certainty game flag is off, the process advances to the next step 3101.

In step 3101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving activation number reaching flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation number counter has reached the number of time-saving activations is off. Then, when it is determined that the time saving activation number reaching flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving activation count reaching flag is off, the process advances to the next step 3102.
In step 3102, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving activation number counter by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 3103.

In step 3103, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time saving activation number counter has reached zero. If it is determined that the time saving activation number count has not been reached, the time saving activation count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the point has been reached, the process advances to the next step 3104.
In step 3104, the main CPU 101 executes a first low probability time saving gaming state setting process for setting the first low probability time saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time-saving game flag and sets "600" to the number of time-saving games. In addition, when the number of time saving activations is reached, the normal gaming state is set, and the high certainty gaming flag is turned off. This high certainty game flag remains off. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number of time reductions “600” in the first low probability time saving game state to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 3105.

In step 3105, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 3106.
In step 3106, the main CPU 101 turns on the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the time saving activation number count execution process ends.

Next, the special game ending process that is executed when the special game ends will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74.
In step 3200, the main CPU 101 checks the jackpot symbol (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the ended special game, and determines the game state after the end of the special game according to the jackpot symbol described above. Execute the game state setting process to be set.
Specifically, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is X1 (that is, when the second low-probability time-saving game state is set), the main CPU 101 turns off the high-probability game flag and starts the second time-saving game. Turn on the flag and set "100" to the number of time saving times. In addition, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol is X2 or X3 (that is, when the high probability time saving game state is set), both the high probability game flag and the second time saving game flag are turned on, and and set "100" to the number of time saving times.
Further, when the high probability time saving gaming state is set, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A and number data B corresponding to the high probability number of times "100" to the sub control board 300, and also transmits the number of time saving times "100". The number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number are transmitted to the sub control board 300. Further, when the second low probability time saving game state is set, the number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number of time saving times "100" are transmitted to the sub control board 300.
Then, the process advances to the next step 3201.

In step 3201, the main CPU 101 stores the gaming state set in step 3200 described above and a special post-game gaming state designation command including the corresponding gaming state designation information in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 3202.
In step 3202, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 3203.

In step 3203, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 3204.
In step 3204, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second low probability time saving gaming state was set in step 3200 described above. Specifically, in step 3200 described above, it is determined whether the high certainty game flag is turned off and the second time saving game flag is turned on. Then, when it is determined that the second low probability time saving game state is not set, the special game ending process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second low probability time saving gaming state has been set, the process advances to the next step 3205.

In step 3205, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation frequency counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number of time saving activations "500" to the sub control board 300. Then, the special game ending process is ended.

Next, RAM clear processing executed based on RAM clear (reset) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75.
In step 3300, the main CPU 101 executes a normal gaming state setting process to set a normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off the high-precision game flag, the first time-saving game flag, and the second time-saving game flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 3301.
In step 3301, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 3302.

In step 3302, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 3303.
In step 3303, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation frequency counter to "500". Further, the main CPU 101 transmits the number data A and the number data B corresponding to the number of time saving activations "500" to the sub control board 300. Then, the RAM clear post-processing ends.

Next, the specification specification command transmission time processing executed at the specification specification command transmission time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 76.
In step 3400, the main CPU 101 stores the spec designation command including the model information of the pachinko machine P and the corresponding gaming state designation information in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the specification specifying command sending point process is ended.

(Summary of various displays such as background image display, countdown display of the number of remaining time reductions, countdown display of the number of times towards the number of time reduction activations, etc.)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the normal background image corresponding to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 77(d) to (e), etc.) is used as the background image displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. , a first low-probability time-saving background image corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 77(i) to (j), etc.), a second low-probability time-saving background image corresponding to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ( 77(a) to (b), etc.), high probability time saving background images (see FIG. 79(a) to (c), etc.) corresponding to high probability time saving gaming states are provided. The corresponding background image is displayed on the display section 21a.

Specifically, a normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, and a second low probability time-saving background image is displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. is displayed, and a high probability time saving background image is displayed during the high probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3, and the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations. A first low probability time saving background image is displayed during the first low probability time saving game state which is set by reaching the first low probability time saving game state.
When the gaming state changes, the displayed background image also changes accordingly (see FIG. 77(d), FIG. 77(i), etc.).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, during both the first low probability time saving game state and the second low probability time saving game state, a predetermined part of the display section 21a (in other application example 6, the upper right An upper display frame for performing a predetermined display is displayed in the corner), and within this upper display frame, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed each time a special symbol variation (variation effect) is performed. (See FIGS. 77(a) to 77(c), FIG. 77(j), FIG. 78(a), etc.). Similarly, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a countdown of the remaining high-probability number of times (time-saving number) is displayed in the upper display frame mentioned above each time the special symbol changes (variation effect). (See FIGS. 79(a) to 79(c), etc.).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, while the time saving activation number counter is counting (that is, while the second low probability time saving gaming state and the normal gaming state A are set), A lower display frame for performing a predetermined display is displayed at a predetermined location of the display section 21a (in other application example 6, the lower right corner), and within this lower display frame, the special symbol changes (variation effect) once. Each time it is performed, a count-up display of the number of times toward 500, which is the number of time saving activations, is performed (Figures 77 (a) to (h), Figures 79 (d) to (g), (See FIGS. 80(a) to (c), etc.).

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, during the first low probability time saving game state, in addition to displaying the above-mentioned low probability time saving background image, the first low probability time saving game is displayed within the above lower display frame. A display (in other application example 6, a display indicating "Lucky time") is displayed to indicate that the system is in the current state (FIGS. 77(i) to (j), FIG. 78(a), (See FIG. 79(h), FIG. 80(d), etc.).

The various displays mentioned above will be explained in more detail below.
(1) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 As mentioned above, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, the second low probability time-saving game state is set, and the time-saving activation number counter Counting begins.
With the setting of the second low probability time saving gaming state, the display unit 21a displays a second low probability time saving background image and a display indicating that the second low probability time saving gaming state has been set (another application example 6). In this case, the text "Start Revenge Mode!" is displayed), the upper display frame is displayed, and the initial value of the remaining number of time savings for which the countdown display is performed (i.e., the number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is "100") is displayed. , the lower display frame, and the initial value (“1”) of the count-up display toward the number of time-saving activations are displayed (see FIG. 77(a)).

After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, when the stop display time for that variation has elapsed, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed, and the number of times towards the time saving activation number is displayed. A count-up display is performed.
Then, when the special symbol changes 100 times without winning a jackpot, the display of the remaining time saving number becomes "0" and the display of the number of times towards the time saving activation becomes "100" (Fig. 77(b)), when the stop display time in the variation has elapsed, the normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set. Along with the setting of this normal gaming state, the second low probability time saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the second low probability time saving gaming state has ended (in other application example 6, "Revenge mode ends") is displayed. ”), the display in the upper display frame is cleared, and the display of the remaining time saving number is cleared (see FIGS. 77(c) to 77(d)). Note that the count-up display continues for the number of times toward the time saving activation number (see FIG. 77(d)).

After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, a count-up display of the number of time-saving activations is performed when the stop display time for the variation has elapsed (Fig. 77(e) ) to (g)).
Then, if the special symbol changes 400 times without winning a jackpot, the display of the number of times toward the time saving activation number becomes "500" (see Fig. 77 (g)), and the stop display for the fluctuation occurs. When time elapses, a first low probability time saving game state is set. Along with the setting of the first low probability time saving game state, the normal background image is switched to the first low probability time saving background image, and a display indicating that the first low probability time saving game state has been set (in other application example 6) , the characters "Lucky time start!" are displayed), the initial value of the remaining number of time savings for which a countdown display is performed (i.e., "600" the number of time savings in the first low probability time saving game state), and a count-up display is performed. The display of the number of times the game has been played is cleared, and a display indicating that the game is in the first low probability time saving game state is performed (see FIGS. 77(h) to (i)).

After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed when the stop display time for the variation has elapsed.
Then, if the special symbol changes 600 times without winning the jackpot, the remaining time saving number display becomes "0" (see Figure 77 (j)), and when the stop display time for the change has elapsed. , a normal gaming state (normal gaming state B) is set. Along with the setting of this normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has ended (in other application example 6, "Lucky time is over" is displayed) ”), the display in the lower display frame is cleared, and the display indicating that the first low probability time saving game state is in progress is cleared (see FIGS. 78(a) to 78(b)).

In addition, since the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state has been performed once, after the above-mentioned normal game state (normal game state B) is set, the time-saving activation number counter does not count. Therefore, until the next jackpot is won, the display in the lower display frame and the count-up display of the number of time-saving activations are not performed (see Figure 78(c)). .

(2) Display after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 As described above, after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X3, a high probability time-saving game state is set. As mentioned above, during the high probability time saving game state, the time saving activation number counter does not count.
With the setting of the high probability time saving gaming state, the display unit 21a displays a high probability time saving background image and a display indicating that the high probability time saving gaming state has been set (in other application example 6, "super mode start" is displayed). !'' character display), the display in the upper display frame, and the initial value of the remaining high probability number and time saving number for which the countdown display is performed (i.e., the high probability number of high probability number and time saving number in the high probability time saving gaming state "100") is displayed (see FIG. 79(a)). Note that since the time saving activation number counter does not count, at this point, the lower display frame and the initial value of the count-up display toward the number of time saving activations are not displayed (Figure 79 ( a) see)

Thereafter, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed when the stop display time in the variation has elapsed.
Then, when the special symbol changes 100 times without winning a jackpot, the remaining high accuracy and time saving times will be displayed as "0" (see Figure 79(b)), and the stop display time for the fluctuation will be "0". When the time has elapsed, a normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set. Along with this setting of the normal gaming state, the high probability time saving background image is switched to the normal background image, and a display indicating that the high probability time saving gaming state has ended is displayed (in other application example 6, the text "Super mode ends" is displayed) ), the display in the upper display frame is cleared, and the display of the remaining time saving number is cleared (see FIGS. 77(c) to 77(d)). In addition, since the normal game state is set, the time saving activation number counter starts counting, so the initial value ("1") of the display in the lower display frame and the count-up display toward the number of time saving activations is displayed. is displayed (see FIG. 79(d)).

After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, a count-up display of the number of time-saving activations is performed when the stop display time for the variation has elapsed (Fig. 79(e) ) to (f)).
Then, if the special symbol changes 500 times without winning the jackpot, the display of the number of times toward the time saving activation number becomes "500" (see Figure 79 (f)), and the stop display for the fluctuation occurs. When time elapses, a first low probability time saving game state is set. Along with this setting of the first low probability time saving game state, similarly to (1) above, the normal background image is switched to the first low probability time saving background image and the first low probability time saving game state is set. display, display the initial value (“600”) of the remaining number of time-saving displays for which the countdown display is performed, clear the display of the number of times the count-up display has been performed, and indicate that the first low-probability time-saving game state is in progress. A display indicating the following is performed (see FIGS. 79(g) to (h)).
Further, the subsequent flow of display is the same as that described in (1) above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(3) Display after clearing the RAM As described above, after the RAM is cleared, the normal gaming state (normal gaming state A) is set, and the time saving activation number counter starts counting.
Then, with the setting of the normal game state, the display section 21a displays the normal background image, the lower display frame, and the initial value ("1") of the count-up display toward the number of time-saving activations. (See FIG. 80(a)).

After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, when the stop display time for that variation has elapsed, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed, and the number of times towards the time saving activation number is displayed. A count-up display is performed.
Then, when the special symbol changes 500 times without winning a jackpot, the display of the number of times toward the time saving activation number becomes "500" (see Figure 80(b)), and the stop display time for the fluctuation occurs. When the period has elapsed, a first low probability time saving game state is set. Along with the setting of this first low probability time saving game state, the normal background image is switched to the first low probability time saving background image and the first low probability time saving game state is set, similar to (1) and (2) above. the initial value of the remaining number of times the countdown display is performed, clearing the display of the number of times the count-up display has been performed, and the fact that the first low probability time saving game state is in progress. The display shown in FIG. 80(c) to (d) is performed.
Further, the subsequent flow of display is the same as that described in (1) above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(Summary of the above display after power recovery)
As described above, if an unexpected power outage occurs in the pachinko machine P due to lightning or the like, for example, the gaming state designation information stored in the sub-RAM 303 is cleared. However, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, when recovering from the power outage, the gaming state designation information backed up in the main control board 100 at the time of the occurrence of the power outage is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Thereby, based on the above-mentioned received gaming state designation information, the predetermined display that was being executed before the occurrence of the power outage can be performed even after the power outage is restored.

For example, if the second low-probability time-saving gaming state is set before the power outage occurs, at the time of recovery from the power outage, the main control board 100 sends the second Game state designation information such as low probability time saving designation information, second low probability time saving end designation information a predetermined number of times before, and second low probability time saving final designation information is transmitted to the sub control board 300. As a result, the sub control board 300 can understand that the gaming state that was set before the power outage occurred is the second low probability time saving gaming state, so the second low probability time saving background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, an upper display frame, a lower display frame, etc. can be displayed.

In addition, if the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set before the power outage occurs, at the time of recovery from the power outage, the main control board 100 sends the first Game state designation information such as low probability time saving designation information, first low probability time saving end designation information a predetermined number of times before, and first low probability time saving final designation information is transmitted to the sub control board 300. As a result, the sub control board 300 can understand that the gaming state that was set before the power outage occurred is the first low probability time saving gaming state, so the first low probability time saving background image is displayed as the background image. At the same time, the upper display frame can be displayed, the lower display frame can be displayed, and a display indicating that the first low probability time-saving game state is in progress (text display of Lucky Time) can be performed.

In addition, if the normal gaming state A was set before the power outage occurred, at the time of recovery from the power outage, the normal A designation information stored before the power outage is sent from the main control board 100. Game state designation information is transmitted to the sub control board 300. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can understand that the gaming state that was set before the power outage occurred is the normal gaming state A, so the normal background image is displayed as the background image, and the lower display frame is displayed. etc. can be done.

In addition, if normal gaming state B was set before the power outage occurred, at the time of recovery from the power outage, the normal B designation information stored before the power outage is sent from the main control board 100. Game state designation information is transmitted to the sub control board 300. As a result, the sub-control board 300 can understand that the gaming state that was set before the power outage occurred is the normal gaming state B, so the normal background image is displayed as the background image, and the display in the lower display frame is You can prevent it from happening.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, when the power is restored, the gaming state designation information stored before the power outage is transmitted to the sub control board 300, and the gaming state designation information is Based on this, it is possible to display a background image, etc.
That is, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, various displays according to the gaming state that were set before the power outage can be reliably restarted after the power outage is restored, so that the power outage can be avoided. It is possible to prevent a situation in which an inappropriate performance is executed if such a situation occurs.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 6, at the time of recovery from a power outage, the remaining number of time reductions and the count value of the time reduction activation number counter before the occurrence of the power outage are stored in the sub control board 300. It will never be sent. Therefore, the sub control board 300 cannot grasp these values and cannot accurately display them.
Therefore, although not particularly illustrated, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a power outage occurs in the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state. After recovering from a power outage, the upper display frame is displayed, but within this upper display frame there are certain displays that make it difficult to remember the exact number of times (for example, a "?" mark or a "0"). display, etc.). Similarly, a power outage occurs in the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, or the normal gaming state A, and after recovering from this power outage, the lower display frame is displayed; The above-mentioned display is displayed within the display frame.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player misunderstands the remaining number of time reductions, the number of times remaining until the time reduction activation number, etc.

At the time of recovery from a power outage, the remaining number of time reductions before the power outage and the count value of the time reduction activation counter are set to be sent to the sub control board 300, and the accurate number of times is displayed after the power outage is recovered. It may be made executable.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 6)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, one gate 20 was provided only in the second game area 12b, but the installation position and number of gates 20 are not limited to this.
For example, one gate 20 may be provided in the first game area 12a, or one gate 20 may be provided in each of the first game area 12a and the second game area 12b.
In this case, even when a game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a, there is an opportunity to draw a normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest.
In addition, almost all of the game balls that entered the second gaming area 12b and did not enter the second starting prize opening 16 and the big winning opening 18 can enter the second gaming area 12b, A regular symbol operating winning hole may be provided, which is configured to pay out a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls when a game ball enters the ball and also draw a regular symbol.
In this case, for example, if a game ball is launched toward the second game area 12b during the non-time-saving game state, the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening 16, but the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening 16, but the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening 16, A game ball enters the mouth, and this provides an opportunity to pay out the game ball and draw a normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low probability time-saving game state) that is set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, , the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery was the same as during the non-time-saving gaming state, but the probability is not limited to this, and the probability is higher during the first time-saving gaming state than during the non-time-saving gaming state. The probability may be set so that a winning result occurs in the drawing of normal symbols.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state, settings are made such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than during the non-time-saving game state, settings are made such that the variation time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the movable piece 16b is activated. By performing at least one of the settings that increase the time, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state) is set through jackpot winning (determination of jackpot symbols X1, A time-saving game that is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state (normal game state, second low-probability time-saving game state) Although a state (first time-saving game state) was provided, the types of time-saving game state are not limited to these.
For example, special symbols other than jackpot symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state (e.g., losing symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, small symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) A time-saving gaming state or the like may be provided that is set based on the determination of winning symbols, etc.).
In addition, there is a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game, and a time-saving game that is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in a low probability game state. The time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol that is other than the jackpot symbol and is determined to set the time-saving gaming state is when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as those of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, a total of 13 types of gaming state designation information (normal A designation information, second low probability time saving designation information, second low probability time saving end predetermined number of times before designation information, second Low-probability time-saving final designation information, high-probability time-saving hold designation information, high-probability time-saving designation information, high-probability time-saving end designation information a predetermined number of times before, high-probability time-saving final designation information, first low-probability time-saving designation information before arrival, first low Probability time saving designation information, first low probability time saving end specified number of times before designation information, first low probability time saving final designation information, and normal B designation information (gaming state designation information), but other gaming state designation information may be provided.

For example, in the normal game state that is set after the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state ends, a special fluctuation pattern is determined for a specific period until a predetermined number of fluctuations are performed. For pachinko machines that have been set, the game state designation information includes specific period designation information that indicates changes in special symbols during the above-mentioned specific period, and specific period designation information that indicates changes in the last special symbol during the above-mentioned specific period. Specific period final designation information or the like may be provided to indicate that there is a certain period.
Furthermore, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine in which it is possible to win a small win through a lottery, and a time-saving gaming state is set for a predetermined small win symbol that can be determined when a small win is won, the game As the state designation information, small win time saving designation information indicating that the special symbol is changed in the time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the small winning time saving gaming state) set based on the determination of the small winning symbol described above, and small winning. Small hit time saving final designation information or the like may be provided indicating that this is the last special symbol change in the time saving gaming state.
In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine that is specified to set a time-saving gaming state to a predetermined losing symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss, the gaming state designation information may be based on the determination of the losing symbol described above. Loss time saving designation information indicating that this is a change in the special symbol in the time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as losing time saving gaming state) set by Final designation information, etc. may also be provided.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the game state designation information includes the time when the stop display time has elapsed, the time when the special game ends, the time when the spec designation command is sent (when the customer waiting time has elapsed, the special symbol at the start of fluctuation, at the start of the opening process, at the start of the round game, at the end of the round game, at the start of the ending process, at the end of the ending process, at the time of RAM clearing, at the time of power on (at the time of power recovery)) Although the gaming state designation information is transmitted to the sub-control board 300, the timing of transmitting the gaming state designation information is not limited to this.
For example, in a pachinko machine that allows you to win a small win through a lottery, and is set to execute a small win game when you win a small win, at the start of the small win game, The gaming state designation information may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the time of termination or the like.
In addition, for example, setting values are provided that are associated with settings related to ball dispensing, and as modes related to setting values, there is a setting value change mode for changing the setting values, and a setting value that is checked is set. In a pachinko machine equipped with a set value confirmation mode for the purpose of You may also do so.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of times constituted by the above-mentioned number of times data A and number of times data B is the high-accuracy number, the time-saving number, and the time-saving activation number, but it is limited to these. It's not something you can do.
For example, a pachinko machine that is set up to be able to switch the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the end of the special game (hereinafter also referred to as the special number of times). Alternatively, the special number of times may be composed of the number of times data A and number of times B described above.
For example, as a condition for the time-saving gaming state to end, a predetermined event must occur a specific number of times (for example, in the case of a pachinko machine that allows small wins to be won through a lottery, it is possible to win small wins). For pachinko machines in which the number of times a predetermined small winning symbol is determined reaches a specific number, etc.), the specific number of times is determined by the number of times data A and number data B mentioned above. may be configured.
Also, for example, the total number of fluctuations based on the first special drawing random number and the number of fluctuations based on the second special drawing random number reaches the first time saving number, and the number of fluctuations based on the second special drawing random number reaches the second In a pachinko machine that is set so that the time-saving gaming state ends when one of the conditions for reaching the number of time-savings is met, both the first number of time-savings and the second number of time-savings are set. It may be configured by the number data A and the number data B described above.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 6 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 6, the number of times data A and the number of times data B are both 1-byte data, and the lower 7 bits of the number of times data A are used to calculate the numerical values of various times by 7. The remainder value was constructed by dividing by a value that is 1 larger than the maximum value that can be expressed in binary bits, and the lower 7 bits of count data B were used to construct the quotient value. The format is not limited to this.
For example, both count data A and count data B may be binary data of 2 bytes or more, or the data sizes of count data A and count data B may be set to be different.
Specifically, for example, both the number data A and the number data B may be configured as 2-byte data consisting of an upper 1 byte of data and a lower 1 byte of data. When configured in this way, the upper 1 byte of data is used to indicate the type of data to be transmitted (for example, the number data A related to the high accuracy number, the number data B related to the high accuracy number, etc.). The lower 1 byte data may be used as data for specifying the number of times described above. Thereby, by referring to the data in the upper 1 byte, the type of number of times specified by the data in the lower 1 byte that follows can be reliably transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition to the number data A and number data B, other commands and data sent from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 (for example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined at the start of fluctuation, a preliminary determination process As mentioned above, the upper 1 byte (the type of command and data to be sent) It may be configured as 2-byte data consisting of a lower 1 byte (one that specifies the specific content of the command or data) and a lower one byte (one that specifies the specific contents of the command or data). This makes it possible to standardize the format of data transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and to reduce the processing load associated with receiving data transmitted from the main control board 100.
In addition, when count data A, count data B, etc. are configured as 2-byte data consisting of an upper 1 byte and a lower 1 byte as described above, the first bit of the upper 1 byte is always set to a predetermined value (for example, 1 ), and the first bit of the lower one byte may always be set to a value different from the predetermined value (for example, 0). Thereby, in the sub control board 300, by determining the value set in the first bit, it is possible to reliably grasp whether the data is the upper 1 byte data or the lower 1 byte data.
Then, the sub control board 300 determines whether the leading bit of the successively received 1-byte data (the data received first is also referred to as preceding data, and the data received following the preceding data is also referred to as subsequent data) is If they are the same value (if the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the succeeding data are both predetermined values, the first bit of the preceding data and the first bit of the succeeding data are both different values from the predetermined value) case), it is determined that the upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte of the various commands and data configured as described above could not be received due to the occurrence of noise etc., and the preceding data described above is discarded or Various processes based on the received data may not be performed by discarding the subsequent data, or by discarding both the above-mentioned preceding data and the above-mentioned subsequent data.
On the other hand, if the first bit of the preceding data is a predetermined value and the first bit of the subsequent data is a value different from the predetermined value, then It may be determined that the byte and the lower one byte have been properly received, and various processes may be performed based on the received data.
Note that the above-mentioned predetermined value or the bit to which a value different from the predetermined value is set is not limited to the first bit, but may be other bits.
Further, the bits constituting the above-mentioned remainder value and quotient value may be, for example, the upper 7 bits, or may be 7 bits excluding a predetermined bit (for example, the 4th bit from the first bit).
Further, the above-mentioned remainder value and quotient value may be configured using a plurality of bits other than 7 bits (for example, 5 bits, 8 bits, etc.). For example, the lower 5 bits of count data A are used to construct the remainder value when the numerical value of each type of count is divided by a value that is 1 larger than the maximum value that can be expressed in a 5-bit binary number, and the lower 5 bits of count data B are Bits may be used to construct the quotient value.
Further, the number data A may constitute the above-mentioned quotient value, and the number data B may constitute the above-mentioned remainder value.
Even in the case described above, even if the various times such as the number of times of time saving and the number of times of time saving activation are large values, the number of times mentioned above is reduced while reducing the number of data sent to the sub control board 300. It can be transmitted to the control board 300.
In addition, the main CPU 101 stores information on the number of time saving activations for which the first low probability time saving gaming state is set and the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state (number of times data A, number of times data B) due to backup errors, etc. The information may be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 even in a game stop state where the game cannot proceed based on the above. In addition, there are setting values associated with settings related to the ball output, and as modes related to the setting values, there is a setting value change mode for changing the setting value after the game has become impossible to proceed. In a pachinko machine that is provided with a set value confirmation mode for checking the set values set when progress is disabled, the main CPU 101 is set to a first low probability time saving gaming state. Information on the different number of time saving activations and the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state (number of times data A, number of times data B) is sent to the sub control board 300 even during the setting value change mode or setting value confirmation mode. You may also do so.

(Other application example 7)
The external configuration of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7 (the configuration of the game board 11 (play area 12), the installed devices and members), the configuration of the control means, the progress of the game, the various random numbers used in the game, etc. The various tables are almost the same as the pachinko machine P according to the embodiment described above, and only the conditions for setting the first low probability time-saving gaming state and the configuration of the win/fail random number determination table 110 are the same as those in the above-described implementation. This is different from the pachinko machine P according to the form.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, during the normal game state, during the first low probability time saving game state, and during the second low probability time saving game state, a jackpot win and a small win win are generated. In the case of winning a jackpot, one of the jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 similar to the above-mentioned embodiment is decided, and the lottery result is either a loss or a loss. In the case of a win, either the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 similar to the above embodiment is determined, and in the case of a loss, the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, it is defined that the first time-saving game state (time-saving game state, number of time-savings is 50 times) is set for the losing symbol Z2, and during the normal game state, When the losing symbol Z2 is determined, a first time-saving gaming state is set and the game shifts to a first low-probability time-saving gaming state. In addition, if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first time saving gaming state will not be reset and the first low probability time saving gaming state will continue. There is. Similarly, if the losing symbol Z2 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state is not set, and the second low-probability time-saving gaming state continues. There is.
On the other hand, it is not defined that the first time-saving gaming state is set for the losing symbol Z1, and when the losing symbol Z1 is determined, the gaming state at the time of the determination continues. That is, when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state continues, and when a losing symbol Z1 is determined during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state continues. However, when the losing symbol Z1 is determined during the second low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state continues.

In addition, even during the high probability time-saving game state, the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot win, a small win win, or a loss, but in the case of a jackpot win, the above-mentioned embodiment Either the similar jackpot symbol X1 or X4 is determined, and in the case of a small win, either the small prize symbol Y1 or Y2, which is similar to the above embodiment, is determined, and in the case of a loss, the losing symbol Z1 is now determined. That is, if a loss occurs during the high probability time saving game state, the losing symbol Z2 will not be determined.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the win/fail random number determination table 110 includes low probability gaming states (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state). The table TL that is referred to when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16 in the gaming state), the first starting winning hole 15 in the high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) Alternatively, a table TH is provided that is referred to when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16.
Here, the random number determination table 110 of other application example 7 includes a special lottery result that is determined to be one of the lottery results described above (big hit win, small win win, loss), and a special lottery result corresponding to the determined lottery result. A plurality of numerical ranges are set in which the type of symbol is determined, and the above-mentioned lottery results and special symbol The type of is determined. That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, both the result of the winning lottery and the type of special symbol are determined by the winning random number determination table 110 and the winning random number. Therefore, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 is not provided with the special symbol random numbers and the special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol, which are provided in the pachinko machine P according to the above-described embodiment. Not yet.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 81(a) and 82(a), according to the table TL, if the winning or losing random number is between 0 and 63570, it is determined that the winning pattern is a loss, and the losing symbol Z1 is If the winning/losing random number is 63,571 to 63,963, it is determined to be a loss, and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, and if the winning/losing random number is from 63,964 to 63,965, it is determined to be a jackpot, and If the jackpot symbol X1 is determined and the random number is between 63966 and 64147, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined and the random number is between 64148 and 64225, the jackpot is determined If it is determined to be a win, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, and the random numbers are between 64,226 and 64,880, it is determined that a small win has been won, and the small winning symbol is determined, and the random numbers are between 64,881 and 65,535. If there is, it is determined that the small winning has been won, and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 81(b) and 82(b), according to the table TH, if the winning/losing random number is between 0 and 63570, it is determined that the winning is a loss, and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, If the random numbers are between 63571 and 64028, it is determined that the jackpot has been won, and the jackpot symbol If the symbol X4 is determined and the random number is between 64226 and 64880, it is determined that the small winning symbol has been won, and when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined and the random number is between 64881 and 65535, it is determined that the small winning symbol is won. It is determined that the winning is successful, and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the numerical range (hereinafter referred to as The high probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range (hereinafter referred to as the low probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range) is wider than the numerical range in which jackpot symbols are determined in the table TL referenced in the low probability gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the low probability jackpot symbol determination numerical range). In TL, a losing pattern Z2 that is determined to be a loss and for which it is determined that the first time-saving gaming state is set is a range corresponding to the difference between the high-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range and the low-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range. It is set as a numerical range to be determined.
That is, the numerical range in which the losing symbol Z2 is determined in the table TL is set to be switched to the numerical value range in which the jackpot symbol is determined in the table TH.
With this configuration, although jackpot symbols are determined in the high probability gaming state, the numerical range in which jackpot symbols are not determined in the low probability gaming state is effectively used, and the first time saving gaming state is started. It is possible to determine the losing symbols that are specified to be set, and to prevent winning of the jackpot and transition to the time-saving gaming state without going through special games in the high-probability gaming state, while allowing the low-probability game to be set. In this state, it is possible to reliably execute control that allows a transition to a time-saving gaming state without winning a jackpot or a special game.

Note that in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the special symbol random number and special symbol random number determination table 111 for determining the type of special symbol are not provided, and only the win/fail random number and the win/fail random number determination table 110 are provided. However, the invention is not limited to this.
For example, similar to the above-described embodiment, a special symbol random number and a special symbol random number determination table 111 are provided, and the result of the lottery is determined by the random number and the random number determination table 110, and then the determined result of the lottery is determined. The type of special symbol may be determined using the special symbol random number and the special symbol random number determination table 111 while referring to the above. Even in this case, similarly to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7, the numerical range of the win/fail random number determination table 110 may be set.

Specifically, the table TL, which is the win/fail random number determination table 110 that is referred to in the low probability gaming state, includes, for example, a first numerical range and a second numerical range that are determined to be a loss, and a winning range that is determined to be a jackpot. The table TH, which is the win/fail random number determination table 110 that is referred to in the high probability gaming state, includes, for example, a first numerical range that is determined to be a loss, and a numerical range that is determined to be a small win. A numerical range for determining a jackpot win and a numerical range for determining a small win are provided. Then, in the table TL, the range corresponding to the difference between the numerical range determined as a jackpot win in the table TH and the numerical range determined as a jackpot win in the table TL is set as the above-mentioned second numerical range. Set.
In addition, the special symbol random number determination table 111, for example, when it is determined that the loss belongs to the first numerical range, no matter what value the acquired special symbol random number is, the loss symbol Z1 (first time-saving game state If a losing symbol Z2 (for which it is not specified to set a losing symbol) is determined and is determined to be a losing symbol belonging to the second numerical range, no matter what value the obtained special symbol random number is, the losing symbol Z2 (the losing symbol Z2 If a losing symbol (which is defined to set a 1-time saving gaming state) is determined and it is determined to be a jackpot winning symbol, then either jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3 or X4 is determined and a small winning winning symbol is determined. When it is determined that the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is set so as to be determined.
When set as above, the second numerical range that is determined to be a loss in the winning lottery in the low probability gaming state is switched to the numerical range that is determined to be a jackpot win in the winning lottery in the high probability gaming state. becomes. Then, when it is determined that the loss belongs to the second numerical range, the losing symbol Z2 is determined to set the first time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be achieved.

In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, the special symbol random number determination table 111 is based on the type of the starting winning hole into which the game ball entered (that is, the type of the acquired special symbol random number (first special symbol random number, first special symbol random number, Separate tables may be provided for each of the two special symbol random numbers), and different types of special symbols may be determined for each table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16, In the low-probability time-saving game state, the table TL is referred to, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the table TH is referred to, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the win/fail random number determination table 110 is referred to when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in the low probability time saving gaming state, and the winning/losing random number determination table 110 is referred to when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 while in the low probability time saving gaming state. A win/fail random number determination table 110 that is referred to when a game ball enters the opening 16, and a win/fail random number that is referenced when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in a high probability time-saving gaming state. A judgment table 110 is provided separately, and a win/fail random number judgment table 110 is provided which is referred to when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 in a high probability time-saving gaming state, and the results of the win/fail lottery are determined for each table. You may also set a numerical range that is associated with the type of special symbol.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the range corresponding to the difference between the high-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range and the low-probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range is determined to be a loss in the table TL, and the loss pattern Z2 was completely consistent with the determined numerical range, but is not limited to this.
For example, the numerical range in which it is determined to be a loss in the table TL and in which the losing symbol Z2 is determined is a part of the range corresponding to the difference between the high probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range and the low probability jackpot symbol determination numerical value range. It may be set to
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 7, the numerical range in which the losing symbols Z2 are determined in the table TL is limited to the numerical range in which the jackpot symbols are determined in the table TH. Instead, the small winning symbol may be determined.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 7 can be achieved.

(Other application example 8)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 has a variation of special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and a variation of the special symbol based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16. (If both the reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and the reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 16 are stored, both The system is set to perform so-called simultaneous processing control, in which pending requests are processed at the same time.

(Summary of structure within gaming area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as in the above-described embodiment, a general winning opening 14, a first starting winning opening 15, a second starting winning opening 16, a movable piece 16b, An attacker device 17, an exit 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 83). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as the second starting winning opening 16, a normal second starting winning opening 16c in which the movable piece 16b is not attached, and a specific starting winning opening 16c in which the movable piece 16b is attached. Two 2-start winning openings 16d are provided.
Note that the structures, installation positions, etc. of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiments.
The structure within the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as shown in FIG. There is. Only the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as shown in FIG. 83, the gate 20 is provided at the upper right of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is configured such that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through it, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through it. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, almost all game balls entering the second game area 12b are configured to pass through the gate 20.

As shown in FIG. 83, below the gate 20, a specific second starting prize opening 16d and a flat movable piece 16b (ordinary electric accessory) that can be projected and retracted into the game board 11 are installed side by side. has been done.
The upper surface of the movable piece 16b is formed so as to slope downward from the right end to the left end when it protrudes from the game board 11. And, the right end of the movable piece 16b is located directly below the gate 20, and the specific second start prize opening 16d is arranged to the left of the left end of the movable piece 16b. Further, the specific second starting prize opening 16d has a cup shape that opens upward, and the game ball that reaches the opening enters the specific second starting winning opening 16d.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the movable piece 16b is protruding from the game board 11, the upper surface of the movable piece 16b is a guide that guides the game ball to the opening of the specific second starting prize opening 16d. By functioning as a member, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the specific second starting prize opening 16d (see FIG. 84(b)). On the other hand, when the movable piece 16b is immersed in the game board 11, the movable piece 16b cannot guide the game ball to the opening of the specific second starting prize opening 16d, and It is impossible for a game ball to enter the opening 16d (see FIG. 84(a)). In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the length from the right end of the movable piece 16b to the specific second starting prize opening 16d is equal to the width of the flowing passage in the second gaming area 12b through which the game ball flows down. Since they are almost the same, in a state where the movable piece 16b is protruding, almost all of the game balls that have entered the second game area 12b and passed through the gate 20 can enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d.

Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols is carried out, and a variable display of the normal symbols is started. If the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a win, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b protrudes for a predetermined operating time. state (see FIG. 84(b)). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is a loss, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b is moved to the game board. 11 (see FIG. 84(a)).
In addition, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.

As shown in FIG. 83, an attacker device 17 is provided below the specific second starting prize opening 16d and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the grand prize opening 18.
In addition, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.
As described later, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the game is played according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is now set.

As shown in FIG. 83, below the attacker device 17, a second starting prize opening 16c is normally provided. Normally, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16c, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball. Then, game balls that have entered the second gaming area 12b and have not entered the specific second starting prize opening 16d and the large winning opening 18 can normally enter the second starting winning opening 16c.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16c, a predetermined number of game balls (three in other application example 8) are paid out, and a specific number of game balls are paid out. When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16d or the first starting winning hole 15, a number of game balls (one in other application example 8) different from the above-mentioned predetermined number are paid out.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a normal gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-probability gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low-probability gaming state and a first time-saving gaming state. Any of the high probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as high probability time saving) which is a gaming state that is a combination of a probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as low probability time saving gaming state), a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state The gaming state of is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are the frequency of entry of game balls into the second starting winning hole 16 ( The difficulty level of the balls (in other words, the frequency of winning/losing drawings based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is set to be different from each other. The specific contents of the settings will be explained in detail later.
Note that, similar to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b. The game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d, enter the big winning opening 18, and normally enter the second starting winning opening 16c.
In principle, during the normal gaming state, the player is instructed to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting) so that the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15. During the low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the special game, and the small winning game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the specified second starting winning opening 16d or the normal second starting winning opening. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the ball 16c and also enters the big prize opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, and the jackpot If you win, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be determined. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting winning hole 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), winning of the jackpot The probability is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is set to approximately 6/300. .
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 70/100 (that is, 70%), and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 30/100 (that is, 30%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined.
Incidentally, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 85(a), in the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting winning hole 16 (normal second starting winning hole 16c, specific second starting winning hole 16d), there is a jackpot or a winning lottery. It is possible to win a small hit, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 is determined, and when a small win is won, a small win symbol Y1 is determined. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), winning of the jackpot The probability is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is set to approximately 6/300. .
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the determination probability of the small win symbol Y1 is set to 100/100 (100%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, during the special game based on the determination, the jackpot 18 is opened for 29.0 seconds or A round game that ends when one of the conditions that 10 game balls enters the winning hole 18 is satisfied is executed five times, and about 500 game balls can be won.
Then, as shown in FIG. 85(a), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X3 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on the determination, Approximately 1,000 game balls can be won.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 86(a), when the small winning is won and the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, the big winning hole 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and the big winning hole 18 is opened for 0.05 seconds once. When 10 game balls enter the ball while it is open, a small winning game is executed in which the big prize opening 18 is closed. During this small winning game, as mentioned above, the big winning hole 18 is opened for only 0.05 seconds, so it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 18.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, during the normal gaming state, a loss occurs through a winning/failure lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the losing symbol Z1 is determined. If the first pending number at the time is less than 2 (0 or 1), "13 seconds variation (variation pattern in which the special symbol variation time is set to 13 seconds)" or "30 seconds variation (special symbol variation)" A variation pattern in which the time is set to 30 seconds) is determined. In addition, if the first pending number at the time mentioned above is 2 or more, either "5 seconds variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 5 seconds)" or "30 seconds variation" A pattern is determined.

During the normal game state, if a loss occurs in the lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, a variation pattern of "13 seconds variation" is determined.
During the normal gaming state, if you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, and if you win the jackpot by the lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined. In either case, a variation pattern of "120 seconds variation (variation pattern in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 120 seconds)" is determined.
During the normal gaming state, if you win a small hit by lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, "3 seconds fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to 3 seconds)" A variation pattern of "Fluctuation pattern)" is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in the low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving gaming state, if a loss occurs in the winning lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and the second In any case where there is a loss and a loss pattern Z2 is determined by the lottery based on the special pattern random numbers, one of the fluctuation patterns of "5 seconds fluctuation", "30 seconds fluctuation" or "60 seconds fluctuation" is determined. .
In the low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or When a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X3 is determined, a variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.
In the low-probability time-saving gaming state or the high-probability time-saving gaming state, if a small hit is won and the small winning symbol Y1 is determined by the lottery based on the second special pattern random number, a fluctuation pattern of "3 seconds fluctuation" is determined. be done.

(Summary of simultaneous rotation control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, the special symbols change based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16. Control that simultaneously changes the special symbols based on the balls, so-called simultaneous rotation control, is executed. The simultaneous rotation control in another application example 8 will be described below.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the special game is not being executed, and the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 are not performing variable display of special symbols. In this case, it is possible to draw a lottery based on the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number.
In addition, when the first special symbol display device 30 is in the process of displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, and the second special symbol display device 31 is not displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, the second special symbol random number is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. Win/fail lottery is possible, and when the second special symbol display device 31 is displaying a special symbol in a variable manner and the first special symbol display device 30 is not displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol It is possible to draw a lottery based on random numbers.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 perform variable display of the special symbols at the same time. Then, when the first special symbol display device 30 finishes the variable display of the special symbol, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the first special symbol display device 30 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. When the second special symbol display device 31 finishes the variable display of the special symbol, if the second special symbol random number is stored, the second special symbol display device 31 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when a new winning lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number while the first special symbol display device 30 is displaying a varying special symbol, the variation When the special symbol being displayed is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (i.e., when a jackpot has been won in the lottery that triggers the variable display in progress), a new jackpot symbol will be executed. If a jackpot cannot be won as a result of the hit/fail lottery and it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the lottery result is forcibly set to be a loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Similarly, when a new winning/failure lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number while the second special symbol display device 31 is displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is the jackpot symbol X3. In the event that a jackpot is not won as a result of a new lottery, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery is set to be a forced loss. There is. In other words, the result of the lottery is a small win or a loss.
Therefore, for example, when a jackpot is won based on the second special pattern random number and a special symbol (jackpot symbol X3) based on the jackpot win is displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, a new If a lottery is held based on the first special drawing random number, the result of the lottery will be a loss. In addition, when a jackpot is won based on the first special symbol random number and a special symbol (jackpot symbol X1 or X2) based on the winning of the jackpot is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, a new If a lottery is held based on the second special random numbers, the result of the lottery will be a small winning or a loss.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, the small win symbol Y1 is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31. If it is inside, this small winning symbol Y1 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to a losing symbol Z2, and this losing symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, if the losing symbol Z2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31, this losing symbol Z2 is It is now forcibly stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, when the jackpot symbol X3 or the small win symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the losing symbol Z1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30. If it is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, this losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped.
In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, if the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, this jackpot symbol X1 Or, X2 is forcibly changed (rewritten) to the losing symbol Z1, and this losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, when the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) are stopped and displayed on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, the jackpot symbols (X1, X2) are displayed on the other one. ., A variable display is now performed.

(Summary of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 8 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 86(b), in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in a protruding state) when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not particularly shown, the same setting is made during the special game and the small winning game.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, which is the same as during the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1, which is higher than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state. 1. The normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when the normal symbol is won by lottery is the same as during the first time-saving game state. It is set to 5 seconds.

In other words, during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), a special game, or a small winning game, there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and the movable piece There are many opportunities for 16b to become prominent. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to go from the retracted state to the protruding state (from the protruding state to Although the interval until the next protruding state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is extremely short. Therefore, during a non-time-saving game state, a special game, or a small winning game, the movable piece 16b is almost retracted, and the game ball that enters the second game area 12b enters the specific second starting prize opening 16d. That has become almost impossible.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning is the same as during the non-time-saving game state, so the movable piece 16b protrudes as in the non-time-saving game state. There are many opportunities for this situation to occur. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is retracted. Although the time it takes for the movable piece 16b to reach the protruding state is short (the interval from one protruding state to the next protruding state is short), the time that the movable piece 16b is maintained in the protruding state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is always in a protruding state, and almost all the game balls that enter the second game area 12b enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d. .

In addition, during the second time-saving game state (high probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of winning than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state, so there is a chance that the movable piece 16b will be in a protruding state. are extremely common. In addition, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is As in the case of inside, although the time from the retracted state to the protruded state of the movable piece 16b is short (the interval from one protruded state to the next protruded state is short), the state in which the movable piece 16b protrudes It is maintained for a long time. Therefore, even during the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is always in a protruding state, and almost all the game balls that enter the second game area 12b enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d. .

As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is extremely low in all of the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state. Although it is set high, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility that the game ball enters the specific second starting winning hole 16d (that is, the specific second starting winning hole The frequency of game balls entering the game ball 16d, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning lottery based on the game balls entering the specific second starting prize opening 16d, is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, unlike during the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in a substantially protruding state, so that the movable piece 16b is relatively moved to the specific second starting prize opening 16d. Game balls can easily enter the ball. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for a winning lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, compared to the non-time-saving game state.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, any one of the normal gaming state, the low probability time saving gaming state, and the high probability time saving gaming state is set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(c), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 or In any case where a jackpot is won by lottery and jackpot symbol X3 is determined (that is, when a jackpot is won), the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability gaming state. At the same time, by setting the second time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving game state is set. When the high probability time saving game state is set, both the high probability number of times and the time saving number of times are set to 50.
That is, after the end of the special game that is executed when the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or Until the results of the lottery based on the 2nd special pattern random number are derived 50 times (the number of fluctuations of the special pattern determined based on the 1st special pattern random number (hereinafter also referred to as 1st special pattern) and the 2nd special pattern) The high probability time-saving gaming state continues until the total number of variations of the special symbols (hereinafter also referred to as second special symbols) determined based on the random numbers reaches 50.
Then, during the high-probability time-saving gaming state, if the results of the lottery based on the first special random number and the result of the lottery based on the second special random number are other than jackpots (small wins, losses) all 50 times, The gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state by changing the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state and changing the second time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state.

Furthermore, if a jackpot is won during the above-mentioned high-probability time-saving gaming state and jackpot symbols X1, X2, or X3 are determined, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set again after the special game based on the determination ends. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 85(c), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, the first special When the total number of variations of the number of variations and the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (500 times in other application example 8) (in other words, in a low probability gaming state, the lottery based on the first special symbol random number , and the results of the winning lottery based on the second special random number are all 500 times other than the jackpot), the low probability gaming state is set as it is, and the first time saving gaming state is set, resulting in a low probability time saving gaming. The state is set. When the low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 450 times.
After the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, you will not win a jackpot until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 450 (that is, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol The low probability time-saving gaming state continues until the results of the winning lottery based on random numbers and the winning lottery results based on the second special figure random numbers are derived 450 times in total).
Then, during the low probability time-saving gaming state, if the results of the winning lottery based on the first special random number and the results of the winning lottery based on the second special random number are all other than jackpots (small wins, losses) for 450 times, By changing the first time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state while keeping the low probability game state as it is, the game state is changed to the normal game state.

In addition, if a jackpot is won during the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving game state and a jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined, a high-probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination ends.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a time saving activation number counter for counting the number of time saving activations (500 times) for which a low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set is provided. , a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined by the RAM being cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, the special game ending, or the low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set. It is reset when any one of the reset conditions is met.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), so the time saving activation number counter starts counting from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, the time saving activation number counter does not start counting from the time the special game ends, and the time saving activation number counter starts counting from the time the high probability time saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is set. is started.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the variation of the first special figure (a winning/failure lottery based on the first special figure random number) or the variation of the second special figure (the winning/failure lottery based on the second special figure random number) is Every time the game is played, a count is performed by a time-saving activation number counter, and when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, a low probability time-saving game state is set as described above.

Note that, as described above, counting by the time saving activation number counter starts with the setting of the normal gaming state as a trigger. When the time saving activation number counter starts counting with the setting of the normal gaming state, the time saving activation number counter reaches the point when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches 500 times (in other words, the low probability time saving gaming state is set). The gaming state at the time when the game ends is the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of a special game based on winning a jackpot until winning the next jackpot, the pachinko machine P is in a low-probability time-saving gaming state. can be set only once.
In other words, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations (500 times) and the low probability time saving gaming state is set, the low probability time saving gaming state must be set again until the next jackpot is won. I can't.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving activation will not be activated until the next jackpot is won. The number counter is set to stop counting.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, it is not specified that the time-saving gaming state is set for both the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) and the small winning symbol (Y1). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the losing symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time when the losing symbol was determined continues. Further, after the small winning game based on the determination of the small winning symbol ends, the gaming state at the start of the small winning game continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the number of consecutive time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability change settings as in the above-mentioned embodiment are not set, and when the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined. A high probability time saving game state is always set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 8)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state), the low-probability time-saving gaming state (a low-probability gaming state and a first Either the game state (a game state that combines the time-saving game state) or the high-probability time-saving game state (the game state that combines the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state) is set, and the game progresses. ing.

When a player starts playing, a normal gaming state is often set. During the normal gaming state, as mentioned above, the instruction is to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a (so-called left-handed batting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will: There is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16 (normal second starting winning hole 16c, specific second starting winning hole 16d). Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined (see FIG. 85(a)). Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, a special game in which 5 round games are played is executed, and when the jackpot symbol X2 is determined, a special game in which 10 round games are played is executed. The game state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 85(c)).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, if you play left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, you will be able to shift to the high-probability time-saving gaming state by winning the jackpot ( (See Figure 87).

During the high-probability time-saving game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than during the normal game state, and it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d, making the game more enjoyable than during the normal game state. To more easily win a jackpot while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses.
During the high probability time saving game state, if you hit right as instructed, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16 (normal second starting winning hole 16c, specific second starting winning hole 16d). Extremely high. Then, during the high-probability time-saving game state, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, and when a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 is always determined (Fig. 85 (see (a)). In other words, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the second special random number, you will always get more game balls than in the special game (special game in which 5 rounds of games are played) based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1. A possible special game (a special game in which 10 round games are played) is executed, and the game state after the end of the special game is set again to the high probability time-saving game state (see FIG. 85(c)).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, if you play right as instructed during the high probability time saving game state, you will win the jackpot and a relatively advantageous special game will be executed. At the same time, it becomes possible to shift to the high probability time saving gaming state again (see FIG. 87).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as described above, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is reduced to the number of time saving activations without winning a jackpot during the normal gaming state. (500 times) (when the number of times the lottery results of the winning/failure lottery based on the first special drawing random number and the second special drawing random number are derived reaches the number of time saving activations), the subsequent gaming state is low probability time saving. The gaming state is set (see FIG. 85(c)). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, if you play left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, all the results of the 500 winning/failure drawings will be other than winning the jackpot, so the probability is low. This will shift to the time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 87).

During the low-probability time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same as during the normal gaming state, but it is easier for the game ball to enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d than during the normal gaming state, and the normal gaming Opportunities for winning and losing lottery can be obtained while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses compared to during the state.
And, during the low probability time saving game state as well as during the high probability time saving game state, if the game ball is hit right as instructed, there is a very high possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting prize opening 16. Then, during the low-probability time-saving game state, as in the high-probability time-saving game state, a lottery is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, and if you win a jackpot, you will definitely receive The jackpot symbol X3 is determined (see FIG. 87).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, if you play right as instructed during the high probability time saving game state, you will win a jackpot and a relatively advantageous special game will be executed. At the same time, it becomes possible to shift to the high probability time saving gaming state again (see FIG. 87).

Here, the low-probability time-saving gaming state, which is set when the results of all 500 winning/failure drawings during the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) are other than jackpots, reduces the number of game balls as the game progresses. It is possible to perform a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 up to 450 times while suppressing the number of winnings, and the expectation level of winning the jackpot (execution of a special game in which 10 rounds of games are played). Since this is high, it is an advantageous gaming state for the player.
As mentioned above, if a jackpot is won in the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting winning slot 15, 4 round games are played rather than a special game where 10 round games are played. A special game is likely to be executed, and there is a high possibility that only a relatively small number of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is close to reaching the number of time saving activations, a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting prize opening 15. It is more desirable for the player that the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations and a low probability time-saving gaming state is set without winning the jackpot.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state, the player (See FIGS. 88(a) to (d) and FIGS. 89(a) to (d)). As a result, when the above-mentioned suggestion is made, although it is in the normal gaming state, until the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, the second gaming area 12b It is possible to aim at winning a small hit (determining the small winning symbol Y1) by launching a game ball toward the player and letting the game ball enter the normal second starting prize opening 16c.
As mentioned above, when the small winning symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, if the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, this The jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is forcibly changed to a losing symbol Z1, and then this losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped. Therefore, while the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is fluctuatingly displayed, if a small win is won in a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16c and the small prize symbol Y1 can be stopped and displayed, then the small win symbol Y1 can be stopped and displayed. Since the jackpot that was won is canceled and becomes a loss, it is possible to avoid winning the jackpot.

Specifically, during the normal gaming state, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, it is suggested that the jackpot has been won with the start of the variable performance. A jackpot suggesting image (for example, a character image of "!!!", etc.) is displayed (see FIGS. 88(a) to (d) and FIGS. 89(a) to (d)).
In addition, in the variable performance during the normal gaming state, in the center of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21, a variable display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to a winning/failure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 is displayed. At the lower right corner of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21, a variable display of performance symbols 50 corresponding to the winning/failure lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is performed. (See FIGS. 88(a) to (e) and FIGS. 89(a) to (e)).

When the above-mentioned jackpot suggestion image is displayed, the game ball can be launched toward the second game area 12b in order to normally cause the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16c.
Here, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 during the normal gaming state and a jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, a fluctuation pattern of "120 seconds fluctuation" is determined (FIG. 85(b) ), the variable display (variable performance) of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be executed for 120 seconds on the first special symbol display device 30. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the normal second starting winning hole 16c (second starting winning hole 16) during the normal gaming state and a losing symbol Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation" is determined (see FIG. 85(b)), and the variable display (variable effect) of the losing symbol Z2 is executed on the second special symbol display device 31 for 13 seconds. Then, during the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16c can be executed up to nine times. Therefore, if a small hit is won in the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery that can be performed up to nine times during the fluctuating display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, and the small win symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed while the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is fluctuating, The determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (the winning of the jackpot in the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15) will be cancelled.

Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, when the small prize symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is The losing symbol Z1 is changed to a losing symbol Z1, and the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30. Along with this, in the lower right corner of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21, the performance symbols 50 are stopped and displayed in a manner that notifies the winning of the small hit (for example, in a manner in which all the performance symbols 50 are even-numbered symbols). At the same time, the performance symbol 50 is stopped and displayed in the center of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 in a manner that notifies you of a loss (see FIGS. 88(c) to 88(e)). Further, the jackpot suggestion image is deleted (see FIG. 88(e)).

On the other hand, the above-mentioned variable time of 120 seconds has passed without the small winning symbol Y1 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, and the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is not being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30. In this case, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31. Along with this, in the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, the effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a manner to notify the winning of the jackpot, and in the lower right corner of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21, The effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed in a manner that notifies you of a loss (see FIGS. 89(c) to 89(e)). Furthermore, the jackpot suggestion image is deleted (see FIG. 89(e)).
Note that when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, no special display is performed when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the number of time-saving activations is almost reached in the normal gaming state and the jackpot is won, the above-mentioned gaming method is executed and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting prize opening 16c. By aiming to win a small hit, there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot can be canceled. If the winning of the jackpot can be canceled, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter will not be cleared, so the user can continue to aim to reach the number of time-saving activations.
Note that when winning a jackpot in the normal gaming state, it is not necessarily necessary to execute the above-described gaming method. For example, if you win a jackpot in a situation where the time saving activation number counter has just started counting (the situation is far from reaching the number of time saving activations), you can win the jackpot without executing the above gaming method. A special game based on the above may be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8, through the jackpot winning (determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3) and the execution of the special game, the Not only can it be possible to shift to the probability time-saving gaming state, but also all 500 time-saving activations can be performed during the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state). A low-probability time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state without winning the jackpot or executing a special game because the result of the lottery (based on special drawing random numbers) is other than a jackpot (loss, small win). Since it is possible to shift the game to the next step, it is possible to provide novel gameplay and increase the interest of the players.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, in the second time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or is now set. As a result, for example, even if a gaming state that combines the low probability gaming state and the second time saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3, the low probability gaming When the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during a gaming state that is a combination of the state and the second time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state being set is changed to a different time saving gaming state. situations can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 in the normal gaming state, that fact is notified. Ru. Then, during the fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, if a small hit is won in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16c and the small prize symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is won. The symbol X1 or X2 is changed to a losing symbol Z1, and this losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the winning of the jackpot can be canceled. As a result, depending on the progress of the game (for example, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is close to reaching the number of time saving activation times, etc.), the game ball is normally entered into the second starting prize opening 16c with the aim of winning a small hit. , the player can select whether or not to cancel the winning of the jackpot, and it is possible to provide novel gameplay rich in strategy and increase the player's interest.

Next, the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed when the special symbol variation starts will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90.
In step 5000, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the second reservation storage area, that is, whether the second reservation number counter is equal to or greater than "1". . If it is determined that the second special figure random number is not stored, the process proceeds to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure random number is stored, the process advances to the next step 5001.

In step 5001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol (special symbol determined based on the second special symbol random number) is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step 5013. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 5002.
In step 5002, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the second pending number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the second pending storage area. This shift processing is the same as the processing in step 804 in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to step 5003.

In step 5003, the main CPU 101 executes a validity determination process. This validity determination process is the same as the validity determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5004.
In step 5004, the main CPU 101 executes a second special figure determination process that determines the type of the second special figure. This second special symbol determination process is similar to the special symbol determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5005.

In step 5005, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special symbol determined in step 5004 described above is the jackpot symbol X3. If it is determined that the symbol is not the jackpot symbol X3 (that is, it is the small prize symbol Y1 or the losing symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the jackpot symbol X3, the process advances to the next step 5006.
In step 5006, the main CPU 101 determines whether the data stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area, which will be described later, is related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, as described above, the first special symbol (the special symbol determined based on the first special symbol random number) and the second special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner at the same time. It has become. Then, at the start of the variable display of the second special figure, the determined second special figure (that is, the second special figure to be stopped and displayed) is stored in the second special figure temporary storage area. Similarly, at the start of the variable display of the first special figure, the determined first special figure (that is, the first special figure to be stopped and displayed) is stored in the first special figure temporary storage area. In other words, the first special symbol temporary storage area stores the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, and the second special symbol temporary storage region stores the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30. The second special figure being displayed in a variable manner is stored.
Therefore, in this step 5006, when starting the variable display of the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second symbol, the first special symbol display device 30 displays the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first special symbol. It is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed.
If it is determined that the above-mentioned data is not related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 (that is, the losing symbol Z1), the process advances to step 5008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above-mentioned data is related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5007.

In step 5007, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol X3 stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area to the data related to the losing symbol Z2. That is, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started during the variable display of the first special pattern in which the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 has been determined, and if the jackpot pattern X3 is determined as the second special pattern, , this jackpot symbol X3 is forcibly rewritten to a losing symbol Z2.
As mentioned above, after determining the second special symbol, instead of forcibly rewriting the determined jackpot symbol X3 to the losing symbol Z2, when determining the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed. The device 30 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the jackpot symbol X1 or The losing symbol Z2 may always be determined as a figure.
Then, the process advances to the next step 5008.
In step 5008, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area in the performance transmission data storage area. Specifically, if the second special symbol (jackpot symbol X3, small prize symbol Y1, or loss symbol Z2) determined in step 5004 described above, or if forced rewriting is performed in step 5007 described above, Losing symbol Z2 is memorized. As a result, information regarding the second special symbol will be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable performance. Then, the process advances to the next step 5009.

In step 5009, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process. This fluctuation pattern determination process is the same as the fluctuation pattern determination process in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5010.
In step 5010, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 31. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 31 is started. Then, the process advances to the next step 5011.

In step 5011, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. This time saving number updating process is the same as the time saving number updating process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5012.
In step 5012, the main CPU 101 executes a high-accuracy frequency update process. This high-accuracy count update process is the same as the high-accuracy count update process in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5013.

In step 5013, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special figure random number is stored in the storage section of the first reservation storage area, that is, whether or not the first reservation number counter is equal to or greater than "1". . Then, when it is determined that the first special figure random number is not stored, the fluctuation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure random number is stored, the process advances to the next step 5014.
In step 5014, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the variable display is in progress, the special symbol variation start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 5015.

In step 5015, the main CPU 101 decrements the value of the first pending number counter by "1" and executes a shift process of the first pending storage area. This shift processing is similar to the processing in step 803 in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to step 5016.
In step 5016, the main CPU 101 executes a validity determination process. This validity determination process is the same as the validity determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5017.

In step 5017, the main CPU 101 executes a first special figure determination process that determines the type of the first special figure. This first special symbol determination process is similar to the special symbol determination process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5018.
In step 5018, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol determined in step 5017 described above is the jackpot symbol X1 or X2. If it is determined that the jackpot symbol is not X1 or X2 (that is, it is a losing symbol Z1), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol is X1 or X2, the process proceeds to the next step 5019.

In step 5019, the main CPU 101 determines whether the data stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area is related to the jackpot symbol X3. That is, when starting the variable display of the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 determined as the first symbol, the main CPU 101 causes the second special symbol display device 31 to display a variable display of the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second special symbol. Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the above-mentioned data is not related to the jackpot symbol X3 (that is, the small win symbol Y1 or the losing symbol Z2), the process proceeds to step 5021. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above-mentioned data is related to the jackpot symbol X3, the process proceeds to the next step 5020.
In step 5020, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area to the data related to the losing symbol Z1. That is, when the variable display of the first special pattern is started during the variable display of the second special pattern in which the jackpot pattern X3 has been determined, if the jackpot pattern X1 or X2 is determined as the first special pattern, , this jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is forcibly rewritten to a losing symbol Z1.
In addition, after determining the first special symbol, instead of forcibly rewriting the determined jackpot symbol X1 or X2 to the losing symbol Z1, when determining the first special symbol, the second special symbol display device 31 , determines whether or not the jackpot symbol X3 determined as the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the jackpot symbol It may be determined.
Then, the process advances to the next step 5021.

In step 5021, the main CPU 101 stores a symbol determination command indicating the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area in the performance transmission data storage area. Specifically, if the first special symbol (jackpot symbol X1 or X2, or loss symbol Z1) determined in step 3017 described above, or if forced rewriting is performed in step 5020 described above, the loss symbol is The symbol Z1 is stored. As a result, information regarding the first special figure will be transmitted to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable performance. Then, the process advances to the next step 5022.
In step 5022, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern processing. This fluctuation pattern determination process is the same as the fluctuation pattern determination process in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5023.

In step 5023, the main CPU 101 sets variable display data for starting variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 30. Thereby, the variable display of the first special symbol display device 30 is started. Then, the process advances to the next step 5024.
In step 5024, the main CPU 101 executes time saving number update processing. This time saving number updating process is the same as the time saving number updating process in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the process advances to the next step 5025.

In step 5025, the main CPU 101 executes a high-accuracy frequency update process. This high-accuracy count update process is the same as the high-accuracy count update process in the embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the special symbol fluctuation stop process that is executed when the special symbol fluctuation stops will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91.
In step 5100, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30. If it is determined that the variable display is not in progress, the process advances to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is in progress, the process advances to the next step 3101.
In step 5101, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed. If it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process advances to step 5106. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 5102.

In step 5102, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area on the first special symbol display device 30, and Execute stop display. Then, the process advances to the next step 5103.
In step 5103, the main CPU 101 stores a first special figure stop display command indicating that the first special figure is stopped and displayed in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 5104.

In step 5104, the main CPU 101 determines the special figure stop display time (hereinafter also referred to as the first special figure stop display time) for stopping and displaying the first special figure. Then, the process advances to the next step 5105.
In step 5105, the main CPU 101 sets the first special figure stop display time determined in step 5104 described above to the first stop display time timer counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5106.

In step 5106, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31. Then, when it is determined that the variable display is not in progress, the special symbol variation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display is in progress, the process advances to the next step 5107.
In step 5107, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed. Then, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 5108.

In step 5108, the main CPU 101 sets stop display data for stopping and displaying the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area on the second special symbol display device 31, and stops the second symbol. Execute display. Then, the process advances to the next step 5109.
In step 5109, the main CPU 101 stores a second special figure stop display command indicating that the second special figure is stopped and displayed in the production transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 5110.

In step 5110, the main CPU 101 determines the special figure stop display time (hereinafter also referred to as the second special figure stop display time) for stopping and displaying the second special figure. Then, the process advances to the next step 5111.
In step 5111, the main CPU 101 sets the second special figure stop display time determined in step 5110 described above to the second stop display time timer counter. Then, the special symbol variation stop processing ends.

Next, the post-stop process executed after the end of the special symbol variation stop process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92.
In step 5200, the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special figure stop display time set in the first stop display time timer counter in step 5105 described above has elapsed. If it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to step 5202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the process advances to the next step 5201.
In step 5201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special figure stop display time set in the second stop display time timer counter in step 5011 described above has elapsed. Then, when it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 5202.

In step 5202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped and displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a small winning symbol or a losing symbol), the process advances to step 5209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot, the process advances to the next step 5203.
In step 5203, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not another special symbol that is different from the stopped and displayed special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed is jackpot symbol X1 or X2, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is When the figure is the jackpot symbol X3, it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step 5207. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to the next step 5204.

In step 5204, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a small winning symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a small winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 5206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a small winning symbol, the process advances to the next step 5205.

In step 5205, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the small winning symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner (that is, the data related to the small winning symbol Y1 stored in the second special symbol temporary storage area) to the data related to the losing symbol. Then, the process advances to the next step 5206.
In step 5206, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbols that are being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a losing symbol, the losing symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area or the second special symbol temporary storage area is also stored in the step described above. When rewriting is performed in step 5205, the losing symbol stored in the rewritten first special symbol temporary storage area or second special symbol temporary storage area is replaced with the corresponding special symbol even if the variable time has not elapsed. Display stop on the display device. That is, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variation time of this first special symbol has not elapsed. . In addition, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31 even if the variable time of this second special symbol has not elapsed. . Then, the process advances to step 5207.

In step 5207, the main CPU 101 turns off the high-precision game flag and the time-saving game flag (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag). Note that when the high-precision game flag and the time-saving game flag are off, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 5208.
In step 5208, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the effect transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Further, the number of rounds during the special game to be executed after the opening time has elapsed is set in the round number storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 5209, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above step 5202 that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stopped and displayed special symbol is a small prize symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a small winning symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 5218. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a small winning symbol, the process advances to the next step 5210.
In step 5210, the main CPU 101 executes a time saving activation number count execution process for counting by the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5211.

In step 5211, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, if the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the small winning symbol Y1, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Determine whether it is inside. If it is determined that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step 5216. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to the next step 5212.
In step 5212, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process proceeds to step 5214. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol, the process advances to the next step 5213.

In step 5213, the main CPU 101 rewrites the data related to the jackpot symbol being displayed in a variable manner (that is, the data related to the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area) to the data related to the losing symbol Z1. Then, the process advances to the next step 5214.

In step 5214, the main CPU 101 forcibly stops and displays the special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the special symbol being fluctuatedly displayed is a losing symbol Z1, the losing symbol Z1 stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area is also rewritten in step 5213 described above. In this case, the lost symbol Z1 stored in the rewritten first special symbol temporary storage area is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variable time has not elapsed. That is, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variation time of this first special symbol has not elapsed. . Then, the process advances to the next step 5215.

In step 5215, the main CPU 101 executes a time saving activation count execution process. Then, the process advances to the next step 5216.
In step 5216, the main CPU 101 executes a time-saving activation count start process to start counting by the time-saving activation frequency counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5217.

In step 5217, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time set at the start of the small winning game in the opening time timer counter, and stores an opening command indicating that the opening process is started in the performance transmission data storage area. . Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 5218, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 5209 that the symbol is not a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 executes a time saving activation number count execution process. Then, the process advances to the next step 5219.
In step 5219, the main CPU 101 executes time saving activation count start processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 5220.

In step 5220, the main CPU 101 checks the current gaming state and stores the gaming state command in the performance transmission data storage area. This game status command includes information on whether the high-accuracy game flag is on or off, information on whether the time-saving game flag (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag) is on or off, information on the number of high-accuracy games, and information on the number of time-saving games. Contains information, etc. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the time-saving activation count execution processing in steps 5210, 5215, and 5218 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 93.
In step 5300, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high certainty game flag is off. Then, when it is determined that the high certainty game flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high certainty game flag is off, the process advances to the next step 5301.
In step 5301, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving activation number reaching flag indicating that the count value of the time-saving activation number counter has reached the number of time-saving activations is off. Then, when it is determined that the time saving activation number reaching flag is not off (that is, it is on), the time saving activation number count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving activation count reaching flag is off, the process advances to the next step 5302.

In step 5302, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving activation number counter by 1. Note that if the count value is 0, the main CPU 101 does nothing here. Then, the process advances to the next step 5303.
In step 5303, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time saving activation number counter has reached zero. If it is determined that the time saving activation number count has not been reached, the time saving activation count execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the point has been reached, the process advances to the next step 5304.

In step 5304, the main CPU 101 executes a first time-saving game state setting process for setting the first time-saving game state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on the first time saving game flag and sets the number of time saving times to "450". In addition, when the number of time saving activations is reached, the normal gaming state is set, and the high certainty gaming flag is turned off. This high certainty game flag remains off. As a result, a low probability time saving gaming state is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 5305.
In step 5305, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5306.
In step 5306, the main CPU 101 turns on the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the time saving activation number count execution process ends.

Next, the time saving activation frequency count start processing in steps 5216 and 5219 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94.
In step 5350, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the time when the high probability time saving gaming state has ended. Specifically, in step 5012 or step 5025 described above, it is determined whether the high certainty game flag has changed from on to off. Then, if it is determined that it is not the time when the high probability time saving game state has ended, the time saving activation number count start process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability time saving game state has ended, the process proceeds to the next step 5351.

In step 5351, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation frequency counter to "500". Then, the time saving activation number count start process ends.

Next, the special game ending process executed when the special game ends will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95.
In step 5400, the main CPU 101 checks the jackpot symbol (stored in the processing area of the main RAM 103) that triggered the execution of the ended special game, and determines the game state after the end of the special game according to the jackpot symbol described above. Execute the game state setting process to be set.
Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns on both the high-accuracy game flag and the second time-saving game flag, and also sets the high-accuracy number of times and Set "50" to both of the time saving times.
Then, the process advances to the next step 5401.

In step 5401, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5402.
In step 5402, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the special game ending process ends.

Next, RAM clear processing executed based on RAM clear (reset) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 96.
In step 5500, the main CPU 101 executes normal gaming state setting processing to set the normal gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 turns off both the high-precision game flag and the time-saving game flag (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag). Then, the process advances to the next step 5501.
In step 5501, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 5502.

In step 5502, the main CPU 101 turns off the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 5503.
In step 5503, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving activation number of times "500" in the time saving activation number counter. Then, the RAM clear post-processing ends.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 8)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, during the first time-saving game state (during the low probability time-saving game state), which is set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, the non-time-saving game is It was designed to be a hit in the drawing of normal symbols with the same probability as during the state, but it is not limited to this, and during the first time-saving game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the non-time-saving gaming state. It may be set so that it is a win in the lottery.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state, settings are made such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than during the non-time-saving game state, settings are made such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the movable piece 16b is activated. By performing at least one of the settings that increase the time, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the specific second starting prize opening 16d.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, the time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state), and a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) However, the types of time-saving gaming states are not limited to these.
For example, special symbols other than jackpot symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state (e.g., losing symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, small symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) A time-saving gaming state or the like may be provided that is set based on the determination of winning symbols, etc.).
In addition, there is a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game, and a time-saving game that is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in a low probability game state. The time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is set to set the time-saving gaming state is the entry of the game ball into the specific second starting prize opening 16d. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, so-called simultaneous rotation control is executed, and the time-saving gaming state (low probability However, this method of setting the time-saving gaming state may be applied to pachinko machines other than pachinko machines in which simultaneous spin control is executed. In other words, while the first special pattern is changing, the second special pattern cannot be changed, and while the second special pattern is changing, the first special pattern cannot be changed (at the same time, the first special pattern is changing). Even in pachinko machines where both the second special figure and the second special figure cannot be changed and only one of them is changed, the time-saving game is performed based on the total number of changes of the first special figure and the number of changes of the second special figure. It may also be possible to set the state.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, the timing of counting by the time saving activation counter is either the time when the special symbol starts changing, the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, or the time when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the stop display time (so-called symbol confirmation time) has elapsed. Good too.
In addition, when counting by the time saving activation number counter is performed at the time when the special symbol starts changing, even when the jackpot has been won in the lottery that triggers the fluctuation, the counting by the time saving activation number counter is also performed. good. Then, when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations during fluctuations related to winning a jackpot, the time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) based on the arrival is not set, and the jackpot is reached. The game state may be set based on the winning of the special game after the special game ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, in the high probability time saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or However, it is not limited to this, and a different number of times may be set.
For example, the number of time savings set in the high probability time saving gaming state may be set to be smaller than the high probability number of times, such as the number of high probability times being 50 and the number of time saving times being 10 times.
In addition, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined, instead of setting a high probability time-saving game state after the special game based on the determination, a game state (hereinafter referred to as a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state) , also referred to as low probability time-saving gaming state X) may be set.
Then, as mentioned above, a game state (low probability time-saving game state The low-probability time-saving game state, which is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning, is such that the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the specific second starting prize opening 16d is different. The difficulty level may be set to be the same. For example, a game state (low probability time-saving game state In one of the low-probability time-saving game states that are set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the other. By performing at least one of the settings that shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the settings that lengthen the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the game ball enters the specific second starting prize opening 16d. It may be made easier.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, counting by the time-saving activation number counter is performed only in the normal gaming state (gaming state that combines the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, as a game state in which a low probability game state is set, in addition to the normal game state, a game state that is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol ( In a pachinko machine equipped with a low-probability time-saving gaming state If the result is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation count counter may be used to count the number of time-saving activations, or a gaming state (low-probability In both of the time-saving gaming states (X), if the result of the lottery is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation number counter may be used to count. Then, when the count value by the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations, a gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state) that is a combination of the low probability time saving gaming state and the first time saving gaming state in other application example 8 is set. You may also do so.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, the time saving activation number counter in other application example 8 decrements the value of the time saving activation number set at the start of counting by a predetermined value (“1” in other application example 8) at the time of counting execution. As a result, the count towards the number of time saving activations was executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, by setting a predetermined starting value (e.g., "0") at the time of counting start, and incrementing by a predetermined value (e.g., "1") at the time of counting, the count can be executed toward the number of time-saving activations. You may also do so.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, if a jackpot is won in the normal gaming state, a jackpot suggestion image is displayed along with the variable performance to notify that the jackpot has been won. However, the method of notification is not limited to this.
For example, in addition to the jackpot suggestion image, the fact that a jackpot has been won may be notified by outputting a predetermined sound or lighting a predetermined lamp in a predetermined lighting manner. Furthermore, the winning of the jackpot may be notified in a pre-reading performance that can be executed before the start of the variable performance based on the first special figure random number that determines the winning of the jackpot.
Furthermore, not only during the normal gaming state but also when winning a jackpot in the high probability time saving gaming state, the notification may be made to that effect.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 8 can be achieved.

(Other application example 9)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 is configured so that a special game is executed only on the basis of winning a jackpot, similarly to the above-described embodiment.

(Summary of structure within gaming area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, as in the above-described embodiment, there is a general winning opening 14, a first starting winning opening 15, a second starting winning opening 16, a movable piece 16b, An attacker device, an exit 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 97).
Among these devices and members, although the attacker device has a different configuration from the above embodiment, everything else other than the attacker device has the same structure (structure, installation position, etc.) as the above embodiment. There is.
Hereinafter, the structure within the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be explained, focusing on an attacker device that is different from the above-described embodiment.

The pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 is provided with two attacker devices, a first attacker device 170 and a second attacker device 180.
As shown in FIG. 97, the first attacker device 170 is provided at the lower left of the effect display device 21 (lower part of the first game area 12a), and the second attacker device 180 is provided at the lower right of the effect display device 21 (lower part of the first game area 12a). 2 (lower part of the gaming area 12b).

The first attacker device 170 includes a first big prize opening 171 into which a game ball can enter, and a first opening/closing door 172 that opens and closes the first big prize opening 171. Under normal conditions, the first opening/closing door 172 is closed and the first grand prize opening 171 is closed, so it is impossible for a game ball to enter the first grand prize opening 171, but it is possible to win the jackpot. When the special game based on the winning is executed, the first opening/closing door 172 opens and the first big prize opening 171 is opened, so that the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 171. When one game ball enters the first big prize opening 171, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in other application example 9) are paid out.
A game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first big prize opening 171, but a game ball flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

The second attacker device 180 includes a second grand prize opening 181 into which a game ball can enter, and a second opening/closing door 182 that opens and closes the second grand prize opening 181. Under normal conditions, the second opening/closing door 182 is closed and the second grand prize opening 181 is closed, so it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 181, but it is possible to win the jackpot. When the special game based on the winning is executed, the second opening/closing door 182 opens and the second grand prize opening 181 is opened, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 181. When one game ball enters the second grand prize opening 181, a predetermined number of prize balls (15 in other application example 9) are paid out.
A game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second big prize opening 181, and a game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, unlike the above-mentioned embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are provided in the first big winning hole 171 and the second big winning hole 181. Not provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, after the special game executed based on winning the jackpot ends, a game state is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. It has become so.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, a normal gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-probability gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low-probability gaming state and a first time-saving gaming state. A high probability time saving gaming state which is a gaming state that is a combination of a probability time saving gaming state, a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state, or a high probability non time saving gaming state which is a gaming state which is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a non time saving gaming state. One of the gaming states is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are defined as the frequency of entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 (input). The difficulty level of the balls (in other words, the frequency of winning/losing drawings based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is set to be different from each other. The specific contents of the settings will be explained in detail later.
Note that, similar to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15 and the first big prize opening 171. The game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through the gate 20, enter the second starting prize opening 16, and enter the second large prize opening 181.
Then, during the normal game state, during the high probability non-time-saving game state, and during the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol The player is made to launch a game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hit) so that the ball enters the first big prize opening 171. In addition, during the low probability time saving game state, the high probability time saving game state, and during the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X3 or The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the second big prize opening 181.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, and the jackpot can be won. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X4 is determined. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting winning hole 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), winning of the jackpot The probability is set to approximately 1/33, and when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state), the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/33. /15.
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 98.9%, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is 1%, and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 0.1%.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 98(a), it is possible to win a jackpot even in a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, and when a jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined. It is now possible to do so. Then, when the gaming state at the time of performing the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state), winning of the jackpot The probability is set to approximately 1/33, and when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state), the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/33. /15.
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X3 is set to 3%, and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X4 is set to 97%.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Incidentally, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (upper limit number of second reserved number) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 98(a) and 98(c), when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the first jackpot 171 is opened for 29.0 seconds during the special game based on the determination. A round game is executed twice, which ends when either one of the following conditions is satisfied: or one game ball enters the first big prize opening 171. In addition, during the above-mentioned one round game, including a game ball that enters just before the first big prize opening 171 is closed and whose entry is detected after the first big prize opening 171 is closed, the average number of balls is 1.8. game balls can be entered. Therefore, during the above-mentioned special game, an average of 36 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, if you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol A round game is executed twice, which ends when one of the conditions that a game ball enters the ball is satisfied. In addition, during the above-mentioned one round game, including a game ball that enters just before the closing of the second grand prize opening 181 and whose entry is detected after the second grand prize opening 181 is closed, the average of 1.8 game balls can be entered. Therefore, during the above-mentioned special game, an average of 36 game balls can be obtained.
In addition, if jackpot symbol X3 or A round game that ends when one of the conditions for a ball to enter is satisfied is executed 10 times, and an average of 270 game balls can be obtained.

(Overview of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 9 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, high probability non-time-saving gaming state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol. The time is set to 10 seconds, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is in the open state) when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not particularly shown, the same settings are made during the special game.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.2, which is the same as during the non-time-saving game state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving game state.
In addition, during the second time-saving game state (during the high-probability time-saving game state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is about 1/1, which is higher than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state. 1. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b when the normal symbol is won by lottery is the same as during the first time-saving game state. It is set to 5 seconds.

That is, during both the non-time-saving game state (normal game state, high-probability non-time-saving game state) and special game, there is a high probability in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20. There are many chances that the game will be a hit and the movable piece 16b will be in an open state. However, since the variation time of the normal symbol is 5 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state (from the open state to the open state). Although the interval until the next open state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a closed state, and it is almost impossible for the game ball that has entered the second gaming area 12b to enter the second starting prize opening 16.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving gaming state (during the low-probability time-saving gaming state), you will win in the normal symbol lottery with the same probability as during the non-time-saving gaming state, so as in the non-time-saving gaming state, There are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to be in an open state. In addition, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is closed. Although the time from the opening to the open state is short (the interval from one open state to the next open state is short), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in an open state, and there is a high possibility that the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will enter the second starting prize opening 16.

Also, during the second time-saving game state (second low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), there is a higher probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery than during the non-time-saving game state or the first time-saving game state. Therefore, there are extremely many chances that the movable piece 16b will be in the open state. In addition, since the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds, which is the same as during the first time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state is As with the inside, the time for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state is short (the interval from one open state to the next open state is short), but when the movable piece 16b is in the open state It is maintained for a long time. Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more likely to be in an open state than during the first time-saving game state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16. The performance is higher than during the first time-saving game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is generally high in all of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state. Although it is set, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operating time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16 (that is, the possibility of the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16) The frequency of entry of game balls (in other words, the frequency of execution of the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is more easily maintained in the open state than in the non-time-saving game state, so it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16, and the second time-saving game state Inside, the movable piece 16b is more easily maintained in the open state than in the first time-saving game state, so the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Therefore, during the second time-saving game state, the decrease in game balls as the game progresses is suppressed more than during the non-time-saving game state and the first time-saving game state, and during the first time-saving game state, more than in the non-time-saving game state. At the same time, you will have the opportunity to win a lottery.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9, any one of the normal gaming state, the low probability time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state, or the high probability non time saving gaming state is set.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98(b), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, and when the jackpot symbol In any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to a high probability gaming state and also to a non-time saving gaming state. , the normal gaming state is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 98(b), if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, the game state after the end of the special game based on the determination is By setting the high-probability game state and setting the second time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is set. Further, the high accuracy number of times is set to 10,000 times, and the time saving number of times is set to 5 times.
That is, after the end of the special game that is executed when the jackpot symbol (until 5 times) the high probability time saving gaming state continues.
During this high-probability time-saving gaming state, if all five winning/failure lottery results are other than a jackpot (loss), the second time-saving gaming state is changed to a non-time-saving gaming state while the high-probability gaming state remains the same. As a result, the gaming state is changed to a high probability non-time saving gaming state.
Thereafter, the high probability non-time-saving gaming state continues until the result of the winning lottery is derived 9995 times (until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 9995 times). During this high-probability time-saving gaming state, if all 9995 winning or losing lottery results are other than a jackpot (loss), the high-probability gaming state is changed to a low-probability gaming state while the non-time-saving gaming state remains the same. , the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, as described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/15, so in reality, until winning the jackpot again, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/15. The non-time-saving gaming state will continue.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 98(b), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol By setting the high probability gaming state and setting the second time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state is set. Furthermore, both the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times are set to 10,000 times.
That is, after the end of the special game that is executed when the jackpot symbol (until reaching 10,000 times), the high probability time saving gaming state continues.
During this high-probability time-saving game state, if all 10,000 success/fail lottery results are other than a jackpot (loss), the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state. By changing the state, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/15, so in reality, until winning the jackpot again, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 1/15. The time-saving gaming state will continue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 98(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, after the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state) is set, the special symbols change without winning the jackpot. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of time saving activations (100 times in other application example 9) (that is, when all 100 winning/fail lottery results in the low probability gaming state are other than jackpots), the low probability gaming state remains as it is. By setting the first time-saving game state, a low probability time-saving game state is set. When the low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.
After the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 100 (that is, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 100 times) without winning a jackpot. The gaming state continues.
During the low-probability time-saving gaming state, if all 100 success/failure lottery results are other than jackpots (losses), the first time-saving gaming state is changed to the non-time-saving gaming state while the low-probability gaming state remains the same. , the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, a time saving activation number counter for counting the number of time saving activations (100 times) for which a low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set is provided. , a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined by the RAM being cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, the special game ending, or the low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) being set. It is reset when any one of the reset conditions is met.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), so the time saving activation number counter starts counting from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 ends, the subsequent game state is set to the normal game state, so counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from this point.
Further, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, but counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the normal game state (low probability game state) is set.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the time saving activation number counter counts each time the special symbol changes, and the count value of the time saving activation number counter is equal to the number of time saving activations. When reaching , the low probability time saving gaming state is set as described above.

Note that, as described above, counting by the time saving activation number counter is started when the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is set. When the time-saving activation number counter starts counting with the setting of the normal gaming state, the time-saving activation number counter reaches the point when the count value of the time-saving activation number reaches 100 (in other words, the low probability time-saving gaming state is set). The gaming state at the time when the game ends is the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot and until winning the next jackpot, the low probability time saving game state is set. can only be set once.
In other words, after the count value of the time-saving activation counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (100 times) and the low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the low-probability time-saving gaming state must be set again until the next jackpot is won. I can't.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving activation will not be executed until the next jackpot is won. The count by the number counter is set to be stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, it is not specified that the time-saving gaming state is set for the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the losing symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time when the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the number of consecutive time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability change settings as in the above-mentioned embodiment are not set, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, A high probability time saving game state is always set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

(Game performance of pachinko machine P according to other application example 9)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, as described above, the normal gaming state (a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state), a low probability time saving gaming state (a low probability gaming state and a first A gaming state that combines a time-saving gaming state), a high-probability time-saving gaming state (a gaming state that combines a high-probability gaming state and a second time-saving gaming state), or a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state) The game progresses by setting one of the game states (a combination of states).

When a player starts playing a game, the normal gaming state is often set. During this normal game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hitting), and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game ball will , there is a possibility that the ball will enter the first starting winning hole 15, and the ball will not enter the second starting winning hole 16. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98(a)). .
Then, when the jackpot symbol X1 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot symbol X2 or X4 is determined, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state based on the determination. The game state after the end of the special game is set to a high probability time saving game state (see FIG. 98(b) and FIG. 100). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, if the player plays left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, the player wins the jackpot and shifts to the normal gaming state or the high probability time-saving gaming state. (See Figure 100).
However, since the jackpot symbol X2 is determined in 1% of the cases when the jackpot is won, and the jackpot symbol X4 is determined in 0.1% of the cases when the jackpot is won (Figure 98(a) ), during the normal gaming state, even if you win a jackpot, it is extremely difficult to shift to the high probability time-saving gaming state.

Also, as mentioned above, if the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations (100 times) without winning a jackpot during the normal gaming state (the number of times the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is drawn reaches the number of time-saving activations) case), the subsequent gaming state is set to the low probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 98(b)). That is, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, if the player plays left-handed as instructed during the normal gaming state, all the results of the 100 winning/failure drawings will be other than jackpots (i.e., losses). , it will shift to a low probability time saving gaming state (see FIG. 100). This low-probability time-saving gaming state continues until the results of the winning lottery are derived 100 times without winning a jackpot.

During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second starting prize opening 16 is more easily maintained in the open state than during the normal gaming state, and the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening 16, so the game progresses. While suppressing the accompanying decrease in game balls, it is possible to aim for winning the next jackpot. In addition, during the low probability time saving game state, as mentioned above, the game ball is directed to be launched (right-handed) towards the second game area 12b, and as long as the game ball is launched in accordance with this instruction, the game will not be played. There is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but it will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98(a)).
Then, when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the normal gaming state, and when the jackpot symbol The game state after the end of the special game based on is set to the high probability time saving game state (see FIG. 98(b) and FIG. 100). In other words, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, if you hit right as instructed during the low probability time saving gaming state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state by winning the jackpot, or the high probability This will result in a transition to a time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 100).
In addition, since the jackpot symbol It is easy to shift to a time-saving gaming state.

During the high-probability time-saving game state, the second starting prize opening 16 is more easily maintained in the open state than during the low-probability time-saving gaming state, and it is extremely easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 16, so the game It is possible to aim for winning the next jackpot while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls that accompanies the progress of the game. In addition, during the high probability time saving game state, as in the low probability time saving game state, an instruction is given to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (right shot), and the game ball is launched according to this instruction. As long as there is a game ball, there is a possibility that the ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16, but it will not enter the first starting winning hole 15. Then, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3 or X4 is determined (see FIG. 98(a)).

Here, in the high probability time saving game state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, the number of time saving times is set to 10000 (see FIG. 98(b)). As mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is approximately 1/15, so during this high-probability time-saving gaming state, the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16, He will win the jackpot again. Then, when a jackpot is won by the lottery, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined with an extremely high probability of determination. Therefore, once the jackpot symbol X4 is determined, unless the jackpot symbol X3 with an extremely low determination probability (3%) is determined, a special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 and a high probability time saving will be executed. Since the game state settings are repeated, there is a high possibility that a large number of game balls can be acquired at once.

On the other hand, in the high probability time saving game state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the number of time saving times is set to 5 (see FIG. 98(b)). Then, if the results of the lottery are all 5 losses without winning a jackpot, the state shifts to a high probability non-time-saving gaming state, and an instruction is given to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a (left-handed strike). . Therefore, after transitioning to the high probability non-time-saving gaming state, a lottery is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, as in the normal gaming state. Then, after the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol 5 times), and the upper limit number (4) of the second pending number that can be stored at the time when the 5th win/fail lottery ends. If you win a jackpot in this maximum of 9 winning/failure drawings, there is a very high possibility that the jackpot symbol There is no guarantee that you will be selected. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the high-probability time-saving gaming state is set again than the high-probability time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4. Unlikely.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9, when the high probability time saving game state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, the execution of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 and the high probability The setting of the time-saving game state is repeated with an extremely high probability. That is, the high probability time saving gaming state set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4 is a gaming state that is extremely advantageous for the player.
Then, a game ball enters the first starting winning slot 15 during the normal gaming state or the high probability non-time saving gaming state that transitions after the high probability time saving gaming state ends, and a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the entered ball. Even if the jackpot symbol When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 and a jackpot is won by lottery based on the entered ball, the jackpot symbol X4 is determined with an extremely high probability.
Therefore, the low-probability time-saving game state that can be transitioned from the normal game state without going through jackpot winnings or special games is transferred to the high-probability time-saving game state based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X4, which is extremely advantageous for the player. This provides an innovative gameplay experience in that the game becomes a chance zone, increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the game enters a high probability time-saving game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state through winning a jackpot (determining the jackpot symbol XX2 or X4) and executing a special game. Not only can it be transferred, but also when the results of all 100 winning/failure drawings, which are the number of time-saving activations, are other than jackpots (losses) during the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), winning the jackpot and special Since it is possible to shift to a low-probability time-saving game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state without playing a game, it is possible to provide novel gameplay and increase the interest of the players.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, in the second time-saving game state that is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol It looks like this. As a result, for example, even if a gaming state that combines the low probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, the low probability gaming state and the second Prevents the situation where the second time-saving game state being set is changed to a different time-saving game state when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations during a game state that combines time-saving game states. It becomes possible.

Note that the progress of the special figure game in the other application example 9 is almost the same as the content of the flowchart explaining the progress of the special figure game of the pachinko machine P according to the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 6. , the explanation is omitted here.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 9)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, during the first time-saving game state (during the low-probability time-saving game state), which is set when the count value by the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations, the non-time-saving game is It was designed to be a hit in the drawing of normal symbols with the same probability as during the state, but it is not limited to this, and during the first time-saving game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than during the non-time-saving gaming state. It may be set so that it is a win in the lottery.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state, settings are made such that the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than during the non-time-saving game state, settings are made such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the movable piece 16b is activated. By performing at least one of the settings that increase the time, it may be possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, the time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), and a time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state) that is set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state). However, the types of time-saving gaming states are not limited to these.
For example, special symbols other than jackpot symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state (e.g., losing symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, small symbols that are set to set a time-saving gaming state, etc.) A time-saving gaming state or the like may be provided that is set based on the determination of winning symbols, etc.).
In addition, there is a time-saving game state that is set through winning a jackpot and executing a special game, and a time-saving game that is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning a jackpot in a low probability game state. The time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the state and the special symbol other than the jackpot symbol that is determined to set the time-saving gaming state is when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. The difficulty levels may be set to be different, or the difficulty levels may be set to be the same.
In addition, in the time-saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of a special symbol that is other than the jackpot symbol and is determined to set the time-saving gaming state, similarly to the low probability time-saving gaming state in other application example 9, The probability of determining the jackpot symbol X4, which is extremely advantageous to the player, may be set to be extremely high.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is determined, instead of setting a high probability time-saving game state after the special game based on the determination, a game state (hereinafter referred to as a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state) , also referred to as low probability time-saving gaming state X) may be set.
Then, as mentioned above, a game state (low probability time-saving game state The low-probability time-saving game state, which is set when the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning, is set so that the difficulty level of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is different. Alternatively, the difficulty levels may be set to be the same. For example, a game state (low probability time-saving game state In one of the low-probability time-saving game states that are set when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the number of time-saving activations without winning, the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the other. By setting at least one of the following: , a setting that shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and a setting that lengthens the operating time of the movable piece 16b, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16. It may be done as follows.
Even in the case described above, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 9, counting by the time-saving activation number counter is performed only in the normal gaming state (gaming state that combines the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, as a game state in which a low probability game state is set, in addition to the normal game state, a game state that is a combination of a low probability game state and a time-saving game state that is set after the end of a special game based on the determination of a predetermined jackpot symbol ( In a pachinko machine equipped with a low-probability time-saving gaming state If the result is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation count counter may be used to count the number of time-saving activations, or a gaming state (low-probability In both of the time-saving gaming states (X), if the result of the lottery is other than a jackpot, the time-saving activation number counter may be used to count. Then, when the count value by the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations, a gaming state (low probability time saving gaming state) that is a combination of the low probability time saving gaming state and the first time saving gaming state in other application example 9 is set. You may also do so.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

In addition, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 9 includes the above-described embodiment and its modifications, the pachinko machine P according to other application examples 1 to 8, and various modifications thereof, to the extent that no contradiction occurs. It may be configured by applying settings and controls.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 9 can be achieved.

(Other application examples 10)
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is not a pachinko machine that mixes one type and two types or a pachinko machine that performs so-called simultaneous rotation control, but is similar to the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 6. The special game is configured to be executed only on the basis of winning.

(Summary of structure within gaming area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, as in the above embodiment, there is a general winning opening 14, a first starting winning opening 15, a second starting winning opening 16, a movable piece 16b, Although an attacker device 17, an outlet 19, a gate 20, and a performance display device 21 are provided, only the internal structure of the attacker device 17 is different from the above-described embodiment.
Specifically, unlike the above embodiment, the special area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the big prize opening 18 in the attacker device 17. Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the special game executed based on winning the jackpot ends, the game state is set according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. It has become so.
Note that other devices and members have the same structure and installation position as in the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 3), so explanations will be omitted.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, a normal gaming state which is a gaming state that combines a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state (time saving gaming state) are combined. A first low probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the first low probability time saving) which is a gaming state, a second low probability time saving gaming state which is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state (time saving gaming state). Either a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a second low probability time saving), a high probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a high probability time saving) which is a gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a second time saving gaming state. The gaming state of is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are defined as the frequency of entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 (input). The difficulty level of the balls (in other words, the frequency of winning/losing drawings based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is set to be different from each other.
Note that, similar to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b. The game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the grand prize opening 18, and enter the second starting prize opening 16.
Then, during the normal gaming state, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15b, and the first During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and during the special game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second starting prize opening 16, and The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the big prize opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, and the jackpot can be won. If you win, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 will be determined.
Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize opening 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state ), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is , is set to approximately 6/300.
Further, the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X1 is set to 25/100 (25%), and the determination probability of the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 75/100 (75%).
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, and if the jackpot is won, a jackpot symbol X3, X4, or X5 is determined. It is supposed to be done. If the gaming state at the time of the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is a low probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300. Therefore, the probability of winning the jackpot when the above-mentioned gaming state is a high probability gaming state is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the decision probability of jackpot symbol X3 is set to 25/100 (25%), the decision probability of jackpot symbol X4 is set to 30/100 (30%), and the decision probability of jackpot symbol X5 is set to 45/100 (45%). There is.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (the upper limit number of second reserved numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the second special figure random number is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 101(a), when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, and A round game that ends when either condition is met, such as opening for 0 seconds or when 10 game balls enter the grand prize opening 18, is executed four times, and about 400 game balls are acquired. It is now possible to do so.
When a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X5 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on the determination, and about 1000 game balls can be obtained.

(Summary of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 101(c), during the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in an open state) when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not particularly shown, the same settings are made during the special game.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), the normal symbol The probability of winning in the lottery is approximately 1/1.1, which is the same as in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than in the non-time-saving gaming state. The operating time of the movable piece 16b in this case is set to 5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time saving game state.

That is, during the non-time saving game state (normal game state), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state (from the open state to Although the interval until the next open state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a closed state, so the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will almost never enter the second starting prize opening 16.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), non-time-saving games are Since the probability of winning is the same as during the state, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open as in the non-time saving game state. Since the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 5 seconds longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is closed. Although the time from the first open state to the next open state is short (the interval from one open state to the next open state is short), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in an open state, and the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16 with high frequency. becomes.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, in all of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is extremely low. Although it is set high, by varying the variation time of the normal symbol and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility that the game ball will enter the second starting winning hole 16 (that is, the possibility of the game ball entering the second starting winning hole 16) The frequency of entry of game balls (in other words, the frequency of execution of the winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16) is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, unlike during the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is maintained in an almost open state, so that the game is relatively moved to the second starting prize opening 16. It is easy for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for a winning lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, compared to during the non-time-saving game state.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, any one of the normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, or the high probability time saving gaming state is set. be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101(b), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, and when the jackpot symbol In any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the low probability gaming state, and is also set to the second time-saving gaming state. , a second low probability time saving game state is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.
During this second low-probability time-saving gaming state, if all 100 winning/failure drawings result in losses, the second time-saving gaming state is changed to a non-time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state is changed to a normal gaming state. be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 101(b), if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special random number, then a jackpot is won and the jackpot is determined by the lottery based on the second special random number. In either case, if symbol X4 or A time saving gaming state is set. Further, both the high accuracy number and the time saving number are set to 10,000.
That is, after the end of the special game that is executed when jackpot symbol X2, X4 or The high probability time saving game state continues until it is derived (until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times).
During this high-probability time-saving game state, if all 10,000 success/fail lottery results are loses, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state. By doing so, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, as described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. Until then, the high probability time saving gaming state will continue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101(b), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state) is set, the jackpot is won. When the number of changes in the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations (900 times in other application example 10) without doing so (that is, in a low probability gaming state, when all 900 success/fail lottery results are losses), By setting the first time-saving game state while leaving the low-probability game state as it is, the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. When the first low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 1200 times.
After the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state is played until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 1200 times without winning a jackpot (that is, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1200 times). The low probability time saving gaming state continues.
Then, during the first low-probability time-saving game state, if all 1,200 winning/fail drawings result in losses, the first time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state while the low probability game state remains the same. The state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, and the jackpot is almost certainly won during the first low probability time saving gaming state. He will be elected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the number of time saving activations is used to count the number of time saving activations (900 times) at which the first low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set. A counter is configured by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, when the special game ends, or when the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set. It is reset when one of the following reset conditions is satisfied.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), so the time saving activation number counter starts counting from this point.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is finished, the subsequent game state is set to the first low probability time-saving game state, so counting by the time-saving activation number counter is started from this point.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, but counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the normal game state (low probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot until winning the next jackpot, the first low probability time saving The gaming state can only be set once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is continued until the next jackpot is won. Cannot be set again.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low probability time saving game state, whether the next jackpot is won or the RAM It is set so that counting by the time saving activation number counter is stopped until the time is cleared.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, it is not specified that the time-saving gaming state is set for the losing symbols (Z1, Z2). Therefore, the gaming state is not changed after the losing symbol is stopped, and the gaming state at the time when the losing symbol was determined continues.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the number of consecutive time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability change settings as in the above-mentioned embodiment are not set, and when the jackpot symbol X2, X4, or X5 is determined. A high probability time saving game state is always set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

(Summary of control regarding determination of variation pattern commands)
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 includes a table A, a table B, a table C, and a table D as a variation pattern table 114 that stores variation pattern commands associated with variation patterns (see FIG. 102). a)). Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a changing pattern command is determined with reference to one of the changing pattern tables 114. Ru.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another low usage example 10, in order to improve the production effect after the special game ends in balance with the executed special game, the number of changes in the special symbols after the special game ends is changed. The tendencies of the fluctuation patterns that can be determined (for example, only fluctuation patterns with relatively short fluctuation times are determined, fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times are likely to be determined, etc.) are varied. In order to make it possible to execute a performance according to the number of fluctuations, after winning a jackpot and executing a special game, a fluctuation pattern command is determined according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table 114 that is referred to when doing so can be switched.
That is, after the special game ends, a variable pattern command can be determined based on a different variable pattern table 114 depending on the number of variations even during the same game state.

On the other hand, if the variable pattern table 114 that is referred to when determining the variable pattern command is switched as described above according to the number of variations without executing a special game, even though the special game is not being played, However, the tendency of the fluctuation pattern that is determined may change, giving the player a sense of discomfort in the performance. Therefore, after clearing the RAM, it is prohibited to switch the variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the RAM is cleared until the first jackpot is won. A variable pattern command is determined based on a variable pattern table 114 associated with a gaming state.
In other words, during the period from when the RAM is cleared until the first jackpot is won, the variable pattern commands are always executed based on the same variable pattern table 114 corresponding to the currently set gaming condition as long as the game condition is the same. It is to be determined.

(Determination of fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to)
Here, a process for determining the variation pattern table 114 to be referred to when determining a variation pattern command in another application example 10 will be described.
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 includes a selection state value table for determining a selection state value, which will be described later, and a variation pattern table to be referred to, as tables used to determine the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to. It has a decision table that defines 114. When determining a variable pattern command, the variable pattern table 114 to be referred to is determined based on the information related to these tables.

The selected state value table defines the selected state values used for determining the variation pattern table 114. As shown in FIG. 102(b), this selection state value table defines selection state values that are set based on winning a jackpot or executing RAM clear (reset processing).
If a jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot (X1, X2, X3, A selection state value corresponding to X4, Further, when RAM clearing is executed, a selection state value corresponding to the execution of RAM clearing is acquired, and this acquired selection state is set in the above-mentioned selection state flag.

As shown in FIG. 102(b), according to the selection state value table, if the jackpot symbol determined at the time of jackpot winning is X1 or X3, the selection state value of "01H" is acquired and the jackpot is won. If the jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning is X2, X4, or X5, a selection state value of "02H" is acquired.
Furthermore, when RAM clearing is executed, a selection state value of "00H" is acquired.

The determination table defines the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to.
In this determination table, as shown in FIG. 102(c), if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "01H" or "02H" (that is, the end of the special game based on the jackpot win), If it is later), a fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to is determined for each number of fluctuations after the end of the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot.
In addition, if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "00H" (that is, after RAM clear has been executed), the time-saving game flag (indicating that the first time-saving game state is in progress) is displayed. A variation pattern table to be referred to depending on whether the first time-saving game flag indicating the time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag indicating the second time-saving game state are on or off (that is, whether or not the time-saving game state is in progress) 114 is defined.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the second time-saving game state is set via a special game based on winning a jackpot, so after executing RAM clearing, winning a jackpot will not occur. As far as possible, only the first time-saving game state that does not go through the special game can be set. Therefore, when the selection state value is "00H", either the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are turned off, or the first time-saving game flag is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 102(c), according to the decision table, if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "01H" (the jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special drawing random number) If the jackpot symbol X1 is determined (or if the jackpot symbol X3 is determined by winning the jackpot by lottery based on the second special symbol random number), the change in the special symbol after the end of the special game based on the determination Table C is determined at the 1st time, table B is determined at the 2nd to 99th time, table D is determined at the 100th time, table A is determined at the 101st to 900th time, Table C is determined at the 901st time, table B is determined at the 902nd to 2099th time, table D is determined at the 2100th time, and table A is determined at the 2101st and subsequent times.

That is, for the first fluctuation during the second low probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the above-mentioned jackpot symbol, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and the second low probability For the 2nd to 99th fluctuations during the time-saving gaming state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table B, and the 100th fluctuation during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state (the final fluctuation during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state) is determined based on Table B. Regarding the variation), a variation pattern command is determined based on Table D.
For the 1st to 800th fluctuations in the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the second low probability time-saving gaming state described above, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table A. That is, during the normal gaming state, the variable pattern command is always determined based on table A.
Regarding the first fluctuation during the first low probability time saving gaming state set after the end of the above-mentioned normal gaming state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table C, and the second to second fluctuations during the first low probability time saving gaming state are determined based on Table C. For the 1199th variation, the variation pattern command is determined based on Table B, and for the 1200th variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state (the final variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state), it is determined based on Table D. A variation pattern command is determined based on this.
Regarding fluctuations during the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the first low probability time-saving gaming state described above, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on table A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 102(c), if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "02H" (the jackpot is won by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the jackpot symbol X2 is (If the jackpot is won by lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4 or Table C is determined the first time, table B is determined the second to 9999th time, table D is determined the 10000th time, table A is determined the 10001st to 10900th time, and table A is determined the 10901st time. Table C is determined at the 10902nd to 12099th time, table D is determined at the 12100th time, and table A is determined at the 12101st time or later.

That is, for the first fluctuation during the high probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol described above, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C. For the 2nd to 9999th fluctuations, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table B, and for the 10000th fluctuation during the high probability time saving gaming state (the final fluctuation during the high probability time saving gaming state), the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table D. A variation pattern command is determined.
For the 1st to 900th fluctuations in the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the high probability time-saving gaming state described above, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table A. That is, during the normal gaming state, the variable pattern command is always determined based on table A.
Regarding the first fluctuation during the first low probability time saving gaming state set after the end of the above-mentioned normal gaming state, a fluctuation pattern command is determined based on Table C, and the second to second fluctuations during the first low probability time saving gaming state are determined based on Table C. For the 1199th variation, the variation pattern command is determined based on Table B, and for the 1200th variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state (the final variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state), it is determined based on Table D. Based on this, a variation pattern command is determined.
Regarding fluctuations during the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the first low probability time-saving gaming state described above, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on table A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 102(c), if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "00H" (after executing RAM clear), the time saving game flag is turned off. (that is, when both the first time-saving game flag and the second time-saving game flag are off), table A is determined, and when the time-saving game flag is on (the first time-saving game flag is on), table A is determined. Table B is determined at a certain time).

That is, for fluctuations during the normal gaming state that are set after the RAM is cleared, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on table A. In addition, for fluctuations during the first low probability time-saving gaming state that is set when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches 900 during the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table B. Ru.

Note that the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is provided with a variation counter for counting the number of times the winning lottery is executed (the number of variations of the special symbol), as in the above-described embodiment. The count value of this variation counter is reset by clearing the RAM or ending the special game, and is incremented by "1" each time a win/fail lottery (variation of special symbols) is executed. From the count value, it is possible to grasp the number of changes since the end of the special game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the first low probability time saving gaming state is set after executing RAM clearing (the first low probability time saving gaming state executed without going through a jackpot) , when determining a variable pattern command according to the selection state value ("00H") set in the selection state flag and whether the time-saving game flag is on or off (i.e., the set gaming state). The variation pattern table 114 referred to is determined to be table B. During the first low-probability time-saving gaming state that is set after executing the RAM clear, the variable pattern command is always determined based on table B, and the table B is prevented from switching to other variable pattern tables 114. There is.
This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the tendency of the determined fluctuation pattern changes during the first low-probability time-saving game state that is set after the RAM is cleared, causing an unnatural feeling in the performance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, during the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state, and the high probability time saving game state set via the jackpot, the table B , table C, or table D, and switching from table B to table C or from table C to table D is executed.
As a result, during the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state, and the high probability time saving game state set via the jackpot, it is possible to execute a performance according to the number of changes in the special symbol. , it is possible to improve the performance effect.
Note that in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, both switching from table B to table C and switching from table C to table D are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, only switching from table B to table C may be executed, or only switching from table C to table D may be executed. Furthermore, switching to another variation pattern table 114 different from the variation pattern table 114 may be performed.

Then, with reference to the variation pattern table 114 determined as described above, a variation mode command and a variation pattern command are determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102(a), according to table A, losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined (that is, the result of the lottery is a loss), and the number of pending symbols at the time of determination is When (the first number of reservations in the case of losing symbol Z1, the second number of reservations in the case of losing symbol Z2) is less than 2, the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation (variation time of special symbol 13 seconds)" The fluctuation pattern command "00H" (decision probability is 85%) is associated with the fluctuation pattern command "00H" (decision probability is 85%), and the fluctuation pattern command "03H" (decision The probability is 10%), or the variation pattern command "04H" (decision probability is 5%), which is associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 60 seconds)" is determined. Ru.
In addition, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and the number of pending at the time of said determination is 2 or more, the variation with which the variation pattern of "6 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 6 seconds)" is associated Either the pattern command "01H" (decision probability is 85%), the above-mentioned variation pattern command "03H" (decision probability is 10%), or the above-mentioned variation pattern command "04H" (decision probability is 5%) It is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "A3H" (decision probability is 5%) or the variation pattern command "A4H" (determination probability is 95%) associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation".

As shown in FIG. 102(a), according to table B, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation pattern to which the variation pattern of "6 seconds variation" is associated is used regardless of the number of reservations. Either the command "02H" (decision probability is 85%), the above fluctuation pattern command "03H" (decision probability is 10%), or the above fluctuation pattern command "04H" (decision probability is 5%) is determined. be done.
In addition, if the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4 or Either "A4H" (decision probability is 95%) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), according to table C, when losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation pattern to which the variation pattern of "6 seconds variation" is associated is used regardless of the number of reservations. The command "0AH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4, or A variation pattern command "ABH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 102(a), according to table D, if a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, regardless of the number of reservations, "10 seconds fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation time 10 seconds)" A variation pattern command "0BH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined, which is associated with the variation pattern.
Moreover, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2, X3, X4 or X5 is determined, the above-mentioned "ABH" (determination probability is 100%) is determined regardless of the number of reservations.

(Summary of control in the first low probability time saving game state)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, during the variable presentation at the time of setting and end of the first low probability time-saving gaming state, a presentation for suggesting a change in the gaming state is executed. There is.

Specifically, if there is a loss in the lottery at the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set, a loss variable effect at the start is executed as a variable effect to notify the loss, and the first low probability time saving game state is changed. If the winning/failure lottery at the end of the game results in a loss, a loss fluctuation performance at the end is executed as a fluctuation performance to notify the loss.

In the start-time loss variation performance, the performance symbols 50 are displayed in a variable manner on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21, and the performance symbols 50 are displayed at a predetermined end timing (for example, from the start of the variation display (start of the fluctuation performance)). 3 seconds after the start of the fluctuating display), the start notification effect indicating that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state has been set (for example, the display of the image "Chance Mode Start!" (not particularly shown). z)) will be carried out.
In addition, in the losing-at-end fluctuating performance, when the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 ends and a stop display is performed on the display unit 21a of the performance display device 21, an end notification indicating that the first low probability time-saving game state has ended is issued. The effect (for example, display of an image "Chance Mode End" (not particularly shown)) is started, and when the remaining variable time has elapsed, the stop display of the effect pattern 50 and the end notification effect are finished.
In addition, the above-mentioned start-time loss fluctuation performance is executed based on one video data (performance data) in which the execution contents of the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 50 and the start notification performance are determined, and the above-mentioned start-time loss fluctuation performance is , the execution contents of the variable display of the performance symbols 50 and the end notification performance are executed based on one predetermined moving image data (performance data). That is, by reproducing the above-mentioned video data, the variable display of the performance symbols 50 and the start notification performance (or end notification performance) are integrally executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the variation effects including the above-mentioned loss variation effect at the beginning and loss variation effect at the end are the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main control board 100 at the start of variation of special symbols. The process is started based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 100 at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). That is, unless the symbol confirmation command is received, the fluctuating performance being executed will not end. For example, if a loss variation effect at the start is being executed, the stop display of the effect symbol 50 will continue until the symbol confirmation command is received, and if a loss variation effect is being executed at the end. The stop display of the performance symbols 50 and the end notification performance are continuously performed until the symbol confirmation command is received.

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, after winning the jackpot and executing the special game, depending on the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the special game, The variation pattern table 114 referred to when determining a variation pattern command can be switched.
The first low-probability time-saving game state after the execution of the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5 (i.e., the first low-probability time-saving game state set via jackpot winning) At the time of setting, the fluctuation pattern command is determined with reference to table C (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)), but according to this table C, if losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, A variation pattern command of "0AH" is always determined (see FIG. 102(a)).
Furthermore, at the end of the first low probability time-saving game state after the execution of the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5, the variable pattern command is determined with reference to table D. According to this table D, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation pattern command of "0BH" is always determined (see FIG. 102(a)). ).

The above-mentioned "0AH" fluctuation pattern command is determined only when a loss occurs at the time of setting the first low-probability time-saving gaming state that is set via the winning of the jackpot, and the above-mentioned The "0BH" fluctuation pattern command is determined only when the player loses at the end of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state set through winning a jackpot (FIG. 102(a), (See FIGS. 102(b) and (c)).
As a result, the sub-control board 300 receives the "0AH" fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100, so that the relevant time point is the first low-probability time-saving game set via the winning of the jackpot. Since it is possible to grasp that the state is set, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 is able to execute the above-mentioned start failure variation effect based on this "0AH" variation pattern command. There is.
In addition, by receiving the "0BH" fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 100, the sub control board 300 determines that the time point is in the first low probability time saving gaming state set via the winning of the jackpot. The sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 is able to execute the above-mentioned losing variation effect at the end based on this "0BH" variation pattern command. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, after the RAM is cleared, until the first jackpot is won, the variation pattern table 114 according to the number of variations of the special symbol after the RAM is cleared. switching is prohibited, and a variable pattern command is determined based on the variable pattern table 114 associated with the gaming state being set.
During the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after clearing the RAM (that is, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state set without going through a jackpot win), the variable pattern command is always determined with reference to Table B. (See FIGS. 102(b) and (c)), but according to this table B, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation of "02H", "03H" or "04H" A pattern command is determined (see FIG. 102(a)). That is, in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after RAM clearing, if losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at the setting time, if losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at the end time, and at the setting time and end. Even if the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined at a time other than the time, a variation pattern command of "02H", "03H" or "04H" is determined.

Then, during the first low-probability time-saving game state that is set without going through the jackpot winning, the sub control board 300 inputs "02H", "03H", or "04H" transmitted from the main control board 100. Although it is possible to know that the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 has been determined by receiving the fluctuation pattern command, it is not possible to determine whether the relevant time is the setting time of the first low probability time-saving gaming state or the end point with only the fluctuation pattern command. Or, it cannot be determined whether it is at a time other than the set time or the end time, and it is not possible to appropriately execute the above-mentioned start-time loss variation performance and end-time loss variation performance. Therefore, at the time of setting and the end of the first low probability time-saving game state described above, when performing a variable effect in the same manner as the start-time loss variable effect and the end-time loss variable effect, "02H", "03H" It is necessary to replace the variation effect based on the variation pattern command ``'' or ``04H'' with a form similar to the above-mentioned losing variation effect at the start and loss variation effect at the end.

Furthermore, other than when setting and ending the first low-probability time-saving gaming state set via jackpot winning, and during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after RAM is cleared (without going through jackpot winning), During the set first low probability time saving game state), the variable pattern command is determined with reference to table B (see FIGS. 102(b) and (c)), so the losing symbol Z1 or When Z2 is determined, a variation pattern command of "02H", "03H", or "04H" is determined (see FIG. 102(a)).
Then, the sub control board 300 determines that if only the fluctuation pattern commands of "02H", "03H", or "04H" are used, the relevant time point is in the first low probability time saving game state set via the winning of the jackpot. It is not possible to determine whether the player is in the first low probability time-saving game state, which is set without going through a jackpot win. Therefore, for example, a production that is executed during the first low probability time saving game state set via winning a jackpot and during the first low probability time saving gaming state set without going through winning a jackpot. When performing control to change the mode (for example, the mode of the design of the production pattern 50, the mode of display that counts down the number of remaining time reductions, the mode of display of the suggestion image that makes a predetermined suggestion during the variable production, etc.), There is a possibility that changes in the presentation mode may not be executed appropriately.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the main CPU 101, when the special symbols start changing at the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set, informs that the first low probability time saving game state is set. A first low probability time saving start command indicating this is transmitted to the sub control board 300, and at the time of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol at the end of the first low probability time saving gaming state, at the end of the first low probability time saving gaming state. A first low-probability time-saving termination command indicating that there is such a thing is transmitted to the sub-control board 300.

Specifically, when the variation of the special symbol ends when the number of time-saving activations (900 times) is reached, the normal game state ends and a first low probability time-saving game state is set. The main CPU 101 transmits the above-described first low probability time saving start command to the sub control board 300 based on the first low probability time saving game state being set and the special symbol variation being started.
Furthermore, when the special symbols change 1200 times (time saving number) without winning a jackpot during the first low probability time saving game state, the first low probability time saving game state ends and a normal game state is set. The main CPU 101 sub-controls the first low-probability time-saving end command based on the fact that the 1200th special symbol change starts without winning a jackpot after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is transmitted to the board 300.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101, after the RAM is cleared, when the special symbol starts to change during the first low probability time saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared (during the first low probability time saving gaming state set without going through the winning of the jackpot). A jackpot non-via first low probability time saving command indicating that the game is in the first low probability time saving gaming state is transmitted to the sub control board 300.
In addition, the control regarding the jackpot non-transit first low probability time saving command will be described in detail later.

As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the sub control board 300 determines whether or not the first low probability time saving start command is received, whether the first low probability time saving end command is received, and whether or not there is a jackpot. Based on whether or not the first low probability time saving command is received, the relevant time is the setting time of the first low probability time saving gaming state after RAM clearing, the setting time and end of the first low probability time saving gaming state after RAM clearing. Other than the time, the end point of the first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing the RAM, the setting point of the first low probability time saving gaming state set via the jackpot, the first low probability time saving gaming state set via the jackpot It is possible to determine whether it is the end time of the first low-probability time-saving game state set via a jackpot, other than the time when the game state is set and the time when it ends. Then, based on this determination result, execute the above-mentioned loss fluctuation performance at the beginning and loss fluctuation performance at the end, replace with the same mode as the loss fluctuation performance at the start and the loss fluctuation performance at the end, and go through the jackpot. It becomes possible to perform different performances in the first low probability time saving gaming state set as a first low probability time saving gaming state set without going through the jackpot.

(Details of control in the first low probability time saving game state)
Next, the control in the first low probability time saving game state will be explained in detail.
The pachinko machine P according to another application example 10 is provided with two counters, a first low probability time saving counter A and a first low probability time saving counter B, as counters used for predetermined determination in the first low probability time saving game state. It is being Each of these counters is constituted by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
Then, when the special game ends or the RAM is cleared, predetermined starting values are set in the first low probability time saving counter A and the first low probability time saving counter B, and each time the special symbol changes. These counters are used to count. Then, a predetermined determination is made based on the count values of these counters.

Specifically, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or The number of fluctuations (number of time saving activations) until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set through the gaming state and the normal gaming state is set, and the first low probability time saving counter B is set with a predetermined starting value "2100'' (The number of fluctuations (number of time saving activations) from the point in time until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set via the second low probability time saving gaming state and the normal gaming state and the first low probability time saving gaming state ends 900 times and the total value of 1200 times of time saving in the first low probability time saving game state)) is set.
In addition, when the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X2, X4, or At the same time, the first low probability time saving counter B is set to "12100" as a predetermined starting value (from that point on to the high probability The number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set via the time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state is set.
Further, when the RAM is cleared, the main CPU 101 sets "0" to both the first low probability time saving counter A and the first low probability time saving counter B as a predetermined starting value.

As described above, when a predetermined starting value is set in the first low probability time saving counter A and the first low probability time saving counter B, the counters start counting.
When the winning lottery is performed based on the first special pattern random number or the second special pattern random number, the main CPU 101 calculates the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A and the first low probability at the time when the change of the special symbol starts. The count values of time saving counter B are each decremented by "1". Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after the decrement and the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the decrement are less than "0" (negative value). Determine. Furthermore, if it is determined that the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the decrement described above is less than "0", the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A is set to "0" again. If it is determined that the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement is less than "0", the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B is set to "0" again.

Here, as mentioned above, when the RAM is cleared, the first low probability time saving counter A is set to "0", and when the special game ends, the first low probability time saving counter A is set to "900" or "10900". " is set.
Then, after the RAM is cleared, the first low probability time saving counter A is decremented from "0" to "1" as described above, and is determined to be less than "0" as described above. Then, since "0" is set again, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the above-described "1" decrement is always less than "0".
That is, in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after clearing the RAM (the first low-probability time-saving gaming state set without going through the jackpot), at the setting time, at the end time, and at any time other than the setting time and end time. Also, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the above-mentioned decrement by "1" is always less than "0".

On the other hand, after the special game ends, the first low probability time saving counter A is decremented from "900" or "10900" by "1". Moreover, as mentioned above, the values of "900" and "10900" are the number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set.
Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game (the first low-probability time-saving game state set via the jackpot), at the time of setting, the above-mentioned "1" was decremented. The count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after that is "0", and at times other than the setting point and the end point, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A after being decremented by "1" as described above. becomes less than "0", and at the end of the process, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the above-described "1" decrement is less than "0".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the RAM is cleared, the first low probability time saving counter B is set to "0", and when the special game ends, the first low probability time saving counter B is set to "2100" or "12100". is set.
Then, after the RAM is cleared, the first low probability time saving counter B is decremented from "0" to "1" as described above, and is determined to be less than "0" as described above. Then, since "0" is set again, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after the above-described "1" decrement is always less than "0".
That is, in the first low probability time saving game state after clearing the RAM, the first low value after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is The count value of the probability time saving counter B is always less than "0".

On the other hand, after the special game ends, the first low probability time saving counter B is decremented from "2100" or "12100" by "1". Further, as described above, the values of "2100" and "12100" are the number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving game state ends.
Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game, at the time of setting, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" is less than "0". also becomes a large value, and at times other than the setting time and the end time, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after the above-mentioned decrement of "1" becomes a value larger than "0", and at the end time The count value of the first low probability time saving counter B becomes "0" after the above-mentioned "1" decrement is performed.

According to the above content, in the first low probability time saving game state after clearing the RAM, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the above-described "1" decrement and the first low probability time saving All the count values of counter B become less than "0" (see FIG. 103). On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving game state after the end of the special game, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after being decremented by "1" mentioned above. Both count values will never be less than "0" (see FIG. 103).

(Determination of first low probability time saving gaming state after RAM clearing)
In the first low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B are both less than "0" after the above-mentioned "1" decrement is performed. If so, it can be determined that the first low probability time saving gaming state is set after the RAM is cleared (set without going through the jackpot). In this case, the main CPU 101 transmits the above-described jackpot non-via first low probability time saving command to the sub control board 300.
Further, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits the first low probability time saving start command to the sub control board 300 at the time of setting the first low probability time saving gaming state, and at the time of ending the first low probability time saving gaming state. , transmits a first low probability time saving end command to the sub control board 300.

Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, when the sub-control board 300 receives the first low-probability time-saving command without jackpot and the first low-probability time-saving start command, the sub-control board 300 determines that the time point is the first time saving command after the RAM is cleared. It can be understood that the low probability time saving gaming state is set.
In this case, as the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation pattern of "02H", "03H" or "04H" is determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the relevant time point. When receiving the command, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 executes a variation effect based on the variation pattern command (a variation effect that notifies a loss) by replacing it with the form of the above-mentioned start-time loss variation effect.

Further, when the sub control board 300 receives the first low probability time saving command without jackpot and the first low probability time saving end command in the first low probability time saving gaming state, the sub control board 300 determines that the time point is the first time saving command after the RAM is cleared. It can be understood that it is the end of the low probability time saving game state.
In this case, as the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the variation pattern of "02H", "03H" or "04H" is determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the time point. When receiving the command, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 replaces and executes the variation performance based on the variation pattern command (the variation performance that notifies the loss) with the above-mentioned form of the loss variation performance at the end.

In addition, in the first low probability time saving game state, the sub control board 300 received the first low probability time saving command without going through a jackpot, but received both the first low probability time saving start command and the first low probability time saving end command. If not, it can be understood that the relevant time is other than the setting time and end time of the first low probability time saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared.
In this case, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 selects "02H", which is determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the time point. Even if a variation pattern command of "03H" or "04H" is received, the above-mentioned replacement is not performed, and the variation effect based on the variation pattern command is executed as is.

In addition, in any of the above cases, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 updates the fluctuation pattern table 114 (table When the "A3H" or "A4H" variation pattern command is determined with reference to B), the above-mentioned replacement is not performed, and the variation effect based on the variation pattern command (the variation effect that announces a jackpot) is left as is. Execute in a manner.

(Determination of the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game)
On the other hand, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, both the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter A and the count value of the first low-probability time-saving counter B after the above-described "1" decrement is performed. is not less than "0", it can be determined that the first low-probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game (set without going through the jackpot). . In this case, the main CPU 101 does not transmit the above-described jackpot non-via first low probability time saving command to the sub control board 300.
Further, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits the first low probability time saving start command to the sub control board 300 at the time of setting the first low probability time saving gaming state, and at the time of ending the first low probability time saving gaming state. , transmits a first low probability time saving end command to the sub control board 300.

Then, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, if the sub-control board 300 has not received the first low-probability time-saving command without going through jackpot, but has received the first low-probability time-saving start command, the relevant time point is It can be understood that this is the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game.
In this case, when a losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and a fluctuation pattern command of "0AH" determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 (table C) corresponding to the time point is received, the sub control The sub-CPU 301 of the board 300 executes a start loss variation effect based on the variation pattern command.

Furthermore, in the first low probability time saving game state, if the sub control board 300 has not received the first low probability time saving command without going through the jackpot, but has received the first low probability time saving end command, the point in time is It can be understood that this is the end point of the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game.
In this case, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined and a fluctuation pattern command of "0BH" determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table 114 (table D) corresponding to the time point is received, the sub control The sub-CPU 301 of the board 300 executes the end-time loss variation effect based on the variation pattern command.

In addition, the sub control board 300 has not received the first low probability time saving command not via jackpot in the first low probability time saving gaming state, and the first low probability time saving start command and the first low probability time saving end command. If neither is received, it can be understood that the relevant time is other than the setting time and end time of the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game.
In this case, when the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 is determined, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 selects "02H", which is determined by referring to the variation pattern table 114 (table B) corresponding to the time point. Even if a variation pattern command of "03H" or "04H" is received, the above-mentioned replacement is not performed, and the variation effect based on the variation pattern command is executed as is.

In addition, in any of the above cases, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 updates the fluctuation pattern table 114 (table When a variation pattern command of "A3H", "A4H", "AAH" or "ABH" is determined by referring to Table B, Table C or Table D), the above variation pattern command is not replaced, but the variation pattern command is The based variable effect (the variable effect that notifies you of a jackpot) is executed as is.

By performing the above-mentioned control, according to the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the sub-control board 300 also maintains the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after clearing the RAM (i.e., without going through the jackpot). Other than the setting time of the first low probability time saving gaming state (set before the RAM is cleared), the setting time and ending time of the first low probability time saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared, the ending time of the first low probability time saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared , the setting time of the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game (that is, the first low probability time saving game state set via the jackpot), the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game It becomes possible to appropriately determine the end time of the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game, other than the set time and end time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the first (i.e., at the start time) or the 1200th (i.e., at the end time) fluctuation in the first low probability time-saving gaming state after clearing the RAM causes the RAM to be cleared. A fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern is determined under the same conditions as the fluctuations other than the 1st and 1200th fluctuations in the later first low probability time-saving gaming state (that is, with reference to the same fluctuation pattern table 114 (table B)) A command is determined. Then, the fluctuation pattern command that can be determined by the 1st or 1200th fluctuation in the first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing the RAM, and the fluctuation other than the 1st or 1200th fluctuation in the first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing the RAM. The variation pattern commands that can be determined are the same. However, even if a similar variation pattern command is determined, in the first variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state after RAM clearing, the first low probability time saving start command is sent to the sub control board 300, In addition, in the 1200th change in the first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing the RAM, the first low probability time saving end command is transmitted to the sub control board 300, so that the sub control board 300 that has received the command It can be understood that this is the 1st or 1200th change in the first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing. Even if a similar variation pattern command is received, based on the reception of the first low probability time saving start command and the first low probability time saving end command, the first time in the first low probability time saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared. During the variation production related to the 1200th variation, a start notification production indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has been set and an end notification production indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has ended can be executed. It looks like this.
As a result, according to the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the number of fluctuations in the first low probability time-saving game state set without going through the jackpot, and the performance This makes it possible to prevent the above contradiction from occurring.

Next, an outline of the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 6.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed when the special symbol variation starts will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104.
The processing in steps 6000 to 6007 is almost the same as the processing in steps 801 to 808 of the special symbol variation start processing in the above-described embodiment, so the explanation is omitted here and the process proceeds to step 6208.

In step 6008, the main CPU 101 executes a determination process for determining the first low probability time saving gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 6009.
In step 6009, the main CPU 101 executes a time point determination process to determine whether the time point is the start time or end time of the first low probability time saving gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 6010.

In step 6010, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process. In this fluctuation pattern determination process, the process of acquiring the fluctuation pattern table 114 to be referred to when determining a fluctuation pattern command is different from the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment, and the other processes are different from the fluctuation pattern determination process in the above-described embodiment. Since this process is almost the same as the variation pattern determination process, only the process for acquiring the variation pattern table 114 will be described.
Specifically, in the variation pattern determination process in other application example 10, as described above, if the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "01H" or "02H", the jackpot is won. A fluctuation pattern table 114 corresponding to the number of fluctuations after the end of the special game to be executed based on the determination table is obtained based on the determination table. Further, when the selection state value set in the selection state flag is "00H", a variation pattern table 114 corresponding to ON or OFF of the time saving game flag is acquired based on the determination table.
Then, the process advances to the next step 6011.
The processing in step 6011 and the processing in step 6012 are almost the same as the processing in step 810 and the processing in step 812 of the special symbol variation start processing in the above-described embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the determination processing in step 6008 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 105.
In step 6100, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 6101.
In step 6101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A is less than "0". If it is determined that the value is not less than "0" (that is, it is greater than or equal to "0"), the process advances to step 6108. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is less than "0", the process advances to the next step 6102.

In step 6102, the main CPU 101 sets the first low probability time saving counter A to "0". Then, the process advances to the next step 6103.
In step 6103, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B by one. Then, the process advances to the next step 6104.

In step 6104, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B is less than "0". If it is determined that the value is not less than "0", the determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is less than "0", the process advances to the next step 6105.
In step 6105, the main CPU 101 sets the first low probability time saving counter B to "0". Then, the process advances to the next step 6106.

In step 6106, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current time is in the first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, if the high-probability game flag indicating the high-probability time-saving game state is off and in the first time-saving game state). (Whether or not the first time-saving game flag indicating that the game is on) is determined. Then, if it is determined that the first low probability time saving game state is not in progress, the determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first low probability time saving game state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 6107.
In step 6107, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot non-via first low probability time saving command indicating that the game is in a first low probability time saving gaming state after clearing the RAM in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the jackpot non-transit first low probability time saving command is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the determination process ends.

Further, in step 6108, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 6101 that the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A is not less than 0, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 6109.
In step 6109, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B is less than "0". If it is determined that the value is not less than "0", the determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is less than "0", the process advances to the next step 6110.
In step 6110, the main CPU 101 sets the first low probability time saving counter B to "0". Then, the determination process ends.

Next, the time point determination process in step 6009 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 106.
In step 6200, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set (that is, whether the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 1200, which is the number of time saving times). If it is determined that it is not the time to set the first low probability time saving gaming state, the process advances to step 6202. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time to set the first low probability time saving gaming state, the process advances to the next step 6201.
In step 6201, the main CPU 101 sets a first low probability time saving start command indicating that it is time to set the first low probability time saving gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first low probability time saving start command is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 6202.

In step 6202, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is the end of the first low-probability time-saving game state (that is, whether the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is 0). If it is determined that it is not the end time of the first low probability time saving game state, the time point determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end of the first low probability time saving game state, the process advances to the next step 6203.
In step 6203, the main CPU 101 sets a first low probability time saving end command indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has ended in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first low probability time saving termination command is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the time point determination process ends.

Next, the special game end process executed at the end of the special game will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107.
The processing in steps 6300 to 6303 is almost the same as the processing in steps 3200 to 3203 of the special game end processing in other application example 6, so the explanation is omitted here and the process proceeds to step 6304.
In step 6304, the main CPU 101 sets the first low probability time saving counter A to a predetermined start value (900), and sets the first low probability time saving counter B to a predetermined start value (2100). Then, the process advances to the next step 6305.

The processing in steps 6305 to 6306 is almost the same as the processing in steps 3204 to 3205 of the special game end processing in other application example 6, so the explanation will be omitted here.
In step 6307, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 6305 that the state is the second low probability time saving gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the selection state value "01H" to the selection state flag. Then, the special game ending process is ended.
Further, in step 6308, which is proceeded when it is determined in the above-mentioned step 6305 that the state is not in the second low probability time saving game state, the main CPU 101 sets the selection state value "02H" to the selection state flag. Then, the special game ending process is ended.

Next, the RAM clear processing performed when the RAM is cleared will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108.
The processing in steps 6400 to 6403 is almost the same as the processing in steps 3300 to 3303 of the RAM clearing process in Application Example 6, so a description thereof will be omitted here and the process will proceed to the next step 6404.
In step 6404, the main CPU 101 sets the first low probability time saving counter A to a predetermined start value (0), and also sets the first low probability time saving counter B to a predetermined start value (0). Then, the process advances to the next step 6405.
In step 6405, the main CPU 101 sets the selection state value "02H" to the selection state flag. Then, the RAM clearing process ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the same post-stop processing and time-saving activation count execution processing as in other application example 6 are also executed, but since the contents are almost the same, they will not be explained here. Omit.

Next, control processing in the sub-control board 300 for executing various processing as described above will be explained.
First, the jackpot non-transit first low probability time saving command reception process that is executed when the jackpot non-transit first low probability time saving command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 109.
In step 6500, the sub CPU 301 turns on the after-RAM-clear flag indicating that the game is in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state after the RAM is cleared. Note that in the initial state (such as after factory shipment or after reset due to RAM clearing), this RAM clear flag is off. Then, the jackpot non-transit first low probability time saving command reception process is ended.

Next, the first low-probability time-saving start command reception process that is executed when the first low-probability time-saving start command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 110.
In step 6600, the sub CPU 301 turns on the setting time flag indicating that it is the time to set the first low probability time saving gaming state. Note that in the above-mentioned initial state, this setting time flag is off. Then, the first low probability time saving start command reception process ends.

Next, the first low-probability time-saving termination command reception process that is executed when the first low-probability time-saving termination command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111.
In step 6700, the sub CPU 301 turns on the end point flag indicating that it is the end point of the first low probability time saving gaming state. Note that in the above-mentioned initial state, this end point flag is off. Then, the first low probability time saving termination command reception process is terminated.

Next, the process of receiving a variable pattern command during the first low probability time saving game state, which is executed when the variable pattern command is received during the first low probability time saving gaming state, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112.
In step 6800, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the first low probability time saving game state is in progress. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, information on the game state set after the end of the special game and the changed game state when the game state is changed is transmitted to the sub control board 300. This allows the sub-control board 300 to grasp the gaming state being set based on the information. Then, when it is determined that the first low probability time saving game state is not in progress, the process of receiving the fluctuation pattern command during the first low probability time saving game state is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first low probability time saving game state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 6801.
In step 6801, the sub CPU 301 determines the mode of the variation effect based on the received variation pattern command. Then, the process advances to the next step 6802.

In step 6802, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the received variation pattern command is "02H", "03H" or "04H" (that is, the losing symbol Z1 or Z2 has been determined and refers to table B. It is determined whether the command is a variation pattern command determined by If it is determined that it is neither "02H", "03H", or "04H", the process advances to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is one of "02H", "03H", or "04H", the process advances to the next step 6803.
In step 6803, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on. If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off), the process advances to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to the next step 6804.

In step 6804, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the setting time flag is on. If it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step 6806. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to the next step 6805.
In step 6805, the sub CPU 301 replaces the variation performance mode determined in step 6801 described above (that is, the variation performance mode that notifies a loss) with the start-time loss variation performance mode. Then, the process advances to step 6808.

Furthermore, in step 6806, which is proceeded when it is determined in step 6804 that the set time flag is not on, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the end time flag is on. If it is determined that it is not on, the process advances to step 6808. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is on, the process advances to the next step 6807.
In step 6807, the sub CPU 301 replaces the variation performance mode determined in step 6801 described above (the variation performance mode that notifies a loss) with the loss-at-end variation performance mode. Then, the process advances to the next step 6808.

In step 6808, the sub CPU 301 sets in the transmission buffer a variable effect execution command corresponding to the variable effect mode determined in step 6801 described above and the variable effect mode replaced in step 6805 or step 6807 described above. The variable effect execution command set here is transmitted to various control boards, and these control boards perform control to execute the variable effect based on the received variable effect execution command. Then, the process advances to the next step 6809.
In step 6809, the sub CPU 301 turns off the RAM clear after flag, the setting time flag, and the end time flag. Then, the first low probability time saving game state variation pattern command reception process is ended.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 10)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, regardless of the first low probability time saving game state after RAM clearing and the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game, the number of times the time saving is activated and the number of times the time saving is performed Although the setting time and end time of the first low probability time-saving gaming state were determined using the above method, the method of determination is not limited to this.
As mentioned above, after the RAM is cleared, the first low probability time saving counter A is decremented from "0" to "1" as described above, and as mentioned above, if it is less than "0", When the determination is made, "0" is set again, so the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after the above-described "1" decrement is always less than 0. Therefore, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after being decremented by "1" becomes "0" only after the special game ends. In addition, the values "900" and "10900" set as predetermined starting values in the first low probability time saving counter A are the number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, so as mentioned above, The count value of the first low probability time saving counter A after being decremented by "1" becomes "0" only when the first low probability time saving game state is set.
Similarly, after the RAM is cleared, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after being decremented by "1" as described above will always be less than 0. Therefore, the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after being decremented by "1" becomes "0" only after the special game ends. In addition, the values "2100" and "12100" set as predetermined starting values in the first low probability time saving counter B are the number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving gaming state ends. The count value of the first low probability time saving counter B after being decremented by "1" becomes "0" only at the end of the first low probability time saving game state.

From the above, since the count value of the first low probability time saving counter A has become "0" after the above-mentioned decrement of "1", this time point is the first low probability time saving counter A after the end of the special game. It is determined that it is the time to set the game state, and the count value of the first low probability time saving counter B becomes "0" after being decremented by "1" as described above, so this time is determined as the time for the special game. It may be determined that it is the end point of the first low probability time saving game state after the end. Then, based on this determination result, it is determined that the state is in the first low probability time saving game state after the end of the special game, that it is the time to set the first low probability time saving game state, and that the first low probability time saving game state has ended. A command indicating that the current time is reached may be sent to the sub control board 300.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, the sub CPU 301 controls the loss variation performance at the start based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted to the sub control board 300 at the time when the variation display of the special symbol is finished. However, this is not limited to this.
For example, a stop display time elapsed command is sent to the sub-control board 300 when the variable display of a special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, or when the variable display of the next special symbol (variable effect) starts. Based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted to the sub-control board 300, the start-time loss variation performance and the end-time loss variation performance may be set to end.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 10, by playing a piece of video data (performance data) in which the execution contents of the loss fluctuation performance at the start and the loss fluctuation performance at the end are determined, the performance patterns 50 Although the variable display and the start notification effect (or end notification effect) are performed in an integrated manner, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, separate video data is provided in which the execution content of a fluctuating effect that notifies a loss is determined, and video data is defined in which the execution content of a start notification effect (or end notification effect) is determined, and the process is performed based on these video data. The variable display of the performance symbols 50 and the start notification performance (or end notification performance) may be performed by superimposing and displaying the moving images that are played back. Even in this case, the current performance (playback of the moving image) may not end unless a predetermined command (such as a symbol confirmation command) is received.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 10 can be achieved.
Further, the image of the end notification effect (the image indicating the end of chance mode) may be continuously displayed even after the variable effect has ended (after receiving the symbol confirmation command, etc.). For example, the image of the above-mentioned end notification effect continues to be displayed even while the customer is waiting for the first special pattern random number and the second special pattern random number to be stored and the next special pattern variable display (fluctuating effect) is not started. Alternatively, even after the start of the variable display of the next special symbol, the display of the image of the above-mentioned end notification effect may be continued until a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed.
In this case, it is possible to more reliably notify that the first low probability time saving gaming state has ended.

(Other application examples 11)
Like the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11 is not a pachinko machine that mixes 1 type and 2 types or a pachinko machine that performs so-called simultaneous rotation control, but is a pachinko machine that can win a jackpot. The special game is configured to be executed based on the following.
The pachinko machine P according to other application example 11 is capable of deriving the determination result of winning the time-saving award in a win/fail lottery during a low-probability gaming state, and when the time-saving award is won, it is possible to derive the determination result that the time-saving award is won. This differs from the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10 in that a time-saving gaming state can be set.
Hereinafter, the same configuration as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 10 (the structure in the gaming area 12 (structure of various parts, installation positions), etc.) will not be explained unless necessary, and A description will be given focusing on the configuration different from the pachinko machine according to Example 10 (win/fail lottery, setting of gaming state, etc.).

In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the game states that can be set are the normal game state in other application example 10, the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, and the high probability time saving gaming state. In addition, a third low probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the third low probability time saving gaming state), which is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a third time saving gaming state (time saving gaming state) described later, and a low probability gaming state A fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state) is provided, which is a gaming state that is a combination of the fourth time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) described later, and any one of the gaming states The settings are set and the game begins.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, the non-time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state and the fourth working time saving gaming state are the states in which the input to the second starting prize opening 16 is The frequency of entering the game ball (difficulty of entering the ball, in other words, frequency of lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16) is set to predetermined contents.
Note that, similar to the other application example 10, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, the player is instructed to direct the game ball toward the first game area 12a so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the normal game state. A strike (so-called left-handed hit) is performed, during the first low probability time-saving game state, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the third low-probability time-saving game state, during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and during the high probability time-saving game state. During the state and special game, the player is instructed to play the second game so that the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the second starting prize opening 16, and the game ball enters the big winning opening 18. The game ball is launched toward the area 12b (so-called right-handed hitting).
Then, based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning hole 16, a winning/failure lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, the low probability gaming states (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, third low probability gaming state, In the lottery when the probability time-saving game state, fourth low-probability time-saving game state) is set, it is possible to win a jackpot or time-saving grant, and the high-probability game state (high probability time-saving game state) is set. In the case where the winning lottery is held, it is possible to win only the jackpot and not the time saving grant.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113(a), when the low probability gaming state is set, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a time saving grant is set to approximately 3/300. , the probability of winning the jackpot when the high probability gaming state is set is set to approximately 6/300.

Then, in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X1 is 25/100. (25%), and the probability of determining the jackpot symbol X2 is set to 75/100 (75%). In addition, in the above-mentioned lottery, if you win the time-saving award, the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J1 is 80/100 (80%), and the probability of determining the time-saving symbol J2 is 80/100 (80%). It is set to 20/100 (20%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined.
On the other hand, in the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16, if a jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X3, X4, or X5 is determined, and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined. The probability is set to 25/100 (25%), the probability of determining jackpot symbol X4 is set to 30/100 (30%), and the probability of determining jackpot symbol X5 is set to 45/100 (45%). Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, if a time saving award is won by a lottery during the low probability gaming state, the low probability gaming state does not change and the third time saving gaming state or the fourth time saving gaming state described below can be set. That is, when winning the time saving award, the third time saving game state or the fourth time saving game state is set without passing through the winning of the jackpot and the execution of the special game. For example, if you win a time-saving award by lottery during the normal gaming state, the low-probability gaming state remains unchanged, but the non-time-saving gaming state is changed to the third time-saving gaming state or the fourth time-saving gaming state, and thereby the third low-probability gaming state changes. Transition to the time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, since it is possible to win the time-saving award by lottery during the low-probability game state, it is possible to win the time-saving award not only during the normal game state (non-time-saving game state). , if you win the time-saving award also during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state. There is.
Control regarding the setting of the gaming state when winning the time saving award will be described in detail later.
It should be noted that in the lottery during the high-probability game state, the time-saving award is not won, so the gaming state does not change based on the time-saving award winning during the high-probability time-saving gaming state.

(Summary of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 11 will be explained. The performance of the non-time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving game state in other application example 11 (probability of winning by lottery of normal symbols, fluctuation time of normal symbols, operating time of movable piece 16b) is other than that. Since it is the same as Application Example 10, the explanation will be omitted, and here the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state will be mainly explained.
As shown in FIG. 113(c), during the third time-saving game state (during the third low-probability time-saving game state) and during the fourth time-saving game state (during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state), a normal symbol is drawn by lottery. The probability of winning is during the non-time-saving gaming state (during the normal gaming state), during the first time-saving gaming state (during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state), and during the second time-saving gaming state (during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state). The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, which is the same as (medium), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state and longer than during the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. The operating time of the movable piece 16b in the case of a winning lottery is set to 3.5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state and shorter than during the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. .

During the non-time-saving game state (normal game state), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state (from the open state to Although the interval until the next open state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is extremely short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in a closed state, so the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b will almost never enter the second starting prize opening 16.

Also, during the third time-saving game state (during the third low-probability time-saving game state) and during the fourth time-saving game state (during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state), you will win at the same probability as during the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open as in the non-time-saving gaming state. Since the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 0.5 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 3.5 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is closed. Although the time from the open state to the open state is short (the interval from the open state to the next open state is short), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is long. Therefore, during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, the period in which the movable piece 16b is in the open state is long, and the game balls that have entered the second game area 12b go to the second starting prize opening 16 with high frequency. Balls can be entered.

Furthermore, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state), during the non-time-saving game state, during the third time-saving game state, and Since the winning probability is the same as in the fourth time-saving game state, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open as in the non-time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fourth time-saving game state. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than that during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. Although the time required for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state is extremely short, the time for which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is extremely long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is almost in an open state, and game balls that have entered the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 16 with extremely high frequency. becomes.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, in any of the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, the third time-saving gaming state, and the fourth time-saving gaming state, Although the probability of winning by drawing the normal symbols is generally set to be extremely high, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbols and the operating time of the movable piece 16b, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. The possibility (that is, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16, in other words, the frequency of executing the winning lottery based on the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16) changes. It looks like this.
That is, during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, the period during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is longer than during the non-time-saving game state, so the second start is longer than during the non-time-saving game state. It is easy for game balls to enter the winning hole 16. In addition, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the period during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is longer than during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. The game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more easily than during the first time saving game state and the second time saving game state. Therefore, during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, during the non-time-saving game state, during the first time-saving game state and during the second time-saving game state, during the third time-saving game state and during the fourth time-saving game state. It is possible to obtain an opportunity for a lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses, compared to during the game state.

In addition, during the first time-saving game state and during the second time-saving game state, the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 was the same, but it is not limited to this. . By varying any one or more of the probability of winning by drawing the normal symbols, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b, the first time-saving game state is faster than the second time-saving game state. It may be set so that the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more easily, and the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 16 during the second time saving game state more easily than during the first time saving gaming state. You can set it to make it easier.
Similarly, during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state, the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is not the same, but one of them is easier than the other. It may be set so that the game ball easily enters the second starting prize opening 16.
In addition, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more easily during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state than during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state. Instead, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more easily during the third time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state than during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state. You may also do so.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, the third time-saving game state, and the fourth time-saving game state, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16. It may be set to be different, or it may be set so that the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting prize opening 16 is the same for two or more time-saving game states.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state Either a gaming state or a high probability time saving gaming state is set.
Note that when the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, the fourth low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state is set, a predetermined amount of data in the main RAM 103 is set. The time saving number counter configured by the storage area starts counting the number of time saving times corresponding to each time saving gaming state. Specifically, when the above-mentioned time-saving gaming states are set, the number of time-saving games corresponding to each time-saving gaming state is set in the time-saving number counter, and the count value of the time-saving number counter changes every time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is decremented by 1. Further, the count value of the time saving number counter is reset when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or when the special game ends. Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times (that is, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches 0), the time saving game state being set ends.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), regardless of the gaming state being set, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X1 is determined by the lottery based on the first special pattern random number, and In any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined by the lottery based on the winning/failure lottery, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the low probability gaming state, and is also set to the second time-saving gaming state. As a result, a second low probability time saving gaming state is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times.
During this second low-probability time-saving gaming state, if all 100 winning/failure drawings result in losses, the second time-saving gaming state is changed to a non-time-saving gaming state, and the gaming state is changed to a normal gaming state. be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113(b), regardless of the gaming state being set, if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special figure random number, the second special figure random number In any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined by the lottery based on the winning/failure lottery, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the high probability gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state By setting this, a high probability time saving gaming state is set. Further, both the high accuracy number and the time saving number are set to 10,000.
That is, after the end of the special game that is executed when jackpot symbol X2, X4 or The high probability time saving game state continues until it is derived (until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 10,000 times).
During this high-probability time-saving game state, if all 10,000 winning/fail drawings result in losses, the high-probability game state is changed to a low-probability game state, and the second time-saving game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state. By doing so, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in reality, it is possible to win the jackpot again. Until then, the high probability time saving gaming state will continue.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 113(b), in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations (other application In Example 11, when the number of winnings is reached (900 times in Example 11) (that is, when all 900 winning lottery results in the low probability gaming state are losers), the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the first low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 1200 times.
After the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the first low-probability time-saving game state is played until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 1200 times without winning a jackpot (that is, until the result of the winning lottery is derived 1200 times). The low probability time saving gaming state continues.
Then, if all 1200 winning/failure drawings result in losses during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the first time saving gaming state is changed to a non time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same, thereby changing the gaming state. Changes to normal gaming state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the number of time saving activations is used to count the number of time saving activations (900 times) at which the first low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set. A counter is configured by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, when the special game ends, or when the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set. It is reset when one of the following reset conditions is satisfied.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and counting by the time saving activation number counter is started from this point.
Furthermore, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is completed, the subsequent game state is set to the first low probability time-saving game state, so counting by the time-saving activation number counter is started from this point.
In addition, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends, but counting by the time saving activation number counter starts from the time when the normal game state (low probability game state) is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot and until winning the next jackpot, the first low probability time saving The gaming state can only be set once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is continued until the next jackpot is won. Cannot be set again.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low probability time saving game state, whether the next jackpot is won or the RAM It is set so that counting by the time saving activation number counter is stopped until the clearing is performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the number of continuous time reduction settings and the number of continuous probability change settings as in the above-mentioned embodiment are not set, and when the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5 is determined. A high probability time saving game state is always set after the end of the special game based on the determination.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, it is possible to win the time-saving award by lottery during the low probability game state, and if the time-saving award is won, the third low-probability time-saving game state is entered. can be set. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113(b), if the time saving symbol is won, the time saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, and if the third low probability time saving gaming state is set based on the determination of the time saving symbol J1, the number of time saving symbols is determined. is set to 20 times, and when the third low probability time saving game state is set based on the determination of the time saving symbol J2, the number of time saving times can be set to 40 times.

(Setting the gaming state when winning the time saving award)
As mentioned above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, it is possible to win the time saving award by lottery during the low probability game state, so the time saving award is possible during the normal gaming state where the non-time saving gaming state is set. , and during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability gaming state, and the fourth low probability gaming state where the time saving gaming state is set. You may win the grant.
Below are the game states for when you win a time-saving award during the normal gaming state, when you win a time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and when you win the time-saving award during the third low-probability time-saving game state. Each setting will be explained below.

(1) If you win a time-saving award during the normal gaming state In this case, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined based on the winning, the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed. , the gaming state is set to the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the number of time saving times is set to 20.
Furthermore, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined based on the winning, the game state is set to the fourth low probability time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed. At the same time, the number of time saving times is set to 40 times.
Then, the time saving number counter starts counting the above-mentioned number of time saving times, and when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the above-mentioned number of time saving times, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal time saving number of times is reached. The gaming state is set.

(2) If you win a time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the same control is performed during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the second low-probability time-saving game state. Therefore, the control will be explained based on the first low probability time saving gaming state, and the explanation of the control in the second low probability time saving gaming state will be omitted.
In this case, even if the time saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined based on the winning of the time saving award, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time saving symbol based on the winning will be displayed. Although the setting of the gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is not performed and the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state is maintained, the number of time saving times corresponding to the type of time saving symbol determined is the number of time saving times counter. is set, and counting of the number of time reductions concerned is started. As a result, the count of the number of time savers corresponding to the first low probability time saver gaming state being set and the count of the number of time savers corresponding to the types of time saver symbols (J1, J2) determined based on the above-mentioned winning are performed in parallel. and executed.

Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter that counts the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state reaches the number of time saving times, the number of time saving times that counts the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol determined based on the winning mentioned above. If the count value of the counter is 1 or more, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low probability time saving game state being set ends and the third low probability time saving game state or A fourth low probability time saving game state is set.
That is, when the first low-probability time-saving game state being set ends as the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-saving times, and the number of time-saving games based on the time-saving grant award remains, a new third time-saving game state is entered. A low probability time saving game state or a fourth low probability time saving game state is set.
In other words, when winning the time-saving award, the remaining number of time-savings in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state being set is greater than the number of time-savings corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. If it is smaller, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times and the first low probability time saving gaming state being set ends, a third low probability time saving gaming state or a fourth low probability time saving gaming state is newly started. Set.

On the other hand, when the count value of the time saving number counter that counts the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state reaches the number of time saving times, the time saving number corresponding to the time saving symbol determined based on the winning mentioned above is counted. If the count value of the time saving number counter is not 1 or more (in other words, it is 0 or less), when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low probability time saving game being set Although the state ends, the normal game state is set without newly setting the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state. In other words, the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times. Therefore, when the first low-probability time-saving game state being set ends and there is no time-saving number remaining based on the time-saving award winning, a new third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state is started. The normal game state is set without being set.
In other words, when winning the time-saving award, the remaining number of time-savings in the first low probability time-saving gaming state being set is equal to or greater than the number of time-savings corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. If there is, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times and the first low probability time saving gaming state being set ends, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is set. The normal gaming state is set without any interruption.

(Specific example 1 of (2))
Specific example 1 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 114(a).
For example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 1150th lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. That is, it is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings in the first low probability time saving gaming state is 50, it is determined that the third low probability time saving gaming state with a number of 20 time saving times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/failure lottery for winning the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the third low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning is not performed and the Although the 1 low probability time saving game state is maintained, the number of time saving times of 20 corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. As a result, the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 50 times) in the first low probability time saving game state and the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 20 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-savings (50 times) in the first low probability time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-savings (20 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Then, before the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state reaches the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state (that is, the first low probability time saving gaming state ends). ), the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J1 reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J1. Therefore, when the first low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 becomes 0 or less, so even if the time-saving award is won, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set. The normal gaming state is set without any changes.
That is, in the above case, when the first low probability time saving game state of 1200 time saving times ends, the normal game state is set as is.

(Specific example 2 of (2))
Specific example 2 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 114(b).
For example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 1190th lottery during the first low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. That is, it is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings in the first low probability time saving gaming state is 10, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving gaming state with 40 time saving times can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/failure lottery for winning the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning is not performed, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is not set. Although the 1 low probability time saving game state is maintained, the number of time saving times of 40 corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. Thereby, the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 10 times) in the first low probability time saving game state and the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 40 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time savings (10 times) in the first low probability time saving game state is smaller than the number of time savings (40 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Then, even if the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state reaches the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 is counted. The count value of the time saving number counter for this purpose does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, at the time when the first low probability time saving game state is finished, the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 becomes 1 or more, so the fourth low probability time saving game state is set.
Incidentally, at this point, the remaining number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving game state is 30 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed 30 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 is reached, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state is set. .
That is, in the above case, when the first low-probability time-saving game state of 1200 time-savings ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 30 times. The time-saving gaming state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 30 times during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (2))
Specific example 3 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(a).
For example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 30th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. That is, it is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 70, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving gaming state with a number of time saving times of 40 can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/failure lottery for winning the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning is not performed, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is not set. 2 Although the low probability time saving game state is maintained, the number of time saving times of 40 corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. As a result, the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 70 times) in the second low probability time saving game state and the counting of the number of time saving times (remaining 40 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-savings (70 times) in the second low probability time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-savings (40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2. Then, before the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, the second low probability time saving gaming state ends). ), the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2 reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state ends, the count value of the time-saving number counter corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 becomes 0 or less, so even if the time-saving award is won, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set. The normal gaming state is set without any changes.
That is, in the above case, when the second low probability time saving game state of 100 time saving times ends, the normal game state is set as is.

(Specific example 4 of (2))
Specific example 4 of (2) will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b).
For example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 90th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined. That is, it is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 10, it is determined that the third low probability time saving gaming state with a number of time saving times of 20 can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning/failure lottery for winning the time-saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time-saving gaming state based on the winning will not be set, and the 2 Although the low probability time saving game state is maintained, the number of time saving times of 20 corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. As a result, the counting of the number of time saving times (10 remaining times) in the second low probability time saving game state and the counting of the number of time saving times (20 remaining times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time-savings (10 times) in the second low probability time-saving game state is smaller than the number of time-savings (20 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. Then, even if the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 is counted. The count value of the time saving number counter for this purpose does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low probability time saving game state ends, the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 becomes 1 or more, so the third low probability time saving game state is set.
Incidentally, at this point, the remaining number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving game state is 10 times. When the variable display of special symbols is performed 10 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-savings corresponding to time-saving symbol J1 is reached, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the normal gaming state is set. .
That is, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state of 100 time-savings ends, the third low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times. The time-saving gaming state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 10 times during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(3) If you win a time-saving grant during the normal gaming state and win the time-saving grant again while counting the number of time-savings based on the winning.As mentioned above, if you win the time-saving grant during the normal gaming state, the time-saving grant will be based on the winning. When the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the stop display time has elapsed, a third low probability time saving game state or a fourth low probability time saving game state is set, and counting of the corresponding number of time saving times is started.
Then, during the counting of this time saving number (that is, during the set third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state), if the time saving award is won again and the time saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, When the variable display of the special symbol based on the re-winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time-saving gaming state and the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state are set based on the re-winning. Although the 3rd low probability time saving game state or the 4th low probability time saving gaming state being set is maintained without being won, the number of time savings corresponding to the type of time saving symbol determined based on the re-winning is the number of time savings. It is set in a counter and starts counting the number of time reductions. As a result, the time-saving symbol type (J1 , J2) are executed in parallel.

Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter that counts the number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state set earlier reaches the number of time saving times, based on the above-mentioned re-winning. If the count value of the time saving number counter that counts the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving symbol is 1 or more, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display has elapsed, the third The low-probability time-saving gaming state or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, and the third low-probability time-saving gaming state or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is newly set based on the above-mentioned re-winning.
That is, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times and the previously set third low probability time saving game state or fourth low probability time saving gaming state ends, the time saving grant is won again. When the number of time-savings remains, a third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set.
In other words, when winning the time-saving award again, the remaining number of time-savings in the previously set third low-probability time-saving gaming state or fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is determined based on the winning of the time-saving award again. If it is smaller than the number of time-savings corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol, when the count value of the time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-savings, the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game that was previously set is activated. When the state ends, a third low probability time saving gaming state or a fourth low probability time saving gaming state is newly set.

On the other hand, when the count value of the time saving number counter that counts the number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state reaches the number of time saving times, it is decided based on the above-mentioned re-winning. If the count value of the time-saving number counter that counts the number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving symbol is not 1 or more (in other words, it is 0 or less), when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, , although the previously set third low probability time saving gaming state or fourth low probability time saving gaming state ends, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is not newly set and the normal state is reached. The gaming state is set.
That is, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times and the previously set third low probability time saving game state or fourth low probability time saving gaming state ends, the time saving grant is won again. When there is no time saving number remaining, the normal game state is set without newly setting the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state.
In other words, when winning the time-saving award again, the remaining number of time-savings in the previously set third low-probability time-saving gaming state or fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is determined based on the winning of the time-saving award again. If the number of time savings is equal to or greater than the number of time savings corresponding to the type of time saving symbol, the count value of the time savings counter reaches the number of time savings and the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game that was previously set is entered. When the state ends, the normal gaming state is set without newly setting the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state.

(Specific example 1 of (3))
Specific example 1 of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(a).
For example, when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined by winning the time-saving lottery in the normal game state, the 40th low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the 10th low-probability time-saving game state is set during the 4th low-probability time-saving game state. It is assumed that the time-saving symbol J1 has been selected once again in the winning/failure lottery. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is 30, it is determined that the third low probability time saving gaming state with a number of 20 time saving times can be set again.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award again ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award again will not be set. , Although the fourth low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the number of time saving times of 20 corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time saving award again is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. . As a result, the count of the number of time-savings (30 times remaining) in the fourth low probability time-saving game state set earlier and the count of the number of time-savings (20 times remaining) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again. are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time reductions (30 times) in the fourth low probability time reduction game state set previously is greater than the number of time reductions (20 times) corresponding to the time reduction symbol J1 based on the winning of the time reduction award again. Then, before the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving gaming state set earlier reaches the number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving gaming state (that is, before the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving gaming state set earlier). (before the fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends), the count value of the time-saving number counter for counting the number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time-saving award again is the time-saving game state corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1. reach the number of times. Therefore, when the previously set fourth low probability time saving game state ends, the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time saving award again becomes 0 or less, so the time saving award is performed. Although the winning is won again, the third low probability time-saving game state is not set, but the normal game state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the fourth low probability time saving game state of the previously set 40 time saving times ends, the normal game state is set as is.

(Specific example 2 of (3))
Specific example 2 of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b).
For example, when a time-saving symbol J1 is determined by winning the time-saving lottery in the normal game state, the 3rd low-probability time-saving game state is set for 20 times, and the 10th time-saving game state during the 3rd low-probability time-saving game state is set. It is assumed that the time-saving symbol J2 has been selected once again in the winning/failure lottery. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the third low probability time saving gaming state is 10, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving gaming state with a number of 40 time saving times can be set again.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award again will not be performed. Although the third low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the number of time saving times of 40 corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving award is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. . As a result, a count of the number of time savings (10 times remaining) in the third low probability time saving game state set earlier and a count of the number of time savings (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving grant again. are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time reductions (10 times) in the third low probability time reduction game state set previously is smaller than the number of time reductions (40 times) corresponding to the time reduction symbol J2 based on the winning of the time reduction award again. Then, even if the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving gaming state that was previously set reaches the number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving application is not applied again. The count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2 based on winning does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2. Therefore, when the previously set third low probability time saving game state ends, the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on winning the time saving award again becomes 1 or more, so a new time saving game state is started. 4. A low probability time saving game state is set.
Incidentally, at this point, the remaining number of time saving times in the newly set fourth low probability time saving game state is 30 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed 30 times without winning a jackpot or time-saving award, the number of time-saving symbols corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on winning the time-saving award again is reached, and a new 4th low probability time-saving gaming state is entered. The game ends and the normal gaming state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the third low-probability time-saving game state of 20 time-savings ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set, and the new state is continued until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 30 times. The fourth low probability time saving game state can be continued. Then, when the special symbol is displayed 30 times during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the new fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (3))
Specific example 3 of (3) will be described with reference to FIG. 116(c).
For example, when a time-saving symbol J2 is determined by winning the time-saving lottery in the normal game state, the 40th low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the 10th low-probability time-saving game state is set during the 4th low-probability time-saving game state. It is assumed that the time-saving symbol J2 is determined again by winning the time-saving award again in the lottery. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the fourth low probability time saving game state is 30, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving game state with a number of time savings of 40 times can be set again.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award again will not be performed. Although the fourth low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 determined based on the winning of the time saving award again is set to the time saving number counter, and the number of time saving times is counted. is started. As a result, the count of the number of time savers (30 times remaining) in the fourth low probability time saver gaming state set earlier and the count of the number of time savers (40 times remaining) corresponding to the time saver symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saver award again. are carried out in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time saving times (30 times) in the fourth low probability time saving game state set previously is smaller than the number of time saving times (40 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Then, even if the count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving game state set earlier reaches the number of time saving times in the fourth low probability time saving game state, the time saving application is not applied again. The count value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2 based on winning does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving pattern J2. Therefore, when the previously set fourth low probability time saving game state ends, the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 becomes 1 or more, so a fourth low probability time saving game state is newly set. be done.
Incidentally, at this point, the remaining number of time saving times in the newly set fourth low probability time saving game state is 10 times. When the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times without winning a jackpot or time saving award, the number of time savings corresponding to time saving symbol J2 based on winning the time saving award again is reached and a newly set 4th low probability time saving is performed. The gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the fourth low-probability time-saving game state with 40 time-savings ends, a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, and the new state is continued until the special symbol is displayed 10 times. The fourth low probability time saving game state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner 10 times during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the new fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In other words, in this case, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state continues for 50 variable displays of special symbols.

(4) If you win a time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and win the time-saving award again while counting the number of time-savings based on the winning, as described above, the first If you win a time-saving grant during the low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state will not be set based on the winning. While the first low probability time saving gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state being set is maintained, the number of time saving times corresponding to the type of time saving symbol determined based on the winning is set in the time saving number counter, and The time saving count starts.
In addition, when the time saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined by winning the time saving award again while counting the number of time saving based on the above-mentioned winning, the variable display of the special symbol based on the said winning again ends and the stop display time has elapsed. At the time, the third low probability time saving gaming state and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are not set based on the winning again, and correspond to the type of time saving symbol determined based on the winning again. The number of time saving times to be performed is set in the time saving number counter, and counting of the number of time saving times is started.
As a result, the time-saving symbol determined based on the count of the number of time-savings corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state or the second low-probability time-saving gaming state that was set first, and the winning of the first time-saving award described above. The counting of the number of time-savings corresponding to the type (J1, J2) and the counting of the number of time-savings corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol (J1, J2) determined based on the above-mentioned winning of the time-saving grant again are carried out in parallel. is executed.

Then, the count value of the time saving number counter (hereinafter also referred to as the first time saving number counter) that counts the number of time saving times in the first low probability time saving game state or the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first is the number of time saving times. When reaching , the count value of the time saving number counter (hereinafter also referred to as the second time saving number counter) that counts the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol determined based on the winning of the first time saving award mentioned above becomes 1. In the above case, when the special symbol fluctuation display ends and the stop display passes, the first low probability time saving gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first ends, and a new A third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set based on the winning of the first time-saving award described above.

Furthermore, when the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is newly set based on the first time saving award winning, the count value of the second time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times. In this case, the count value of the time saving number counter (hereinafter also referred to as the third time saving number counter) that counts the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol determined based on the above-mentioned winning of the time saving award again was 1 or more. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display passes, the new third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state ends, and the above-mentioned new time saving award is won again. A third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on is set.
On the other hand, when the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set based on the first time-saving award winning, the count value of the second time-saving number counter reaches the number of time-savings. At this time, if the count value of the third time saving counter is not 1 or more, when the special symbol fluctuation display ends and the stop display passes, a new third low probability time saving game state or a fourth low probability time saving game state is entered. The game state ends, and the normal game state is set without setting a new third low probability time saving game state or fourth low probability time saving game state based on the above-mentioned winning of the time saving grant again.

On the other hand, when the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times and the count value of the second time saving number of times counter is not 1 or more, the count value of the third time saving number of times counter is also 1 or more. If not, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low-probability time-saving game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, but the above-mentioned A new third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state based on winning the first time-saving award will not be set, and a new third low-probability time-saving gaming state based on the above-mentioned winning of the second time-saving award will not be set. Neither the gaming state nor the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is set.
On the other hand, if the count value of the second time saving number counter is not 1 or more when the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times, and the count value of the third time saving number counter is 1 or more, then , When the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the first low probability time saving game state or the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first ends, and the first time saving mentioned above ends. Although a new third low-probability time-saving gaming state or a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the grant is not set, a new third low-probability time-saving gaming state or a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state based on the above-mentioned winning of the time-saving grant again. A probability time saving game state is set.

(Specific example 1 of (4))
Specific example 1 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a).
For example, in the 90th lottery during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and in the 95th lottery during the second low probability time saving game, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol is selected. It is assumed that J2 has been determined. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 10, it is determined that the third low probability time saving gaming state with a number of time saving times of 20 can be set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. It is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings is 5, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving game state with 40 time savings can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of special symbols based on the first time-saving award win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving award win will be set. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the second time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award is completed and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award is not performed. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the third time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 40, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. After this, count the number of time savings (remaining 5 times) in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first, and the number of time savings (remaining 15 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving grant. ) and the counting of the number of time-savings (remaining 40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is smaller than the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving award. Then, the count value of the first time saving number counter (a counter for counting the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first) reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state. However, the count value of the second time saving number counter does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low probability time saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time saving number counter becomes 1 or more, so based on the winning of the first time saving award, a new third low probability A probability time saving game state is set.
Furthermore, here, the remaining number of time savings in the newly set third low probability time saving game state is smaller than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Then, even if the count value of the second time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the third low probability time saving game state, the count value of the third time saving number counter does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, at the end of the newly set third low probability time saving game state, the count value of the third time saving number counter becomes 1 or more, so based on the winning of the time saving award again, the fourth low probability time saving game state is newly set. The gaming state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state of 100 time-savings ends, the third low-probability time-saving game state is newly set, and the new state is continued until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times. The third low probability time saving game state can be continued. In addition, when the special symbol is displayed 30 times and the new third low probability time saving game state ends, a fourth low probability time saving game state is newly set, and the new 4th low probability time saving game state is set until the special symbol is displayed 25 times. The fourth low probability time saving gaming state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 25 times in a variable manner during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the new fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 2 of (4))
Specific example 2 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b).
For example, in the 70th lottery during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and in the 75th lottery during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol is selected. It is assumed that J1 has been determined. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 30, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving gaming state with a number of time saving times of 40 can be set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. It is assumed that when the remaining number of time savings is 25, it is determined that a third low probability time saving game state with a number of 20 time savings can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the first time-saving grant win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving grant win will be performed. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the second time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 40, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award is completed and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award is not set. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the third time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. After this, count the number of time savings (remaining 25 times) in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first, and the number of time savings (remaining 35 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the first time saving award. ) and the counting of the number of time-savings (remaining 15 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is smaller than the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the first time saving award. Then, even if the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the time saving number of the second low probability time saving game state, the count value of the second time saving number counter does not reach the time saving number corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving number counter becomes 1 or more. A probability time saving game state is set.
Here, before the new fourth low probability time saving game state is set, the count value of the third time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. That is, the remaining number of time savings in the newly set fourth low probability time saving game state is greater than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Therefore, when the newly set 4th low probability time saving game state ends, the count value of the 3rd time saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new 3rd low probability time saving game state based on the winning of the time saving award again is started. The gaming state is not set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-savings ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set, and the new state is continued until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10 times. The fourth low probability time saving game state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner 10 times during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the new fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 3 of (4))
Specific example 3 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 117(c).
For example, in the 50th lottery during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and in the 55th lottery during the second low probability time saving game, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol is selected. It is assumed that J2 has been determined. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 50, it is determined that the third low probability time saving game state with a number of time saving times of 20 can be set, and the second low probability time saving game state is set. It is assumed that when the remaining number of time reductions is 45, it is determined that the fourth low probability time reduction game state with 40 time reductions can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of special symbols based on the first time-saving award win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving award win will be set. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the second time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award is completed and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award is not performed. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the third time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 40, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. After this, count the number of time savings (45 remaining) in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first, and the number of time savings (15 remaining) corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving grant. ) and the counting of the number of time-savings (remaining 40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, before the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first ends), 2 The count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low probability time saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new third time saving game state based on the winning of the first time saving award is started. The low probability time saving game state is not set.
Furthermore, the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Then, before the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state, the count value of the third time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the third time-saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on the winning of the time-saving grant again is started. The setting of the probability time saving game state is also not performed.
That is, in the above case, the normal game state is set when the second low probability time saving game state of 100 time savings ends.

(Specific example 4 of (4))
Specific example 4 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(a).
For example, in the 70th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving symbol is won and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, and in the 80th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game, the time-saving symbol is won and the time-saving symbol is selected. It is assumed that J2 has been determined. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 30, it is determined that the third low probability time saving game state with a number of time saving times of 20 can be set, and the second low probability time saving game state is set. It is assumed that when the remaining number of time reductions is 20, it is determined that the fourth low probability time reduction game state with 40 time reductions can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of special symbols based on the first time-saving award win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving award win will be set. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the second time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award is completed and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award is not performed. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the third time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 40, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. After this, count the number of time savings (remaining 20 times) in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first, and the number of time savings (remaining 10 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving award. ) and the counting of the number of time-savings (remaining 40 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the first time saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, before the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first ends), 2 The count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low probability time saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new third time saving game state based on the winning of the first time saving award is started. The low probability time saving game state is not set.
On the other hand, the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is smaller than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Then, even if the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state, the count value of the third time saving number counter does not reach the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the third time-saving number counter becomes 1 or more, so a new fourth low-probability time-saving game state is created based on the winning of the time-saving grant again. A time saving gaming state is set.
That is, in the above case, when the second low-probability time-saving game state with 100 time-savings ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set, and the new state is continued until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 20 times. The fourth low probability time saving game state can be continued. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 20 times in a variable manner during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the new fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

(Specific example 5 of (4))
Specific example 5 of (4) will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b).
For example, in the 50th lottery during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, and in the 60th lottery during the second low probability time saving game, the time saving symbol is won and the time saving symbol is selected. It is assumed that J1 has been determined. That is, when the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state is 50, it is determined that the fourth low probability time saving gaming state with a number of time saving times of 40 can be set, and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set. It is assumed that when the remaining number of time reductions is 40, it is determined that the third low probability time reduction game state with 20 time reductions can be set.
In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the first time-saving grant win ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the setting of the fourth low probability time-saving game state based on the first time-saving grant win will be performed. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the second time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the time saving award is completed and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time saving gaming state based on the winning of the time saving award is not set. Although the second low probability time saving game state is maintained as it is, the third time saving number counter is set to the number of time saving times of 20, and counting of the number of time saving times is started. After this, count the number of time savings (remaining 40 times) in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first, and the number of time savings (remaining 30 times) corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the first time saving award. ) and the counting of the number of time-savings (remaining 20 times) corresponding to the time-saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time-saving grant again are performed in parallel.
Here, the remaining number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2 based on the winning of the first time saving award. Then, before the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, before the second low probability time saving gaming state that was set first ends), 2 The count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J2. Therefore, when the second low-probability time-saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the second time-saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new fourth time-saving game state based on the winning of the first time-saving grant is created. The low probability time saving game state is not set.
Furthermore, the remaining number of time savings in the second low probability time saving game state that was set first is greater than the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving symbol J1 based on the winning of the time saving award again. Then, before the count value of the first time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times in the second low probability time saving game state, the count value of the third time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving symbol J1. Therefore, when the second low probability time saving game state that was set first ends, the count value of the third time saving number counter becomes 0 or less, so a new third low probability based on winning the time saving award again is started. The setting of the probability time saving game state is also not performed.
That is, in the above case, the normal game state is set when the second low probability time saving game state with the number of time savings of 100 times ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, it is more advantageous than the normal gaming state through winning the jackpot (determining jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5) and executing the special game. Not only can it be possible to shift to the second low probability time saving game state or the high probability time saving game state, but also the results of all 1200 winning/fail drawings, which is the number of time saving activations, during the low probability game state will be a loss. Or, by winning the time-saving grant during the low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state and the third low-probability time-saving game state are more advantageous than the normal game state without winning the jackpot or executing the special game. Since the game state can be shifted to the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, it is possible to provide novel gameplay and increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, in the first low probability time saving game state, in the second low probability time saving game state, in the third low probability time saving game state, and in the fourth low probability time saving game state. If you win the time-saving grant during your stay, you will be able to continue the time-saving gaming state until you reach the number of time-saving games corresponding to the time-saving gaming state during your stay, and you will be able to enter the time-saving gaming state that can be set based on the above-mentioned winning of the time-saving grant. The corresponding number of time-saving games is counted, and when the number of time-saving games corresponding to the time-saving gaming state during the stay is reached and the time-saving gaming state ends, the remaining number of time-saving games based on the above-mentioned winning of the time-saving grant is 1 or more. In this case, a time-saving gaming state is set based on the winning of the above-mentioned time-saving award.
As a result, even if the above-mentioned time-saving gaming states are won at the time-saving grant during the time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming states overlap, both time-saving gaming states can be appropriately controlled within the range of the number of times that can be set. Therefore, there are many opportunities to set various time-saving gaming states, and the player's interest can be increased.

Next, an overview of the process related to winning the time saving grant will be explained using a flowchart.
First, the time-saving award winning process that is executed when the time-saving award is won will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 119.
In step 7000, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol ends, has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not yet elapsed, the time saving award winning process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7001.
In step 7001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving award has been won by lottery. If it is determined that the time saving award has not been won, the time saving award winning process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving award has been won, the process advances to the next step 7002.

In step 7002, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal gaming state is in progress. Then, it is determined that the player is not in the normal game state (that is, in the first low probability time saving game state, in the second low probability time saving game state, in the third low probability time saving game state, or in the fourth low probability time saving game state). If so, proceed to step 7004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal gaming state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 7003.
In step 7003, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. Specifically, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, a third low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. Then, the process advances to the next step 7004.

In step 7004, the main CPU 101 sets the number of time savings corresponding to the type of time saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time saving award in the corresponding time saving number counter. Thereby, counting of the number of times of time saving corresponding to the set time saving gaming state is started, and the count value of the above-mentioned time saving number of times counter is decremented by 1 every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Then, the time saving award winning process ends.

Next, the processing at the end of the time-saving gaming state that is executed when the number of time-saving games corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being set is reached and the time-saving gaming state ends will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120.
In step 7100, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the above-described stop display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not yet elapsed, the time saving game state end process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7101.
In step 7101, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current state is a first low probability time saving game state, a second low probability time saving game state, a third low probability time saving game state or a fourth low probability time saving game state. do. If it is determined that the user is not in the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the time saving game state ends. Ends time processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user is in the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the process advances to the next step 7102. .

In step 7102, the main CPU 101 selects the current time-saving gaming state (one of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state). It is determined whether or not the count value of the time saving number counter corresponding to has reached 0, that is, whether it has reached the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving gaming state being set. When it is determined that the count value of the corresponding time saving number counter has not reached 0, the time saving game state end process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the corresponding time saving number counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 7103.
In step 7103, the main CPU 101 ends the time-saving gaming state that is being set. Then, the process advances to the next step 7104.

In step 7104, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a time saving counter whose current count value is 1 or more. If it is determined that there is no time saving counter with a count value of 1 or more, the process advances to step 7106. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a time saving counter whose count value is 1 or more, the process advances to the next step 7105.
In step 7105, the main CPU 101 selects a time-saving game state (a third low-probability time-saving game state) corresponding to the time-saving number counter that has started counting first among the time-saving number counters whose current count value is 1 or more. or a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state). Then, the time saving game state end processing is ended.

Further, in step 7106, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 7104 that there is no time saving number counter with a count value of 1 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the normal gaming state. Then, the time saving game state end processing is ended.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 11)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, time saving is provided during the first low probability time saving game state, during the second low probability time saving game state, during the third low probability time saving game state, and during the fourth low probability time saving game state. If you win, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol that is executed when the number of time savings corresponding to each time saving game state is reached (at the end of each game state) and the stop display time has elapsed, the set The middle time-saving game state ended and a new time-saving game state (third low-probability time-saving game state or fourth low-probability time-saving game state) could be set. The timing of setting the time-saving gaming state is not limited to this.
For example, the timing at which the variable display of a special symbol that is executed when the number of time savers corresponding to the time-saving gaming state that is being set is reached, or the variable display of a special symbol that is executed after the variable display of the special symbol is You may end the time-saving gaming state being set and setting a new time-saving gaming state at the starting timing.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 11 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, during the first low probability time saving game state, during the second low probability time saving game state, during the third low probability time saving game state, and during the fourth low probability time saving game state. In the case of winning a time-saving grant, the setting of the time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving grant would not be performed until the time-saving gaming state being set ended; however, this is not limited to;
For example, internally, when winning a time-saving award, in addition to the previously set time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving award is set redundantly. The setting of the time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving grant is disabled until the previously set time-saving gaming state ends, and when the previously set time-saving gaming state ends, the setting of the time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving grant is set. may be set to be valid.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 11 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, when the time saving symbol J1 is determined by winning the time saving award during the third low probability time saving game state, or when the time saving award is won during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state. When the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the time-saving gaming state is temporarily ended by reaching the time-saving number corresponding to the previously set time-saving gaming state, and then the same time-saving gaming state is newly started. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in the above case, even if the number of time-saving games corresponding to the previously set time-saving game state is reached, the time-saving game state is not ended, but the time-saving game state continues as it is, and only the number of time-saving games is executed. You may also make new settings.
In this case, the same effect as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11 is achieved, and the player wins the time-saving grant and reaches the number of time-savings corresponding to the previously set time-saving gaming state. The processing load at the time can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, it was possible to derive lottery results for both a jackpot win and a time-saving award win by a win/fail lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the lottery result for winning the time-saving grant may not be derived in the winning lottery, but the lottery result for winning the time-saving grant may be derived through another lottery different from the winning lottery.
Even when set in this way, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11, during the first low probability time saving game state, during the second low probability time saving game state, during the third low probability time saving game state, and during the fourth low probability time saving game state. If you win a time-saving award, the time-saving gaming state based on the time-saving award winning will not be set until the time-saving gaming state being set ends, but the number of time-savings based on the time-saving award winning will not be counted. , when the time-saving gaming state being set ends, a control (hereinafter also referred to as control A) is executed in which the time-saving gaming state is set based on the winning of the time-saving grant. The control in the case of winning is not limited to this, and the following control B and control C may be executed.

(Control B)
If you win a time-saving award during each of the above-mentioned time-saving gaming states, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the time-saving gaming state being set will end and the corresponding A time-saving gaming state based on winning may be set.
(Specific example of control B)
For example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 20th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the second low probability time saving gaming state being set ends and the 40th time saving game state based on the winning of the time saving award ends. A new low probability time saving game state is set. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 40 times during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. That is, in this case, the time-saving gaming state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 60 times.
Further, for example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 80th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. In this case, when the variable display of the special symbols based on the winning of the time saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the second low probability time saving gaming state being set ends and the 40th time saving game state based on the winning of the time saving award ends. A new low probability time saving game state is set. Then, when the special symbols are displayed 40 times during the new fourth low probability time saving game state, the fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. That is, in this case, the time-saving gaming state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 120 times.
When set in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when winning the time saving award during the time saving gaming state.

(Control C)
If a time-saving grant is won during each of the above-mentioned time-saving game states, the time-saving game state based on the winning may not be set thereafter.
(Specific example of control C)
Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the time-saving award is won in the 20th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. However, in this case, the 40th low-probability time-saving game state based on winning the time-saving award is not newly set. Therefore, when the special symbols are displayed 100 times during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. That is, in this case, the time-saving gaming state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 100 times.
Further, for example, assume that the time-saving award is won in the 80th lottery during the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined. However, even in this case, the 40th low-probability time-saving game state based on winning the time-saving award is not newly set. Therefore, when the special symbols are displayed 100 times during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. That is, also in this case, the time-saving gaming state can be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed 100 times.
When set in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when winning the time saving award during the time saving gaming state.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, the above-mentioned control A is executed even if the time saving award is won during any time saving game state, but this is not limited to this. Instead, different controls may be executed depending on the time-saving gaming state being set.
For example, if the time saving award is won during the second low probability time saving game state, the above control A is executed, but if the time saving award is won during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the above control B is executed. may be executed.
In this case, the control when winning the time-saving award during the time-saving game state is rich in variation, and various gaming features can be provided.

(Other application example 12)
The pachinko machine P according to other application example 12 has almost the same configuration as the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, and has a lottery result derived from a win/fail lottery, a game state to be set, and a time-saving game state. The process of setting the gaming state when winning the time saving award during the game is different from the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11.
Hereinafter, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine P according to other application example 11, and the explanation of the same configuration will be omitted unless necessary.

(Type of gaming state)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, similarly to other application example 11, the game states that can be set include a normal game state, a first low probability time saving game state, a second low probability time saving game state, and a third low probability time saving game state. A low-probability time-saving game state, a fourth low-probability time-saving game state, and a high-probability time-saving game state are provided, and any one of the game states is set to proceed with the game.
Here, the high-probability time-saving gaming state in other application example 12 is not a gaming state that combines the high-probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state as in other application example 11, but the high-probability gaming state and the first time-saving gaming state. The game state is a combination of game states.

(Summary of lottery)
As shown in FIG. 121(a), the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 has low probability gaming states (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state, third low probability gaming state, In the lottery when the probability time-saving game state (4th low-probability time-saving game state) is set, it is possible to win a big hit, a small win, or a time-saving grant, and the high probability game state (high probability time-saving game state) ) is set, in the lottery, you will not be able to win the time saving award, and you will only be able to win the jackpot or small jackpot.
The probability of winning a small hit when a low probability gaming state is set and the probability of winning a small winning when a high probability gaming state is set are both set to approximately 30/300. ing. In addition, if a small hit is won by a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and if a small winning is won by a winning lottery based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16. In both cases of winning, the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, and the probability of determining the small winning symbol Y1 and the determining probability of the small winning symbol Y2 are both set to 50/100 (50%). has been done.
In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot, the type of jackpot symbol determined when winning a jackpot, the probability of winning a time-saving award, the type of time-saving symbol determined when winning a time-saving award, and the type of jackpot symbol determined in the case of a loss. The types of losing symbols are the same as in other application example 11.

(Summary of the fluctuation pattern to be determined)
Although not particularly shown, if a small hit is won during the normal gaming state and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the number of reservations at that time (first number of reservations, second number of reservations) and Regardless of the type of starting winning hole where the game ball entered (first starting winning hole 15, second starting winning hole 16), the fluctuation pattern of "13 seconds fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation time set to 13 seconds)" A variation pattern command of "D0H" is determined.
If you win a small hit during the first low-probability time-saving game state or high-probability time-saving game state and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the number of reservations at that time and the starting prize opening where the game ball entered Regardless of the type, a variation pattern command of "D1H" is determined, in which a variation pattern of "3 seconds variation (the variation time of the special symbol is set to 3 seconds)" is defined.
If you win a small hit and the small winning symbol Y1 is determined during the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the number of pending at that time and Regardless of the type of starting prize opening into which the game ball enters, the "D2H" variation pattern command is determined, in which the variation pattern of "20 seconds variation (special symbol variation time is set to 20 seconds)" is determined, When the small winning symbol Y2 is determined, the fluctuation of "D3H" with a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" is determined, regardless of the number of reservations at the time and the type of the starting winning hole where the game ball entered. A pattern command is determined.

In addition, if you win the time-saving award during the first low-probability time-saving game state and the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined, regardless of the number of reservations at that time and the type of the starting winning hole where the game ball entered, A variation pattern command of "E0H" in which a variation pattern of "45 seconds variation (special symbol variation time is set to 45 seconds)" is determined.
If you win the time-saving award and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the number of reservations at that point and the game Regardless of the type of starting winning hole where the ball entered, if the "E1H" fluctuation pattern command with the "20 seconds fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is determined and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, at that point A fluctuation pattern command of "E2H" in which a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds fluctuation" is determined is determined, regardless of the number of reservations and the type of the starting winning hole into which the game ball enters.

(Overview of small winning games)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 121(b), when a small hit is won and the small winning symbol Y1 or Y2 is determined, the big winning hole 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds, and the big winning hole 18 is opened once for 0.05 seconds. When 10 game balls enter while the opening 18 is open, a small winning game is executed in which the big winning opening 18 is closed. During this small winning game, as mentioned above, the big winning hole 18 is opened for only 0.05 seconds, so it is almost impossible to let the game ball enter the big winning hole 18.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state Either a gaming state or a high probability time saving gaming state is set.

Note that when the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, the fourth low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state is set, a predetermined amount of data in the main RAM 103 is set. The time saving number counter configured by the storage area starts counting the number of time saving times corresponding to each time saving gaming state. Specifically, when the above-mentioned time-saving gaming states are set, the number of time-saving games corresponding to each time-saving gaming state is set in the time-saving number counter, and the count value of the time-saving number counter changes every time a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is decremented by 1. As a result, the remaining number of time savings in each time saving game state is counted. Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches the number of time saving times (that is, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches 0), the remaining time saving number of times becomes 0. Further, the count value of the time saving number counter is reset when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or when the special game ends.

(1) First low-probability time-saving gaming state As shown in FIG. 122, low-probability gaming states (normal gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state, third low-probability time-saving gaming state, fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state) When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of time-saving activations (900 times in other application example 12) without winning a jackpot (that is, in a low probability gaming state, all 900 winning/fail lottery results are other than jackpots). ), the first low probability time saving game state is set. When the first low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 1200 times.

The first low-probability time-saving game state is to win a jackpot, or to derive the result of the winning lottery 1200 times, which is the number of time-savings, without winning a jackpot (the number of changes in special symbols reaches 1200 times) (see FIG. 122).
Specifically, if you win a jackpot during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning ends, the winning is determined based on the winning. A game state is set according to the jackpot symbol.
In addition, if all 1200 winning/failure lottery results during the first low probability time saving gaming state are other than jackpots, the first time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same. The first low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, so in reality, until winning the jackpot, the 1. The low probability time saving gaming state will continue.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the number of time saving activations is used to count the number of time saving activations (900 times) at which the first low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set. A counter is configured by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
The count value of this time-saving activation counter is determined when the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation, when the special game ends, or when the first low-probability time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) is set. It is reset when one of the reset conditions is met.

When the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and counting by the time saving activation number counter is started from this point.
In addition, as will be described later, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or Begins.
On the other hand, as will be described later, when the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X2, X4, or X5 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time-saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). Therefore, counting by the time saving activation number counter does not start from the time when the special game ends. For example, when the result of the lottery is derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is set, counting by the time saving activation number counter is started from this point.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot until winning the next jackpot, the first low probability time saving The gaming state can only be set once.
That is, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the number of time-saving activations (900 times) and the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is continued until the next jackpot is won. Cannot be set again.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, after the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is reset by setting the first low probability time-saving game state, whether the next jackpot is won or the RAM It is set so that counting by the time saving activation number counter is stopped until the time is cleared.

(2) High probability time-saving gaming state As shown in FIG. 122, regardless of the gaming state being set, if a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 is determined by the lottery based on the first special symbol random number, the second special symbol In any case where a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined by lottery based on random numbers, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to the high probability gaming state, and the first By setting the time-saving game state, a high probability time-saving game state is set. Further, both the high accuracy number and the time saving number are set to 10,000.

A high probability time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot, or to derive a winning lottery result 10,000 times, which is a high accuracy and time-saving number, without winning a jackpot (the number of changes of special symbols is 10,000 times). 122).
Specifically, if you win a jackpot during the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning ends, the jackpot symbol determined based on the winning The gaming state is set according to the.
Also, if all 10,000 winning/fail lottery results are other than jackpots during the high probability time saving gaming state, the high probability gaming state is changed to the low probability gaming state, and the first time saving gaming state is changed to the non time saving gaming state. As a result, the high probability time saving gaming state is ended as described above and the normal gaming state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 6/300 (1/50), so in reality, the probability of winning the jackpot is approximately 6/300 (1/50). The high probability time saving gaming state will continue until the player wins again.

(3) Second low-probability time-saving gaming state As shown in FIG. 122, when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 is determined by lottery based on the first special random number, regardless of the gaming state being set; In any case where a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X3 is determined by the lottery based on the second special random number, the gaming state after the end of the special game based on the determination is set to a low probability gaming state, By setting the second time-saving game state, a second low probability time-saving game state is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times.

The second low-probability time-saving game state is to win a jackpot, to derive the winning/fail lottery results 10,000 times without winning a jackpot (the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 10,000 times), and to activate the number of time-savers. The count value of the counter reaches the number of time saving activations (900 times), the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the small winning is carried out a predetermined number of times (in this example, 3 times), or the time saving is granted. The game ends when one of the ending conditions is met (see FIG. 122).
Specifically, if you win a jackpot during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning ends, the winning is determined based on the winning. A game state is set according to the jackpot symbol.
In addition, if all 10,000 winning/failure lottery results during the second low probability time saving gaming state are other than jackpots, the second time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same. The second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In addition, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during the second low probability time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state is changed to the first time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains unchanged. As described above, the second low probability time saving gaming state is completed and the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. Here, during the second low probability time saving game state, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations before all 10,000 winning/failure lottery results become other than jackpots, so the second low probability It is impossible for all 10,000 winning/failure lottery results to be other than a jackpot during the time-saving gaming state, and in reality, when this ending condition is met, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set. It will not be done.
In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times during the second low probability time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state is changed to the non time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same. The second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
Note that the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12 is provided with a determination number counter (configured by a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 103) for counting the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1. Then, from the time when the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, the determination number counter starts counting the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1, and the count value of this determination number counter reaches the end of the above-mentioned end. When the number of establishments (3 times) is reached, the second low probability time saving game state ends. The count value of the determination number counter is reset by RAM clearing (resetting) by a predetermined operation or by completion of the second low probability time saving game state being set.
Furthermore, if the time saving game is won during the second low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the second time saving game state ends and the low probability game state is changed to the third time saving game state. As a result, the second low-probability time-saving game state is ended and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time elapses, the second low probability time saving game state ends and the third low probability time saving game state is set. On the other hand, if the time saving symbol J2 is won during the second low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the second time saving game state ends and the low probability game state is changed to the fourth time saving game state. As a result, the second low-probability time-saving game state is ended and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time elapses, the second low probability time saving game state ends and the fourth low probability time saving game state is set.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, a different type of time-saving gaming state is set, but the time-saving gaming state itself continues. It looks like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, as described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small winning symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20 (winning the small winning). The probability is 30/300 (1/10) x the probability of determining the small winning symbol Y1 in the case of winning the small winning 50/100 (1/2)). Therefore, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter never reaches the number of time-saving activations, and furthermore, as mentioned above, the result of the winning lottery is 10,000 without winning the jackpot. It is never derived twice.
Therefore, substantially, the second low probability time saving game state ends when the jackpot is won, the time saving award is won, or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times. In particular, the probability of winning the small winning symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time saving award (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state (1/300). Then, the second low probability time saving game state ends when the time saving award is won or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times.

(4) Third low-probability time-saving game state As shown in FIG. 122, time-saving during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state. If the award is won and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the low probability game state remains as it is, the non-time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the third time saving game state or the fourth time saving game state ends, and the 3. A low probability time saving game state is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times.

The third low-probability time-saving game state is winning the jackpot, deriving the result of the winning lottery 10,000 times without winning the jackpot (the number of changes in the special symbol reaches 10,000 times), and the number of time-saving activations. The count value of the counter reaches the number of time saving activations (900 times), the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the small winning is carried out a predetermined number of times (in this example, 3 times), or the time saving is granted. The game ends when one of the ending conditions is met (see FIG. 122).
Specifically, if you win a jackpot during the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning ends, the winning is determined based on the winning. A game state is set according to the jackpot symbol.
In addition, if all 10,000 winning/fail lottery results during the third low probability time saving gaming state are other than jackpots, the third time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same. The third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In addition, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during the third low probability time saving gaming state, the third time saving gaming state is changed to the first time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains unchanged. As described above, the third low probability time saving gaming state is completed and the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. Here, during the third low probability time saving game state, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations before all 10,000 winning lottery results become other than jackpots, so the third low probability It is impossible for all 10,000 winning/failure lottery results to be other than jackpots during the time-saving gaming state, and in reality, when this ending condition is met, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set. It will not be done.
Furthermore, when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times during the third low probability time saving gaming state, the third working time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains unchanged. The third low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the counting of the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined by the number of determination counter starts from the time when the third low probability time saving game state is set. When the count value of the determination counter reaches the above-mentioned number of completions (3 times), the third low probability time saving game state ends. The count value of the determination number counter is reset by RAM clearing (resetting) by a predetermined operation, or by completion of the third low probability time saving game state being set.
Furthermore, if you win the time saving symbol J1 during the 3rd low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the 3rd time saving game state will temporarily end while the low probability game state remains the same, but after this end, you will be given the 3rd time saving again. The gaming state is set. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the third low probability time saving game state ends once; The gaming state will be reset. That is, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the third low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state substantially continues.
On the other hand, if the time saving symbol J2 is won during the third low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the third time saving game state ends and is changed to the fourth time saving game state while the low probability game state remains the same. As a result, the third low-probability time-saving game state is ended and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set as described above. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time elapses, the third low probability time saving game state ends and the fourth low probability time saving game state is set.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, if a time-saving award is won during the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, the same or different type of time-saving gaming state is set, and the time-saving gaming state itself continues. It looks like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, as described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small winning symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20. Therefore, the result of the winning lottery will not be derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot during the third low probability time saving game state.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, the time saving activation number counter starts counting from the time when the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the normal gaming state that can be set after the end of the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability Since counting by the time saving activation number counter continues even in the probability time saving gaming state and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during the third low probability time saving gaming state. There are cases where
Therefore, in reality, either you win the jackpot, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations, you win the time saving award, or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times. As a result, the third low probability time saving game state ends. In particular, the probability of winning the small winning symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time-saving award (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state (1/300). Then, the third low probability time saving game state ends when the time saving award is won or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined three times.

(5) Fourth low-probability time-saving game state As shown in FIG. 122, time-saving during the normal game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state. If the award is won and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the low probability game state remains as it is, the non-time saving game state, the second time saving game state, the third time saving game state or the fourth time saving game state ends, and the 4. A low probability time saving game state is set. Further, the number of time saving times is set to 10,000 times.

The fourth low-probability time-saving game state is winning the jackpot, deriving the result of the winning lottery 10,000 times without winning the jackpot (the number of changes in the special symbol reaching 10,000 times), and the number of time-saving activations. The count value of the counter reaches the number of time saving activations (900 times), the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the small winning is carried out a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 times), or the time saving is granted. The game ends when one of the ending conditions is met (see FIG. 122).
Specifically, if a jackpot is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state, the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state ends as described above, and after the special game based on the winning ends, a decision is made based on the winning. A game state is set according to the jackpot symbol.
In addition, if all 10,000 winning/fail lottery results during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are other than jackpots, the fourth time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains the same. The fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set. In addition, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the fourth time saving gaming state is changed to the first time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains unchanged. As described above, the fourth low probability time saving game state is completed and the first low probability time saving game state is set. Here, during the fourth low probability time saving game state, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations before all 10,000 winning lottery results become other than jackpots, so the fourth low probability It is impossible for all 10,000 winning/failure lottery results to be other than jackpots during the time-saving gaming state, and in reality, when this ending condition is met, the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set. It will not be done.
In addition, when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined five times during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the fourth time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state while the low probability gaming state remains unchanged. The fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the determination count counter starts counting the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined from the time when the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the count value of this determination number counter reaches the above-mentioned number of completions (5 times), the fourth low probability time saving game state ends. The count value of the determination number counter is reset by RAM clearing (resetting) by a predetermined operation or by completion of the fourth low probability time saving game state being set.
Furthermore, if the time saving game is won during the fourth low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J1 is determined, the fourth time saving game state ends and the low probability game state is changed to the third time saving game state. As a result, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is ended as described above, and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low probability time saving game state ends and the third low probability time saving game state is set.
On the other hand, if you win the time saving award during the 4th low probability time saving game state and the time saving symbol J2 is determined, the 4th time saving game state will temporarily end while the low probability game state remains the same, but after this end, the 4th time saving game will start again. The gaming state is set. More specifically, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the fourth low probability time saving game state ends once; The gaming state will be reset. That is, when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state substantially continues.
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12, if the time-saving game award is won during the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the same or different type of time-saving game state is set, and the time-saving game state itself continues. It looks like this.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12, as described above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of determining the small winning symbol Y1 is approximately 1/20. Therefore, the result of the winning lottery will not be derived 10,000 times without winning a jackpot during the fourth low probability time saving game state.
On the other hand, as mentioned above, the time saving activation number counter starts counting from the time when the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, and the normal gaming state that can be set after the end of the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability Since counting by the time saving activation number counter continues even in the probability time saving gaming state and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state. There are cases where
Therefore, in reality, either you win the jackpot, the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations, you win the time saving award, or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined 5 times. As a result, the fourth low probability time saving game state ends. In particular, the probability of winning the small winning symbol Y1 (1/20) and the probability of winning the time saving award (3/300 (1/100)) are higher than the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state (1/300). The fourth low-probability time-saving game state ends when the time-saving award is won or the small winning symbol Y1 is determined five times.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, if the time saving award is won in the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, other application Based on control B in the modified example of Example 11, the gaming state is set.
That is, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the variable display of special symbols based on the winning ends and the display stops. When the time has elapsed, the time-saving gaming state being set ends, and the time-saving gaming state based on the winning is set.

Here, as mentioned above, from the time when the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are set, the number of decisions of the small winning symbol Y1 is counted by the decision number counter. is started, and when the count value of the determination number counter reaches the above-mentioned number of completions (3 or 5 times), the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, and the fourth low probability time saving game state ends.
Then, before the count value of the determination number counter reaches the above-mentioned number of completions, if the time saving award is won and the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is newly set, the number of determined times The count value of the counter is reset, and counting of the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined by the determination number counter starts anew. That is, if you win the time-saving grant before the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the above-mentioned number of completions in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state, From the time when the new third low probability time saving game state and the fourth low probability time saving game state are set, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined is counted again toward reaching the above-mentioned number of completions.

For example, after setting the second low-probability time-saving game state, if the time-saving award is won and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined with the small winning symbol Y1 determined once, the second low-probability time-saving game state being set is The game ends, and a third low probability time saving game state is newly set. At this time, since the count value of the determination number counter is reset, the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 becomes 0. Then, from the time when the new third low-probability time-saving game state is set, counting of the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 is newly started, and when the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches 3, the third low probability being set is changed. The probability time saving game state ends.
For example, after setting the new third low-probability time-saving game state described above, if you win the time-saving award again with the small winning symbol Y1 determined twice and the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, then the The third low probability time saving game state is once ended, and a third low probability time saving game state is newly set. At this time, as described above, since the count value of the determination number counter is reset, the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 becomes 0. Then, from the time when the third low-probability time-saving gaming state is reset, counting of the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 is newly started, and when the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches 3, the reset number 3. The low probability time saving game state ends.
Furthermore, for example, after resetting the third low-probability time-saving game state described above, when the small winning symbol Y2 is determined once and the time-saving symbol J2 is determined once again, if the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the reset The third low-probability time-saving game state is completed, and a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is newly set. At this time, as described above, since the count value of the determination number counter is reset, the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 becomes 0. Then, from the time when the new 4th low probability time-saving game state is set, counting of the number of small winning symbols Y1 is newly started, and when the number of small winning symbols Y1 is determined reaches 5 times, the fourth low probability that is being set is The probability time saving game state ends.

Next, an outline of the process related to counting the number of winnings and terminations of time-saving grants in other application example 12 will be described using a flowchart.
First, the time-saving award winning process that is executed when the time-saving award is won will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 123.
In step 7200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop display time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol ends, has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not yet elapsed, the time saving award winning process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7201.
In step 7201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving award has been won by lottery. If it is determined that the time saving award has not been won, the time saving award winning process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving award has been won, the process advances to the next step 7202.

In step 7202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, or the fourth low probability time saving game state. Then, if it is determined that the game is not in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the time saving award winning process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the process advances to the next step 7203.
In step 7203, the main CPU 101 ends the game state being set (second low probability time saving game state, third low probability time saving gaming state, fourth low probability time saving gaming state) and resets the count value of the determination number counter. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 7204.

In step 7204, the main CPU 101 sets a gaming state corresponding to the type of time-saving symbol determined based on the winning of the time-saving award. Specifically, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined, a third low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, a fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. In addition, no matter which gaming state is set, the time saving number counter is set to 10,000 time saving times. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the determination number counter to 3 times when the time saving symbol J1 is determined, and sets the determination number counter to 5 times when the time saving symbol J2 is determined. As a result, the counting of the number of times the end is achieved corresponding to the set time-saving gaming state (counting the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined) is started, and each time a small winning is won and the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, the above-mentioned decision is made. The count value of the number counter is decremented by 1. Then, the time saving award winning process ends.

Next, the small winning symbol determination process executed based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124. In addition, this process at the time of determining a small winning symbol is a process that is executed at the time of determination when a small winning symbol is won in the win/fail lottery and the minor winning symbol Y1 is determined.
In step 7210, the main CPU 101 determines whether the small winning symbol Y1 has been determined based on the winning of the small winning in the win/fail lottery. Then, when it is determined that the small winning symbol Y1 has not been determined, the small winning symbol determination process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small winning symbol Y1 has been determined, the process proceeds to the next step 7211.
In step 7211, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state. Then, if it is determined that the game is not in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the process at the time of small winning symbol determination is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the process advances to the next step 7212.

In step 7212, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the determination number counter by 1. Further, the main CPU 101 stores a determination number command indicating the count value of the determined number of times counter after decrementing in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the current count value of the decision number counter is transmitted to the sub control board 300, and the count value of the decision number counter can be recognized in the sub control board 300. That is, the sub control board 300 can grasp the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined in the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state being set. . Then, the small winning symbol determination process ends.

Next, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is completed, and the time-saving game state being set is The processing when the number of successful terminations is reached, which is executed upon termination, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 125.
In step 7220, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the above-described stop display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the stop display time has not yet elapsed, the processing when the number of times the end is satisfied is reached is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7221.
In step 7221, it is determined whether the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state. Then, if it is determined that the game is not in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the processing when the number of times of completion is reached is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the process advances to the next step 7222.

In step 7222, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the determination number counter has reached 0, that is, whether or not the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 has reached the number of completion completions. Then, if it is determined that the count value of the determination number counter has not reached 0, the process when the number of times of termination is satisfied is reached is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count value of the determination number counter has reached 0, the process advances to the next step 7223.
In step 7223, the main CPU 101 ends the game state being set (second low probability time saving game state, third low probability time saving gaming state, fourth low probability time saving gaming state) and resets the count value of the determination number counter. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 7224.

In step 7224, the main CPU 101 sets the normal gaming state. Then, the processing when the number of times the number of completion is satisfied is reached is ended.

In addition, as a process when the number of time-saving games corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being set is reached and the time-saving gaming state ends, the processing from steps 7100 to 7103 in the process at the end of the time-saving gaming state of other application example 11 is performed. At the same time, after step 7103 is completed, processing for setting the normal gaming state is executed. In addition, the processing related to the execution of a special game based on winning a jackpot, the processing when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activation, and other processing are similar to other application examples 6 and 10. Since they are almost the same, the explanation will be omitted.

(Summary of the performance)
Next, the high probability time saving game state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12. An overview of the effects performed in this state will be explained. In the following, the display of the background image and the small winning symbol Y1 executed in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state until reaching the number of completed completions will be described. The explanation will focus on the remaining number of decisions suggestion effect that indicates how many decisions remain.

(Summary of background image display)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the normal background image corresponding to the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 127(a) and 130(e) ), time-saving background image A corresponding to the high-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 126(a) to (e)), and time-saving background image B corresponding to the first low-probability time-saving gaming state (FIGS. 127(b) to (c) ), time-saving background images C corresponding to the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state (see FIGS. 128(a) to (h), FIG. 129(a) - (g) and FIGS. 130(a) to (c)) are provided, and a corresponding background image is displayed on the display section 21a during each gaming state.

Specifically, the normal background image is displayed during the normal game state, and the time-saving background image A is displayed during the high probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X2, X4, or X5. The time-saving background image B is displayed during the first low-probability time-saving game state, which is set when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter reaches the time-saving activation number, and the special time-saving background image B is displayed based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or X3. During the second low probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the game, during the third low probability time saving game state that is set based on the determination of the time saving symbol J1, and during the fourth low probability time saving gaming state that is set based on the determination of the time saving symbol J2. A time saving background image C is displayed during the probability time saving game state.
When the gaming state changes, the displayed background image also changes accordingly.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the time saving background image C is displayed during the second low probability time saving game state, during the third low probability time saving game state, and during the fourth low probability time saving game state. If you win the time saving award during the state, the game state you are currently setting will end and a new 3rd low probability time saving game state or 4th low probability time saving game state will be set, but the new 3rd low probability time saving game state will be set. Alternatively, when the fourth low probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving background image C that was displayed before the setting is not switched, and the time-saving background image C is continuously displayed.

(Summary of performance in high probability time saving game state)
As described above, the high probability time saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X2, X4 or X5.
With the setting of the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the display unit 21a displays a time-saving background image A and a display indicating that the high-probability time-saving gaming state has been set (for example, the words "Super Chance Mode Start!" are displayed). ) is performed, and thereafter, a variable effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol (see FIGS. 126(a) to 126(b)).

In addition, during the high probability time-saving gaming state, if the result of the lottery is a loss and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, or if the result of the lottery is a jackpot and a predetermined variation pattern is determined, multiple A BATTLE effect is executed that provides notification based on the BATTLE result by the characters.
Specifically, when the variation effect based on the above-described variation pattern is started, a BATTLE effect start image (for example, a character image "BATTLE START!") indicating the start of the BATTLE effect is displayed (FIG. 126(c)). ), and then a BATTLE image (not particularly shown) showing the contents of the BATTLE is displayed.
If the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then a BATTLE result image (for example, "WIN!! " character image) is displayed, and furthermore, a jackpot notification image (for example, a character image "BONUS!!") is displayed to notify that the player has won the jackpot, thereby informing him that he has won the jackpot. (See FIGS. 126(d) to (e)).
On the other hand, if the result of the lottery is a loss, although not particularly shown, after the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (for example, , "LOSE..." character image) is displayed to notify that the player has lost.

(Summary of performance in the first low probability time saving game state)
As described above, after the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches the number of time saving activations, the first low probability time saving gaming state is set.
For example, when the number of time-saving activations is reached during the normal game state, the normal background image displayed on the display unit 21a is switched to the time-saving background image B, and the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. A display indicating that the low-probability time-saving game state has been set (for example, displaying the text "Lucky time start!"), and a countdown display of the number of time-savings (1200 times) in the first low-probability time-saving game state. The initial value of the number of time reductions is displayed (see FIGS. 127(a) and 127(b)).
After that, each time a special symbol variation (variation display) is executed, a countdown display of the remaining time saving number is performed when the stop display time for the variation has elapsed (see FIG. 127(c)).

Also, although not particularly shown, during the first low probability time saving game state, the result of the winning lottery is a loss and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is determined, or the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is determined. Once the pattern is determined, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is executed and the result of the winning/losing lottery is announced as in the high probability time saving game state.

In addition, during the first low probability time-saving game state, a display indicating that the game state is in progress (for example, a text display saying "During Lucky Time") may be performed. In addition, until the first low probability time saving game state is set, that is, while the time saving activation number counter is counting, each time the special symbol changes (variation display), the number of time saving activation is calculated. A count-up display of the number of times toward 900 times may be performed.

(Overview of effects in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state)
As mentioned above, the second low probability time saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or A probability time-saving game state is set, and after the end of the variable display of the special symbol based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, a fourth low probability time-saving game state is set.
Then, with the setting of the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the display section 21a displays the time saving background image C, the second low probability time saving gaming state, A display indicating that the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state have been set is performed (for example, the words "Chance mode start!" are displayed), and then, along with the changing display of special symbols, A variation effect is executed (see FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b)).

Further, as described above, in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, and the fourth low probability time saving game state, the remaining number of decisions suggestion performance is executed.
The remaining number of determinations suggestion effect indicates how many times the small winning symbol Y1 remains until reaching the number of completed completions described above in each of the above-mentioned gaming states, and thereby, the time-saving gaming state This allows the player to visually recognize whether or not the game is about to end.
Specifically, in the remaining decision count suggestion performance in other application example 12, when the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, or the fourth low probability time saving game state is set, a predetermined remaining number of decisions is made. The number of times suggestion images (for example, heart mark images) corresponding to the number of completion completion times are displayed (see FIG. 128(a)). For example, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 or 3. When the low probability time-saving game state is set, three remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of successful completions (3 times) are displayed (see Fig. 128(a)), and the time-saving game state is set in the normal game state. When the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set by winning and determining the time-saving symbol J2, five remaining number-of-number suggestion images corresponding to the number of successful endings (5 times) are displayed.

Thereafter, each time the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, the remaining count suggestion images being displayed are erased one by one (see FIGS. 128(d) to (e)). Thereby, it is notified that the small winning symbol Y1 has been determined.
Then, the time-saving gaming state that is being set when the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the number of completion completions (any of the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state) When the process ends, all remaining number suggestion images are deleted (see FIGS. 130(c) to 130(d)). As a result, notification is made that the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 has been determined has reached the number of completions and that the time-saving game state being set has ended.

On the other hand, if you win a time-saving award while the remaining number of times suggestion image is displayed (second low-probability time-saving gaming state, third low-probability time-saving gaming state, fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state), the time saving will be determined based on the winning. The number of remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of completions of the gaming states (third low probability time saving gaming state, fourth low probability time saving gaming state) is displayed (see FIG. 128(g)).
Specifically, if the number corresponding to the set number of times the time-saving gaming state is completed is greater than the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed, the number of remaining pieces corresponding to the difference between them is A frequency suggestion image is additionally displayed (see FIG. 128(g)).
Although not particularly shown in the figure, if the number corresponding to the number of completion completion of the set time-saving gaming state is smaller than the number of remaining number suggestion images currently displayed, the difference corresponds to these. The remaining number suggestion image for the number of items to be used is deleted.
Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the figure, if the number corresponding to the number of times the set time-saving gaming state is completed is the same as the number of remaining number suggestion images displayed at the moment, the number of remaining pieces of the current number The suggestion image continues to be displayed.

(Specific example of a presentation suggesting the number of remaining decisions)
Hereinafter, the remaining decision count suggestion effect will be explained in more detail by giving a specific example. In addition, although the following explanation will mainly be given as an example of the remaining decision number suggestion in the second low probability time saving gaming state, the remaining decision number suggestion in the third low probability time saving gaming state and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state will be explained. Similar processing is also performed for presentation.

For example, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X1 ends and the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, as described above, the number of completions (3 times) in the second low-probability time-saving game state corresponds to Three remaining number suggestion images are displayed, and thereafter, a variable effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols (see FIGS. 128(a) and 128(b)).

Also, for example, a state in which three remaining count suggestion images are displayed in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the small winning symbol Y1 has not yet been determined). When the small winning symbol Y1 is determined by winning a small win by lottery (no state), one remaining number suggestion image is deleted.
Here, in the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, a small hit is won, and the "20 The above-mentioned BATTLE effect is also executed when the variation pattern of "Second Variation" is determined. Then, when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined based on the winning of the above-mentioned small winning, the remaining count suggestion image is deleted after the execution of the BATTLE effect (FIGS. 128(c) to 128(e)) reference).
Specifically, when the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, a variation pattern of "20 seconds variation" related to the variation pattern command of "D2H" is determined. When the variation effect based on the determined variation pattern is started, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 128(c)), and then a BATTLE image (not particularly shown) indicating the BATTLE content is displayed. Ru. After the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (for example, a character image saying "Damage!!") indicating that a specific character has received damage is displayed, and an image suggesting the remaining number of times is displayed. is deleted, leaving two remaining number of remaining number suggestion images (see FIGS. 128(d) to (e)). As a result, it is notified that the small winning symbol Y1 has been determined and that the remaining number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 until reaching the final number of realizations is 2.

Also, for example, a state in which one remaining count suggestion image is displayed in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined twice) When the small winning symbol Y1 is determined by winning the small winning symbol in the winning lottery, the second low probability time saving game state being set ends. In this case, as described above, the remaining count suggestion images are erased after the BATTLE effect is executed, and the number of remaining count suggestion images being displayed becomes 0 (see FIGS. 130(a) to 130(c)). ). That is, all remaining number suggestion images are deleted. In addition, in conjunction with this, an end display (for example, text display of "Chance Mode End") indicating that the second low probability time saving game state has ended is performed (see FIG. 130(d)). As a result, the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 in the second low-probability time-saving game state reaches three times, which is the number of completions, and notification is made that the second low-probability time-saving game state being set has ended.
Then, when the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and the normal game state is set, the time-saving background image C displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state is switched to the normal background image (FIG. 130(e)) reference).

Also, for example, a state in which two remaining count suggestion images are displayed in the second low probability time saving gaming state (that is, after the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the small winning symbol Y1 is determined once) When the time saving symbol J2 is determined by winning the time saving symbol J2 in the winning lottery, the second low probability time saving game state being set ends and the fourth low probability time saving game state is set. In addition, along with this, the number corresponding to the number of times the fourth low-probability time-saving game state is completed (5 times) based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J2, and the number of images suggesting the remaining number of times currently displayed (2 ) are additionally displayed. That is, five remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the fourth low probability time saving game state is completed (5 times) are displayed.
Here, in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the time saving award is won, and the "20 The above-mentioned BATTLE effect is also executed when the variation pattern of "Second Variation" is determined. Then, when the time-saving symbol J1 or J2 is determined based on the winning of the above-mentioned time-saving award, the remaining count suggestion image is additionally displayed after the execution of the BATTLE effect (FIG. 128(f) to ( (see g)).
Specifically, when the time saving symbol J2 is determined, a variation pattern of "20 seconds variation" related to the variation pattern command of "E2H" is determined. When the variation effect based on the determined variation pattern is started, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 128(f)), and then a BATTLE image (not particularly shown) showing the contents of the BATTLE is displayed. Ru. After the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (for example, a text image saying "Life Charge!") indicating that the damage of a specific character has been recovered is displayed, and the remaining three characters are displayed. Additional count suggestion images are displayed, leaving five remaining count suggestion images (see FIGS. 128(g) to (h)). As a result, the time-saving award is won, the time-saving symbol J2 is determined, the second low-probability time-saving gaming state ends, the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, and the remaining small winning symbols until the number of times the end is achieved is reached. It is notified that the number of determinations of Y1 has reached 5.

Further, although not particularly shown, for example, in a state where two remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the second low probability time saving game state, a person wins the time saving award by lottery and the time saving symbol J1 is determined. In this case, the second low-probability time-saving game state being set ends and a third low-probability time-saving game state is set. In addition, along with this, the number corresponding to the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state is completed (3 times) based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, and the number of images suggesting the remaining number of times currently displayed (2 ) is additionally displayed. That is, three remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the third low probability time saving game state is completed (three times) are displayed.
Further, although not particularly shown, for example, in a state where five remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the fourth low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol J1 is determined by winning the time saving award by lottery. In this case, the fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set ends and the third low-probability time-saving game state is set. In addition, along with this, the number corresponding to the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state is completed (3 times) based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1, and the number of images suggesting the remaining number of times currently displayed (5 ) are deleted. That is, three remaining number suggestion images corresponding to the number of times the third low probability time saving game state is completed (three times) are displayed. In addition, if the remaining number of times suggestion image is deleted due to the winning of the time saving grant, the BATTLE result image indicating that a specific character has been damaged in the BATTLE performance is similar to the case where the small winning symbol Y1 is determined. is now displayed.
Further, although not particularly shown, for example, in a state where three remaining number suggestion images are displayed during the second low probability time saving game state, the time saving symbol J1 is determined by winning the time saving award by lottery. In this case, the second low-probability time-saving game state being set ends and a third low-probability time-saving game state is set. In this case, the number corresponding to the number of times the third low-probability time-saving game state is completed (three times) based on the determination of the time-saving symbol J1 is the same as the number of images suggesting the remaining number of times currently displayed (three). Therefore, the current display of the three remaining number suggestion images will be maintained. In addition, if you win the time saving award, but the display of the image suggesting the remaining number of pieces at the current time is maintained, in the BATTLE performance, a specific character will be damaged in the same way as when the small winning symbol Y2, which will be described later, is determined. A BATTLE result image (see FIG. 129(c)) indicating that the problem was avoided is displayed.

As mentioned above, by winning the time-saving award, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set ends, and a new third low-probability time-saving game is started. When the state or the fourth low probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving background image C that was displayed before the end is continuously displayed. That is, in this case, the display of the time-saving background image C remains unchanged, and only the display of the remaining number of times suggestion image is changed.

In addition, here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, although there are cases where a small win is won and the small win symbol Y2 is determined by the lottery, the small win symbol Y2 is determined by the second low probability time saving method. It is not set as a condition for ending the gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the small winning symbol Y2 is determined in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the remaining count suggestion image being displayed is not deleted (Fig. 129 ( c) to (d)).
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the above-mentioned also applies when the small winning symbol Y2 is determined in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state. The BATTLE effect is executed, but unlike the case where the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, even if the BATTLE effect is executed, the remaining count suggestion image being displayed is not erased.
For example, when two remaining count suggestion images are displayed in the second low probability time saving game state (see FIG. 129(a)), if a small hit is won and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined, "D3H" A variation pattern of "20 seconds variation" related to the variation pattern command is determined. When the variation effect based on the determined variation pattern is started, a BATTLE effect start image is displayed (see FIG. 129(b)), and then a BATTLE image (not particularly shown) showing the BATTLE content is displayed. is displayed. After the above-mentioned BATTLE image is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a BATTLE result image (for example, a text image saying "Damage avoided!!") indicating that a specific character has avoided damage is displayed, and the number of remaining 2 characters is displayed. The suggestion image continues to be displayed (see FIGS. 129(c) to 129(d)). As a result, it is announced that the small winning symbol Y2 has been determined and that the remaining number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 until reaching the final number of realizations remains 2.

In addition, in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the result of the winning lottery is a loss and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is determined, or the result of the winning lottery is a loss. When the jackpot is won and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is determined, the above-mentioned BATTLE effect is executed and the result of the winning/losing lottery is announced, as in the high probability time saving game state and the first low probability time saving game state. (See FIGS. 129(e) to (g)).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, when winning the time-saving grant in the second low probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state, The time-saving gaming state being set ends, a time-saving gaming state that is the same as or different from the time-saving gaming state (third low-probability time-saving gaming state or fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state) is set, and the time-saving gaming state continues. ing. Then, when the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the number of completion completion corresponding to the time-saving game state being set, the game state being set ends and a normal game state is set.
That is, after the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state are set, the time-saving game state is switched to the same or a different type based on the winning of the time-saving grant. The time-saving game state continues until the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the number of completion completions corresponding to the time-saving game state being set and the normal game state is set.
While the time-saving gaming state continues, the time-saving background image C continues to be displayed, while the number of displayed remaining count suggestion images increases or decreases based on the determination of the small winning symbol Y1 and the winning of the time-saving award. It has become. Then, when the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches the number of completion completion corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being set, the number of displayed remaining number suggestion images becomes 0 (that is, all remaining number suggestion images are ).
In this way, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, after the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are set, the small winning symbol Y1 is Until the number of determinations reaches the number of completion completions corresponding to the time-saving gaming state being set, there is a possibility that the time-saving gaming state will switch to the same or a different type of time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving grant, but during this time, the time-saving background image By continuing to display C, it is possible to strongly impress the player that the time-saving gaming state continues without making the player conscious of switching to the time-saving gaming state. In addition, by increasing or decreasing the number of remaining number suggestion images, the player can visually recognize whether or not the time-saving gaming state is about to end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the main control board 100 sends the winning/fail lottery results, the type of special symbol, the variation pattern (variation pattern command), the set gaming state, and the time saving to the sub-control board 300. The count value of the activation number counter, the remaining number of time savings in the first low probability time saving gaming state, the number of times the second low probability time saving gaming state, the third low probability time saving gaming state or the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is completed, and the number of decisions. Information such as the count value of the counter (the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined) is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 301 acquires the effect data stored in the sub ROM 302 based on the received information, and based on the effect data, displays the above-mentioned background image, changes effect, BATTLE effect, and suggests the number of remaining decisions. Performs control to execute various performances such as performances.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the second game which has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state through the jackpot winning (determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X3, X4, or X5) Not only is a low-probability time-saving game state and a high-probability time-saving game state set, but all 1,200 winning/failure drawings (the number of time-saving activations) during the low-probability game state become losers, making it impossible to win a jackpot. It is possible to set a first low-probability time-saving game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state without having to win, and by winning the time-saving grant during the low-probability game state, the normal game state can be set without going through a jackpot win. Since it is possible to set a third low-probability time-saving game state and a fourth low-probability time-saving game state that are more advantageous than the above, it is possible to provide novel gameplay and increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, if the time saving grant is won during the second low probability time saving game state that is set through winning the jackpot, the second low probability time saving gaming state ends and the jackpot is awarded. It is possible to set a third low-probability time-saving game state and a fourth low-probability time-saving game state that do not involve winning. Then, when the second low-probability time-saving game state ends and a third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving game state continues following the second low-probability time-saving game state. However, the termination conditions under which the gaming state (time-saving gaming state) being set ends can be changed.
Similarly, if a jackpot is won and jackpot symbol X1 or X3 is determined during the third low probability time saving game state or the fourth low probability time saving game state which is set without winning the jackpot, After the high-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state are completed and the special game based on winning the jackpot ends, a second low-probability time-saving game state via winning the jackpot can be set. Then, even when the third low probability time saving game state and the fourth low probability time saving game state are finished and the second low probability time saving game state is set, the third low probability time saving game state and the fourth low probability time saving game state are set. Subsequently, although the time-saving gaming state continues, the ending conditions under which the gaming state being set ends can be changed.
Furthermore, if you win the time saving grant during the 3rd low probability time saving game state or the 4th low probability time saving game state that is set without winning the jackpot, the 3rd low probability time saving game state or the 4th low probability time saving game state When the state ends, it is possible to newly set a third low-probability time-saving game state and a fourth low-probability time-saving game state that do not involve winning a jackpot. Also, even when the third low probability time saving game state and the fourth low probability time saving game state are ended and the third low probability time saving game state and the fourth low probability time saving game state are newly set, the settings are made first. Although the time-saving game state continues following the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the ending conditions under which the game state being set ends can be changed.
That is, when a new opportunity to set a time-saving gaming state occurs during a predetermined time-saving gaming state, a new time-saving gaming state is set and the time-saving gaming state continues, while the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state are changed. There are many variations until the end of the time-saving game state, and the player's interest can be further increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the small winning. The process ends when the number of determinations reaches a predetermined number of times the process is completed. In addition, in these gaming states, a display related to the winning of the small hit (a display related to the determination of the small winning symbol Y1, that is, a display of the remaining number suggestion image) is performed, and a display not related to the winning of the small hit (the time-saving background image) is displayed. Display C) is performed. In addition, if you win the time saving award in these gaming states, it is possible to change the display related to winning the small win (eliminating the image suggesting remaining number of times, additional display), and it is possible to continue displaying information not related to winning the small win. It becomes.
As a result, there is a wide variety of performances that can be performed until the end of the time-saving game state, and the player's interest can be further increased.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 12)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, if a time saving award is won during the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, or the fourth low probability time saving game state, the setting The second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state are completed, and the time saving gaming state (third low probability time saving gaming state or 4 (low probability time-saving game state) was set, but the switching mode of the game state based on winning the time-saving award is not limited to this.
For example, even if a time-saving award is won during the first low-probability time-saving game state, the first low-probability time-saving game state is ended and a time-saving game state is set according to the type of the determined time-saving symbol. Good too. Furthermore, if a time saving award is won during the third low probability time saving game state or during the fourth low probability time saving game state, a new time saving game state may not be set. In addition, the time-saving gaming state that is set when winning the time-saving award is not limited to the third low-probability time-saving gaming state or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state, but only one of these can be set. Alternatively, other low probability time saving game states other than these may be set.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the number of times the small winning symbol Y1 is determined ends during the second low probability time saving game state, during the third low probability time saving game state, and during the fourth low probability time saving game state. When the number of establishments is reached, the game state being set ends and the normal game state is set, but the conditions for ending each time-saving game state are not limited to this.
For example, the number of times the small winning symbol Y2 is determined instead of the small winning symbol Y1 reaches a predetermined number of times, the number of winnings of the small winning symbol reaches a predetermined number regardless of the type of the determined small winning symbol, the small winning symbol The number of determinations of both Y1 and Y2 reaches a predetermined number, the number of determinations of small winning symbol Y1 and the number of determinations of small winning symbol Y2 each reach a predetermined number (they may be the same or different times), and a small hit The symbol Y1 and the small winning symbol Y2 are determined in a predetermined order, the small winning symbol other than the small winning symbol Y1 and Y2 is provided, and the number of determinations of the small winning symbol reaches a predetermined number, etc. May be used as a condition.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and there is a wide variety of opportunities for ending each time-saving game state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Further, instead of making the content related to the winning of a small hit the termination condition of each time-saving game state, the content regarding the lottery and variation of the normal symbols may be made the termination condition of each time-saving game state.
For example, during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the number of times that a normal symbol is won by lottery reaches a predetermined number; The end condition may be that the number of times of fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times. In addition, when set in this way, at any timing from the start to the end of the fluctuating display of normal symbols, the time-saving gaming state being set is ended and the time-saving symbol is changed according to the type of determined time-saving symbol. A new time-saving gaming state may be set. Furthermore, when the time-saving gaming state is newly set, the counting of the above-mentioned number of times is started again, and the display control of the background image similar to the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12 and the control of the remaining determined number of determined number suggestion effect are controlled. You may also do this.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and there is a wide variety of opportunities for ending each time-saving game state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the number of successful completions in the second low probability time saving game state and the third low probability time saving gaming state is 3, and the number of successful completions in the fourth low probability time saving gaming state is 5. However, the ending conditions may have different contents for each time-saving game state, or may have the same contents.
For example, the number of successful terminations in the second low-probability time-saving gaming state may be two, the number of successful terminations in the third low-probability time-saving gaming state may be three, and the number of successful endings in the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state may be five. , the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, and the fourth low probability time saving game state may all be completed three times.
For example, in the second low-probability time-saving game state, the ending condition is that the number of small winnings reaches a predetermined number, and in the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, the number of times the small winning symbol Y2 is determined reaches a predetermined number. The end condition may be that the number of determinations of both small winning symbols Y1 and Y2 reaches a predetermined number in the fourth low probability time saving game state.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 12 can be achieved, and there is a wide variety of opportunities for ending each time-saving game state, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, when the time-saving symbol J1 is determined during the third low probability time-saving game state or when the time-saving symbol J2 is determined during the fourth low probability time-saving game state, Even though the same type of time-saving game state is set, once the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state that were previously set are finished, the same type of time-saving game state is newly set. Although the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state are set, the control of switching the game state at the time of winning the time-saving grant is not limited to this.
For example, in the above case, the third low-probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state being set may be continued without ending.
In this case, the same effect as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12 is achieved, and the control of switching the gaming state when winning the time saving award becomes simple, and the hardware of the main CPU 101 etc. The processing load on hardware resources can be reduced.

In the second low-probability time-saving gaming state, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state, and the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state, an external signal indicating that the time-saving gaming state is set is transmitted to the external device of the pachinko machine P (the hall computer, It may also be set to be output to a data display device (such as a data display device that displays the number of jackpot hits, etc.).
Then, in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, and the fourth low probability time saving game state, the time saving game is won, the time saving game state being set is ended, and a new third low probability time saving game state is established. When setting a new low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the output of the external signal described above is temporarily stopped upon completion of the time-saving game state being set, and then a new third low-probability time-saving game state or a new low-probability time-saving game state is set. 4. The output of the above-mentioned external signal may be started again in conjunction with the setting of the low probability time saving game state.
In this case, it is possible to reliably transmit to the external device that the time-saving gaming state has been newly set due to the winning of the time-saving award.

Also, if you win the time saving game in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving game state, and the fourth low probability time saving game state, you will end the time saving game state that is being set and enter a new third low probability time saving game state. or when setting the fourth low probability time-saving gaming state, the output of the above-mentioned external signal may be continued without stopping.
In this case, since the output of the external signal is not stopped or started, the control of the output of the external signal when winning the time saving award becomes simple, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 is reduced. can be reduced.

In addition, in the remaining determination number suggestion production in other application example 12, by displaying an increase or decrease in the number of heart mark images (remaining number suggestion images), the remaining small winning symbols Y1 until the end number of realizations is reached. Although the number of decisions has been notified, the mode of presentation is not limited to this. For example, by displaying a predetermined meter image such that the meter decreases each time the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, and increases when the time saving award is won, the remaining small winnings until the number of final winnings is reached. The number of times the symbol Y1 has been determined may be notified.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 12, if a jackpot is won in the second low probability time saving game state, the third low probability time saving gaming state, and the fourth low probability time saving gaming state, the small winning is won. When the small winning symbol Y1 is determined, when the small winning is won and the small winning symbol Y2 is determined, and when the time saving award is won, the same BATTLE performance is executed and the winning and determination results are dealt with. However, it is not limited to this, and different types of effects are performed depending on the result of the winning or decision. A corresponding notification or display may be made.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12 can be achieved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 12, the control B in the modification of other application example 11 is adopted, and the second low probability time saving game state being set based on the winning of the time saving grant, the third low probability The probability time-saving game state and the fourth low-probability time-saving game state were terminated, and the third low-probability time-saving game state or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state were to be newly set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the control A of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 11 may be adopted.
Specifically, if a time-saving award is won during the second low-probability time-saving game state, the third low-probability time-saving game state, or the fourth low-probability time-saving game state, the time-saving game state being set ends. Until then, the third low-probability time-saving gaming state or the fourth low-probability time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving award will not be set, but the number of decisions for the small winning symbol Y1 will be determined by the number of decisions counter based on the winning of the time-saving award. When counting is performed and the time-saving game state being set ends, a third low-probability time-saving game state or a fourth low-probability time-saving game state based on winning of the time-saving award may be set.
In addition, in this case, the remaining determined number of times suggestion effect is, for example, when the time saving award is won, the remaining number of times suggestion image is not displayed to be updated, and the remaining number of determined number of times suggestion image is not updated when the time saving game state being set ends. An image indicating that the number of times suggestion image may be updated (for example, a text image that says "Damage recovery? If the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the time saving award has not reached the final number of realizations, the remaining number suggestion image is updated at this point, and the number of determinations of the small winning symbol Y1 based on the winning of the time saving award has reached the final number of realizations. In this case, the remaining number of times suggestion image may not be updated.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 12 can be achieved.

(Other application example 13)
The pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, like the pachinko machine P according to other application example 8, changes the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning hole 15 and the second start winning prize. Simultaneously changes the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the opening 16 (holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize opening 15 and the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting winning opening 16) When both reservations based on the above are stored, both reservations are processed at the same time, so-called simultaneous processing control is performed.

(Summary of the structure within the gaming area 12)
In the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as in the above-described embodiment, a general winning hole 14, a first starting winning hole 15, a second starting winning hole 16, an attacker device 17, An outlet 19, a gate 20, and an effect display device 21 are provided (see FIG. 131). Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as the second starting winning opening 16, a normal second starting winning opening 161 in which the movable piece 16b is not provided, and a specific starting winning opening 161 in which the movable piece 16b is provided. Two 2-start winning openings 162 are provided.
Note that the structures, installation positions, etc. of some of these devices and members are different from those in the above-described embodiments.
The structure within the gaming area 12 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be described below, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. There is. Only the game balls flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game balls flowing down the second game area 12b cannot enter.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. 131, the gate 20 is provided at the upper right of the effect display device 21 (above the second game area 12b). The gate 20 is configured such that only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can pass through it, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through it. Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, most of the game balls that enter the second game area 12b are configured to pass through the gate 20.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, a specific second starting prize opening 162 is provided below the gate 20. Only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the specific second starting prize opening 162, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot pass through.
Since this specific second starting winning hole 162 has the same configuration as the second starting winning hole 16 in the above-described embodiment, the explanation will be omitted here.
Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 20, a lottery of normal symbols is carried out, and a variable display of the normal symbols is started. If the result of the drawing of the normal symbol is a win, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and then the winning symbol is displayed in the specific second starting winning hole 162 for a predetermined operating time. The provided movable piece 16b is opened, and the specific second starting prize opening 162 is opened. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is a loss, after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined variable time, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned movable piece 16b is closed. Therefore, the specific second starting prize opening 162 also remains closed.

As shown in FIG. 131, an attacker device 17 is provided below the specific second starting prize opening 162 and the movable piece 16b. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific area 57, the general area 58, and the distribution member 59 are not provided in the grand prize opening 18.
In addition, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the big prize opening 18, and the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball.
As described later, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, after the special game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the game is played according to the type of jackpot symbol determined at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is now set.

As shown in FIG. 131, below the attacker device 17, there is provided a normal second starting prize opening 161 that opens upward. Normally, only game balls flowing down the second game area 12b can enter the second starting prize opening 161, and game balls flowing down the first game area 12a cannot enter the ball. In addition, although not particularly illustrated, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, a game ball that enters the second game area 12b and does not enter the specific second starting prize opening 162 or the grand prize opening 18 It is configured so that about half of the balls can normally enter the second starting prize opening 161.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, a predetermined number of game balls (three in other application example 13) are paid out, and normally the first game ball is paid out. When a game ball enters the 2-start winning hole 161 or the specific 2nd starting winning hole 162, a different number of game balls (in other application example 13, 1 ball) than the above-mentioned predetermined number are paid out.

Although not particularly illustrated, the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 notifies a predetermined location outside the game area 12 on the game board 11 that the game ball will be launched toward the second game area 12b. A right-handed hitting notification lamp HL is provided. Further, this right-handed hitting notification lamp HL is connected to the sub-control board 300.
Although the right-handed notification lamp HL is off in the normal gaming state, when the time-saving gaming states (first low-probability time-saving gaming state, second low-probability time-saving gaming state, and high-probability time-saving gaming state) described later are set. , a command indicating that the time-saving gaming state has been set (a state transition command to be described later) is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and the sub-CPU 301 that receives the command lights the right-handed notification lamp HL. . The right-hand hitting notification lamp HL remains lit during the above-mentioned time-saving game state. When the above-mentioned time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state described later is set, a command (state transition command) indicating that the normal gaming state has been set is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 300. The sub CPU 301 that received the command turns off the right-handed player notification lamp HL.
Note that the right-handed notification lamp HL may be connected to the main control board 100 instead of being connected to the sub-control board 300, and the main control board 100 may control its lighting and extinguishing.

(Overview of control and games)
Next, various controls and games executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be explained, focusing on the differences from the above-described embodiment.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a normal gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, and a gaming state is a gaming state that is a combination of a low probability gaming state and a first time saving gaming state. 1 low probability time saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as 1st low probability time saving), a 2nd low probability time saving gaming state (hereinafter referred to as 2nd low probability time saving) which is a gaming state that is a combination of the low probability gaming state and the 2nd time saving gaming state ), one of the high-probability time-saving game states, which is a game state that is a combination of the high-probability game state and the second time-saving game state, is set.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state are defined as the frequency of entry of game balls into the specific second starting prize opening 162 ( The difficulty of entering the ball, in other words, the frequency of winning/fail drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the specific second starting prize opening 162, and in other words, the frequency of execution of the variable display of the special symbol) are each predetermined contents. is set to . The specific contents of the settings will be explained in detail later.
Note that, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state is set in the initial state after factory shipment or after reset.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the game ball flowing down the first game area 12a can enter the first starting prize opening 15, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 12b. The game ball can pass through the gate 20, enter the normal second starting prize opening 161, enter the big winning opening 18, and enter the specific second starting winning opening 162.
Then, during the normal gaming state, the player is made to launch the game ball toward the first game area 12a (so-called left-handed hit) so that the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, and the first During the low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, and during the special game, the game ball passes through the gate 20 and enters the normal second starting prize opening 161 or the specific second starting prize. The player is made to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (so-called right-handed hit) so that the ball enters the opening 162 and also enters the big prize opening 18.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, it is possible to win a jackpot in the lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, and the jackpot If you win, the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 will be determined. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize opening 15 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state ), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is , is set to approximately 6/300.
Also, the decision probability of jackpot symbol X1 is 55/100 (i.e. 55%), the decision probability of jackpot symbol X2 is 10/100 (i.e. 10%), and the decision probability of jackpot symbol X3 is 35/100 (i.e. 35%). It is set.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z1 is determined.
In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the upper limit number of first special figure random number holds that can be stored (upper limit number of first hold numbers) is set to four. The upper limit number of reservations for the first special figure random number is not limited to this.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting winning hole 16 (normal second starting winning hole 161, specific second starting winning hole 162), there is a jackpot. It is possible to win, and when a jackpot is won, jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 are determined. Then, the gaming state at the time of performing the lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 is a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state, first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability time saving gaming state ), the probability of winning the jackpot is set to approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning the jackpot when the above gaming state is a high probability gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state) is , is set to approximately 6/300.
In addition, the decision probability of jackpot symbol X4 is set to 15/100 (15%), the decision probability of jackpot symbol X5 is set to 50/100 (50%), and the decision probability of jackpot symbol X6 is set to 35/100 (35%). There is.
Furthermore, if the above-mentioned winning/failure lottery results in a loss, a losing symbol Z2 is determined.
Incidentally, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the upper limit number of second special figure random numbers that can be stored (upper limit number of second reserved number) is set to four. The upper limit number of second special figure random numbers to be reserved is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 132(a), when a jackpot is won and jackpot symbols X1, X3, X4, or A round game that ends when either the conditions are met, such as opening for 0 seconds or 10 game balls entering the grand prize opening 18, is executed 5 times, and approximately 500 game balls are obtained. It is now possible to do so.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 132(a), when a jackpot is won and the jackpot symbol X2 or X5 is determined, the above-mentioned round game is executed 10 times during the special game based on the determination, Approximately 1,000 game balls can be won.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, similarly to the above-described embodiment, a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 or the second starting winning opening 16, and a winning lottery is executed. When a special symbol is determined, a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern in which a variation mode (variation time) of a variation display (variation performance) of the special symbol is determined is determined. Then, a variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is executed based on the variable pattern corresponding to the determined variable pattern command. Determination of the variation pattern command will be described in detail later.

(Summary of simultaneous rotation control)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, the special symbol changes based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 and the entering of the gaming ball into the second starting winning hole 16. Control that simultaneously changes the special symbols based on the balls, so-called simultaneous rotation control, is executed. The simultaneous rotation control in another application example 13 will be described below.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a special game is not being executed, and the first special symbol display device 30 and the second special symbol display device 31 are not performing variable display of special symbols. In this case, it is possible to draw a lottery based on the first special figure random number and the second special figure random number.
In addition, when the first special symbol display device 30 is in the process of displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, and the second special symbol display device 31 is not displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, the second special symbol random number is displayed based on the second special symbol random number. Win/fail lottery is possible, and when the second special symbol display device 31 is displaying a special symbol in a variable manner and the first special symbol display device 30 is not displaying a special symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol It is possible to draw a lottery based on random numbers.
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 30 and the variable display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 31 are performed at the same time. Then, when the first special symbol display device 30 finishes the variable display of the special symbol, if the first special symbol random number is stored, the first special symbol display device 30 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. When the second special symbol display device 31 finishes the variable display of the special symbol, if the second special symbol random number is stored, the second special symbol display device 31 starts the variable display of the next special symbol. be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when a new lottery is performed based on the second special symbol random number while the first special symbol display device 30 is displaying the special symbols in a varying manner, When the special symbol being displayed is the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or If a jackpot cannot be won as a result of the lottery conducted and it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the lottery result is forcibly set to be a loss. In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Similarly, when a new winning lottery is performed based on the first special symbol random number while the second special symbol display device 31 is displaying the special symbol in a variable manner, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is the jackpot symbol X4, X5. Or, if it is X6, the jackpot cannot be won as a result of the newly conducted lottery, and if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the result of the lottery will be forced to be a loss. is set to . In other words, the result of the lottery is a loss.
Therefore, for example, when a jackpot is won based on the second special symbol random number, a special symbol (jackpot symbol X4, X5, or X6) based on the jackpot win is displayed in a variable manner on the second special symbol display device 31. Sometimes, when a new lottery is conducted based on the first special drawing random number, the result of the lottery is a loss. Also, when a jackpot is won based on the first special symbol random number and a special symbol (jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3) based on the jackpot win is displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, If a new lottery is conducted based on the second special drawing random number, the result of the lottery will be a loss.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30, the losing symbols ( When Z2) is being displayed in a variable manner, this losing symbol is forcibly stopped.
Similarly, when the jackpot symbols (X4, , this losing symbol is forcibly stopped.

In addition, when the jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, X4, When the symbols (Z1, Z2) are being displayed in a variable manner, the measurement of the variation time of the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) which are being displayed in a variable manner may be stopped. That is, the measurement of the fluctuation time may only be stopped, and the fluctuation display of the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) may continue to be performed.
Specifically, when the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 while the losing symbol Z2 is being fluctuatedly displayed on the second special symbol display device 31, the The losing symbol Z2 is not displayed in a stopped state, and by stopping the measurement of this variation time, the variable display of the losing symbol Z2 is continued while maintaining the remaining variation time at this point, and the jackpot symbol When the special game based on X1, X2 or X3 ends, measurement of the stopped variation time of the losing symbol Z2 may be restarted.
Similarly, when the jackpot symbol X4, X5, or X6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31 while the losing symbol Z1 is being displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display device 30, the losing symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner Z1 is never stopped and displayed, and by stopping the measurement of this fluctuation time, the fluctuation display of losing symbol Z1 is continued while maintaining the remaining fluctuation time at this point, and jackpot symbol X4, When the special game based on X5 or X6 ends, measurement of the stopped variation time of the losing symbol Z1 may be restarted.

Also, when the losing symbols (Z1, Z2) are stopped and displayed on either the first special symbol display device 30 or the second special symbol display device 31, the jackpot symbols (X1, X2, X3, If the losing symbols (X4, X5, X6) or losing symbols (Z1, Z2) are being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the measurement of the fluctuating time is not stopped. The variable display of the above-mentioned jackpot symbols and losing symbols continues to be displayed without stopping.

(Overview of Fuzu Game)
Next, an outline of a game played in a pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 132(b), in the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is approximately 1/1.1, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds, The operating time of the movable piece 16b (the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in an open state) when a winning result is obtained by drawing a normal symbol is set to 0.05 seconds. Although not particularly shown, the same settings are made during the special game.
In addition, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), the normal symbol The probability of winning in the lottery is approximately 1/1.1, which is the same as in the non-time-saving gaming state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 0.2 seconds, which is shorter than in the non-time-saving gaming state. The operating time of the movable piece 16b in this case is set to 2 seconds, which is longer than during the non-time saving game state.

That is, during the non-time saving game state (normal game state), there is a high probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery executed when the game ball passes through the gate 20, and there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open. However, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 0.05 seconds, it takes a long time for the movable piece 16b to change from the closed state to the open state (from the open state to Although the interval until the next open state is long), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is short. Therefore, during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be in a closed state, and it is difficult for the game ball that has entered the second gaming area 12b to enter the specific second starting prize opening 162.

On the other hand, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), non-time-saving games are Since the probability of winning is the same as during the state, there are many opportunities for the movable piece 16b to open as in the non-time saving game state. Since the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.2 seconds shorter than during the non-time-saving gaming state, and the operating time of the movable piece 16b is 2 seconds longer than during the non-time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 16b is closed. Although the time from the first open state to the next open state is short (the interval from one open state to the next open state is short), the time during which the movable piece 16b is maintained in the open state is long. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy for the game ball that has entered the second game area 12b to enter the specific second starting prize opening 162. becomes.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the probability of winning by drawing a normal symbol is generally high in all of the non-time-saving gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, and the second time-saving gaming state. Although it is set, by varying the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the operation time of the movable piece 16b, the possibility that the game ball enters the specific second starting winning hole 162 (that is, the possibility of the game ball entering the specific second starting winning hole 162 The frequency of game balls entering the ball is changed.
That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, unlike during the non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 16b is likely to be maintained in the open state, so the game is relatively moved to the specific second starting prize opening 162. It is easy for the ball to enter the ball. Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for a winning lottery while suppressing the decrease in game balls as the game progresses, compared to during the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined when a jackpot occurs during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, and the variation time of the special symbol during the non-time-saving game state. Although the fluctuation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the case of a jackpot is the same, the fluctuation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the case of a loss during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state is , is set to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol that can be determined in the event of a loss during the non-time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 133(a)). That is, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, a control is performed in which the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than during the non-time-saving game state (operation of the so-called special symbol fluctuation shortening function). It is becoming more and more popular. As a result, the frequency of execution of the winning lottery (in other words, the frequency of execution of variable display of special symbols) is changed.
Specifically, during the first time-saving game state (during the first low-probability time-saving game state) and during the second time-saving game state (during the second low-probability time-saving game state, during the high-probability time-saving game state), the non-time-saving game is Since the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than during the state (normal gaming state), it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the specified second starting winning hole 162 mentioned above, and this is a non-time saving mode. Compared to during the gaming state, the winning lottery and the variable display of special symbols are more likely to be executed.
Therefore, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the execution frequency of the winning lottery (fluctuating display of special symbols) is reduced while suppressing the decrease in the number of game balls as the game progresses, compared to the non-time-saving game state. can be increased.

In addition, during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state, the performance of the normal pattern game (the probability of winning in the drawing of normal symbols, the fluctuation time of normal symbols, the operation time of the movable piece 16b) is not time-saving. It may be set to be the same as during the gaming state, and only the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation shortening function may be activated. Even in this case, the winning lottery and the variable display of special symbols can be made more likely to be executed during the first time-saving game state and the second time-saving game state than during the non-time-saving game state.

(Summary of the gaming state to be set)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, any one of the normal gaming state, the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, or the high probability time saving gaming state is set. be done.

(Summary of the settings of the second low probability time saving gaming state and high probability time saving gaming state)
Specifically, as long as the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a as instructed during the normal gaming state, the game ball can enter the first starting prize opening 15. In addition, in the lottery based on the entered ball, it is possible to win a jackpot, and if the jackpot is won, the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or X3 is determined (see FIG. 132(a)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(c), when the jackpot symbol X3 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the low probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. A low probability time saving game state is set. When the second low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. In addition, in the second low probability time saving game state, the special symbol is determined based on the first special random number without winning the jackpot and the special game is started, or the special symbol is determined based on the first special symbol random number without winning the jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the first special symbol). The total number of fluctuations of the special symbol (hereinafter also referred to as the second special symbol) determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (also referred to as the figure) and the second special symbol random number reaches 100 (i.e., the first special symbol random number When the total number of executions of the winning lottery based on 100 times and the number of executions of the winning lottery based on the second special drawing random number reaches 100 times), the process ends.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 132(c), when the jackpot symbol X1 or X2 is determined, the gaming state after the end of the special game is set to the high probability gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. As a result, a high probability time saving gaming state is set. When the high probability time saving game state is set, both the high probability number of times and the time saving number are set to 100 times. In addition, in the high-probability time-saving game state, either the jackpot is won and the special game is started, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches 100 without winning the jackpot. When reached, it ends.

In both the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state), as described above, the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state, so that the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state, so that the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state. Game balls tend to enter the specific second starting winning hole 162, and furthermore, game balls that do not enter the specific second starting winning hole 162 usually tend to enter the second starting winning hole 161. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second gaming area 12b as instructed during the second low probability time saving gaming state or the high probability time saving gaming state, normally the second starting prize opening 161 or the specific A game ball can enter the second starting prize opening 162.

It is possible to win a jackpot in a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the normal second starting winning hole 161 or the specific second starting winning hole 162, and when winning the jackpot, the jackpot symbol X4, X5, or X6 is determined. (See FIG. 132(a)).
As shown in FIG. 132(c), when the jackpot symbol X6 is determined, a second low probability time saving game state is set after the special game ends, and the number of time saving times is set to 100 times. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, a high probability time saving game state is set after the special game ends, and both the high probability number of times and the time saving number are set to 100 times.

Then, when the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 without winning a jackpot during the second low probability time-saving gaming state, the low probability gaming state remains unchanged and the second By changing the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the second low probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set as described above. Also, if the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 times without winning a jackpot during the high probability time saving gaming state, the high probability gaming state will change to the low probability gaming state. When the second time-saving game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state, the high probability time-saving game state is ended and the normal game state is set as described above.

(Summary of setting the first low probability time saving gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 132(c), after the low probability gaming state of either the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the The total number of fluctuations of the two special drawings reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (900 times in other application example 13) (that is, the number of times the winning/failure lottery is executed based on the first special drawing random number and the second special drawing random number) When the total number of executions of the winning lottery reaches 900), a first low probability time saving gaming state is set. When the first low probability time saving game state is set, the number of time saving times is set to 1200 times.
In addition, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, either the jackpot is won and the special game is started, or the sum of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol is reached without winning the jackpot. When it reaches 1200 times, it ends.

During the first low-probability time-saving game state (during the first time-saving game state), the movable piece 16b is likely to be in an open state, similar to the second low-probability time-saving game state and the high-probability time-saving game state. The game ball that has entered the gaming area 12b easily enters the specific second starting prize opening 162, and furthermore, the gaming ball that does not enter the specific second starting winning opening 162 usually enters the second starting winning opening 161. Easy to ball. Therefore, as long as the game ball is launched toward the second gaming area 12b as instructed during the first low probability time saving gaming state, normally the second starting prize opening 161 or the specific second starting winning opening 162 is launched. When a game ball becomes available for entry and a jackpot is won by lottery based on the entry, jackpot symbols X4, X5, or X6 are determined (see FIG. 132(a)).

Then, in the same way as described above, when the jackpot symbol X6 is determined during the first low probability time saving game state, a second low probability time saving game state is set after the special game ends, and the number of time saving times is set to 100. (See Figure 132(c)). Furthermore, when the jackpot symbol X4 or X5 is determined, a high probability time saving game state is set after the end of the special game, and both the high probability number of times and the number of time saving times are set to 100 (see FIG. 132(c)).

On the other hand, if the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 1200 without winning a jackpot during the first low probability time-saving gaming state, the low probability gaming state remains unchanged and the first By changing the time-saving gaming state to the non-time-saving gaming state, the first low probability time-saving gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is set as described above.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, as mentioned above, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, so in reality, until winning the jackpot, the 1. The low probability time saving gaming state will continue.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, after the RAM is cleared (after reset) or after the end of the special game based on winning the jackpot and until winning the next jackpot, the first low probability time reduction The gaming state can only be set once. That is, after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the first low-probability time-saving gaming state cannot be set again until the next jackpot is won.

(Summary of the setting timing of the first low probability time saving gaming state)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a time saving activation number counter for counting the number of time saving activations (900 times) at which a first low probability time saving gaming state (first time saving gaming state) is set is provided. , a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 of the main control board 100.
Then, when either the RAM is cleared (reset) by a predetermined operation or the special game ends, a message corresponding to the number of time-saving activations (900 times) is displayed on the time-saving activation counter. 900" is set.

The main control board 100 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 is provided with a RAM clear switch (not particularly shown) that can be operated by pressing down. By turning on the power, the RAM is cleared (reset) and the time saving activation counter is set to "900".
On the other hand, even if the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM will not be cleared and the time saving activation counter will not be set to "900". That is, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the count value of the time saving activation number counter remains the value stored at the present time and is not changed.

Although not particularly shown, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13 is in a state where the RAM has been cleared and the jackpot has not been won since the power was restored (hereinafter referred to as "before winning after RAM clearing"). There is a RAM clear before winning flag (consisting of a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103) that indicates that the state is (also referred to as a state), and a state that a jackpot has not been won since the power was restored without RAM clearing ( A RAM clear non-execution before winning flag (configured by a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103) is provided to indicate that the state is in a RAM clear non-execution before winning state (hereinafter also referred to as a RAM clear non-execution before winning state).

When the main CPU 101 turns on the power while pressing down the RAM clear switch, it turns on the RAM clear execution before winning flag and turns off the RAM clear no execution before winning flag. Further, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch, the main CPU 101 turns off the RAM clear execution before winning flag and turns on the RAM clear non-execution before winning flag.
Therefore, if you turn on the power while pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM clear execution before winning flag will be turned on (RAM clear non execution before winning flag will be off), and "900" will be displayed in the time saving activation counter. However, if you turn on the power without pressing the RAM clear switch, the RAM clear non-execution before winning flag will turn on (RAM clear execution before winning flag will turn off), but the time saving activation number counter will turn on. The count value remains the currently stored value.
Further, when the main CPU 101 wins a jackpot, it turns off both the RAM clear execution pre-win flag and the RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag.

Then, when the RAM is cleared (reset), the subsequent gaming state is set to the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state), and counting by the time saving activation number counter is started from this point.
In addition, when the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol X3 or be done.
On the other hand, when the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X4, or X5 ends, the subsequent gaming state is set to a high probability time-saving gaming state (high probability gaming state). When a high probability time-saving game state is set, the time-saving activation number counter does not start counting from the time this special game ends. As mentioned above, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol reaches 100 without winning a jackpot during the high probability time-saving gaming state (the first special symbol random number When the total number of executions of the winning lottery based on the random number and the number of executions of the winning lottery based on the second special drawing random number reaches 100 and the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) is set, from this point on, the time saving activation number counter counting starts.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the stop display time is the time during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the special symbol ends. It is set so that the count value of the time saving activation number counter is decremented by 1 when the time saving activation number counter reaches "0". This means that it has been reached. At this point, the first low probability time saving game state is set.
When set in this way, the 900th special symbol fluctuation display that is performed without winning a jackpot after the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set is the first low probability time saving gaming state. This is the fluctuation immediately before the setting of the first low-accuracy time saving setting (hereinafter also referred to as the fluctuation immediately before the first low-accuracy time saving setting). That is, at the start of the 900th variable display of the special symbol, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is "1", and when the variable display ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the count value is decremented by 1 and "0'', and at this point the first low probability time saving gaming state is set.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the time-saving activation number counter continues counting until the next jackpot is won or the RAM is cleared. is set not to occur (ie, to be canceled).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the first low probability time-saving game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time for stopping the special symbol has elapsed. It has become so.
Here, instead of setting the first low-probability time-saving game state when the above-mentioned stop display time has elapsed, for example, the first low-probability time-saving game state may be set at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Conceivable. More specifically, the count value of the time-saving activation counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the count value reaches "0", the first low probability time-saving gaming state can be set at this point. Conceivable.
In addition, when set in this way, after the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the time saving will be activated before the start of the 900th special symbol fluctuation display that is performed without winning the jackpot. When the count value of the number counter is "1" and the fluctuation display starts, the count value is decremented by 1 and becomes "0", and at this point the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. Become.
However, when simultaneous spin control is executed as in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, after the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state is set, the first game without winning the jackpot occurs. When the 899th variable display by the special figure starts, the count value of the time saving activation number counter becomes "1" at this time, and at this time, the game ball is launched towards the second game area 12b and the game ball is When the ball normally enters the second starting winning hole 161, the variable display of the second special symbol starts. Then, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter becomes "0", and at this point, the first low probability time-saving game state is set. In other words, even though the first special symbol is currently displaying the 899th variation in which the first low probability time saving game state would not normally be set, the first low probability time saving game state is set and the specific first Since it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening 162, by launching the game ball toward the second game area 12b from the 899th variable display of this first special figure, the specified number It becomes easy to acquire prize balls based on entering the game ball into the 2-start winning hole 162.
Therefore, if the first low probability time saving game state is set at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, when the 899th variable display of the first special symbol is started, the second A first low-probability time-saving method that allows the game ball to enter the normal second starting prize opening 161 by launching the game ball toward the gaming area 12b, making it easy for the game ball to quickly enter the specific second starting winning opening 162. There is a high possibility that a game will be executed by shifting to a gaming state. Then, there will be a difference in gaming advantage between players who execute such a method and those who do not, and there is a possibility that fair gaming cannot be ensured.

On the other hand, when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set when the stop display time has elapsed, as in the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13, the above-mentioned first special figure Even if a game ball is entered into the normal second starting prize opening 161 during the 899th variation display and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry is started, at this point the first low probability time-saving game No state is set.
In addition, the 900th variation display by the first special symbol is the variation immediately before the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and since the 900th variation display is the normal gaming state, as will be described later, During this fluctuating display, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize opening 161 will last for a long time of 590 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or a loss. (See FIG. 133(a)). Then, the 900th variable display by the first special symbol ends earlier than the second special symbol, and the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set when the stop display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. Become. In other words, even if the game ball is entered into the normal second starting prize opening 161 during the variable display of the first special symbol (during the 900th variable display) immediately before the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, The first low probability time saving game state is never set during the variable display of the first special symbol.
In this way, according to the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, a game is performed by a method of quickly transitioning to the first low probability time saving game state during the variable display of the first special symbol as described above. It is possible to prevent this and ensure fair gaming.

In addition, even if the first low probability time saving game state is set when the stop display time has elapsed, for example, the fluctuation of the first special symbol immediately before the first low probability time saving game state is set. The variable display of the second special figure, which was started when the game ball entered the normal second starting prize opening 161 before the display (900th variable display), is displayed during the variable display of the first special figure. When it ends and the stop display time has elapsed, a first low probability time saving game state is set during the variable display of the first special symbol.
However, since the varying time of the first special figure's variable display is determined by a lottery, the intention was to have the second special figure's variable display end during the 900th variable display of the first special figure. Generally, it is almost impossible to enter the game ball into the second starting prize opening 161. In other words, when the first low probability time-saving game state is set when the stop display time has elapsed, the variable display of the second special figure ends during the 900th variable display of the first special figure. This is an extremely irregular case, and the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 does not take any measures to prevent such an irregular case from occurring.
However, if such an irregular case occurs, certain measures are taken to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This measure will be explained in detail later.

(Summary of the end timing of the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second low probability time saving gaming state, and the high probability time saving gaming state)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed (the number of times the special symbol changes) until the set time saving game state ends is connected to the main control board. 100, a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103.
The time saving number counter counts both the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol. During the gaming state, this time saving counter counts.

Specifically, when the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, the time saving number counter is set to "1200" corresponding to the number of time saving times (1200 times) corresponding to the first low probability time saving gaming state. After that, each time the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the count value of the time saving number counter at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts (immediately after it starts). is decremented by 1. Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", it means that the total of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached 1200 times, which is the number of time savings. The low probability time saving game state ends and the normal game state is set.
When the count value of the time saving number counter becomes "0" and the first low probability time saving gaming state ends, the counting by the time saving number counter also ends, and then any of the time saving gaming states (first low probability time saving gaming state, second low probability Until the probability time-saving game state and high-probability time-saving game state are set, the time-saving number counter does not count.

In addition, when the special game ends and the second low probability time saving game state or high probability time saving game state is set, the time saving number counter will display the number of time saving times corresponding to the second low probability time saving game state or high probability time saving game state. "100" corresponding to (100 times) is set. After that, similarly to the first low probability time saving game state, each time the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts (start (Immediately after the time saving operation is performed), the count value of the time saving number counter is decremented by 1. Then, when the count value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", it means that the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached 100 times, which is the number of time savings, and at this point the setting is in progress. The second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state (as the second time-saving game state ends, the high-probability game state also ends as described later) ends, and the normal game state is set.
As in the case of the first low probability time saving game state, when the count value of the time saving number counter becomes "0" and the second low probability time saving gaming state or high probability time saving gaming state ends, the counting by the time saving number counter also ends, After that, until any time-saving game state (first low probability time-saving game state, second low-probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) is set, the time-saving number counter does not count.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a high-accuracy number counter for counting the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the set high-probability game state ends is installed on the main control board 100. It is constituted by a predetermined storage area in the RAM 103.
Further, when the special game ends and the high probability time saving game state is set, the high probability number counter is set to "100" corresponding to the high probability number (100 times). After that, each time the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the count of the high accuracy number counter is started at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts (immediately after it starts). The value is decremented by 1. When the count value of the high accuracy number counter becomes "0", it means that the total of the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has reached 100 times, which is the high accuracy frequency. Here, the high accuracy number is 100 times, which is the same as the time saving number, so when the count value of the high accuracy number counter becomes "0", the count value of the time saving number counter also becomes "0" as described above. ”, so at this point, the second time-saving game state ends and the high-probability game state also ends, thereby ending the high-probability time-saving game state being set and setting the normal game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, the first low probability time saving game state ends at the time when the variable display of the special symbol starts. The timing to end the first low-probability time-saving game state may be, for example, the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the elapse of the stop display time, etc.; By terminating the game, the first low probability time saving game state can be terminated as quickly as possible. This makes it possible to suppress the advantage of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and prevent a situation where the gambling nature becomes too high.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, in any of the time-saving game states (the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state, and the high-probability time-saving game state), the variable display of special symbols is Since the game ends at the same time as it is started, the process of ending the time-saving game state can be unified, and the processing load on hardware resources such as the main CPU 101 can be reduced.

(Overview of sending status transition commands)
In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, as described above, at the time when the variable display of the special symbols is started, one of the time-saving game states (the first low-probability time-saving game state, the second low-probability time-saving game state , high probability time-saving game state) is finished and the normal game state is set, at the start of the variable display of this special symbol, the main CPU 101 indicates to the sub-control board 300 that the normal game state has been set. A state transition command (indicating that the gaming state has been changed) is sent. In addition, as mentioned above, when the normal game state ends and the first low-probability vagina time-saving game state is set when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, when the stop display time has elapsed, , the main CPU 101 transmits to the sub-control board 300 a state transition command indicating that the first low probability time-saving gaming state has been set (indicating that the gaming state has been changed).
That is, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, when the game state is changed both at the start of the variable display of the special symbol and at the time when the stop display time has elapsed, the game state after the change is changed. The state transition command shown is sent.
Thereby, it is possible to reliably transmit to the sub-control board 300 that the gaming state has been changed.

(Summary of control regarding determination of variation pattern command)
A pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 includes a table A, a table B, a table C, a table D, a table E, and a table F as a variation pattern table 114 that stores variation pattern commands associated with variation patterns. (See Figure 133(a)). Then, as in the above-described embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16, a changing pattern command is determined with reference to one of the changing pattern tables 114. Ru.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another low usage example 13, in order to improve the performance effect after the special game ends in balance with the executed special game, the number of changes in the special symbols after the special game ends is changed. The tendencies of the fluctuation patterns that can be determined (for example, only fluctuation patterns with relatively short fluctuation times are determined, fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times are likely to be determined, etc.) are varied. In order to make it possible to execute a performance according to the number of fluctuations, after winning a jackpot and executing a special game, a fluctuation pattern command is determined according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the end of the special game. The variation pattern table 114 that is referred to when doing so can be switched.
That is, after the special game ends, a variable pattern command can be determined based on a different variable pattern table 114 depending on the number of variations even during the same game state.

On the other hand, if the variable pattern table 114 that is referred to when determining the variable pattern command is switched as described above according to the number of variations without executing a special game, even though the special game is not being played, However, the tendency of the fluctuation pattern that is determined may change, giving the player a sense of discomfort in the performance. Therefore, after the RAM is cleared, until the first jackpot is won (the special game is executed), the fluctuation pattern table 114 cannot be switched according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbols since the RAM was cleared. This is prohibited, and the variable pattern command is determined based on the variable pattern table 114 associated with the gaming state being set.
In other words, during the period from when the RAM is cleared until the first jackpot is won, the variable pattern commands are always executed based on the same variable pattern table 114 corresponding to the currently set gaming condition as long as the game condition is the same. It is to be determined.

A pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 has a determination table that defines a variation pattern table 114 that is referred to when determining a variation pattern command. When determining a variable pattern command, the variable pattern table 114 to be referred to is determined based on the information defined in the above-described determination table.

As shown in FIG. 133(b), according to the determination table, when jackpot symbol X3 or X6 is determined (when the second low probability time-saving game state is set after the end of the special game based on the determination) Table C is determined when the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the special game based on the determination is the 1st to 99th, table D is determined at the 100th, and table D is determined at the 101st to 899th. Table A is determined at the 900th time, table B is determined at the 900th time, table E is determined at the 901st to 2099th time, table F is determined at the 2100th time, and table F is determined at the 2101st time onwards. A is determined.

That is, for the 1st to 99th fluctuations in the second low probability time-saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol described above, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and the second low probability Regarding the 100th variation in the probability time-saving gaming state (the final variation started during the second low-probability time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern command is determined based on Table D.
In addition, the 1st to 799th fluctuations in the normal gaming state set after the end of the second low probability time saving gaming state described above (the 101st to 899th fluctuations after the special game ends and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set) For the variation), a variation pattern command is determined based on table A, and the 800th variation in the normal gaming state (variation immediately before the first low probability time saving setting (when the special game ends and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set) is determined based on table A. For the 900th variation)), a variation pattern command is determined based on Table B.
In addition, the 1st to 1199th fluctuations in the first low probability time saving game state set after the end of the above-mentioned normal game state (901st to 2099th fluctuations after the special game ends and the second low probability time saving game state is set) For the variation), a variation pattern command is determined based on table E, and the 1200th variation in the first low probability time saving gaming state (the final variation started during the first low probability time saving gaming state (the special game has ended) Regarding the 2100th variation)) after the second low probability time-saving gaming state is set, a variation pattern command is determined based on Table F.
In addition, regarding fluctuations in the normal gaming state that is set after the end of the first low probability time saving gaming state mentioned above (variations after the 2101st time after the special game ends and the second low probability time saving gaming state is set), A variation pattern command is determined based on table A.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 133(b), when jackpot symbols X1, X2, X4, or X5 are determined (when a high probability time-saving game state is set after the special game based on the determination), Table C is determined when the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the special game based on the determination is 1st to 99th, table D is determined when it is 100th, and table D is determined when it is 101st to 999th. Table A is determined, table B is determined at the 1000th time, table E is determined at the 1001st to 2199th time, table F is determined at the 2200th time, and table A is determined at the 2201st and subsequent times. It is determined.

That is, for the 1st to 99th fluctuations in the high probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the special game based on the determination of the jackpot symbol described above, the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C, and the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table C. Regarding the 100th variation (the final variation started during the high probability time saving gaming state), a variation pattern command is determined based on Table D.
Also, regarding the 1st to 899th fluctuations in the normal gaming state set after the end of the high probability time saving gaming state mentioned above (the 101st to 999th fluctuations after the special game ends and the high probability time saving gaming state is set) A fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table A, and the 900th fluctuation in the normal gaming state (the fluctuation immediately before the first low probability time saving setting (the 1000th fluctuation after the special game ends and the high probability time saving gaming state is set) )), the variation pattern command is determined based on Table B.
In addition, the 1st to 1199th fluctuations in the first low probability time saving game state that is set after the end of the normal game state described above (the 1001st to 2199th fluctuations after the special game ends and the high probability time saving game state is set) For , the fluctuation pattern command is determined based on table E, and the 1200th fluctuation in the first low probability time saving game state (the final fluctuation started during the first low probability time saving game state (when the special game ends and the high Regarding the 2200th variation after the probability time saving gaming state is set, a variation pattern command is determined based on Table F.
In addition, regarding fluctuations in the normal game state set after the end of the first low probability time saving game state mentioned above (variations from the 2201st time onwards after the special game ends and the high probability time saving game state is set), Table A A variation pattern command is determined based on.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the variation pattern command is always determined based on table A regarding the variation in the normal gaming state that is set after the RAM is cleared. Further, regarding the fluctuation in the first low probability time saving gaming state which is set when the count value of the time saving activation number counter reaches 900 in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation pattern command is always determined based on Table B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, in addition to the above-mentioned time saving activation number counter and time saving number counter, the number of executions of the winning lottery (number of changes of special symbols) is counted, as in the above embodiment. A variation counter is provided for this purpose. The count value of this variation counter is reset by clearing the RAM or ending the special game, and is incremented by "1" each time a winning lottery (variation of special symbols) is executed. The main CPU 101 is able to grasp the number of changes since the end of the special game based on the count value of this number of changes counter.

Then, with reference to the variation pattern table 114 determined as described above, a variation mode command and a variation pattern command are determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table A, a loss occurs in the winning/failure lottery based on the first special symbol random number, and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, and the first pending number at the time is 2. If it is less than 10 seconds, the variation pattern command "00H" (decision probability is 90%), which is associated with the variation pattern of "13 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 13 seconds)", "20 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 13 seconds)" Variation pattern command "02H" (decision probability is 8%) with which the variation pattern of "variation time of 20 seconds)" is associated, or variation pattern of "60 seconds variation (variation time of special symbol 60 seconds)" One of the variation pattern commands "03H" (determination probability is 2%) to which "03H" is associated is determined. If the first pending number at the above point is 2 or more, the fluctuation pattern command "01H" (decision probability is 90 %), the variation pattern command "02H" (decision probability is 8%) associated with the variation pattern of "20 seconds variation", or the variation pattern command "03H" associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" ” (decision probability is 2%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or Either the variation pattern command “A2H” (decision probability is 10%), or the variation pattern command “A3H” (decision probability is 90%) associated with the variation pattern of “60 seconds variation” is determined. .
In addition, if there is a loss in the lottery based on the second special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern will be "590 seconds fluctuation (special symbol fluctuation time 590 seconds)" regardless of the second pending number. A variation pattern command "04H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4, X5, or The variation pattern command "A4H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table B, if a loss occurs in the winning/failure lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the first pending number, "6 seconds fluctuation" A variation pattern command "05H" (determination probability 100%) to which the variation pattern "05H" is associated is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or The variation pattern command "A5H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, if there is a loss in the lottery based on the second special random number and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, the fluctuation pattern command "04H" to which the fluctuation pattern of "590 seconds fluctuation" is associated will be used regardless of the second pending number. ” (decision probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the second special random number and the jackpot symbol X4, X5, or The variation pattern command "A4H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table C, if a loss occurs in the lottery based on the first special symbol random number and a loss symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, the second If there is a loss in the lottery based on the special pattern random number and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, a variation pattern of "5 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 5 seconds)" will be associated regardless of the second pending number. The fluctuation pattern command “11H” (decision probability is 90%), the fluctuation pattern command “12H” (decision probability is 8%) associated with the fluctuation pattern of “20 seconds fluctuation”, or the fluctuation pattern command “12H” (decision probability is 8%) of “60 seconds fluctuation” One of the variation pattern commands "13H" (determination probability is 2%) with which the variation pattern is associated is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, also by lottery based on the second special random number. If you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X4, %) or the variation pattern command "B3H" (determination probability is 90%) associated with the variation pattern of "60 seconds variation" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table D, if a loss occurs in the lottery based on the first special symbol random number and a loss symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, the second If there is a loss in the lottery based on the special pattern random number and the losing pattern Z2 is determined, a variation pattern of "15 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 15 seconds)" will be associated regardless of the second pending number. The variation pattern command "14H" (determination probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, also by lottery based on the second special random number. If you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X4, %) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table E, if there is a loss in the lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, the second If there is a loss in the winning/failure lottery based on the special pattern random number and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, a variation pattern of "3 seconds variation (special symbol variation time 3 seconds)" will be associated regardless of the second pending number. The variation pattern command “21H” (determination probability is 100%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, also by lottery based on the second special random number. If you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X4, %) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), according to table F, if there is a loss in the lottery based on the first special symbol random number and the losing symbol Z1 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, the second In the event that there is a loss in the lottery based on the special pattern random numbers and the losing symbol Z2 is determined, regardless of the second pending number, the fluctuation pattern command "22H" (decision probability (100%) is determined.
In addition, if you win a jackpot by lottery based on the first special random number and the jackpot symbol X1, X2 or X3 is determined, regardless of the first reservation number, also by lottery based on the second special random number. If you win a jackpot and the jackpot symbol X4, %) is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern of "590 seconds variation" is determined, the special symbol variation display and variation effect will be executed for an extremely long time (590 seconds) compared to other variation patterns. . This variation pattern of "590 seconds variation" is determined only when a winning lottery based on the second special figure random number is performed in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 133(a)). As mentioned above, during the normal gaming state, an instruction is given to launch the game ball into the first game area 12a, and if the game ball is launched into the first game area 12a according to this instruction, the game ball will be launched into the second starting prize opening 16. Since the ball does not enter the ball, the fluctuation pattern of "590 seconds fluctuation" is never determined.

(Summary of special symbol stop display time)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a stop display time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is finished is determined according to the determined variation pattern command (variation pattern). When the variable display of the special symbol ends, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a stop display time according to the variation pattern command determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol.
As shown in FIG. 133(c), the main ROM 102 of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 stores a stop display time table in which stop display times corresponding to variable pattern commands that can be determined are determined. There is. When the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the main CPU 101 refers to the stop display time table and obtains the stop display time corresponding to the determined variable pattern command.
According to the stop display time table, if the determined variation pattern command is "05H" (in the variation just before the first low-accuracy time-saving setting, the winning/failure lottery based on the first special symbol random number results in a loss and the losing symbol Z1 is determined. case), a stop display time of 20 seconds is obtained, and if the determined variation pattern command is other than "05H", a stop display time of 0.5 seconds is obtained.

Note that if the variable pattern command is other than "05H", the same stop display time (0.5 seconds) will be obtained, but this is not limiting; Different stop display times may be acquired depending on the type.
For example, if the determined variable pattern command corresponds to a loss determined during the first low probability time saving game state or the second low probability time saving gaming state, the determined variable pattern command is normally A longer stop display time or a shorter stop display time may be determined than those corresponding to a loss determined during the gaming state.
Further, for example, if the determined variable pattern command corresponds to a loss determined based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole 15, the determined variable pattern command A longer stop display time or a shorter stop display time may be determined than in the case where the stop display time is determined based on the entry of the game ball into the 2-start winning hole 16 and corresponds to a loss.

Next, an outline of the progress of the above-mentioned special figure game will be explained using a flowchart, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned embodiment and other application example 8.
First, the special symbol variation start process executed when the special symbol variation starts will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 134.
The processing of steps 7500 to 7502 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5000 to 5002 of the special symbol variation start processing in other application example 8, and the processing of step 7503 is similar to step 805 of the special symbol variation start processing in the above-described embodiment. The processing in steps 7504 to 7511 is substantially the same as the processing in steps 5003 to 5010 of the special symbol variation start processing in other application example 8, so the explanation will be omitted here and the processing in step 7512 will be omitted. move on.
In step 7512, the main CPU 101 executes a variation start time update process for updating the count values of various counters at the time when the variable display of the special symbol is started. Then, the process advances to the next step 7513.

In step 7513, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process at the start of variation to set the game state at the time when the variable display of the special symbols is started. Then, the process advances to the next step 7514.
In step 7514, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the first pending number counter is 1 or more. If it is determined that the number is not 1 or more, the process advances to step 7528. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is 1 or more, the process advances to the next step 7515.

The processing of steps 7515 to 7516 is almost the same as the processing of steps 5014 to 5015 of the special symbol variation start processing in other application example 8, and the processing of step 7517 is similar to step 805 of the special symbol variation start processing of the above-described embodiment. The processing in steps 7518 to 7525 is substantially the same as the processing in steps 5016 to 5023 of the special symbol variation start processing in other application example 8, so the explanation will be omitted here, and the processing in step 7526 will be omitted. move on.
In step 7526, the main CPU 101 executes a process of updating the number of times at the start of fluctuation. Then, the process advances to the next step 7527.

In step 7527, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process at the start of variation. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.
Further, in step 7528, which is proceeded to when it is determined in the above step 7514 that the value of the first pending number counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 101, based on the fact that the variable display is not performed, Executes customer waiting determination processing for display. Specifically, the main CPU 101 measures the time during which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined customer waiting time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner. Assuming that the system is in a customer waiting state, a customer waiting command for displaying a customer waiting screen on the performance display device 21 is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the special symbol variation start process ends.

Next, the above-mentioned step 7512 or 7526 for updating the number of fluctuation start times will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 135.
In step 7550, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current time is in a time-saving game state (that is, whether it is in a first low-probability time-saving game state, a second low-probability time-saving game state, or a high-probability time-saving game state). ). If it is determined that the time saving game state is not in progress, the process advances to step 7553. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving game state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 7551.
In step 7551, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving counter by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 7552.

In step 7552, the main CPU 101 stores a time saving number command indicating the current count value of the time saving number counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the current count value of the time saving number counter (that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the time saving gaming state being set ends) is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 7553.
In step 7553, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the present moment is in a high probability game state (that is, whether or not it is in a high probability time saving game state). If it is determined that the game is not in a high probability gaming state, the process of updating the number of times at the start of fluctuation is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a high probability gaming state, the process advances to the next step 7554.

In step 7554, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the high accuracy counter by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 7555.
In step 7555, the main CPU 101 stores a high accuracy number command indicating the current count value of the high accuracy number counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the current count value of the high probability number counter (that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the high probability gaming state being set ends) is transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the process of updating the number of times at the start of variation ends.

Next, the variation start game state setting process in step 7513 or 7527 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 136.
In step 7570, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current time-saving gaming state is in progress. If it is determined that the time saving game state is not in progress, the process advances to step 7573. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving game state is in progress, the process advances to the next step 7571.
In step 7571, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time saving number counter is "0". If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step 7573. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to the next step 7572.

In step 7572, the main CPU 101 selects a time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game is in the first time-saving game state (a first time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game is in the first time-saving game state, and a second time-saving game flag indicating that the time-saving game is in the second time-saving game state). status flag). That is, the gaming state is set to a non-time saving gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 7573.
In step 7573, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is a high probability game state. If it is determined that the high probability game state is not in progress, the process advances to step 7576. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in a high probability gaming state, the process advances to the next step 7574.

In step 7574, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the high accuracy number counter is "0". If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process advances to step 7576. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to the next step 7575.
In step 7575, the main CPU 101 turns off the high probability gaming flag indicating the high probability gaming state. That is, the gaming state is set to a low probability gaming state. Then, the process advances to the next step 7576.

In step 7576, the main CPU 101 determines whether the gaming state is changed (that is, if the non-time-saving gaming state is set by the processing in step 7572 described above, or if the low probability gaming state is set by the processing in step 7575 described above). case), a state transition command indicating this is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the fluctuation start game state setting process is ended.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the variable display of the special symbol stops), the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time. A special symbol fluctuation stopping process is executed, but since this processing is almost the same as the special symbol fluctuation stopping process of the pachinko machine P according to another application example 8, a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the post-stop process executed after the end of the special symbol variation stop process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 137.
In step 7600, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first special symbol stop display time (first special symbol stop display time) set in a predetermined first stop display time timer counter in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing has elapsed. Determine. If it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to step 7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7601.
In step 7601, the main CPU 101 determines whether the second special symbol stop display time (second special symbol stop display time) set in a predetermined second stop display time timer counter in the special symbol fluctuation stop processing has elapsed. Determine. Then, when it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has not elapsed, the post-stop process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special figure stop display time has elapsed, the process advances to the next step 7602.

In step 7602, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stopped and displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol (that is, it is a losing symbol), the process advances to step 7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot, the process advances to the next step 7603.
In step 7603, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, that is, whether or not another special symbol that is different from the stopped and displayed special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed is the jackpot symbol X1, X2, or If the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol X4, X5 or X6, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If it is determined that there is no special symbol being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step 7605. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to the next step 7604.

In step 7604, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed. Specifically, if the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is a losing symbol, the losing symbol stored in the first special symbol temporary storage area or the second special symbol temporary storage area is also stored in step 7508 or When rewriting is performed in step 7522, the losing symbols stored in the rewritten first special symbol temporary storage area or second special symbol temporary storage area are handled even if the variable time has not elapsed. Make the special symbol display device stop display. That is, when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z1 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 30 even if the variation time of this first special symbol has not elapsed. do. In addition, when the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the losing symbol Z2 is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 31 even if the variable time of this second special symbol has not elapsed. do. Then, the process advances to the next step 7605.

In step 7605, the main CPU 101 turns off the high-precision game flag and the time-saving game flag (first time-saving game flag, second time-saving game flag). Note that when the high-precision game flag and the time-saving game flag are off, the main CPU 101 does not perform any processing. Then, the process advances to the next step 7606.
In step 7606, the main CPU 101 sets the opening time, which is the waiting time set at the start of the special game, in the opening time timer counter, and sends an opening command indicating that the opening process is started to the performance transmission data storage area. to be memorized. Further, the number of rounds during the special game to be executed after the opening time has elapsed is set in the round number storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Further, in step 7607, which is proceeded to when it is determined in step 7602 that the symbol is not a jackpot, the main CPU 101 performs a stop display time elapsed count update process to update the count values of various counters at the time when the stop display time has elapsed. Execute. Then, the process advances to the next step 7608.
In step 7608, the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed to set the game state when the stop display time has elapsed. Then, the post-stop processing ends.

Next, the stop display time elapsed count updating process in step 7607 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 138.
In step 7630, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current time is in the normal gaming state or the second low probability time saving gaming state. Then, if it is determined that the game is neither in the normal game state nor in the second low probability time-saving game state, the process of updating the number of times the stop display time has elapsed is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is in the normal game state or the second low probability time-saving game state, the process advances to the next step 7631.
In step 7631, the main CPU 101 decrements the count value of the time saving activation number counter by 1. Then, the process advances to the next step 7632.
In step 7632, the main CPU 101 stores a time saving activation number command indicating the current count value of the time saving activation number counter in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the current count value of the time-saving activation counter (that is, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time-saving game state is set) is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. Then, the process of updating the number of times the stop display time has elapsed ends.

Next, the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed in step 7608 described above will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 139.
In step 7650, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time-saving activation count reaching flag indicating that the time-saving activation count has been reached is on. If it is determined that it is on, the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off), the process advances to the next step 7651.
In step 7651, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving game state is in progress (that is, whether the first time-saving game flag or the second time-saving game flag is on). Then, when it is determined that the time-saving game state is in progress, the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving game state is not in progress, the process advances to the next step 7652.

In step 7652, the main CPU 101 determines whether the count value of the time saving activation number counter is "0". If it is determined that the value is not "0", the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is "0", the process advances to the next step 7653.
In step 7653, the main CPU 101 sets a first low probability time saving gaming state. That is, the first time saving game flag is turned on and the high certainty game flag is turned off. Then, the process advances to the next step 7654.

In step 7654, the main CPU 101 stores a state transition command indicating that the gaming state has been changed to the first low probability time saving gaming state in the performance transmission data storage area. Then, the process advances to the next step 7655.
In step 7655, the main CPU 101 turns on the time saving activation count reaching flag. Then, the game state setting process when the stop display time has elapsed is ended.

Next, the special game ending process that is executed when all the round games are finished (that is, when the special game ends) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 140.
The process in step 7670 is almost the same as the process in step 5400 of the special game end process in other application example 8, so the explanation is omitted here and the process proceeds to step 7671.
In step 7671, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (“900” corresponding to 900 times of time saving activation) in the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 7672.

Since the process of step 7672 is almost the same as step 5402 of the special game end process in other application example 8, the explanation is omitted here and the process proceeds to step 7673.
In step 7673, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving number counter and the high probability number of times counter to a predetermined value according to the set gaming state (if the second low probability time saving gaming state is set, the time saving number counter is set to "100"). , when the high probability time saving game state is set, the time saving number counter and the high probability number counter are both set to "100"). In addition, the main CPU 101 stores a special game end setting command indicating the game state set after the special game ends, the value set in the time saving number counter and the high accuracy number counter in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the game state after the end of the special game, the values set in the time saving number counter and the high accuracy number counter are transmitted to the sub control board 300. Then, the process advances to the next step 7674.

In step 7674, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the variation counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 7675.
In step 7675, the main CPU 101 determines whether the RAM clear execution before winning flag or the RAM clear non-execution before winning flag is on. Then, when it is determined that none of the flags is on (that is, off), the special game ending process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above-mentioned flag is on, the process advances to the next step 7676.

In step 7676, the main CPU 101 turns off the flags determined to be on in step 7675 (RAM clear execution pre-win flag, RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag). Then, the process advances to the next step 7677.
In step 7677, the main CPU 101 turns off the pre-win after RAM clear execution flag and the pre-win after RAM clear non-execution flag, indicating that the pre-win after RAM clear execution state and the pre-win after RAM clear non-execution state have ended. A pre-winning state end command is stored in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, it is transmitted to the sub control board 300 that the RAM clear execution pre-winning state and the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state have ended. Then, the special game ending process is ended.

Next, the RAM clear processing performed when the RAM is cleared will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 141.
The process in step 7680 is almost the same as the process in step 5500 of the RAM clearing process in Application Example 8, so the explanation is omitted here and the process proceeds to the next step 7681.
In step 7681, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (“900” corresponding to 900 times of time saving activation) in the time saving activation number counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 7682.

The process in step 7682 is almost the same as the process in step 5502 of the RAM clearing process in Application Example 8, so a description thereof will be omitted here. Then, the process advances to the next step 7683.
In step 7683, the main CPU 101 resets (clears to zero) the count value of the variation counter. Then, the process advances to the next step 7684.

In step 7684, the main CPU 101 turns on the pre-win flag after RAM clearing. Moreover, here, if the RAM clear non-execution before winning flag is on, the main CPU 101 turns off the flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 7685.
In step 7685, the main CPU 101 stores a RAM clear post-win pre-win state command indicating that the post-RAM clear pre-win flag is turned on and the RAM clear post-win pre-win state is reached in the effect transmission data storage area. . As a result, the sub control board 300 is informed that the pre-winning state has been reached after the RAM clear has been executed. Then, the RAM clearing process ends.

Next, regarding the RAM clear non-execution power return process that is executed when the power is restored without RAM clear being performed (that is, when the power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being pressed), This will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 142.
In step 7690, the main CPU 101 turns on the RAM clear non-execution before winning flag. Further, here, if the RAM clear execution before winning flag is on, the main CPU 101 turns off the flag. Then, the process advances to the next step 7691.
In step 7691, the main CPU 101 sends a RAM clear non-execution pre-win state command indicating that the RAM clear non-execution pre-win flag is turned on and the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state has entered the production transmission data storage area. to be memorized. As a result, the sub-control board 300 is informed that the state has entered the pre-winning state after the RAM clear has not been executed. Then, the RAM clear non-execution power supply recovery processing is completed.

(Summary of the performance)
Next, regarding the performance executed in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the number of variable displays of the remaining special symbols executed during the high probability time saving game state and the end of the game state ( That is, a number display effect suggesting the remaining time saving number and high probability number), a presentation executed before and after the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, and related to the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state. The explanation will focus on the first low-accuracy, time-saving information suggestion presentation that suggests various information.
(Summary of variable performance)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, similarly to the above-mentioned embodiments, the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 displays a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting prize opening 15. A variable effect is executed to notify the result or the result of the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16 (see FIGS. 143 to 146).

Specifically, in the variable performance, in the center of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21, the game balls are mainly displayed during the set gaming state in the first starting winning hole 15 or the second starting winning hole 16. A fluctuating display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/failure lottery for those whose game ball enters is performed (see FIGS. 143 to 146), and a fluctuating display of the performance pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/failure lottery for those whose game ball does not enter is performed. do not have. Although not particularly shown in the figure, for those who do not receive a game ball, the movement at the center of the display section 21a may be changed at a predetermined display location on the display section 21a (for example, the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display section 21a). A variable display is performed using performance symbols 50 that are extremely smaller in size (a size that is extremely difficult for the player to visually recognize) than the performance symbols 50 to be displayed.
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, during the normal gaming state, an instruction is given to launch the game ball toward the first gaming area 12a, so as long as this instruction is followed, the first starting prize opening 15 A game ball enters the ball. That is, during the normal gaming state, game balls mainly enter the first starting prize opening 15. Therefore, during the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the fluctuating display of the effect symbols 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on the entered ball is displayed at the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21. However, even if a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/failure lottery based on the entered ball is not performed in the center of the display section 21a, and the display section 21a In the upper right corner of the screen, a fluctuating display of performance symbols 50 of extremely small size that is difficult for the player to see is performed.
Furthermore, during the first low probability time saving game state, the second low probability time saving game state, or the high probability time saving game state, an instruction is given to launch the game ball towards the second game area 12b, so according to this instruction, A game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 (normal second starting winning hole 161, specific second starting winning hole 162) as long as there is a game ball. That is, during these gaming states, game balls mainly enter the second starting prize opening 16. Therefore, during these gaming states, when a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, a fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 corresponding to the winning/losing lottery based on the entered ball is displayed on the display section 21a of the performance display device 21. Even though the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the winning/failure lottery based on the entered ball is not performed at the center of the display section 21a, and the display section In the upper left corner of 21a, a fluctuating display is performed using extremely small performance symbols 50 that are difficult for the player to see.

In addition, the mode of the effect symbol 50 that is displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 is different depending on the game state, and in the variable effect, the mode is changed according to the game state being set. A variable display is performed by the effect pattern 50.
Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, for example, the effect pattern 50 that is variably displayed during the normal gaming state is an upright Gothic numeric pattern (hereinafter also referred to as the normal effect pattern). (Refer to FIG. 145(a), FIG. 146(a), etc.), and the effect pattern 50 that is fluctuated and displayed during the high probability time saving game state is an upright Mincho type number pattern (hereinafter also referred to as the high probability time saving effect pattern). (see FIGS. 143(c) to 143(h), etc.), and the performance symbol 50 that is fluctuatingly displayed during the first low probability time saving game state is a numerical symbol in italic Gothic font (hereinafter referred to as the first low probability (also referred to as a time-saving effect pattern) (see FIG. 145(f), FIG. 146(h), etc.). Furthermore, although not particularly shown, the performance symbols 50 that are variably displayed during the second low-probability time-saving game state include numeric symbols with different designs from the normal performance symbols, the high-probability time-saving design, and the first low-probability time-saving design. It has become.
Then, when the game state is changed, the mode of the performance symbol 50 displayed at the center of the display section 21a of the performance display device 21 is also changed accordingly.
Note that the form of the performance symbols 50 is not limited to the above-mentioned content, and it is also possible to provide performance symbols 50 with different display colors, different characters attached, etc. for each game state. good. In addition, a variable display may be performed using the effect symbols 50 in different modes in all game states, or a variable display may be performed using the effect symbols 50 in the same mode in some game states. good.

In addition, the variation effects include a normal loss variation pattern in which the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed as different symbols, and then the result of the lottery is notified that the result is a loss, and the first stop symbol After a reach display is performed in which the same symbol and the second stop symbol are stopped and displayed, a reach development effect that displays a predetermined development effect image (not particularly shown) is executed, and then a win/fail lottery is performed. A reach variation pattern that informs that the result is a jackpot or a loss, and a development that informs that the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot or a loss without performing the reach development effect after the reach display is performed. No reach variation pattern is provided.
In the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the determined variation pattern commands are "00H", "01H", "04H", "05H", "11H", "14H", "21H", "22H". In this case, a variation effect is executed according to the normal loss variation pattern, and the determined variation pattern commands are "02H", "12H", "A2H", "A4H", "A5H", "B2H", "B4H". , "C1H", and "C2H", a variation effect was executed using the no-development reach variation pattern, and the determined variation pattern commands were "03H", "13H", "A3H", and "B3H". In some cases, a variation effect is executed according to a reach variation pattern with development.

Moreover, a plurality of modes are provided for each of the normal loss variation pattern, the reach variation pattern with development, and the reach variation pattern without development.
For example, each of the above-mentioned patterns includes a mode in which a predetermined preview image is displayed in conjunction with the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 50 (a mode in which the preview performance is executed), and a mode in which a predetermined suggestion is displayed when the operation button 9b is pressed. There are provided modes such as a mode in which a notification is performed (a mode in which a button operation effect is executed), a mode in which the accessory effect production device operates in a predetermined manner (a mode in which a role object operation effect is executed), etc.
For example, in the reach variation pattern with development and the reach variation pattern without development, all the effect symbols 50 are temporarily stopped in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol are numbers that are different by 1). A mode in which the variable display is restarted after a temporary stop at a symbol and a temporary stop at a temporary stop symbol where the third stop symbol suggests a temporary stop is performed a predetermined number of times, and then a ready-to-reach display is performed (pseudo continuous (a mode in which the performance is executed), etc. are provided.
For example, in a reach variation pattern with development, after executing a reach development effect in which a predetermined development effect image is displayed, a high expectation indicating that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is higher than that of the predetermined development effect image. A mode of switching to a reach development effect in which a degree development effect image is displayed (a mode of executing a chance-up effect), etc. are provided.
Further, the above-mentioned preview image, operating mode of the accessory production device, number of executions of temporary stop, high expectation development production image, etc. are provided in a plurality of types with different expectations of winning the jackpot.
Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned effects, in addition to displaying images and outputting sounds, the effect lighting device 23 (lamp) may be made to emit light in a predetermined lighting pattern or color.

In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, although not particularly shown, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 has an effect mode in which the above-mentioned pattern modes are associated with each variable pattern command that can be determined. A decision table is stored. When the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control board 300 receives a variation pattern command at the start of variation, it acquires a predetermined performance random number and performs a variation based on the obtained performance random number, the received variation pattern command, and the above-mentioned performance mode determination table. Decide on the mode of production. Then, the variable effect is executed in accordance with this determined mode.

Although not particularly shown, during the second low-probability time-saving game state or the high-probability time-saving game state, the first starting prize opening 15 (basically, the ball will not enter if the ball is launched according to the instructions). The variation that is executed is higher when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 (the starting winning hole where the game ball mainly enters) than when the game ball enters the starting winning hole (starting winning hole). It is set to increase the number of presentation modes (types of presentation performed during the variable presentation). That is, it is set so that more performances can be performed when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 than when the gaming ball enters the first starting winning hole 15.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, during the above-mentioned gaming state, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 more than the case where the gaming ball enters the first starting winning opening 15. In this case, the number of executable effects was increased by increasing the number of variable pattern commands that can be determined, but this is the only way to vary the number of executable effects. It is not something that will be done.
For example, the type of production that is associated with the variable pattern command that can be determined when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 is determined when a gaming ball enters the second starting winning hole 16. By increasing the types of performances associated with variable pattern commands that can be performed, the effect when a game ball enters the second starting winning hole 16 is greater than when the gaming ball enters the first starting winning hole 15. It may be set so that the number of effects that can be executed increases.
In addition, not only during the second low probability time saving gaming state and the high probability time saving gaming state, but also during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the second It may be set so that more performances can be executed when a game ball enters the starting winning hole 16.

(Summary of background image display)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, a background image corresponding to each gaming state is provided, and the corresponding background image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 during each gaming state. It has become.
Specifically, for example, a normal background image corresponding to a normal gaming state (see FIGS. 145(a), 146(a) to (e), etc.), a high probability time saving background image corresponding to a high probability time saving gaming state (see FIGS. 145(a), 146(a) to (e), etc.) 143(a) to (i), etc.), a first low probability time saving background image corresponding to the first low probability time saving gaming state (FIGS. 145(d) to (f), FIGS. 146(f) to (h)) etc.), a second low probability time saving background image (not particularly shown) corresponding to the second low probability time saving gaming state is provided, and the normal background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during the normal gaming state. A high probability time saving background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during the high probability time saving game state, a first low probability time saving background image is displayed on the display unit 21a during the first low probability time saving gaming state, and a second low probability time saving background image is displayed on the display unit 21a. During the low probability time saving game state, a second low probability time saving background image is displayed on the display section 21a. When the gaming state changes, the displayed background image also changes accordingly.

(Summary of number of times display effect)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, during a high probability time saving game state, the remaining number of changes of special symbols (i.e. , the remaining time-saving number and high-accuracy number (hereinafter also referred to as the remaining number of times) are displayed.
Here, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, as the number of times display effect, the first number of times the remaining number of times is continuously suggested from the setting of the high probability time saving game state to the end of the high probability time saving game state. A display effect and a second number of times display effect that can suggest the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, five times) are executed.

(Summary of the first display performance)
When the special game based on the determination of jackpot symbols X1, X2, X4, or A high-accuracy time-saving setting notification (for example, displaying a high-accuracy time-saving setting notification image that says "Super time start!") to notify that the game has been started, and a prompt to perform an operation to launch a game ball toward the second gaming area 12b. An operation notification (for example, display of an operation notification image of "right-handed hit →→→") is performed (see FIG. 143(a)), and the right-handed hit notification lamp HL is lit.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the above-mentioned operation notification image in the operation notification is set to have a higher display priority than the above-mentioned high-accuracy time-saving setting notification image in the high-accuracy time-saving setting notification, The operation notification image is displayed in front of the high-accuracy time-saving setting notification image, overlapping a part of the high-accuracy time-saving setting notification image (that is, a part of the high-accuracy time-saving setting notification image is hidden by the operation notification image). ).
Further, although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, when a predetermined operation notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the operation notification was started, the operation notification ends ("Right (The operation notification image for ``→→→'' is deleted).
In addition, if the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 when the above-mentioned operation notification is not performed during the high probability time saving game state, the operation notification will be executed again. It has become. After the re-operation notification is started, when a predetermined re-operation notification time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time has elapsed, the re-operation notification ends.
In addition, the operation notification or the second operation notification is not only the display of the operation notification image but also the output of a predetermined voice urging the player to hit the game ball toward the second gaming area 12b (for example, "Please hit to the right." This may also be done by outputting audio such as

Then, along with execution of the above-mentioned display, notification, etc., the first number of display effects are started.
Specifically, in the lower left corner of the display section 21a, the initial value of the remaining number of times (that is, the number of changes in the special symbol from the time the high probability time saving game state is set until it ends, in other words, the high probability time saving game state A first remaining number suggestion image "100" suggesting 100, which is the high accuracy number and time saving number) is displayed (see FIG. 143(a)). Thereafter, each time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, at the point when the variable display starts, the first remaining count suggestion image being displayed is updated to correspond to the remaining count at that point in time (Fig. 143). b) to (i), etc.).
Note that the first remaining count suggestion image displayed in the first count display effect is in a display format that is difficult for the player to visually recognize (for example, a size smaller than the effect pattern 50), and furthermore, as described above, Since it is displayed in the lower left corner of the display section 21a, the suggestion of the remaining number of times by the first number of times display effect is difficult for the player who is playing the game to pay close attention to (visually recognize).

Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the total number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol reaches 100, which is the time saving frequency and the high accuracy frequency. Then, the high probability time saving game state is set to end. That is, the remaining number of times will be updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure is executed.
During the high-probability time-saving game state, as described above, the game ball is instructed to be launched toward the second game area 12b, and as long as this instruction is followed, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16. Although the remaining number of times is updated mainly based on the variable display of the second special figure, the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 12a due to an operation error or the like, and the game enters the first starting prize opening 15. Even when a ball enters the ball, the remaining number of times is updated based on the variable display of the first special symbol executed by the ball entering.
Here, as mentioned above, during the high probability time saving game state, the game ball mainly enters the second starting winning hole 16, so when the gaming ball enters the second starting winning hole 16, the entering ball Although the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 based on the above is executed in the center of the display section 21a, even if a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15, the fluctuation display of the performance symbols 50 based on the entering ball is not performed on the display section. The center of 21a is not performed.
Therefore, during the high probability time saving game state, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the effect symbol 50 is displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display section 21a, and the first remaining count suggestion image is updated and displayed. (See FIGS. 143(b) to 143(c), FIG. 143(e), FIG. 143(i), etc.). On the other hand, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, although the variable display of the production symbol 50 is not performed in the center of the display section 21a, the first remaining count suggestion image is updated and displayed (Fig. 143(d), (g), etc.).

(Specific example of the first display performance)
For example, after a high probability time-saving game state is set and the first remaining number suggestion image "100" is displayed, which suggests the initial value of the remaining number of times, 100, the second special symbol will change as the first variation display. It is assumed that the display has been executed.
In this case, when the first variable display of the second special figure is started, the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the second special figure is displayed in a variable manner at the center of the display section 21a. It is executed (see FIG. 143(b)). Since the remaining number of times is 99 due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the first remaining number of times suggestion image "100" being displayed indicates "99 times" which is the remaining number of times at that time. 099" (see FIG. 143(b)). By updating and displaying the first remaining number suggestion image in this way, it is possible to suggest that the remaining number of times is counted down by one each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed.

Further, for example, assume that after the above-described first variable display ends, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed as a second variable display.
In this case, even if the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the second variable display, is started, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is not executed in the center of the display section 21a (FIGS. 143(c) to (d)) reference). However, since the number of remaining times becomes 98 due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first remaining number of times suggestion image "099" being displayed indicates 98 times, which is the remaining number of times at that time. 098" (see FIG. 143(d)). In other words, only the updated display of the first remaining number of times suggestion image is performed while the first variable display is finished and the effect pattern 50 in the center of the display section 21a remains in a stopped state (FIG. 143(c) to 143). (see (d)).

(Summary of second display performance)
As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, it is possible to perform the second number of times display effect when the remaining number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (5 times) in the high probability time saving game state. There is. In other words, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the second display effect can be executed with the execution of the variable display after the 95th time. Therefore, after the start of the 95th variable display, the second number display effect can be executed in parallel to the first number display effect that has been started previously.
In the second number display effect, each time the variable display of the special symbol is performed, at the time when the variable display starts, it is superimposed on the effect symbol 50 in the center of the display section 21a to indicate the remaining number of times at the time. The second remaining count suggestion image is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) (see FIGS. 143(e) to 143(i), etc.).
The second remaining count suggestion image displayed in the second count display effect is in a display format that is easy for the player to see (for example, a size larger than the effect pattern 50), and furthermore, as described above, Since it is displayed in the center of the display section 21a, the suggestion of the remaining number of times by the second number of times display effect is easily noticed (visually recognized) by the player who is playing the game. As a result, the remaining number of times until the end of the high probability time saving game state can be appealed to the player in a very impressive manner.

Here, as mentioned above, although the remaining number of times is updated when either the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the first start during the high probability time saving game state Even if the game ball enters the winning hole 15 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the performance pattern 50 is not performed and the performance pattern 50 remains stopped and displayed.
Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, only the second remaining count suggestion image is displayed in the center of the display section 21a even though the production symbol 50 remains stopped, and the game This will give some viewers a sense of discomfort in terms of performance.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, after determining which of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is changed. Only when executed, a second remaining count suggestion image is displayed by the second count display effect, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, a second remaining count suggestion image is displayed by the second count display effect. is set not to occur. As a result, only when the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 is performed, the second remaining number suggestion image is displayed according to the second number of display performance, giving the player a feeling of discomfort in the performance. can be prevented from giving.

(Specific example of second display performance)
(Specific example 1)
For example, the variable display of the second special figure is executed as the 95th variable display during the high probability time saving game state, and after the 95th variable display is finished, the variable display of the second special figure is executed as the 96th variable display. It is assumed that the variable display of the second special figure is executed as the 97th variable display after the 96th variable display is completed.
In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 95th variable display, is started, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the second special symbol is started in the center of the display section 21a. It is executed (see FIG. 143(e)). Then, since the remaining number of times is 5 due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the first remaining number of times suggestion image is updated and displayed to "005" suggesting the remaining number of times at that time, which is 5 times. At the same time, a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a numeric image of "5") suggesting the remaining number of times of 5 is displayed in the center of the display section 21a for a predetermined time (see FIG. 143(e)). Thereafter, when the variable time has elapsed, the 95th variable display ends and the performance symbol 50 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 143(f)).
Similarly to the 95th variable display, when the 96th variable display of the second special figure starts, an effect corresponding to the second special figure is displayed in the center of the display section 21a. A variable display of the symbol 50 is executed (see FIG. 143(g)). Since the remaining number of times is 4 due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the first remaining number of times suggestion image is updated to "004" which suggests the remaining number of times at that time, which is 4 times. At the same time, a second remaining number suggestion image (for example, a numeric image of "4") suggesting the remaining number of times of 4 is displayed in the center of the display section 21a for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 143(g)). Thereafter, when the variable time has elapsed, the 96th variable display ends and the effect pattern 50 is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 143(h)).
Furthermore, similarly to the 95th and 96th variable display, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the 97th variable display, starts, the effect pattern 50 in the center of the display section 21a changes accordingly. display, update display of the first remaining number of times suggestion image to "003" (an aspect that suggests 3 times which is the remaining number of times at the time), and a second remaining number of times suggesting the remaining number of times of 3 times in the center of the display section 21a. A number suggestion image (for example, a number image of "3") is displayed for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 143(i)).

(Specific example 2)
For example, although the second special figure's variable display is executed as the 95th variable display during a high probability time-saving game state, after the 95th variable display is finished, the 96th variable display is the 96th variable display. It is assumed that after the display is executed and the 96th variable display ends, the variable display of the second special figure is executed as the 97th variable display.
In this case, various displays in the 95th variation display are the same as those in the above-described specific example 1 (see FIG. 144(a)).
After that, the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the 96th variable display, is started, but even if the variable display is started, the variable display of the performance symbol 50 is not executed in the center of the display section 21a, and the 95th variable display is Depending on the manner in which the variable display ends, the effect pattern 50 remains stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 144(b) to 144(d)). However, due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the remaining number of times will be 4, so the first remaining number of times suggestion image will be updated and displayed to "004", which suggests the remaining number of times at that time, which is 4 times. However, the second remaining number of times suggestion image suggesting the remaining number of times of four times is not displayed by the second number of times display effect (see FIGS. 144(c) to 144(d)). That is, after the 95th variation display ends and the effect pattern 50 in the center of the display section 21a remains in a stopped display state, the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed, and the first remaining number suggestion image is updated. It will only be displayed.
Thereafter, when the variable display of the second special figure, which is the 97th variable display, starts, the variable display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the second special figure is executed in the center of the display section 21a. (See FIG. 144(e)). Then, as the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the remaining number of times becomes 3, so the first remaining number of times suggestion image is updated and displayed to "003", which suggests 3 times, which is the remaining number of times at that point. At the same time, a second remaining number suggestion image suggesting the remaining number of times of three is displayed in the center of the display section 21a for a predetermined time (see FIG. 144(e)).

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, only when the variable display of the second special symbol that is mainly executed is executed during the high probability time saving game state, the A variable display of the effect symbols 50 is executed. Then, only when the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is executed, the second remaining count suggestion image is displayed by the second count display effect, and the first special figure is changed. When the display is executed and the variable display of the effect pattern 50 is not executed, the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed by the second number display effect.
Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in terms of performance, such as the second remaining count suggestion image being displayed even though the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 is not executed at the center of the display section 21a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, during the high probability time-saving game state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (effect In either case (when the variable display of the symbol 50 is executed), the first remaining count suggestion image is updated and displayed.
As a result, even if the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second remaining number suggestion image is not displayed, a situation may arise in which the remaining number of times until the high probability time-saving gaming state ends cannot be grasped at all. can be prevented.

(Summary of performance when the first time-saving game state is set)
Next, after the normal game state or the second low-probability time-saving game state is set, the special symbol is displayed for the 900th time without winning the jackpot, and when the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. An overview of the performance will be explained.

(1) When the first low probability time-saving game state is set because the 900th variable display of the first special symbol has ended and the stop display time of the first special symbol has elapsed.As described above, the first special symbol The 900th variation display in the figure is a variation in which the first low probability time-saving game state is set, and the normal game state is maintained from the start of the variation display until the stop display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. When the stop display time has elapsed, the first low probability time saving gaming state is set (switching to the first low probability time saving gaming state).
Therefore, at the start of the 900th variable display by this first special figure, the normal background image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (see FIGS. 145(a) and (b)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the normal performance pattern (performance pattern 50) is started superimposed on the normal background image (see FIG. 145(b)).

Then, when the 900th variable display of the first special symbol ends and the stop display time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the first low probability time-saving game state is set as described above. At this time, a state transition command indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has been set is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and the sub CPU 301 selects the first low probability time saving gaming state based on the reception of the state transition command. While recognizing that the time-saving gaming state has been set, the right-hand hitting notification lamp HL is turned on.

After the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set as described above, the ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 (the starting winning opening into which game balls mainly enter during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state). When the variable display (variable effect) of the second special figure based on the game ball that has been played is started or the customer waiting state is started, various effects based on the settings of the first low probability time-saving game state are executed.
Specifically, the displayed normal background image is switched to the first low-probability time-saving background image, and a first low-probability time-saving setting notification (for example, "Lucky ``Time Start!'' is displayed, and the displayed normal effect pattern is switched to the first low probability time saving effect pattern. In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, even during the first low probability time saving game state, a first number display effect indicating the remaining number of times until the first low probability time saving game state ends A two-times display performance is executed, and a first remaining number-of-numbers suggestion image suggesting the initial value of 1200 remaining times is displayed at the time when the first low probability time-saving game state is set. Furthermore, an operation notification (display of an operation notification image of "Right hit→→→") is performed to prompt the user to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b (see FIG. 145(d)). .
After receiving the state transition command indicating that the first low probability time saving game state has been set, the sub CPU 301 determines when the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts based on the game ball that entered the second starting winning hole 16. By receiving the given variation pattern command or by receiving the customer waiting command, control is performed to execute the above-mentioned performance.
In addition, the control to execute the above-mentioned performance may be performed by receiving a fluctuation pattern command determined at the time of starting fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the game ball that entered the first starting winning hole 15.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, similarly to the high probability time saving game state, the above-mentioned operation notification image in the operation notification is the above-mentioned first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification image in the first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification. The display priority is set higher than that of the first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification image, and the operation notification image is displayed superimposed on a part of the first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification image ( In other words, a part of the first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification image is hidden by the operation notification image.
Although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, similarly to the high probability time saving game state, when a predetermined operation notification time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the operation notification was started, The operation notification ends (the operation notification image of "Right hit→→→" is deleted).
In addition, similar to the high probability time saving game state, if the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 when the above-mentioned operation notification is not performed during the first low probability time saving game state, , the operation notification is executed again. After the re-operation notification is started, when a predetermined re-operation notification time (for example, 3 seconds) shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time has elapsed, the re-operation notification ends.

(2) During the 900th fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol, the 1st low When a stochastic time-saving gaming state is set (in the case of the irregular case mentioned above)
In this case, as in (1), at the start of the 900th variable display by the first special symbol, the normal background image is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (Fig. 146(a) and ( b)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the normal performance pattern (performance pattern 50) starts to be superimposed on the normal background image (see FIG. 146(b)).

Here, in the case of (2), during the 900th variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that was performed earlier ended and the stop display time has elapsed, so the second special symbol As the special figure stop display time elapses, the first low probability time saving game state is set at that point. That is, the first low probability time saving game state is set even though the 900th variable display of the first special symbol is in progress.
At this time, similarly to (1), a state transition command indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has been set is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300, and the sub CPU 301 receives the state transition command. Based on the reception, it is recognized that the first low probability time-saving game state has been set, and the right-hand hit notification lamp HL is turned on even though the 900th variation display by the first special symbol is in progress.

On the other hand, although the first low-probability time-saving game state is set due to the elapse of the stop display time of the second special symbol, the 900th variable display by the first special symbol continues to be executed, so this first low probability time-saving game state is set. At the time of setting the probability time saving game state, the normal background image being displayed is switched to the first low probability time saving background image, the normal production symbol being displayed is switched to the first low probability time saving symbol, and the first low probability time saving setting is performed. If notification (displaying the first low-accuracy time saving setting notification image), operation notification (displaying the operation notification image), displaying the first remaining count suggestion image, etc. is performed, even though the fluctuation effect is being executed. The contents of various performances will be changed, resulting in a feeling of discomfort in the performances.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the first low probability time-saving game state is set due to the elapse of the stop display time of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, the corresponding At this point, the right-handed notification lamp HL is turned on, but various effects based on the settings of the first low probability time saving gaming state as described above are not executed, and are not performed before the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state. Various effects and displays (display of a normal background image, variable display of normal effect symbols, etc.) are set to continue (see FIGS. 146(b) to (e)). Thereby, even if the first low probability time-saving game state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned performance from causing an unnatural feeling.

Then, as mentioned above, the first low probability time saving game state is set, and after the 900th fluctuating display by the first special symbol is finished, the second starting prize opening 16 (mainly during the first low probability time saving game state) When the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol based on the game ball that enters the starting prize opening where the game ball enters (starting prize opening where the game ball enters) or when the customer waits, the first Various effects based on the settings of the low-probability time-saving game state (switching the normal background image to the first low-probability time-saving background image, first low-probability time-saving setting notification, operation notification, changing the normal effect pattern to the first low-probability time-saving effect pattern) switching, displaying the first remaining number suggestion image, etc.) are executed (see FIGS. 146(f) to (h)).
Similarly to (1), after receiving the state transition command indicating that the first low probability time saving gaming state has been set, the sub CPU 301 receives the second game ball based on the game ball that entered the second starting prize opening 16. Control is performed to execute the above-mentioned effects by receiving a variation pattern command determined at the start of variation of special symbols or by receiving a customer waiting command.
Similarly to (1), the control to execute the above-mentioned performance is performed by receiving the fluctuation pattern command determined at the time of the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol based on the game ball that entered the first starting winning hole 15. It's okay.

Furthermore, the mode of the operation notification executed in (2) is the same as the operation notification in (1). Specifically, a part of the first low-accuracy time-saving setting notification image is hidden by the operation notification image. In addition, when a predetermined operation notification time has passed after the operation notification starts, the operation notification ends, and when the above-mentioned operation notification is not performed, the game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15. If so, the operation notification is executed again. When a predetermined re-operation notification time shorter than the above-mentioned operation notification time elapses after the re-operation notification is started, the re-operation notification ends.

Furthermore, if the first low-probability time-saving game state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case like (2), the above-mentioned operation notification cannot be performed at that point even if the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. It may also be executed.
If the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set due to the occurrence of an irregular case, various performances and displays that were performed before the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will continue, so the player cannot Although it is difficult to grasp that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state has been set, by executing the above-mentioned operation notification, the player can be notified that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state has been set in the above case as well. It can make you notice.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the operation notification (display of the operation notification image) is executed based on the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state, and the operation notification is performed from the start of the operation notification. When the time elapses, the operation notification ends. As a result, when the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the player can be reliably encouraged to launch the game ball toward the second gaming area 12b, and the results of the winning/losing lottery can be determined. It is possible to prevent as much as possible a situation in which the visibility of performances that are of high interest to players, such as fluctuating performances to be notified, is obstructed by operation notifications.
In addition, when the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 when the above-mentioned operation notification is not performed during the first low probability time-saving game state, the operation notification will be executed again. ing. As a result, in the first low-probability time-saving game state, a player who is inappropriately launching a game ball (launching a game ball toward the first gaming area 12a) can be told to properly launch a game ball (launching a game ball toward the first gaming area 12a). It is possible to encourage the player to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b.
In addition, when a second operation notification is executed, the second operation notification ends when the second operation notification time elapses from the start of the second operation notification, and the second operation notification time is shorter than the above operation notification time. It has become. As a result, when the operation notification is executed again, the visibility of the performance that is of high interest to the player is improved even more than when the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time-saving gaming state is executed. This makes it easier to prevent situations that would otherwise be hindered.

(Modified example regarding operation notification in the first low probability time saving game state)
The re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is a predetermined variable time that can be determined in the gaming state (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state) (the variation time that can be determined in the first low probability time saving gaming state, the variation time that is most likely to be determined in the first low probability time saving gaming state, etc.).

Specifically, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is most likely to be determined when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15 during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. It may also be set to be shorter than the variable time of "3 seconds", which has a high degree of stability. When set in this way, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and the special symbol variable display and variable performance are executed and the operation notification is executed again, the second operation notification will be executed again. It is possible to prevent the operation notification from interfering with the notification of the result of the lottery based on the variable performance.

Further, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low probability time saving gaming state may be any variable time (3 seconds, 15 seconds, 20 seconds) that can be determined when a loss or jackpot occurs during the first low probability time saving gaming state. It may be set to be shorter than (seconds). Even when set in this way, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result of the lottery based on the variable performance from being disturbed by the notification of the second operation.

Also, for example, the re-operation notification time in the first low probability time saving gaming state is longer than the variable time that can be determined when a loss occurs during the first low probability time saving gaming state, and is determined when a jackpot is achieved. It may be set to be shorter than the fluctuation time. When set in this way, it is possible to prevent the notification of a jackpot due to a fluctuating effect that requires notification to the player from being interrupted by a second operation notification, while also providing a notification to the player in the second gaming area. It is possible to secure enough time to encourage the game ball to be launched toward the ball 12b.

Further, for example, when the re-operation notification time in the first low probability time saving game state is set to be shorter than a predetermined variable time that can be determined during the first low probability time saving gaming state, the variable time is determined. When the variable effect is executed and the operation notification is executed again, various effects indicating the expectation level of winning the jackpot are executed during the above-mentioned variable effect until the re-operation notification time elapses. (For example, a preview effect in which a predetermined preview image is displayed, a pending display effect in which a predetermined pending image is displayed based on the pending memory) is executed after the re-operation notification time has elapsed during the above-mentioned variable effects. The various effects described above may be executed so that the various effects suggest that the expectation level of winning the jackpot is higher.
More specifically, for example, during the above-mentioned fluctuating performance, a preview image with relatively low expectations for winning a jackpot may be displayed until the re-operation notification time elapses, but the above-mentioned fluctuating performance After the re-operation notification time has elapsed, a preview image with a relatively high expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed.
Further, for example, although a predetermined pending image may be displayed until the re-operation notification time elapses during the above-mentioned fluctuating performance, after the re-operation notification time has elapsed during the above-mentioned fluctuating performance, The pending image being displayed may be changed to a pending image that has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than the pending image.
In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a performance in which the expectation of winning a jackpot is high is interrupted by a second operation notification and the player's interest is reduced.

In addition, the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state and the operation notification again are based on the variable display of the effect symbol 50 executed during the variable effect and the various effects that suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot described above. The display priority may also be increased.
For example, if an operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state or a second operation notification is executed at the same time as various effects that suggest the performance symbol 50 or the expectation level of winning the jackpot, the operation In such a way that the notification image is displayed in front of the production pattern 50 and the images related to the various effects described above, superimposed on these images (that is, the operation notification image displays the performance pattern 50 and at least one of the images related to the various effects described above). ) so that the part is hidden.
In this case, the player can be reliably encouraged to launch the game ball toward the second game area 12b.

Further, the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time saving game state and the operation notification again may be in the same manner or may be in different manners.
As different aspects, (1) an operation notification image is displayed in the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time-saving game state, and a predetermined audio output and a predetermined background are displayed in addition to the display of the operation notification image in the second operation notification. Displaying an image; (2) displaying a predetermined operation notification image in the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time saving game state; and in the second operation notification, the operation based on the setting of the first low probability time saving game state; (3) displaying an operation notification image that is easier for the player to watch than the operation notification image displayed in the notification (for example, a large size image, an image with violent movement, etc.); (3) a first low probability time-saving game state; In the operation notification based on the settings, a predetermined sound is output, and in the second operation notification, a sound that the player can easily hear (for example, Examples include outputting high-volume audio, high-pitched audio, etc.).
In this case, it is possible to enhance the function of alerting the user by the second operation notification than the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state.

In addition, the operation notification in the first low probability time saving game state was configured to end when the operation notification time has elapsed from the start of the operation notification, but is not limited to this, for example, when a predetermined number of games The game may end when end conditions such as the ball being launched and a predetermined number of game balls being received into the outlet 19 are met. Similarly, the operation notification again may be terminated when these termination conditions are satisfied.
In addition, the re-operation notification in the first low probability time saving gaming state was to be executed when a game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 and a variable display of special symbols (variable effect) is started, or when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 while the special symbol variable display (variable effect) is being executed. A member (for example, a general prize opening provided in the first gaming area 12a) that can detect that a game ball has entered and storage has been carried out, and that the game ball has entered the first gaming area 12a, The execution may be performed when a re-execution condition is satisfied, such as that a re-execution condition is detected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, in addition to the above-mentioned operation notification, based on the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state, there is also a notification that the first low probability time saving gaming state is set. 1 low-probability time-saving setting notification (displaying the first low-probability time-saving setting notification image), lighting of the right-hand hitting notification lamp HL, etc. Processing and control similar to operation notification based on settings or re-operation notification may be performed.
For example, the first low-probability time-saving setting notification and the lighting of the right-handed notification lamp HL that are executed based on the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state end after a predetermined execution time has elapsed, and the game is transferred to the first starting prize opening 15. The process may be executed again when a ball enters the ball, and terminated when a predetermined re-execution time has elapsed. Furthermore, the execution time and re-execution time may be set in the same manner as in the modification regarding the operation notification time and re-operation notification time described above.
In addition, as notifications, effects, etc. executed based on the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state, effects suggesting that the first low probability time saving gaming state has been set are executed using predetermined characters, icons, etc. Regarding the production, the same processing and control as the operation notification based on the setting of the first low probability time saving game state and the re-operation notification may be performed in the same way as described above.

Further, the above-described operation notification and second operation notification may be performed not only in the high probability time saving game state and the first low probability time saving game state but also in the second low probability time saving game state.
In addition, when the high probability time saving game state, the first low probability time saving game state, and the second low probability time saving game state are completed and the normal game state is set, the game ball is launched toward the first game area 12a. An operation notification (for example, displaying an operation notification image of "←←← left hit") that prompts you to perform the operation is performed for a predetermined operation notification time, and when the operation notification is not performed in the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16, the re-operation notification may be performed for a predetermined re-operation notification time.
Further, the operation notification time may be the same time in any of the game states in which the operation notification is performed, or may be different times depending on the game state in which the operation notification is performed. Similarly, the re-operation notification time may be the same time in any gaming state in which the re-operation notification is executed, or may be a different time depending on the gaming state in which the re-operation notification is executed.
These operation notifications and re-operation notifications may also be set in the same manner as in the above-mentioned modification.

(Summary of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation)
The first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is performed when the RAM is cleared and is in the pre-winning state or the RAM is not cleared and is in the pre-winning state (that is, between when the power is restored and when the first jackpot is won) is executed, and status information indicating whether the execution point is in the RAM clear post-execution pre-winning state or RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state, information on the remaining time saving number of times until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, etc. , which suggests various information related to the setting of the first low probability time saving gaming state.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, when the pachinko machine P enters the customer waiting state, a customer waiting screen based on the customer waiting state is displayed on the display section 21a of the effect display device 21 (FIG. 147(a) (See ~(d)). Then, while this customer waiting screen is being displayed and the RAM is cleared and is in the pre-winning state or the RAM is not cleared and is in the pre-winning state, a predetermined operation (provided on the pachinko machine P that the player can operate) is performed. The first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is performed each time an operation is performed using the device (for example, the operation button 9b is pressed). In this first low-accuracy, time-saving information suggestion presentation, an image of a box with a "?" mark on the front is displayed, and then the image switches to an image of the top of the box being opened, and an image of the contents popping out from inside the box. is now displayed (see FIGS. 147(c) to (d)).
Examples of images of the contents popping out of the box are: white medals popping out 1, bronze medals popping out 2, silver medals popping out 3, gold medals popping out 4, a lot of bronze medals popping out 5, a lot of bronze medals popping out A total of seven types are provided, including a mode 6 in which a silver medal pops out and a mode 7 in which a large amount of gold medals pops out, and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed by any one of the modes.

(Summary of determining the mode of first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation)
As shown in FIG. 148, the sub-ROM 302 of the sub-control board 300 in another application example 13 has a memory for determining whether to execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect according to any of aspects 1 to 7. A first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance mode determination table is stored.
This first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance mode determination table includes the state at the time of execution of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance (the pre-winning state after RAM clear execution or the pre-winning state after RAM clear non-execution), and the state when the power is restored. The number of variations of the special symbol performed from the time of execution to the relevant execution time, the count value of the time-saving activation number counter at the time of execution (the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set), and the predetermined An execution mode of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is determined in association with each performance random number obtained within the numerical range (for example, 0 to 249).
Then, when the operation button 9b is pressed while in the customer waiting state and the RAM clear execution pre-win state or the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state, the sub CPU 301 of the sub control board 300 operates as described above. In addition to obtaining a production random number of 1 from the numerical range, the state at the time, the number of changes in the special symbol since the power was restored, the count value of the time-saving activation counter, the obtained production random number, and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion Based on the presentation mode determination table, any of modes 1 to 7 is determined as the mode of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation. Then, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed in the determined manner.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, aspects 2, 3, and 4 are used to suggest the possibility that RAM clearing is not executed at the time of recovery from power failure, and these are aspects By executing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to 2, it is suggested that there is a low possibility that RAM clearing has not been executed when the power is restored, and according to aspect 3, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed. By this, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the RAM clear has not been executed when the power is restored, and by executing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 4, it is suggested that the RAM clear has not been executed when the power is restored. It is predetermined that a message indicating that the execution has not been executed (that it has been determined that the execution has not been executed) is specified in advance.
In addition, Aspect 5, Aspect 6, and Aspect 7 suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set is less than the predetermined number of times (300 times in other application example 13). By executing the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 5, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set is less than 300. It is suggested that the possibility is low, and by executing the first low probability time saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 6, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set is less than 300. It is suggested that the possibility is high, and by executing the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 7, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set is less than 300. It is predetermined that a message indicating that the number of times has occurred (that it has been determined that the number of times has occurred less than 300 times) is indicated in advance.
It is predetermined in advance that no particular suggestion will be made by executing the first low probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 1.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, although not particularly shown in the figure, a RAM clear execution pre-winning state command indicating that the pre-winning state after execution of RAM clearing is sent from the main control board 100. A RAM clear non-execution pre-win state command is sent from the main control board 100 to the sub control board 300 to indicate that the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state is reached, and the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state command is sent to the sub control board 300, indicating that the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state is reached. information is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303 in the sub control board 300. Thereby, the sub CPU 301 is able to grasp whether the execution time point of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect is the RAM clear execution pre-win state or the RAM clear non-execution pre-win state.
Further, although not particularly illustrated, the sub-control board 300 is provided with a counter (consisting of a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303) for counting the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored. This counter is cleared to zero when receiving a pre-winning state command after execution of RAM clear or a pre-winning state command after non-execution of RAM clear from the main control board 100 (that is, when the power is restored), and receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 100. It is incremented by 1 each time the variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is started. As a result, the sub CPU 301 is able to grasp the number of times the special symbol has changed (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the power was restored) from when the power was restored until the time when the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance was executed. ing.
In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. The count value is transmitted from the control board 100 to the sub-control board 300, and although not particularly shown, the count value is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-RAM 303 in the sub-control board 300. Thereby, the sub CPU 301 can grasp the count value of the time saving activation number counter (the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving game state is set) at the time of execution of the first low probability time saving information suggestion performance. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 148, according to the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance mode determination table, the execution time point of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is in the state after RAM clearing and before winning, and after the power is restored. When the number of variations of the special symbol is the first specific number (1 to 100 times in other application example 13), mode 1 (decision probability is 96.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 1. 5%), aspect 3 (decision probability is 0.5%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 1%), or aspect 6 (decision probability is 0.5%). In this case, aspect 4 and aspect 7 are not determined.
In this case, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 300 or more.

As shown in FIG. 148, the execution point of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is the pre-winning state after the RAM clear is executed, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power is restored is the second specified number (Other application example 13 101 times or more), when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (decision probability is 94.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 2%), mode 3 (decision probability is 1%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 1.5%), or aspect 6 (decision probability is 1%) is determined. At this time, aspects 4 and 7 are not determined either.
In addition, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 1 to 299, mode 1 (decision probability is 91.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 2%), mode 3 (decision probability is 1%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 2.5%), aspect 6 (decision probability is 2%), or aspect 7 (decision probability is 1%). At this time, aspect 4 is not determined.
Further, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 0, mode 1 (decision probability is 100%) is determined. At this time, aspects 2 to 7 are not determined.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the execution time of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is in the pre-winning state after RAM clearing is not executed, and the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored is 1 to 100 times. , when the count value of the time saving activation counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (decision probability is 91%), mode 2 (decision probability is 3%), mode 3 (decision probability is 2%), mode 4 (decision probability is 3%), mode 3 (decision probability is 2%), mode 4 (decision probability is 3%) (probability is 1%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 1%), or aspect 6 (decision probability is 0.5%). At this time, aspect 7 is not determined.
In addition, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 1 to 299, mode 1 (decision probability is 92.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 3%), mode 3 (decision probability (Decision probability is 2%), Aspect 4 (Decision probability is 1%), Aspect 5 (Decision probability is 1.5%), Aspect 6 (Decision probability is 1%), or Aspect 7 (Decision probability is 0.5%). be done.
Further, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 0, mode 1 (decision probability is 100%) is determined. At this time, modes 2 to 7 are not determined.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the execution time of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is in the pre-winning state after RAM clearing has not been executed, and the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored is 101 times or more, When the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 300 or more, mode 1 (decision probability is 87.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 4%), mode 3 (decision probability is 3%), mode 4 ( (decision probability is 2%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 2%), or aspect 6 (decision probability is 1.5%). At this time, aspect 7 is not determined.
In addition, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 1 to 299, mode 1 (decision probability is 85.5%), mode 2 (decision probability is 4%), mode 3 (decision probability (decision probability is 3%), aspect 4 (decision probability is 2%), aspect 5 (decision probability is 2.5%), aspect 6 (decision probability is 2%), or aspect 7 (decision probability is 1%) is determined. .
Further, in the above case, when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 0, mode 1 (decision probability is 100%) is determined. At this time, aspects 2 to 7 are not determined.

Here, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the count value of the time saving activation number counter becomes 0 from the time when the first low probability time saving game state is set until winning the jackpot. In other words, the count value of the time-saving activation counter becomes 0 during the first low-probability time-saving gaming state, and during the normal gaming state that is set after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state ends without winning a jackpot. This is until you win the jackpot. Therefore, during these times, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect is always executed in the first mode.

In addition, in FIG. 148, the mode of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance, the state at the time of execution of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance (pre-winning state after RAM clear execution, pre-winning state after RAM clear non-execution), As mentioned above, the number written in each area in which the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored and the count value of the time-saving activation counter is The ratio of the random number range to the total random number range is shown.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the state at the time of execution of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance (the pre-winning state after RAM clear execution, the pre-winning state after RAM clear non-execution), the power supply The first low-probability time-saving information according to aspect 1, regardless of the number of changes in the special symbol after the return and the count value of the time-saving activation counter (the remaining number of changes until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set) The suggestion effect can be executed, and no particular suggestion is made by the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect according to aspect 1.

On the other hand, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 2 and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 3 are performed when the RAM is cleared and is in the pre-winning state and in the normal gaming state, or It is in the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state and can be executed during the normal gaming state, and the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state is better than the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state. The probability of execution is high. As a result, according to the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation according to aspect 2 and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation according to aspect 3, it is possible to suggest that RAM clearing may not have been executed when the power is restored. becomes.
Furthermore, since the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 3 is set to have a lower possibility of being executed than the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion production according to aspect 2, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 3 is set to be lower. When the information suggestion performance is executed, it is possible to suggest that it is more likely that the RAM clear was not executed when the power was restored than when the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 2 was executed. becomes.

Further, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 4 is not executed when the RAM is cleared and is in the pre-winning state, but can be executed only when the RAM is not cleared and is in the pre-winning state. . Therefore, according to the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 4, it is possible to suggest that the RAM clear was not executed when the power was restored (it is certain that the RAM clear was not executed). Become.

In addition, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 5 and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 6 are performed when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is 300 or more, or when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is 1 to 299, and the possibility of execution is higher when the count value of the time saving activation number counter is 1 to 299 than when it is 300 or more. ing. As a result, according to the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation according to aspect 5 and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation according to aspect 6, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving game state is set is 300. This can suggest that there is a possibility that the amount will be less than 100%.
Furthermore, since the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 6 is set to have a lower possibility of being executed than the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion production according to aspect 5, the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 6 is set to be lower. When the information suggestion performance is executed, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving game state is set is 300 times more than when the first low probability time saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 5 is executed. This means that it is possible to suggest that there is a high possibility that the

Further, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 7 is not executed when the count value of the time-saving activation number counter is 300 or more, but can be executed only when it is between 1 and 299. Therefore, according to the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspect 7, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set is less than 300 (it is confirmed that it is less than 300). This means that it is possible to suggest that the

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, when the pachinko machine P is waiting for a customer and is in the pre-winning state after RAM clearing or the pre-winning state after not executing RAM clearing (i.e., when the power is restored) The first low-probability time-saving information suggestion presentation can be performed during the period from when the player wins the first jackpot until the first jackpot is won. According to this first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance, it is possible to suggest whether the execution point of the performance is in the RAM clear execution pre-winning state or the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state, and 1. It is possible to suggest the remaining number of time savings until the low probability time saving game state is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, after the RAM is cleared and the normal gaming state is set, when the special symbol is displayed 900 times without winning the jackpot, the first A low probability time saving game state is set. The number of times the special symbol changes until this first low probability time saving game state is set is counted by the time saving activation counter, but this count value will be reset when the power is restored at the same time as the RAM clear is executed. , if the power is restored without RAM clearing being executed, the current count value is maintained without being reset.
Then, for example, when the special symbol has been displayed 300 times after RAM clearing and the power is restored with RAM clearing, the count value of the time saving activation counter will be reset. Therefore, the number of times the special symbol changes from this point until the first low probability time saving game state is set is 900 times. On the other hand, if the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the count value of the time-saving activation counter will not be reset, so the special symbols from that point until the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set. The number of fluctuations is 600.

Although not particularly shown, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, by performing a predetermined operation using the operation button 9b, the number of jackpot wins (number of special game executions) after the power is restored and the number of changes in the special symbol are displayed on the display section 21a. Although not particularly shown, the pachinko machine P is connected to a data display device that is installed outside the pachinko machine P and can display various data, and this data display device also has power restored. The number of jackpot wins (the number of special games played) and the number of changes in special symbols are displayed.
Here, the display of the number of jackpot wins and the number of changes in special symbols mentioned above will be cleared regardless of whether the power is restored with RAM clearing or the power is restored without RAM clearing. When the power is restored, the number of jackpot wins will be displayed as "0". However, when the number of jackpot wins is displayed as "0", this display shows that the jackpot has not been won yet since the power was restored, but whether this power restoration was accompanied by RAM clearing or not. It is not possible to determine whether the data does not involve clearing the RAM. Then, for example, if the number of jackpot wins is displayed as ``0'' and the number of changes in the special symbol is displayed as ``100,'' this ``100'' display may be caused by clearing the RAM. If the number of variations in the special symbol after the power is restored, the remaining number of variations until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set is 800, but the variation in the special symbol after the power is restored without RAM clearing. If it is the number of times, the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set is not necessarily 800 times, but the fluctuation of the special symbol from the time the RAM clear is executed until the power is restored. It is the number of times subtracted from the number of times.
In this way, when the number of jackpot wins is "0", the number of changes in the special symbol displayed on the display unit 21a or the data display device until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set is It is not possible to accurately grasp the remaining number of fluctuations.

However, according to the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation in other application example 13, the pre-winning state after executing RAM clear (that is, the state after power restoration accompanied by RAM clearing) or the pre-winning state after non-executing RAM clearing ( In other words, a suggestion that the game is in a state after power recovery without RAM clearing) or a suggestion that the remaining number of executions until the first low probability time-saving game state is set is a predetermined number or less is executed. Even if there is a possibility of winning a jackpot and the number of jackpot wins is "0", it is possible to estimate the remaining number of fluctuations until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set, thereby increasing the player's interest. I can do it.

Furthermore, in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance in other application example 13, in any aspect of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power is restored is the first specified number (1 to 100). The probability of execution is set to be higher when the second specific number of times (101 times or more) is reached than when the second specific number of times is (101 times or more). That is, the execution rate of the first low probability time-saving information suggestion performance in a predetermined manner is different depending on the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored.
Thereby, even if the number of changes in the special symbols displayed on the display unit 21a or the data display device after the power is restored is small, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game.

(Variation example regarding the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation)
In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed in the customer waiting state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at a predetermined timing during the execution of a variable effect (for example, at the start of a variable effect, during execution of a variable effect, from the start of a variable effect until the reach display is performed, after the reach display is performed and when the variable effect is The first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance may be executed until the end of the variable performance (such as at the end of the variable performance).
In addition, if it is possible to execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect at a predetermined timing while the variable effect is being executed, it will be automatically executed in conjunction with the execution of the variable effect without requiring a predetermined operation. You can do it like this. Specifically, for example, if a variable effect is executed in the RAM clear execution pre-winning state or the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state, one of the aspects is always executed at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect. The first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance, and when the execution of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is determined by the lottery, at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance. , the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect may be executed according to any of the aspects.
In this case, the opportunities for performing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance are rich in variation, and the player's interest can be increased.

In addition, if it is possible to execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed so as not to impede the visibility of the fluctuation performance. You may. For example, in the display area of the display unit 21a, in a display area where the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 50 is not performed or a display area where the performance suggesting the expectation of winning the jackpot (display of a preview image or pending image) is not performed. May be executed.
Further, various images in the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance may have a higher display priority than the performance symbols 50, preview images, pending images, and the like.
In this case, the visibility of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance can be improved, and the player's interest can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance was executed according to any of aspects 1 to 7, but the execution manner is limited to these. It's not a thing. For example, a mode that suggests that there is a moderate possibility that RAM clearing will not be executed when the power is restored, or a possibility that the number of remaining fluctuations until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set is less than a predetermined number. It is also possible to provide an aspect that suggests that the value is moderate.
In this case, there are many variations in the execution mode of the first time-saving information suggestion performance, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance in other application example 13, a suggestion is made as to whether the execution time point of the performance is in the RAM clear execution pre-winning state or the RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state, and Both of the remaining predetermined number of suggestions until the first low probability time-saving gaming state is set are executed, but this is not limited to this, and only one of the suggestions is executed. You may also do so.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance in other application example 13, in any aspect of the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the power is restored is the first specified number (1 to 100). Although it has been set that the possibility of execution is higher when the second specific number of times (101 times or more) is reached than when the second specific number of times is (101 times or more), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regarding the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance based on any aspect rather than all aspects, when the number of changes in the special symbol after power recovery is the second specified number of times is higher than when the number of changes in the special symbol is the first specified number of times. It may be set so that the probability of execution is higher.
In addition, for the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance in any aspect, or for the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance in any aspect, the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored is the first specified number of times. It may be set so that the possibility of execution is lower when the second specific number of times is reached than when it is a certain number of times.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed every time a predetermined operation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a predetermined operation is performed and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation is performed, the first The low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation may not be executed.
In this case, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in order to execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect.
In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of times the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed, and after the number of executions of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance reaches the upper limit, a predetermined release condition (for example, RAM clear is executed The first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance may not be executed until the following conditions are established: the winning of a jackpot, the variable display of special symbols (variable effect) being executed a predetermined number of times, etc. .
In this case, since it is possible to leave it to the player's judgment as to when to perform the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the player's interest.
In addition, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect is not executed every time a predetermined operation is performed, but, for example, when a predetermined operation is performed a predetermined number of times, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed when a predetermined operation is performed, and the execution is determined by the lottery. In this case, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect may be executed.
Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's interest in executing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance.
In addition, when the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is executed based on a predetermined operation, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance is The predetermined operation may be restricted again until the time-saving information suggestion effect ends and a predetermined operation invalidation period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses. In other words, the predetermined operation may be disabled until a predetermined time point is reached.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance from being newly executed during the execution of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance, and the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance can be prevented. can be executed reliably every time.
Further, although the above-described first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance progresses from start to end (result display) only by performing a predetermined operation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined operation is performed, an image of a box with a "?" mark is displayed, and then a display prompting the operator to press the operation button 9b is displayed, and the operation button 9b is pressed. Or, if a predetermined operational validity period (for example, 3 seconds) passes without the operation button 9b being pressed, the image changes to an image of the top surface of the box being opened, and an image of the contents popping out from inside the box is displayed. (The results are displayed).
In this case, it is possible to give the impression that the result display was performed by the player's operation, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in executing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance.
In addition, when the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect can be executed while waiting for a customer as described above, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance can be performed by operating the operation button 9b on the display section 21a during this customer waiting state. An image suggesting to the player that the time-saving information suggesting performance will be executed (for example, a text image saying "When you press the button, something will happen!!") may be displayed.
In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance will be executed while waiting for a customer, thereby increasing the chances of executing the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance. be able to.

Further, the execution modes 1 to 7 of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance may be used as execution modes of performances other than the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance.
For example, when a player performs a predetermined operation while waiting for a customer after winning the first jackpot after the power is restored, modes 1 to 2 are implemented to increase the player's interest while waiting for a customer. A customer waiting effect in which any one of the displays in 7 may be performed may be performed. In addition, in this performance while waiting for a customer, the decision probabilities for modes 1 to 7 are all set to be the same (equal), regardless of the number of changes in the special symbol after the power is restored or the count value of the time saving activation counter. It is desirable not to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the first low probability time saving gaming state is set.
In this case, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the same type of performance without preparing new performance data, and it is possible to increase the player's interest.

In addition, in the normal gaming state that is set after the first low probability time saving gaming state ends without winning a jackpot, the first low probability time saving gaming state will not be set unless the jackpot is won afterwards. Suggestions may also be made.
In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the first low-probability time-saving gaming state will not be set, and then leave it up to the player to decide whether or not to continue playing. can.

Next, regarding the control process of the sub-control board 300 in another application example 13, the contents regarding the execution of the first number display effect and the second number display effect in the high probability time saving game state, and the first low accuracy time saving information suggestion effect. We will mainly explain the contents related to the execution.
In the sub-control board 300 of other application example 13, main processing, timer interrupt processing, and variable pattern command reception processing are executed, but these processes are not executed in the sub-control board 300 of the embodiment described above. Since the main processing, timer interrupt processing, and variable pattern command reception processing are substantially the same (see FIGS. 55 to 57), a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, among the command analysis processes executed in the timer interrupt process of the sub control board 300, the flowchart in FIG. Explain with reference to.
In step 7800, the sub CPU 301 refers to the received post-special game setting command and determines whether the gaming state set after the special game is a high-probability time-saving gaming state. Then, when it is determined that the high probability time saving game state is not present, the setting command reception process after the end of the special game ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is a high probability time saving gaming state, the process advances to the next step 7801.
In step 7801, the sub CPU 301 turns on a high probability time saving medium flag (configured by a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 303) indicating that a high probability time saving gaming state is being set. Although not particularly shown, this high probability time saving medium flag is turned off when the high probability time saving game state ends. Then, the process advances to the next step 7802.
In step 7802, the sub CPU 301 displays a first remaining count suggestion image on the display section 21a that suggests the remaining count of 100 in the high probability time saving game state (the time saving count (high probability count) indicated by the setting command after the end of the special game). Execute the control to display. As a result, the first remaining number of times display effect is started, and the first remaining number of times suggestion image "100" corresponding to the remaining number of times of 100 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display section 21a. Then, after the special game ends, the setting command reception process ends.

Next, among the command analysis processes described above, the time saving number command reception process that is executed when the time saving number command is received will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 150.
In step 7810, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the high probability time saving flag is on. Then, when it is determined that the high probability time saving flag is not on (that is, it is off), the time saving number command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the high probability time saving medium flag is on, the process advances to the next step 7811.
In step 7811, the sub CPU 301 displays the number of times included in the received time saving number command (that is, the count value of the time saving number counter, in other words, the remaining number of times until the high probability time saving gaming state ends). Control is executed to update and display the first remaining number suggestion image in the middle. Since the time saving number command is sent to the sub-control board 300 at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the first remaining number suggestion image being displayed suggests the remaining number of times at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The display mode will be updated. Then, the process advances to the next step 7812.

In step 7812, the sub CPU 301 refers to the remaining number of times included in the received time saving number of times command and determines whether the remaining number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (5 times). If it is determined that the remaining number of times is not less than or equal to the predetermined number of times (that is, it exceeds the predetermined number of times), the time saving number of times command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining number of times is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times, the process advances to the next step 7813.
In step 7813, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the started variable display is a variable display of the second special figure. In the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, a symbol determination command indicating the type of special symbol determined based on the result of the winning lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board 300. It looks like this. The sub CPU 301 can determine whether or not the started variable display is the variable display of the second special symbol by referring to the type of special symbol indicated by this symbol determination command. Then, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not a variable display (that is, the first special symbol is a variable display), the time saving number command reception process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a variable display of the second special symbol, the process advances to the next step 7814.

In step 7814, the sub CPU 301 executes control to display on the display unit 21a a second remaining number suggestion image that suggests the remaining number of times in the high probability time-saving gaming state at the current time. As a result, the second remaining number of times display effect is executed, and the second remaining number of times suggestion image corresponding to the current remaining number of times is displayed in the center of the display section 21a. Then, the time saving number command reception process is ended.

In addition, in the pachinko machine according to other application example 13, the time saving number and the high probability number of times corresponding to the high probability time saving gaming state are both 100, so the value of the number of times (remaining number of times) included in the time saving number of times command and The values of the number of times (remaining number of times) included in the high-accuracy number of times command are all the same. Therefore, the above-mentioned time saving number command reception process may be executed not when a time saving number command is received, but when a high accuracy number command is received.

Next, the first low-probability time saving information is executed when a predetermined operation is performed while the user is waiting for a customer and is in the RAM clear execution pre-winning state or RAM clear non-execution pre-winning state. The suggestion effect execution process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 151. Note that this first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process is executed in the timer interrupt process of the sub-control board 300.
In step 7820, the sub CPU 301 determines whether a predetermined operation (pressing operation of the operation button 9b) has been performed. If it is determined that the predetermined operation has not been performed, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed, the process advances to the next step 7821.
In step 7821, sub CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in a customer waiting state. If it is determined that the server is not in a customer waiting state, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the server is waiting for a customer, the process advances to the next step 7822.

In step 7822, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the sub CPU 301 is in the state after the power is restored and before winning the first jackpot, that is, in the pre-winning state after executing RAM clearing or in the pre-winning state after not executing RAM clearing. Determine whether or not. Then, if it is determined that the above-mentioned state is not present, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the above-mentioned state exists, the process advances to the next step 7823.
In step 7823, the sub CPU 301 obtains a performance random number of 1 from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 249), determines the current state (pre-winning state after executing RAM clear or pre-winning state after not executing RAM clear), and returns the power. The number of changes in the special symbol from , the count value of the time-saving activation counter (the remaining number of changes until the first low probability time-saving game state is set), the obtained performance random number, and the first low-probability time-saving information suggestion performance Based on the mode determination table, the mode of the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion presentation is determined to be one of modes 1 to 7. Then, the process advances to the next step 7824.

In step 7824, the sub CPU 301 executes control to perform the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect in the manner determined in step 7823 described above. Then, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance execution process ends.

(Modified example of pachinko machine P according to other application example 13)
In the variable performance in other application example 13, when a game ball enters the starting winning hole where the game ball mainly enters during the game state being set, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the entered ball. However, in addition to the variable display of the effect pattern 50 in the center of the display section 21a, the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the center of the display section 21a. A variable display of a specific symbol may be performed at a predetermined display location, and the result of the winning lottery may be notified by the stop display mode of the performance symbol 50 and the stop display mode of a specific symbol different from the performance symbol 50.
Specifically, for example, during the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting winning hole 15 where game balls mainly enter, a performance pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the center of the display section 21a. 50 is executed, and in synchronization with the variable display of the performance symbols 50, a display is displayed in the lower left corner of the display section 21a that is much smaller in size than the performance symbols 50 and is more visible to the player than the performance symbols 50. A variable display of difficult specific symbols may be executed.
Also, for example, during the first low probability time saving game state, during the second low probability time saving game state, or during the high probability time saving game state, the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 16 into which the game ball mainly enters. Then, a variable display of the effect pattern 50 corresponding to the second special figure is executed in the center of the display section 21a, and in synchronization with the variable display of the effect pattern 50, a variable display from the effect pattern 50 is executed in the lower right corner of the display section 21a. It may also be possible to perform a variable display of a specific symbol which is extremely small in size and is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the production symbol 50.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.

In addition, if a game ball enters a starting winning hole different from the starting winning hole into which the game ball mainly enters during the gaming state being set, the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern in the center of the display section 21a Although the variable display of 50 is not executed, the variable display of the above-mentioned specific symbol may be executed although the variable display of the effect symbol 50 is not executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first number of times display effect and the second number of times display effect can be executed during the high probability time saving game state and the first low probability time saving game state, The gaming states in which these performances can be executed are not limited to these.
For example, even during the second low probability time saving game state, the first number display effect and the second number display are used to indicate the remaining number of times until the second low probability time saving game state ends (remaining time saving number). It may also be possible to perform a performance.
In addition, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a high probability non-time saving gaming state that is a combination of a high probability gaming state and a non-time saving gaming state, even during the high probability non-time saving gaming state, the period of time until the high probability non-time saving gaming state ends is In order to suggest the remaining number of times (the remaining number of highly accurate times), a first number of times display effect and a second number of times display effect may be executed.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be obtained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, during the game state being set, the game ball mainly enters the starting prize opening into which the game ball enters, and the special symbol in the center of the display section 21a appears. When a fluctuating display of the corresponding performance symbol 50 is executed, the execution of the fluctuating display is used as an opportunity to update the first remaining count suggestion image and to update the second remaining count suggestion image by the second count display effect. However, the trigger for updating the first remaining number of times suggestion image and displaying the second remaining number of times suggestion image is not limited to this.
For example, when the above-described fluctuating display of the performance symbol 50 is started, if a start notification effect is executed to notify the start of the fluctuating display, the execution of the start notification effect will trigger the first remaining count suggestion. The image may be updated or a second remaining count suggestion image may be displayed using a second count display effect.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be obtained.

In addition, according to the first number of times display effect and the second number of times display effect in other application example 13, the remaining number of times until the set gaming state ends is counted down, but this is not limited to this. It is not something that will be done. For example, the value may be counted up from a predetermined start value to a predetermined end value using the first count display effect and the second count display effect. Similar control may be employed.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, as shown in FIG. A variable display of the 1st special figure is executed, and then a variable display of the 2nd special figure is executed, and a 2nd remaining count suggestion image (for example, a number image of "3") that suggests the remaining count at this point is displayed. In this case, the second remaining number suggestion image (for example, the number image of "4") that suggests the remaining number of times at the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is not displayed, and the second remaining number suggestion image is directly displayed. Although the second remaining number suggestion image (number image of "3") suggesting the remaining number of times at the time when the variable display of the special figure is executed is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, immediately before displaying the second remaining count suggestion image (number image of "3") that suggests the remaining number of times at the time when the variable display of the second special figure is executed, the variable display of the first special figure is executed. A second remaining number suggestion image (a numeric image of "4") indicating the remaining number of times at the time the number is reached may be displayed.
Even in this case, the same effect as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 is achieved, and the display of the countdown of the remaining number of times using the second remaining number of number of times suggestion image is suppressed as much as possible while minimizing the sense of discomfort in the performance. Can be executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, both the first number of times display effect and the second number of times display effect are executed, but the first number of times display effect and the second number of times display effect are executed. Only one of the number of times display effects may be executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is updated (decremented by 1), and the count value is When becomes "0", the first low probability time saving game state is set at this point, but the update timing of the count value of the time saving activation number counter is not limited to this.
For example, the count value of the time saving activation counter is updated at some point between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the end of the stop display time of the special symbol, and the count value of the time saving activation counter is updated when the stop display time of the special symbol has elapsed. At this point, it may be determined whether or not the count value is "0", and the first low probability time saving gaming state may be set.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.
In addition, since the time saving number counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the time saving activation number counter may be updated together with the time saving number counter at that time. In this case, both the time saving number counter and the number of time saving activation times can be updated at the same timing, so in addition to the above effects, processing can be unified, and the hardware such as the main CPU 101 can The processing load on resources can be reduced.

Also, as mentioned above, if the count value of the time saving activation counter is updated at any point between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the elapse of the stop display time of the special symbol, Rather than determining whether the relevant count value is "0" when the special symbol stop display time has elapsed, it is determined whether the relevant count value is "0" at the time of updating the above-mentioned count value. It may be determined whether or not the count value is "0", and the first low probability time saving gaming state may be set at this point.
Specifically, for example, the count value of the time saving activation number counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the updated count value reaches "0", at this point (i.e., the special symbol The first low probability time saving game state may be set (at the start of the variable display).

In addition, in the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13, if the first low probability time saving game state is set during the variable display of the special symbol, the first low probability time saving game state is set after the end of the variable display being executed. At the point when the variable display of special symbols based on the entry of game balls into the second starting prize opening 16 that mainly enters the ball starts, various effects (background image , switching of the production pattern 50, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the above-mentioned effect is executed at the time when the variable display of special symbols based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting winning hole 15 starts, instead of the entering of the game ball into the second starting winning hole 16. Alternatively, the above-mentioned production may be performed at the time when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into either the second starting winning hole 16 or the first starting winning hole 15 is started. may also be executed.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.

Further, the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13 may be set so that it is possible to win a time-saving grant that sets a time-saving gaming state through a winning/failure lottery. For example, during the variable display of the first special symbol, When the variable display of the second special figure based on the winning of the time-saving award ends and the stop display time has elapsed, the time-saving gaming state based on the winning of the time-saving award is set even if the variable display of the first special figure is in progress. It may be possible to do so. Also in this case, control regarding the execution of various performances based on the setting of the time-saving game state similar to that of the pachinko machine P according to the other application example 13 may be applied.
Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine P according to Application Example 13 can be achieved.

Further, in the pachinko machine P according to another application example 13, the first low-probability time-saving setting notification image is displayed as the first low-probability time-saving setting notification for notifying the setting of the first low-probability time-saving gaming state. However, the mode of the first low accuracy time saving setting notification is not limited to this.
For example, a movable body that can be pushed and retracted from the front of the pachinko machine P (for example, a movable speaker that is installed on the top of the pachinko machine P that can be pushed and retracted from the front of the pachinko machine P) is provided, and the first low-accuracy time saving setting notification is provided. As a result, a movable object effect may be executed in which a movable object that is immersed in the normal game state is made to protrude.
In addition, in the case where the movable body effect is executed as the first low probability time saving setting notification, the first When the variation based on the special symbol (losing symbol Z1) (the variation immediately before the first low probability time saving setting) is executed and the first low probability time saving gaming state is set, the variation immediately before the first low probability time saving setting is started. The movable object effect may be executed during the period from the time to the end, or from the end of the first low-accuracy time saving setting immediately before the stop display time elapses. On the other hand, a variation based on the first special symbol (losing symbol Z1) for the 900th time after the normal gaming state is set via RAM clear (variation immediately before the first low accuracy time saving setting) is executed, and the first low When the probability time-saving game state is set, the movable body performance is executed from the time when the first variable display of special symbols (variable performance) is started after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set. Good too.
Here, if a specific movable body effect that moves a specific movable body different from the above-mentioned movable body is set to be executed as a variation effect executed when winning a jackpot, RAM clear When the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set through the first low-probability time-saving gaming state and a jackpot is won in the first lottery after the first low-probability time-saving gaming state is set, the above-mentioned movable body performance is executed and the above-mentioned identification is performed. There is a possibility that the execution of the movable body effect is repeated, but if a plurality of movable bodies are moved redundantly, there is a risk that the current value will exceed the allowable value.
Therefore, if the first low-probability time-saving game state is set through RAM clearing and a jackpot is won in the first lottery after the first low-probability time-saving game state is set, the movable object effect is executed. The specific movable body effect may be executed after the process is completed. For example, if the time from the start to the end of the movable body performance is 6 seconds, the first variable display of special symbols after the first low probability time-saving game state is set (variable display) will start. The specific movable object effect may be executed after 6 seconds have elapsed since the specific movable object effect has been performed. By doing so, the movable object effect and the specific movable object effect can be reliably executed without the current value exceeding the allowable value.

Further, the various controls in the other application example 13 may be applied to other pachinko machines other than pachinko machines in which simultaneous spin control is executed within the range where no contradiction occurs. For example, if you set up a small win as a result of a win/fail lottery, and the game ball is played not only when the result of the win/fail lottery is a jackpot win, but also in a small win game that is executed when a small win is won, the game ball A big prize opening with a special area that can be entered is opened, and a special game will also be executed if a game ball that enters the big winning hole during the small winning game enters the special area. Pachinko machines that are set to perform the same function (so-called pachinko machines that mix 1 type and 2 types), pachinko machines that are not simultaneous control or pachinko machines that mix 1 type and 2 types, i.e., 1st special and 2nd special Even in pachinko machines that are set so that while one of the variable displays is displayed, the other variable display is not executed and a special game is executed only based on the winning of the jackpot, other applications may be applied to the extent that no contradiction occurs. Even if the various controls in Example 13 are applied to perform various effects based on the setting of the first low probability time saving game state, the first low probability time saving information suggestion effect, the first number of times display effect, the second number of times display effect, etc. good.

(Other variations)
Further, the external configuration of the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13 may be as follows.
Specifically, there is a machine frame 1 which is a substantially rectangular frame, a main body frame 2 which is attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable by a hinge mechanism (not particularly shown), and a main body frame 2 which is hinged to the main body frame 2. A mechanism (not particularly shown) is provided with a door frame 3a (see FIGS. 155 and 156) attached to the door frame so as to be openable and closable. Like the machine frame 1, the main body frame 2 is a substantially rectangular frame with a hollow part, and a game board 11 for forming a game area 12 is accommodated in this hollow part. Further, the door frame 3a is a frame body with an opening in the center of the front, and includes two transparent plates 4a and 4b arranged front and rear and covering the opening of the door frame 3a (Fig. 157 ), the front door 3 is constituted by the door frame 3a and the transparent plates 4a and 4b.
Further, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 open and close the machine frame 1 when the door frame 3a is closed and the two are integrated (that is, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 are integrated, so that the machine frame 1 A frame portion that can be opened and closed is configured, and this frame portion can also open and close the machine frame 1.

In addition, the length from the upper edge to the lower edge of the main body frame 2 (the height (vertical width) of the main body frame 2) is the length from the upper edge to the lower edge of the door frame 3a (the height (vertical width) of the door frame 3a). The length from the left edge to the right edge of the main body frame 2 (the width of the main body frame 2) is slightly longer than the length from the left edge to the right edge of the door frame 3a (the width of the door frame 3a). ) is slightly longer than Therefore, when the door frame 3a is closed, the lower edge of the main body frame 2 is located slightly lower than the lower edge of the door frame 3a, and the right edge of the main body frame 2 is located slightly lower than the right edge of the door frame 3a. This will be located slightly to the right (see Figures 155 and 156).
Note that the vertical width and width of the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 are the same, and when the door frame 3a is closed, the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 are aligned, and the right side of the door frame 3a is It may be configured such that the edge and the right edge of the main body frame 2 coincide with each other.
Moreover, the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 do not need to be configured as frames that can be opened and closed separately, as described above. For example, an outer frame (not particularly shown) is provided, which is a frame body that can accommodate the door frame 3a and the main body frame 2 and is attached to the machine frame 1 so as to be openable and closable. The machine frame 1 may be configured so that the outer frame in the closed state opens and closes the machine frame 1.

In addition, this front door 3 is provided with the same components as in the above-described embodiment (upper plate 6, saucer 7, operating handle 5, speaker, etc.), as well as the upper part of the door frame 3a (front door 3). A decorative portion 610 is provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine P, which constitutes a design of a predetermined shape, such as a three-dimensional object imitating the title logo or motif of the pachinko machine P (see FIG. 157).

Next, the operation handle 5 will be explained in detail.
As shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, the operating handle 5 is roughly divided into a base 510 fixed to the door frame 3a, and a base 510 rotatably supported by the base 510, and rotated at a predetermined angle from the initial position in the normal state. It includes an operation frame 550 that rotates within a range, and a frame cover 570 that covers the front surface of the operation frame 550.

Although not particularly illustrated, the base 510 is a substantially cylindrical member that opens toward the front when fixed to the door frame 3a, and there are holes in the base 510 for attaching various components. and protrusions are formed, and accommodation spaces for accommodating various components are provided.

The operation frame 550 is supported by the base 510 so as to be relatively rotatable, and includes an annular ring body 551 facing the opening of the base 510, a flat plate portion 552 provided within the ring body 551, (See Figure 153). The outer circumferential surface of the ring body 551 is provided with three finger hook projections 551a, 551b, and 551c that protrude outward, and the player can easily hang the finger on the finger hook projections 551a, 551b, and 551c. The operation frame 550 can be rotated at any time.

The above-described flat plate portion 552 is provided with a pair of elongated guide holes 553 that extend through the operating frame 550 in the rotation axis direction and curve along the circumferential direction of the operating frame 550. A guide shaft 518 protruding from the base 510 can be inserted into the guide hole 553. With the operation frame 550 supported by the base 510, the guide hole 553 is guided by the guide shaft 518, and the operation frame 550 is rotatable.
Further, on the front side (frame cover 570 side) of the flat plate portion 552, a protrusion 554 is provided that stands in the front direction at the center position of the operation frame 550. A spring holding piece 555 is provided.

The frame cover 570 is a substantially hemispherical member that opens toward the rear surface when covering the front surface of the operation frame 550. The frame cover 570 is screwed to the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 inserted through the guide hole 553 on the back side thereof, so that the frame cover 570 is fixed to the base 510. Become. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 570, a back hole (not particularly shown) into which the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550 can be inserted so as to be relatively rotatable is provided. When the front surface is covered, the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550 will be inserted into the rear hole.
By being screwed as described above, the operation frame 550 is rotatably held between the frame cover 570 and the base 510.

When the operation handle 5 is assembled, the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 is inserted into the guide hole 553 of the operation frame 550, and when the guide shaft 518 comes into contact with the circumferential end of the guide hole 553, Further rotation of the operation frame 550 is restricted. That is, the guide shaft 518 and the guide hole 553 function as a stopper that guides the rotation of the operation frame 550 and restricts the rotation angle within a certain range.

Further, as shown in FIG. 153, a coil spring 581 is wound around the outer periphery of the protrusion 554 of the operation frame 550.
This coil spring 581 has one end wound around the outer peripheral surface of the guide shaft 518 of the base 510 inserted into the guide hole 553, and the other end is latched onto the spring holding piece 555. The operating frame 550 is constantly biased to rotate counterclockwise. That is, a counterclockwise rotational force is constantly applied to the operation frame 550 around the rotation axis of the operation frame 550. As a result, the operation frame 550 is normally located at an initial position where the guide shaft 518 is in contact with the end of the guide hole 553 in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the operation frame 550 due to the elastic force of the coil spring 581. (See Figure 153).

Furthermore, when a clockwise rotational force is applied to the operating frame 550 while the operating frame 550 is at the initial position, the operating frame 550 rotates clockwise against the elastic force of the coil spring 581. Rotate. Then, when the clockwise rotational force on the operation frame 550 is released, the operation frame 550 is rotated counterclockwise by the elastic force of the coil spring 581 and returns to the initial position.

In addition, in this operating handle 5, by adjusting the amount of winding and rotation of the coil spring 581, the counterclockwise rotational force (biasing force) that is constantly applied to the operating frame 550 can be adjusted. , the operating torque required to rotate the operating frame 550 in the clockwise direction is set as follows.

Specifically, the operating torque required to rotate the operating handle 5 from the initial position (hereinafter also referred to as the first operating torque), and the operating torque required to rotate the operating handle 5 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position ( Regarding the operating torque (hereinafter also referred to as the third operating torque) necessary for rotating the operating handle 5 from the left-handed reference position to the maximum rotation position (hereinafter also referred to as the second operating torque), the second operating torque is The third operating torque is set to be larger than the first operating torque and about twice the first operating torque or less, and the third operating torque is set to be larger than the second operating torque and about twice the second operating torque or less. ing.
For example, in the operating handle 5 described above, the first operating torque is approximately 6.8 N·mm (N·mm is Newton millimeter, which is a unit of operating torque. The same applies hereinafter), and the second operating torque is approximately 13.8 N·mm. 6 N·mm, and the third operating torque can be approximately 23.8 N·mm. Note that the first operating torque of approximately 6.8 N·mm is applied to the operating frame 550 when the operating handle 5 is rotated slightly clockwise from the initial position and the clockwise rotational force applied to the operating frame 550 is released. 550 is the minimum value that can return to the initial position.

Here, the left-handed reference position means that the game ball that is launched from the game area 12 enters the first game area 12a more easily than the second game area 12b, and the game ball enters the first starting prize opening 15. This is the position of the operating handle 5 at which the firing strength is such that the game ball can be hit into a predetermined area (so-called "bucket") where the ball is likely to be hit. Furthermore, the maximum rotational position refers to the position of the operating handle 5 where the clockwise rotation of the operating frame 550 is restricted (that is, the position where the guide shaft 518 is located at the end of the operating frame 550 in the rotational direction in the guide hole 553). ).

In addition, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the operation angle (rotation angle; hereinafter also referred to as the first operation angle) of the operation handle 5 from the initial position to the left-handed batting reference position is the same as that of the operation handle 5 from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. 5 (hereinafter also referred to as the second operation angle). Note that the first operating angle is preferably in the range of approximately 45 degrees to 60 degrees, and the second operating angle is preferably in the range of approximately 100 degrees to 120 degrees. For example, in the above-mentioned operating handle 5, the first operating angle can be approximately 45 degrees, and the second operating angle can be approximately 100 degrees.

As described above, by setting the second operating torque to be larger than the first operating torque and approximately twice or less than the first operating torque, the operating torque between the initial position and the left-handed reference position can be set. does not increase rapidly, and the operational burden on the player can be reduced. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from giving the impression that the operating load suddenly increases from the initial position to the left-handed reference position, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel fatigue in operating the operating handle 5.
In addition, by setting the third operating torque to be larger than the second operating torque and less than twice the second operating torque, the operating torque from the left-handed reference position to the maximum rotation position is suddenly increased. There is a large difference in the operating load when the operating handle 5 is rotated from the initial position to the left-handed batting reference position without increasing, and in the operating load when the operating handle 5 is rotated from the left-handed batting reference position to the maximum rotation position. Since this does not occur, the operational burden on the player can be reduced. Furthermore, during the period from the initial position to the maximum rotation position, it is possible to prevent the impression that the operating load increases rapidly as the position approaches the maximum rotation position, causing the player to become tired of operating the operation handle 5. can make it difficult to feel.

Examples of the above-mentioned operating handle 5 will be described below in comparison with comparative examples.
As described above, the operating handle 5 in the embodiment has a first operating torque of approximately 6.8 N·mm, a second operating torque of approximately 13.6 N·mm, and a third operating torque of approximately 23.8 N·mm. I set it like this. That is, the operating handle 5 in the embodiment satisfies the condition that the second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque and approximately twice or less than the first operating torque (hereinafter also referred to as the first condition), The condition that the third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque and approximately twice or less than the second operating torque (hereinafter also referred to as the second condition) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the operating handle 5 in the comparative example was set so that the first operating torque was approximately 31 N·mm, the second operating torque was approximately 69 N·mm, and the third operating torque was approximately 152 N·mm. That is, the operating handle 5 in the comparative example does not satisfy either the above-mentioned first condition or second condition.

Using the operating handle 5 in the above embodiment and the operating handle 5 in the comparative example, fatigue when the operating handle 5 is rotated a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) from the initial position to the left-handed batting reference position. feeling of fatigue (hereinafter also referred to as the feeling of fatigue in the first half), and feeling of fatigue when the operating handle 5 is rotated a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) from the left-handed batting reference position to the maximum rotation position (hereinafter also referred to as the feeling of fatigue in the second half) ) was evaluated by a sensory test in which the subject actually rotated the operating handle 5.
As shown in FIG. 154, with the operating handle 5 in the example, both the first half and the second half of the fatigue feeling were small, but with the operating handle 5 of the comparative example, the first half of the fatigue feeling and the second half of the fatigue feeling were both large. The operating handle 5 in the example was evaluated to be superior to the operating handle 5 in the comparative example in terms of all fatigue sensations.
Therefore, as is clear from the above results, there is a range in which the second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque and approximately twice the first operating torque, and the third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque. A range of approximately twice as large as the second operating torque or less can be said to be appropriate from the viewpoint of the above-mentioned feeling of fatigue.

Moreover, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is provided on the door frame 3a so as to have the following positional relationship with the door frame 3a (body frame 2). In the following, among the three finger hook protrusions arranged in parallel along the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 of the operation frame 550, the finger hook protrusion 551a located on the left side when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position will be referred to as the finger hook protrusion 551a. The first finger hook protrusion 551a, the finger hook protrusion 551b located at the center are also referred to as the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the finger hook protrusion 551c located on the right side is also referred to as the third finger hook protrusion 551c.

Specifically, the above-described operation handle 5 has a distance DA1 from the center position C of the frame cover 570 (the position that most protrudes toward the front side when attached to the door frame 3a) to the lower edge of the door frame 3a. 40.0 mm, and the distance DA2 from the center position C to the lower edge of the main body frame 2 is approximately 45.0 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is approximately 49.1 mm, and , is provided at a position where the distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is approximately 51.1 mm (see FIG. 155).

Here, in the above-described operation handle 5, the distance DB from the center position C to the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 is about 34.6 mm, and the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551a (the first finger hook protrusion) is approximately 34.6 mm from the center position C. 551a, the distance DC1 from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551 to the most protruding position is approximately 53.4 mm, and from the center position C to the protruding end of the second finger hook protrusion 551b (the ring at the second finger hook protrusion 551b) The distance DC2 from the outer peripheral surface of the body 551 to the most protruding position is approximately 45.6 mm, and the distance DC2 from the center position C to the protruding end of the third finger hook protrusion 551c (the ring body 551 at the third finger hook protrusion 551c) is approximately 45.6 mm. The distance DC3 from the outer peripheral surface to the most protruding position is approximately 39.3 mm (see FIG. 155).
Further, when the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly above the center position C, and the second finger hook protrusion 551b is located almost directly above the center position C. The third finger hook projection 551c is located slightly above and to the right of the center position C (see FIG. 155).

That is, when the operating handle 5 is at the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c are all located above the center position C. The finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c are configured so that they do not protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 155). ).
Further, as described above, the distance DC3 from the center position C to the protruding end of the third finger hook projection 551c is approximately 39.3 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is approximately 49.1 mm. , and since the distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is approximately 51.1 mm, when the operating handle 5 is in the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and None of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrudes to the right beyond the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, when the operation handle 5 is rotated from the initial position by a second operation angle (approximately 100 degrees) and is at the maximum rotation position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly to the right above the center position C, and the second finger The hooking protrusion 551b is located slightly below and to the right of the center position C, and the third finger hooking protrusion 551c is located below and slightly to the right of the center position C (see FIG. 156). Further, the protruding end of the third finger hook projection 551c is located above the lower edge of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2) and to the left of the right edge of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2). (See Figure 156).

That is, when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c are all located above the lower end of the door frame 3a (main body frame 2). Because they are located at (See Figure 156).
Further, as described above, the distance DC2 from the center position C to the protruding end of the second finger hook projection 551b is approximately 45.6 mm, and the distance DA3 from the center position C to the right edge of the door frame 3a is approximately 49.1 mm. , and since the distance DA4 from the center position C to the right edge of the main body frame 2 is approximately 51.1 mm, when the operating handle 5 is at the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and None of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrudes to the right beyond the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 156).

Furthermore, as described above, whether the operating handle 5 is at the initial position or at the maximum rotation position, the first finger hook projection 551a, the second finger hook projection 551b, and the third finger hook projection 551c Neither of them protrudes downward beyond the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. ing.
As a result, although not particularly shown, even when the operating handle 5 is at any rotational position from the initial position to the maximum rotational position, the first fingerrest protrusion 551a, the second fingerrest protrusion 551b, None of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. It is designed so that it does not stand out.

Further, as described above, the distance DC1 from the center position C to the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551a is approximately 53.4 mm, and the distance DC2 from the center position C to the protruding end of the second finger hook protrusion 551b is approximately 53.4 mm. The distance DC3 from the center position C to the protruding end of the third finger hook projection 551c is approximately 39.3 mm, which is the furthest distance from the outer circumference of the ring body 551 (the outer circumference of the ring body 551). The part that protrudes most from the surface is the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551a.
Further, as described above, when the operating handle 5 is at the initial position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located slightly above the left of the center position C, and when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position, the first finger hook protrusion 551a is located at the upper left side of the center position C. Since the hooking protrusion 551a is located above and slightly to the right of the center position C, the height position of the first finger hooking protrusion 551a at the above-mentioned maximum rotation position is the same as the height of the first fingerholding protrusion 551a at the above-mentioned initial position. It is higher than the position.
That is, when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position, the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551 is at the lowest point of the rotation trajectory that the protruding end passes when the operating handle 5 rotates from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. It is designed not to be located at a point.

As described above, in the above-described operation handle 5, when the operation handle 5 is in the initial position, all of the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c are connected to the door. The operating handle 5 rotates to the maximum while not protruding downwardly beyond the lower edge of the frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and not protruding to the right beyond the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. When in this position, all of the first finger hook protrusion 551a, the second finger hook protrusion 551b, and the third finger hook protrusion 551c protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2. Moreover, it is provided so that it does not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2.
As a result, for example, when installing a pachinko machine P on an island, even if the pachinko machine P is temporarily placed on the floor of a hall or leaning against a wall, It is possible to prevent the finger hook projections 551a, 551b, and 551c from coming into contact with the floor or wall and damaging the operating handle 5.

In addition, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 has a first finger hook protrusion 551a, a second finger hook protrusion 551b, and a None of the third finger hook protrusions 551c protrude below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and to the right of the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2. It is designed so that it does not stand out.
As a result, as described above, when the pachinko machine P is placed on the floor of a hall or leaned against a wall, no matter what rotational position the operating handle 5 is in, the finger rest protrusions 551a, 551b, 551c This can prevent a situation where the operating handle 5 is damaged due to contact with the floor or wall.

Further, when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position, the protruding end of the first finger hook protrusion 551a, which has the protruding end farthest from the outer circumferential surface of the ring body 551, The protruding end is configured not to be located at the lowest point of the rotational trajectory that the protruding end passes when rotating from the position to the maximum rotational position.
This reliably prevents the finger hook projections 551a, 551b, 551c from protruding below the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position. I can do it.

Note that the number of finger hook protrusions provided on the above-mentioned operation handle 5 is not limited to three, and as long as the operation handle 5 and the door frame 3a (main body frame 2) have the above-mentioned relationship. , may be two or less, or may be four or more.

In addition, the distance from the center position C of the above-mentioned operation handle 5 to each finger rest protrusion, the position of each finger rest protrusion at the initial position and maximum rotation position, the distance from the center position C to the door frame 3a (main body frame 2), etc. is not limited to the above-mentioned value, but can be set to any value as long as the operation handle 5 and the door frame 3a (body frame 2) have the above-mentioned relationship.

Further, in the above-described operation handle 5, the finger hook projections 551a, 551b, and 551c do not protrude below both the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2, and the right edge of the door frame 3a and Although it is designed not to protrude to the right beyond both right edges of the main body frame 2, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, at least the lower edge of the door frame 3a and the lower edge of the main body frame 2 may not protrude below the lower edge located on the lower side. Similarly, at least the right edge of the door frame 3a and the right edge of the main body frame 2 may not protrude further to the right than the right edge located on the right side.
Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Moreover, the above-mentioned operation handle 5 may be provided at any location of the pachinko machine P, such as the machine frame 1 or the main body frame 2, instead of being provided on the door frame 3a. When the operating handle 5 is provided on the machine frame 1 or the main body frame 2, the operating handle 5 and the machine frame 1 or the main body frame 2 can be set to have the above-mentioned relationship.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned operation handle 5, the first finger hook protrusion 551a does not have the protruding end furthest from the outer circumferential surface of the ring body 551, but instead has other finger hook protrusions (the second finger hook protrusion 551b and the second finger hook protrusion 551b). The three-finger hook protrusion 551c) may have a protruding end that is farthest from the outer peripheral surface of the ring body 551. Also in this case, when the operating handle 5 is at the maximum rotation position, the protruding end follows the rotation trajectory that the operating handle 5 passes when it rotates from the initial position to the maximum rotation position. It can be set so that it is not located at the lowest point.

Next, the decorative portion 610 will be explained in detail.
The decorative part 610 is an eave-like member that has a generally trapezoidal side cross section and extends from the upper part of the door frame to the front side, and can be roughly divided into a front plate 611 that constitutes the front of the decorative part 610 and a top surface of the decorative part 610. The decorative part 610 is composed of a top plate 612 and a bottom plate 613 which forms the lower surface of the decorative part 610 (see FIG. 157).
The bottom plate 613 also includes a curved surface 613a that is located at the rearmost side and is curved to be convex downward near the front end, and an upright surface that extends downward from the front end of the curved surface 613a. It is composed of a surface 613b, a sloped surface 613c that slopes gradually downward from the lower end of the upright surface 613b toward the front, and a horizontal surface 613d that connects with the front plate 611 at the front end of the sloped surface 613c. (See Figure 157). The bottom plate 613 is formed so that the height of the curved surface 613a, the upright surface 613b, the inclined surface 613c, and the horizontal surface 613d gradually decrease toward the front (see FIG. 157).

The game board 11 is a plate-like member that is generally rectangular in front view (see FIGS. 158 and 161), and as described above, the board surface of the game board 11 is provided with a pair of rails 13a and 13b. The area partitioned into a substantially circular shape by the rails 13a and 13b becomes the gaming area 12.
In addition, in the following, the rail 13a located on the outside of the rails 13a and 13b (the rail closer to the outer periphery of the game board 11) is also referred to as the outer rail 13a, and the rail 13b located on the inside (the rail closer to the outer periphery of the game board 11) is referred to as the outer rail 13a. The rail further away from the inner rail 13b is also referred to as the inner rail 13b.

The outer rail 13a is a long metal thin plate member having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and is attached along the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 installed on the board surface of the game board 11 (supporting). (see Figure 158).
Here, the rail base 620 is a plate-like member having a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, and opens toward the lower right when installed on the board surface of the game board 11, and is connected to the game area 12 (game board 11). It is cut out to form a circular arc shape (that is, a circular arc shape that is convex toward the left) centered approximately at the center of the frame. The cutout surface formed by this cutout becomes the base surface 621 (see FIG. 158).
Furthermore, when the rail base 620 is installed on the board surface of the game board 11, the base surface 621 described above is located at the lower left of the game area 12 (lower left of the first game area 12a) and is away from the out port 19 to the left. From the starting end position P1, through the left end P2 and the upper end P3 of the game board 11, it reaches the end position P4 located at the upper right of the gaming area 12 (the upper right of the second gaming area 12b) (Fig. 158, see Figure 161).

Although not particularly shown, a position approximately at the center in the width direction near the end position P4 of the base surface 621 (when the rail base 620 is installed on the board surface of the game board 11, the position on the game board 11 side of the base surface 621 A position approximately half the length from the arcuate long side L1 located on the front side (hereinafter also referred to as the rear long side L1) to the arcuate long side L2 located on the front side (hereinafter also referred to as the front long side L2) (hereinafter referred to as the front long side L2). , also referred to as the central position)) is provided with an end guide fitting hole 622 in the form of a horizontally long rectangular slit.

Furthermore, a plurality of guide protrusions 623 are provided along the rear long side L1 between the starting end position P1 and the ending position P4 on the base surface 621 (see FIG. 158).
Further, although not particularly illustrated, the number of guide protrusions 623 provided on the base surface 621 described above is within the range H1 from the starting end position P1 to the left end P2 (hereinafter also referred to as the first range H1). , is greater than or equal to the range H2 from the left end P2 to the upper end P3 (hereinafter also referred to as the second range H2), and is greater than or equal to the range H3 from the upper end P3 to the terminal position P4 (hereinafter also referred to as the third range H3). ) or more. Specifically, the first range H1 is provided with, for example, three guide protrusions 623, the second range H2 is provided with, for example, two guide protrusions 623, and the third range H3 is provided with, for example, One guide protrusion 623 can be provided.
Further, although not particularly illustrated, no guide protrusions 623 are provided on the left end P2 and upper end P3 of the base surface 621, and the arrangement interval of each guide protrusion 623 provided on the base surface 621 is It is uneven.

The outer rail 13a attached to the base surface 621 described above has approximately the same size as the base surface 621. Specifically, the length of the outer rail 13a in the longitudinal direction is approximately the same as the length from the starting end position P1 to the end position P4 of the base surface 621, and the length of the outer rail 13a in the lateral direction (outer The width of the rail 13a) is approximately the same as the length from the front long side L2 to the rear long side L1 of the base surface 621 (width in the depth direction of the base surface 621) (see FIG. 74). Therefore, when the outer rail 13a is attached to the base surface 621, the outer rail 13a also extends from the starting position P1, through the left end P2 and the upper end P3, to the terminal position P4 (see FIGS. 158 and 161). .

The outer rail 13a also has a terminal end that can be fitted into the terminal guide fitting hole 622 at a position corresponding to the terminal guide fitting hole 622 when the outer rail 13a is attached along the base surface 621. A guide protrusion 632 is provided, and a guide fitting hole 633 into which the guide protrusion 623 can be fitted is provided at a position corresponding to the guide protrusion 623 described above (see FIGS. 158 and 159).
That is, the number of guide fitting holes 633 provided in this outer rail 13a is greater than or equal to the second range H2 in the first range H1, and is greater than or equal to the number of the third is in the range H3 or higher.
Further, similar to the guide protrusion 623 described above, no guide fitting holes 633 are provided at the left end P2 and upper end P3 of the outer rail 13a, and each guide fitting hole 633 provided in the outer rail 13a are arranged at uneven intervals.

Then, the outer rail 13a is attached to the base surface 621 by fitting the end guide protrusion 632 into the end guide fitting hole 622 and fitting each guide protrusion 623 into the corresponding guide fitting hole 633 (see FIG. 160). be able to. That is, the terminal guide fitting holes 622 and guide projections 623 provided in the base surface 621 and the terminal guide projections 632 and guide fitting holes 633 provided in the outer rail 13a attach the outer rail 13a to the base surface 621. These configurations allow the outer rail 13a to be easily attached to an appropriate position on the base surface 621.

The inner rail 13b is a long thin plate-like member made of synthetic resin and has almost the same width as the outer rail 13a. It is installed upright on the board surface (see FIG. 161), and extends from the position slightly left of the out exit 19 (right side of the starting end position P1) to the upper left of the gaming area 12 (the upper left of the first gaming area 12a) and the upper end. They are arranged in an arc shape convex to the left toward a position lower left than P3 (see FIG. 161).

Then, the front side of the space sandwiched between the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b faces the back side of the transparent plate 4b, thereby forming a left guide passage 640 through which the game balls fired by the firing device can pass. (See Figure 161).
This left guide passage 640 includes a passage entrance 641 located at the bottom of the game area 12 and a passage exit 642 located at the top of the game area 12. 641, the game area 12 can be reached through the left guide passage 640 and the passage exit 642.
Furthermore, as described above, since the outer rail 13a and the inner rail 13b forming the left guide passage 640 have an arc shape convex toward the left, the game ball is moved by the centrifugal force generated on itself. It is easy to move within the left guide passage 640 while in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a (the surface facing the inner rail 13b) (see FIG. 160). In particular, game balls fired with a firing intensity that can reach at least the game area 12 move within the left guide path 640 while maintaining contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a.

Here, when the game ball passes through the left guide path 640, the game ball comes into contact with the range from the contact point of the game ball on the outer rail 13a to the end side R1 facing the rear long side L1 of the base surface 621. There isn't. The guide fitting holes 633 described above are all provided within this range along the rear long side L1 (see FIG. 160). That is, the above-mentioned guide fitting hole 633 is provided in a range where the game ball does not come into contact with the outer rail 13a.

Further, although not particularly shown, the outer rail 13a has an inclination that makes it difficult for the game ball passing through the left guide passage 640 to move toward the front side (transparent plates 4a, 4b side). The tilt is adjusted to make it easier to move to the side. That is, the outer rail 13a is configured so that the game ball can easily move within the left guide path 640 while in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and the board surface of the game board 11.

Further, in the upper part of the game area 12, a decorative member 650 is provided with a top surface 651 that faces the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball. (See Figure 161). The front surface of the space sandwiched between the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a and the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650 faces the back surface of the transparent plate 4b, thereby forming an upper guide path 660 through which the game ball can pass. (See Figure 161).
This upper guide passage 660 includes a passage entrance 661 located at the top of the first game area 12a and a passage exit 662 located at the top of the second game area 12b. The game ball can reach the second game area 12b through the left guide passage 640, the passage entrance 661, the inside of the upper guide passage 660, and the passage exit 662. That is, the upper guide passage 660 guides the game balls fired with a firing intensity of a predetermined level or more to the second game area 12b.
In addition, the game ball can easily move within the upper guide passage 660 while being in contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a due to the centrifugal force generated within the game ball. In particular, game balls fired with a firing intensity that can reach at least the second game area 12b move within the upper guide path 660 while maintaining contact with the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a.

Here, the positional relationship between the decorative portion 610 and the upper guide passage 660 (the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a, the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650) is set as follows.

Specifically, an imaginary line passing through the top end of the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a constituting the upper guide passage 660 and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 11 is defined as a first reference line SL1, and this first reference line SL1 The first reference position SP1 is the position where any of the virtual vertical lines IL extending vertically and perpendicularly intersects with the rearmost end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610, and any of the above-mentioned virtual vertical lines IL is, A position intersecting the lowest end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is defined as a second reference position SP2.
The first reference position SP1 is located below the first reference line SL1, and the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 to the first reference position SP1 is less than or equal to the diameter of the game ball, and the second reference position SP2 is located below the first reference line SL1, and the distance D2 from the first reference line SL1 is set to be greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball (see FIG. 157).
Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, for example, the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 to the first reference position SP1 can be 4 mm, and the distance from the first reference line SL1 to the second reference position SP2 D2 can be 40mm. Note that each of these distances D1 and D2 is not limited to the above-mentioned values, and can be arbitrarily set as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied.

Further, an imaginary line passing through a position corresponding to the top end of the surface 643 of the above-mentioned outer rail 13a on the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650 and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 11 is defined as a second reference line SL2. , the position where any of the virtual vertical lines that are perpendicular to this second reference line SL2 and extend in the vertical direction intersects with the rearmost end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is defined as a third reference position SP3, and the above-mentioned virtual vertical line A position where any one of the two intersects with the lowest end of the bottom plate 613 (lower surface) of the decorative portion 610 is defined as a fourth reference position SP4. Note that here, the above-mentioned first reference position SP1 and third reference position SP3 are the same position, and the above-mentioned second reference position SP2 and fourth reference position SP4 are the same position.
The third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) is located above the second reference line SL2, and the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 to the third reference position SP3 is greater than or equal to the radius of the game ball. Yes, the fourth reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) is located below the second reference line SL2, and the distance D4 from the second reference line SL2 to the fourth reference position SP4 is greater than or equal to the diameter of the game ball. (See FIG. 157).
Since the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, for example, the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 to the third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) can be 14 mm. The distance D4 to the fourth reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) can be 22 mm. Note that each of these distances D3 and D4 is not limited to the above-mentioned values, and can be arbitrarily set as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied.

As described above, the second reference position SP2 is below the first reference line SL1, and by making the distance D2 from the first reference line SL1 equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the decorative part provided on the front door 3 610 can be made larger. Furthermore, the first reference position SP1 is below the first reference line SL1, and by making the distance D1 from the first reference line SL1 equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, the decorative portion 610 can be enlarged as described above. However, when the game ball moves within the upper guide path 660 along the surface 643 of the outer rail 13a, for example, when the game ball is launched with the maximum firing strength, the visibility of the moving game ball is ensured. can do.
In addition, the fourth reference position SP4 (second reference position SP2) is below the second reference line SL2, and by making the distance D4 from the second reference line SL2 equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the front door 3 The decorative portion 610 provided on the can be enlarged. Furthermore, the third reference position SP3 (first reference position SP1) is above the second reference line SL2, and by making the distance D3 from the second reference line SL2 equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, as described above, Even though the decorative portion 610 is enlarged, for example, when the game ball moves within the upper guide path 660 along the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650, such as when the game ball is launched with an intensity weaker than the maximum ejection intensity. In addition, visibility of the moving game ball can be ensured.
Here, the pachinko machine P according to other application example 13 is configured to perform the number of winning/failure drawings (i.e., changes in special symbols) without executing a special game (i.e., without winning a jackpot) during the non-time-saving gaming state. The first low-probability time-saving game state is set when the number of times of display) reaches a predetermined number of time-saving activations (900 times). In other words, the game mode shifts to the time-saving game state without going through the jackpot winning (execution of the special game).
In this way, in a pachinko machine that has more opportunities to shift to the time-saving gaming state than before, there are more opportunities to launch the game ball toward the second gaming area 12b. This increases the chances of the game ball passing through the upper guide passage 660, so the above-described configuration is extremely effective.

Note that the positional relationship with the above-mentioned first reference line SL1 and the positional relationship with the above-mentioned second reference line SL may be set to satisfy both, or may be set so that only one of them is satisfied. You may.
Further, among the inner surfaces of the upper guide passage 660, the inner surface located on the lower side (inner side) was constituted by the top surface 651 of the decorative member 650, but is not limited to this, and can stand up from the game board 11. It may also be configured by the top surface of a partition member provided.

Further, as described above, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is set such that the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is greater than or equal to the second range H2 in the first range H1, and , by setting the third range H3 or higher, the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 on the starting end position P1 side, which receives a large impact from the launched game ball (that is, close to the launching device) of the outer rail 13a, This prevents the situation where the outer rail 13a shifts from the mounting position or vibrates, making it impossible to guide the game ball to the position with the firing strength and making it impossible to generate balls as designed. It can be prevented.
In particular, in the pachinko machine described above, which has more opportunities to shift to the time-saving gaming state than in the past, there are many opportunities to launch the game ball toward the second gaming area 12b. As a result, the period during which the game ball is launched at a firing strength (for example, the strongest firing strength, etc.) that allows the game ball to reach the second gaming area 12b becomes longer, and the influence of the impact received from the game ball on the above-mentioned starting end position P1 side is increased. Therefore, the above configuration is extremely effective.
Also, of the outer rail 13a, the number of guide fitting holes 633 is relatively small on the terminal position P4 side, which receives less impact from the launched game ball (that is, far from the launching device), so the rail base It becomes easy to attach 620 to the base surface 621 and process the outer rail 13a.
Furthermore, at the left end P2 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the impact force in the left direction based on the launched game ball is greatest, and at the upper end P3 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) Since the guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) are not provided at these positions where the upward impact force based on the shot game ball is greatest, the above-mentioned outer rail 13a displacement and vibration can be more effectively prevented.
In addition, in the pachinko machine described above, which has more opportunities to shift to the time-saving gaming state than in the past, the pachinko machine inevitably operates for a long time, causing problems and deterioration of the outer rail 13a. This increases the chances of repairing or replacing the outer rail 13a, but with the above configuration, repairing or replacing the outer rail 13a can be done depending on the proficiency of the worker. Therefore, it becomes easy to attach an appropriate outer rail 13a that does not affect the guidance of game balls.

Note that the above-mentioned guide fitting hole 633 (guide protrusion 623) is provided over the range from the starting end position P1 to the ending position P4 of the outer rail 13a (base surface 621). Since the range where the impact from the ball is easily applied and the load is easily applied varies depending on the game specifications, it is recommended that the guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) be arranged evenly from the start position P1 to the end position P4. is not desirable, and it is desirable to arrange them according to game specifications. Therefore, the number and arrangement of the guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) may be varied in various ways as described below.
For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is not limited to the above-described content.
For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is greater in the first range H1 than in the second range H2, and H2 may be larger than the third range H3.
Further, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is greater than or equal to the second range H2 in the first range H1, and In this case, it may be set to be equal to or greater than the third range H3.
Further, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is greater than or equal to the third range H3 in the first range H1, and is larger than the number in the second range H2. In this case, it may be set to be equal to or greater than the third range H3.
Further, the guide fitting hole 633 (guide protrusion 623) may not be provided in the third range H3. That is, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the third range H3 may be zero.

In addition, in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the range from the starting end position P1 to the left end part P2 is defined as a fourth range H4, the range from the left end part P2 to the terminal end position P4 is defined as a fifth range H5, and the outer rail The number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in 13a (base surface 621) may be greater in the fourth range H4 than in the fifth range H5. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fourth range H4 may be three, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fifth range H4 may be two.

Further, in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the range from the starting end position P1 to the upper end P3 is defined as a sixth range H6, the range from the upper end P3 to the terminal end position P4 is defined as a seventh range H7, and the outer rail The number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in 13a (base surface 621) may be greater in the sixth range H6 than in the seventh range H7. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the sixth range H6 may be five, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the fifth range H4 may be zero.

Further, in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621), the intermediate position from the starting end position P1 to the ending position P4 is defined as an intermediate position PC, and the range from the starting end position P1 to the intermediate position PC is defined as an eighth range H8, The range from the intermediate position PC to the end position P4 is defined as a ninth range H9, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) provided in the outer rail 13a (base surface 621) is the same as that of the eighth range H8. may be greater than the ninth range H9. For example, the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the eighth range H8 may be four, and the number of guide fitting holes 633 (guide protrusions 623) in the ninth range H9 may be one.
Even in the above case, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, although the guide fitting hole 633 was provided on the outer rail 13a and the guide protrusion 623 was provided on the base surface 621 of the rail base 620, the guide protrusion 623 was provided on the outer rail 13a. A guide fitting hole 633 may be provided in the base surface 621 of the rail base 620. Similarly, a terminal guide fitting hole 622 may be provided in the outer rail 13a, and a terminal guide protrusion 632 may be provided in the base surface 621 of the rail base 620.

Further, the configuration for guiding and attaching the outer rail 13a to the base surface 621 of the rail base 620 is not limited to the guide protrusion 623 and the guide fitting hole 633, and the configuration is not limited to the guide protrusion 623 and the guide fitting hole 633. It may be an insertion hole, or may be a guide protrusion and a notch in which the guide protrusion can be locked.

Further, although the rail base 620 has been separate from the game board 11, it is not limited to this, and may be integrally molded with the game board 11 and erected from the surface of the game board 11. good.

Note that various settings and controls of the above-described embodiments, modifications, and other application examples may be combined with each other within a range that does not cause any contradiction.
Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the validity determination process in Application Example 13 corresponds to the determining means of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of steps 7511 and 7525 in other application example 13 corresponds to the variable display means of the present invention. Further, the normal gaming state in other application example 13 corresponds to the non-time-saving gaming state of the present invention. Moreover, the first low probability time-saving game state in other application example 13 corresponds to the time-saving game state of the present invention. Further, the main CPU 101 that executes the game state setting process at the start of variation and the game state setting process at the end of the stop display time in other application example 13 corresponds to the setting means of the present invention. Further, the sub CPU 301 and the effect display device 21 that execute the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion effect in the other application example 13 correspond to the suggestion means of the present invention. Further, the main RAM 103 in other application example 13 corresponds to the storage unit of the present invention. Further, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspects 2, 3, and 4 in other application example 13 corresponds to the first suggestion of the present invention. Further, the first low-accuracy time-saving information suggestion performance according to aspects 5, 6, and 7 in other application example 13 corresponds to the second suggestion of the present invention. Moreover, the pachinko machine P in other application example 13 corresponds to the gaming machine of the present invention.

P Pachinko machine 100 Main control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
300 Sub control board 301 Sub CPU
302 Sub ROM
303 Sub RAM

Claims (1)

a determining means capable of determining whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A fluctuation display means capable of performing a fluctuation display based on the result of the determination;
Either a non-time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to play a game in which the frequency of execution of the variable display is relatively low, or a time-saving gaming state in which it is possible to play a game in which the frequency of execution of the variable display is relatively high. configurable setting means;
Suggestion means for making a predetermined suggestion;
The power can be restored with or without erasing information stored in a predetermined storage unit;
The setting means is capable of setting the time-saving gaming state by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times after the information is erased,
The suggestion means is configured to give the first suggestion and the number of times the variable display is displayed until the time-saving game state is set, from when the power is restored until it is decided to execute the special game. At least one of the second suggestions can be carried out,
The first suggestion is executable when the power is restored with or without erasing the information, and the first suggestion suggests the possibility that the information is not erased when the power is restored. or any aspect of the second aspect that is executable when the power is restored without erasing the information and that suggests that the information is not erased when the power is restored. It is possible to do it by
The execution rate of the first suggestion varies depending on the number of times the fluctuating display is performed after the power is restored, and the number of times the fluctuating display remains until the time-saving gaming state is set;
After the power is restored without erasing the information, the rate at which the first suggestion is executed according to the second aspect is higher than the rate at which the first suggestion is executed according to the first aspect. It is set low,
The number of times the fluctuating display occurs after power is restored with deletion of the information is equal to or greater than a specific number, and the remaining number of times the fluctuating display occurs until the time-saving gaming state is set is within a specific range. In some cases, the number of fluctuating displays after power is restored with deletion of the information is less than the specific number, and the remaining number of fluctuating displays until the time-saving gaming state is set is less than the specific number of fluctuating displays. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution rate of the first suggestion is set higher than when it is within a range.

Images